Configuration Utility

Reference Guide

Edition Q
ROUTERMAPPERMAN
RouterMapper ™

Configuration Utility Reference

Guide

Edition Q
October 2006
Trademarks and Copyrights
CCS, CCS CoPilot, CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, Command Control
System, CineTone, CinePhase, CineSound, DigiBus, DigiPeek, Digital
Glue, DigiWorks, DTV Glue, EventWORKS, EZ HD, Genesis, Harris,
HDTV Glue, Image Q, Inca, Inca Station, InfoCaster, Inscriber,
Inscriber CG—FX, Icon, IconLogo, IconMaster, IconMaster Nav,
IconSet, IconStation, Integrator, LeFont, Leitch, LogoMotion,
MediaFile, MIX BOX, NEO, the NEO design, NEOSCOPE,
NewsFlash, Nexio, Opus, Panacea, PanelMAPPER, Platinum, Portal,
PROM-Slide, RouterMAPPER, RouterWORKS, Signal Quality
Manager, SpyderWeb, SuiteView, TitleMotion, UNIFRAME, Velocity,
VelocityHD, VideoCarte, Videotek, and X75 are trademarks of Harris
Corporation, which may be registered in the United States, Canada,
and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Copyright 2006, Harris Corporation. All rights reserved. This
publication supersedes all previous releases. Printed in Canada.

Warranty Information
The limited warranty policy provides a complete description of your
warranty coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as procedures
for obtaining warranty service. To view the complete warranty, visit
www.broadcast.harris.com/leitch > support > warranties.
 Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What’s New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Communication Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Using RouterMapper On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Full-Text Help Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Contacting Us . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Chapter 2: Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installing RouterMapper Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installing RouterMapper on PCs Using
Microsoft® Windows 95, Windows 98, or
Windows Me Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Connecting RouterMapper to Your System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Downloading Router Frame and Control Panel Configurations . . 18
Creating an Additional Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Communications Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Remote Dial-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Opus Master Control Switcher Frame and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide v

Contents

Opus Ethernet Communication Error and Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . 42

Uninstalling RouterMapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Launching RouterMapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Overview of the Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Sorting Entries in the Device List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Pop-Up Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Device Definition Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Router Definition Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Device Summary List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Setting up a Database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Polling the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Polling Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Possible Polling Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Combiner System Polling Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Adding Devices Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Editing Device Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Copying Control Panel Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Downloading Device Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Printing Key Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Upgrading and Backing Up Panacea and Edge Firmware . . . . . . . . . . 73
Upgrading Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Backing Up Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Adding a Frame by Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adding a Frame Using the Add Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Adding Platinum Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Selecting the Frame Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Setting Up a Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Selecting Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Selecting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Adding Integrator Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Adding Integrator Data Router Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Adding Integrator Gold (Multirate Digital) Routers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Setting Up Output Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

vi RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Contents

Adding Integrator Combiner Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Setting Up a Combiner System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adding Combiner System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Adding Panacea Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Adding Other Leitch/Harris Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Adding Control Panels by Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Adding Control Panels Using the Add Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Adding Edge Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Adding an Edge by Polling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Adding an Edge Using the Add Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option Values . . . 158
Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Viewing the Detected Cards Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Setting Network Information for Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Editing Edge Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Changing Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option Values . 178
Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Upgrading and Backing Up Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Chapter 7: Adding and Selecting Opus Master

Controller Frames and Panels
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Adding a Master Control Frame to the Device List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Adding a Master Control Panel to the Device List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Selecting a Master Control Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Selecting a Master Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Defining the Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Naming a Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Changing a Level’s Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide vii

Contents

Specifying the Logical Router Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Overview of the Edit Logical Sources Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Modifying the Edit Logical Sources Dialog Grid Appearance . . 199
Assigning a Source Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Assigning an Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Assigning the Level Inputs and Physical Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Sharing Level Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Status Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Adding Logical Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Deleting Logical Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Editing Sources Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Defining the Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Overview of Edit Logical Destinations Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Assigning a Destination Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Assigning an Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Adding Logical Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Deleting Logical Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Editing Destination Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Adding Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Editing Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Editing Remote Access Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread Information . . . . . . . . . 246
Editing a Database that Includes Partitioned Matrices . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Understanding and Managing Category/Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Adding a New Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Viewing Sources Affected by a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Deleting a Category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Generating Category Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Changing a Category Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Correcting Source and Destination Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Creating and Managing Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Adding a New Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Deleting an Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

viii RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Contents

Deleting All Indexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Changing an Index Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Correcting Source and Destination Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Managing Custom Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Adding Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Importing Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Restoring Default Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Removing Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Printing a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Backing Up and Restoring Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Backing Up a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Restoring a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Editing a Frame’s Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Editing the Router Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Editing the Router Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Configured Matrices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Matrix Partitioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Detected Matrices Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Detected Cards Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Monitoring Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames Only) . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Firmware Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Control Card(s) Tab and Control Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
I/O Hardware Module Tab (Panacea Frames Only) . . . . . . . . . . 336
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Parametric Settings Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Assigning Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Creating a Source Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Creating a Destination Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Creating a Crosspoint Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Creating a Category/Index Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Creating a Salvo Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Adding or Editing a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide ix

Contents

Creating a Command Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372

Adding, Editing, or Deleting Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Creating a Function Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Creating a Panel Status Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Creating a Page Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Creating a Lock Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Creating a Protect Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Creating an Alarm Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Using the Alarm Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Adding Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Editing Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Deleting Alarm Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Creating a Source Alarm Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Creating an On-Air Swap Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Creating a Parametric Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Adding Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Editing Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Deleting Parametric Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
ABA(1)-XY Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
ABA(1)-SB Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
ABA-AFV, ABA(1)-MB Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Moving a Selection Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Limiting the Sources and Destinations
Available to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel . . . . . . . 411
Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations . . . . . . . . . 412
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of
Sources or Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Assigning a Favorite Source or
Destination to a Selection Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414

x RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Contents

Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Editing Details of a Panel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Setting the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Determining Destinations Accessible to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Assigning Sources to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Assigning a Category Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Moving a Selection Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel . . . . . . . 445
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel . . . . . . . 446
Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations . . . . . . . . . 447
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of
Sources and Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key . . . . . 449
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Editing Details of a Panel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Setting the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Determining Destinations Accessible to the Panel . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Assigning Sources to a Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Assigning a Category Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide xi

Contents

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471

Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Configuring Breakaway Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Defining the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Editing LCD Button Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Setting Up Button Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Setting Up Button Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Setting Up Button Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Finishing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Controlling Backlight Intensity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Changing Intensity for Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Setting Up Button Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Monitoring Device Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Setting Network Information for RCP-IDe Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Configuring Breakaway Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Defining the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529

xii RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Contents

Changing Panel Name or ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Edit Button Function Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Configuring Breakaway Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Defining the Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
Defining the Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Assigning Selection Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Clearing Selection Key Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
GPI Panel Definition File Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Setting the Panel ID and Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Configuring the Levels Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Configuring Contact Aux Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Example of GPI Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557

Index
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide xiii

Contents

xiv RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 1
Introduction

Overview
The RouterMapper configuration utility is an easy-to-use Microsoft®
Windows1 based application for programming RouterWorks®, router
frames, control panels, and the Opus master controller. Using
RouterMapper, you may create a database that describes a routing
system (i.e., available levels, sources, and destinations). That database
may be downloaded to a control panel and/or router frame, and may be
used in conjunction with RouterWorks software applications. Function
keys and selection keys (on Programmable Panel series panels only)
may be defined, and keycap inserts printed.
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Communication Dependencies” on page 4
• “Contacting Us” on page 8
• “System Requirements” on page 3
• “Using this Manual” on page 4
• “Using RouterMapper On-Line Help” on page 6
• “What’s New” on page 2

1
“Windows” is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 1

Chapter 1: Introduction

What’s New
These features are new additions to Edition Q of RouterMapper:
• Support for Platinum firmware upgrade
• Support for Platinum 9RU frame configuration
• Support for LCD RCP-IDe Panel & paging
• Support for Platinum & Panacea RES-H tieline
• Support for Platinum parameter set
• Support for Jupiter ASCII & ESswitch protocol

2 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 System Requirements

System Requirements
RouterMapper may be used with any IBM-compatible computer that
Note meets these minimum requirements:
If you want to install
RouterWorks version 5.06 on a CPU 266 MHz Pentium II
PC that uses a Microsoft ®
Windows® 95, Windows® 98, RAM At least 128 MB
or Windows® Me operating
system, you may need to
Hard disk space At least 30 MB free
manually remove certain files Additional disk drives CD-ROM or CD-RW
and Windows registry entries.
*
See page 17 for more Operating system Microsoft® Windows® 95, Windows® 98,
information. Windows NT®, Windows® 2000, Windows®
Me, Windows® XP
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 3.0 or later
Port(s) Serial port, RS-232 or RS-422/9600 baud or
higher
(Opus only) Ethernet port
Display resolution 800×600, 256 colors
1024×768, high color (16 bit) recommended
Pointing device Mouse, trackball, touch screen, or other
pointing device

* Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows Me,
Windows XP, and Microsoft Internet Explorer are either registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 3

Chapter 1: Introduction

Communication Dependencies
To communicate with (i.e., to download, poll and/or control) the
device(s) listed in the left column, the communication link or links
marked with a “•” must be available (that is, properly configured and
connected).

Table 1-1. Communication Dependencies

Serial connection or
Ethernet gateway Ethernet connection
connection to router to Opus master
Device(s) system control system
Edge protocol gateway •
Opus ABA panel •
Opus frame •
Opus master control panel •
Router control panels •
Router frames •

Using this Manual

This manual is intended as a reference to the RouterMapper software
and is not organized in step-by-step tutorial fashion. The manual has the
following writing conventions:

Table 1-2. Writing Conventions

Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields,
buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes,
menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection
names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books
or publications, and the first instances of new
terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as
ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE

4 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Communication Dependencies

Table 1-2. Writing Conventions (Continued)

Term or Convention Description
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries,
such as a DOS entry or something you type into
a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the
electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Indicates important information that helps to
Note avoid and troubleshoot problems

2. The manual is divided into these sections:

• General information: These sections relate to Leitch/Harris
routers, panels, and master controllers.
• Introduction
• Installing software
• Getting started
• Adding devices
• Editing logical databases
• Router-specific information: These sections relate to router
frames (e.g., Integrator™, Panacea™) and panels.
• Editing a router frame definition
• Assigning button functions
• Panel configurations
• Opus master controller-specific information: These sections
relate specifically to the Opus master controller.
• Editing a frame definition
• Panel configurations
• Editing the Opus router control assignment

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 5

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using RouterMapper On-Line Help

The on-line help offers complete information on all RouterMapper
functions. General Help, context-sensitive Help, and Help search
functions are available.

General Help
When you need help on any RouterMapper topic, choose Help from the
main window menu bar. This will allow you to locate information by
category.

Figure 1-1. General Help Menu Selections

Context-Sensitive Help
Context-sensitive Help gives you instant help whenever a menu
command is highlighted, a dialog box is open, or a pop-up message box
is displayed. Press F1 for context-sensitive help.

Full-Text Help Search

RouterMapper Help includes a full text search capability so that you
can find help topics containing the text string you specify. Several
options are available that allow you to refine your search.

6 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Using RouterMapper On-Line Help

Figure 1-2. Full-Text Help Search Using the Index Function

Figure 1-3. Full-Text Help Search Using the Search Function

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 7

Chapter 1: Introduction

Contacting Us
If you have questions about this or other Leitch/Harris products, contact
us for technical support and product information.

Technical Support
We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our
customers around the world. Visit our Web site at www.broadcast.har-
ris.com/leitch > support > technical support for information on how to
contact the Customer Service team in your geographical region.

Product Information
If you would like the latest product information or documentation,
contact your dealer or our Sales Department; or, visit our Web site at
www.broadcast.harris.com/leitch for more information.

8 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 2
Installation

Overview
This chapter provides the information you need to successfully install
(or uninstall) the RouterMapper software application.
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Connecting RouterMapper to Your System” on page 18
• “Downloading Router Frame and Control Panel Configurations” on
page 18
• “Installing RouterMapper Software” on page 10
• “Installing RouterMapper on PCs Using Microsoft® Windows 95,
Windows 98, or Windows Me Operating System” on page 17
• “Opus Master Control Switcher Frame and Panels” on page 41
• “Opus Ethernet Communication Error and Diagnosis” on page 42
• “Uninstalling RouterMapper” on page 44

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 9

Chapter 2: Installation

Installing RouterMapper Software

1. Insert the RouterMapper program disk into the appropriate drive on
your personal computer.
2. Select Run from the Microsoft® Windows® Start menu.
3. In the Command Line box, enter [drive designator]:\setup.exe.

Figure 2-1. Run Window

4. Click OK to launch the RouterMapper setup program. The setup

program will display an installation confirmation dialog box.

Figure 2-2. Initial RouterMapper Setup Window

• Click OK to continue program installation.

• Click Cancel to abort the installation.

10 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Installing RouterMapper Software

5. The Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager dialog box will

appear.

Figure 2-3. Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Dialog Box

The optional Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager function allows

you to manage the dynamic routing thread connections between
Integrator frames and other large routing systems based on
Integrator frames.
6. Click OK to continue the program installation.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 11

Chapter 2: Installation

7. The Install Directory dialog box will appear.

At this screen, you must designate the directory where the
RouterMapper program files will be stored. The default is
c:\leitch\rtrwrks. To change the destination directory, enter the
complete path of the desired directory in the highlighted box.
RouterMapper will create the specified directory (if it does not
already exist) and will store all program files in this directory.

Figure 2-4. Install Directory Dialog Box

8. Click OK.

12 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Installing RouterMapper Software

9. The Install Electronic Documentation dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-5. Install Electronic Documentation Dialog Box

This dialog box provides you with the opportunity to install

“electronic” copies of the printed RouterMapper documentation. In
addition, you may install a copy of Adobe® Acrobat® Reader
version 5. If you would like either the PDF files or the Acrobat
Reader (or both) installed, click the appropriate check boxes.
10. Click OK.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 13

Chapter 2: Installation

11. A Leitch Program Group dialog box will appear. At this screen, you
may select the program group where the application icons will
appear.

Figure 2-6. Leitch Program Group Dialog Box

12. When the program installation is complete, a Read Me dialog box

will appear on the screen. This box includes up-to-date information
that may or may not have been incorporated into the manual at the
time of program release.

14 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Installing RouterMapper Software

Figure 2-7. Read Me Dialog Box

13. Select File > Exit to close the Read Me dialog box and return to the
desktop.
If the RouterMapper program has been successfully installed, the
Note Start menu will include a new group titled Leitch Routing
You may find it helpful to set up Switchers, with the following icons:
a RouterMapper shortcut on
• Read Me
your desktop.
• Un-Install
• RouterMapper Help
• RouterMapper
• Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 15

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-8. Leitch Routing Switchers Window

• Select the Read Me icon to reopen the text notes that were
displayed on installation.
• Select the Un-Install icon to launch an application by which the
RouterMapper software can be removed from the system.
• Select the RouterMapper Help icon to open a Windows® Help
file.
• Select the RouterMapper icon to open the configuration utility.
The operation of the utility is described in detail in the chapters
that follow.
• Select the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager icon to open the
Dynamic Routing Fabric configuration utility. The DRFM
provides run-time management of dynamic routing threads
configured via RouterMapper. The operation of this utility is
described in a separate document; however, configuration
information on dynamic routing fabric management and dynamic
routing threads is described in detail in “Managing the Dynamic
Routing Fabric” starting on page 231.

16 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Installing RouterMapper Software

Installing RouterMapper on PCs Using

Microsoft® Windows 95, Windows 98, or
Windows Me Operating System
If you want to install RouterMapper on a PC that uses a Windows 95,
Windows 98, or Windows Me operating system, you may need to
manually remove the following files and Windows registry entries.

Files and Directories

1. At the root directory (C:\Leitch)
a. Move any previously-created databases that you want to save to
another location.
b. Move any previously-created PAN files that you want to save to
another location.
c. Delete all files and subdirectories.
2. At the Windows root directory (C:\Windows [or WINNT, etc.])
a. Move the EDITRTR.INI file that you want to save to another
location.
b. Delete EDITRTR.INI file in the Windows root directory.

Registry Entries
Use REGEDIT to remove the following key, sub-keys and values:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Leitch Routers and Switchers

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 17

Chapter 2: Installation

Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

• If you are downloading router frame and control panel device
configurations only, you must have a PC that has a serial port
connector.
• If you are downloading Opus master controller device
configurations only, you must have a PC that has an Ethernet
connection.
• If you have a CCS Router Gateway, you must have a PC that has an
Ethernet connections (You will connect to a router via the Ethernet
gateway.)
• If you are downloading both router frame/control panel and Opus
master control device configurations, you must have a PC that has
both serial port and Ethernet connections.

Downloading Router Frame and Control Panel

Configurations
To download device configurations, the PC running the RouterMapper
software must be connected to a serial port on one of the router frames.
Communications between the PC and the panels is carried from the
router frame to all of the panels via the X-Y control bus.
Figure 2-9 on page 19 shows the possible connections. Serial
connection pin assignments are shown in Figure 2-10 on page 20.

18 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

Figure 2-9. Connecting RouterMapper to a Control Panel

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 19

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-10. Serial Connection Pin Assignments

Creating an Additional Serial Port

If a serial port is not available on any of the router frames in the system,
Note then an SPT-LSERIAL can be used to provide a serial port for the
For more information on system. Possible connections are shown in Figure 2-11. Serial
ordering the SPT-LSERIAL, connection cable pin assignments are shown in Figure 2-12 on page 22.
contact your sales representative
or Customer Service.

20 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

Figure 2-11. Connecting RouterMapper to Panel via SPT-LSERIAL

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 21

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-12. SPT-LSERIAL Serial Port Pin Assignments

22 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

Preferences
The Preferences dialog box allows you to control how particular aspects
of RouterMapper information is displayed.
To access the Preferences dialog box, click Preferences at the
RouterMapper menu bar. A drop down list similar to the one shown in
Figure 2-13 on page 23 will appear.
Choose one of these selections:
• Editor
• Panel Defaults
• Soft Panel Fonts
• Hard Panel Fonts
• Button Color
• Zero-Based Export

Figure 2-13. Preferences Dialog Box

Editor Preferences Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to display certain kinds of helpful
information when you edit router databases or panel settings.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 23

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-14. Editor Preferences Dialog Box

• Hints for Router Database Editing selections allows

RouterMapper to display warnings whenever a user reassigns
logical source or destination definitions.
• Hints for Copy Panels selections allows RouterMapper to display
hints on how to copy a panel's button definitions from one panel
to another panel.
• Hints for Override Configured Matrix selections allows
RouterMapper to display warnings when you copy Integrator's
Detected Matrix database over to a Programmed Matrix
database.
• Hints for Unknown Status Devices selections allows
RouterMapper to display warnings whenever you download a
configuration for a device with an unknown status.
• Hints for Panacea selections allows RouterMapper to remove a
Panacea frame’s configuration files after a download or an
upload, and to reset a frame after a download.
• Hints for Panel Definition Editing selections allows
RouterMapper to display warnings when you delete a panel's

24 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

button definition and when you redefine a panel's button

definition.
• The Legacy Frame selections allow you to
• Keep and show all found legacy frames (VIA, XPlus,
XPRESS, MixBox, etc.) when system poll is completed
• Remove all legacy frames from the RouterMapper database
when system poll is completed
• Prompt you as to which of the above operations to perform
after a system poll is completed
• Hints for User Download Options allows you to select different
Note options for downloading devices.
See “Downloading Device • Clicking on the Normal radio button selection allows you
Definitions” on page 69 for
to display three download options: Download selected
more information about this
topic. devices, download changed devices, or download all
devices (see Figure 2-15).

Figure 2-15. Normal Download Display

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 25

Chapter 2: Installation

• Clicking on the Advance radio button allows you to display

appropriate download options based on available devices in
a database. It “filters” the device selection option to allow
you to either download panels or other devices separately
(see Figure 2-16).

Figure 2-16. Advance Download Display

Panel Defaults Dialog Box

This dialog box provides the default button definition for all panels' two
auxiliary buttons.

Figure 2-17. Panel Defaults Dialog Box

26 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

Soft Panel Fonts Dialog Box

Hard Panel Fonts Dialog Box
These dialog boxes allow you to select the fonts to use on soft panel and
hard panel displays.

Figure 2-18. Fonts Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 27

Chapter 2: Installation

Edit Button Colors Dialog Box

The Edit Button Colors dialog box allows you to change panel button
background color and panel button text color. You can also use this
dialog box to select color printing for key caps.

Figure 2-19. Button Colors Dialog Box

To change a panel button background color, follow these steps:

1. Click Preferences at the RouterMapper menu bar.
2. Select the Edit Button Color radio button.
3. Select the button on which you want to change the background
color. A color selection dialog box will appear.
4. Check the color that you want the box to be. You may select either a
basic or a custom color.
5. Click OK. You will return to the Button Colors dialog box.
6. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main window.
To change a panel button text color, follow these steps:
1. Select Preferences at the RouterMapper menu bar.
2. Select the Edit Text Color radio button.
3. Click the button on which you want to change the text color. A
color selection dialog box will appear.
4. Check the color that you want the box to be. You may select either a
basic or a custom color.

28 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

5. Click OK. You will return to the Button Colors dialog box.
To select color printing for key caps, follow these steps:
1. Click Preferences at the RouterMapper menu bar.
2. Check the “Use Colors When Printing Key Caps” check box.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main window.
Zero-Based Export
This selection allows you to controls whether you export a
Note RouterMapper database with zero-based or one-based numbers.
CCS Pilot™ requires you to • When this selection is checked, the database will be exported
export your database with
with zero-based numbers.
zero-based numbers.
• When this selection is not checked, the database will be exported
with one-based numbers.

Communications Settings
The Communications Settings dialog box allows you to control various
telecommunications devices by changing settings (see Figure 2-20).

Figure 2-20. Communications Settings

• If you choose a direct connection type, you can change baud rate or
comm port settings.
• If you choose a remote dial-up connection type, you can set the
baud rate for your modem, the remote router telephone number,

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 29

Chapter 2: Installation

automatic redialing properties, tone or pulse dialing mode, and your

modem initialization string.
• If you choose a TCP/IP connection type, you can set the IP address
Note connections and give instructions on what to do if a current IP
Download and Poll operations address connection fails.
are not supported in Demo
• If your PC is not connected to a routing system, but you want to see
mode. DRFM operations will
not operate in Demo mode. how RouterWorks software will operate with a routing system,
choose Demo Mode to simulate the presence of a router and will
allow the RouterWorks software to be operated normally.

Selecting Serial, Remote, TCP/IP, or Demo Connection Settings

1. Select the RouterMapper icon from the Start menu or from your
desktop shortcut.
2. Click Comm Settings at the RouterMapper menu bar. The
Communications Settings dialog box will appear.
3. Click the appropriate radio button to select the connection.
If you choose Serial, follow these steps:
1. The Communications Settings dialog box will appear as shown in
Figure 2-21 on page 30.

Figure 2-21. Serial Connection Type Dialog Box

30 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

2. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to set the baud rate.
Note The baud rate must match the baud rate setting of the router frame’s
The default baud rate is 9600 serial port.
baud.
3. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to select the COMM
port.
4. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
After the communications settings have been selected, you may test the
configuration by performing a Poll. An error message that indicates a
communication failure will be displayed if the port is not properly
configured or connected. For more information on performing a Poll,
see page 53.
If you choose TCP/IP, follow these steps:
Note 1. The Communications Settings dialog box will appear as shown in
For more information on setting Figure 2-22 on page 31.
the IP address of the Gateway,
refer to the manual that was
supplied with the your Router
Ethernet Gateway.

Figure 2-22. TCP/IP Connection Type Dialog Box

2. Enter the IP address that matches the IP address of your CCS

Router Gateway; then, click the Add button. The new IP address
will appear in the Host IP Connections Orders window.
If you have incorrectly entered the IP address, follow
these steps:

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 31

Chapter 2: Installation

• Highlight the incorrect address in the Host IP Connections

Orders window.
• Click the Modify button.
• The Modify Host dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-23. Modify Host Dialog Box

• Correct the IP address; then, click OK. The corrected IP address

will appear in the Host IP Connections Orders window.
If you want to remove an IP address, follow these steps:
• Highlight the IP address in the Host IP Connections Orders
window.
• Click the Remove button.
The IP address will be removed from the list.
If you want to remove all IP addresses, follow these
steps:
• Click the Remove All button.
• The following dialog box will appear:

Figure 2-24. Warning for Remove All Dialog Box

All IP address will disappear from the Host IP Connections Orders

window. (You will not be able to leave the TCP/IP Connection
Setting dialog box without entering at least one IP address.)

32 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

3. Under Host IP reconnect preferences, select the appropriate radio

button to tell the system what to do if the current IP address
connection fails.
4. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main window.
After the communications settings have been selected you may test the
configuration by performing a Poll. An error message that indicates a
communication failure will be displayed if the port is not properly
configured or connected. For more information on performing a Poll,
see page 53.
If you choose Demo, follow these steps:
5. The Communications Settings dialog box will appear as shown in
Figure 2-25.

Figure 2-25. Demo Connection Type Dialog Box

6. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main window.

If you choose Dial-Up, follow these steps:
1. The Communications Settings dialog box will appear as shown in
Figure 2-26.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 33

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-26. Dial-Up Connection Type Dialog Box

2. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to set the baud rate.
The baud rate must match the baud rate setting of the router frame’s
serial port.
3. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to select the COMM
port.
4. In the Phone Number edit box, enter the phone number of the
remote router. Include the area code, if required, and any additional
numbers necessary. If an outside line must be accessed before the
number is dialed, place a comma in the phone number string. The
comma will cause the modem to pause for one second before
continuing to dial the number. Additional commas may be added as
necessary (each comma equals one second). All other appropriate
Hayes compatible commands are recognized in the phone number
string.
5. Click the appropriate Dial Mode radio button to select either Tone
or Pulse dialing. Click the appropriate mode.
6. The Modem Initialization String edit box allows the modem to be
configured before it attempts to dial the remote router. The default
string will work for most modems. If the modem includes special
features such as data compression or error correction, these special
features may have to be disabled in order for the system to work

34 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

properly. Try the default modem initialization string first. If the

modem does not operate properly, refer to the modem instruction
manual for commands to disable the special features. Enter those
commands in the Modem Initialization String edit box.
7. Change one or all of the following selections in the Dialog
Properties box:
• RouterMapper will automatically redial the remote if the
connection attempt is not successful. The Max Retries spin box
designates the maximum number of times the modem will
attempt to redial. Click the Up/Down arrows or enter the desired
number in the Max Retries edit box.
• The time required for RouterMapper to connect to the remote
router depends on the modem, the phone system and the origin of
the call (local vs. long distance), etc.
• The Wait Period spin box designates the amount of time
RouterMapper will wait for a connection before initiating a
redial. Increase the Wait Period setting if the panel continuously
times-out and redials.
• The Pause Period spin box determines the delay between a
time-out and a redial attempt. Click the Up/Down arrows, or type
the desired number directly in the edit box.
• Occasionally, a modem will report a successful connection, even
though no data is actually being transferred. The Wait After spin
box designates a delay time during which RouterMapper will
wait before accessing the remote router. If RouterMapper
momentarily connects and then breaks the connection, increase
the Wait After connect time.
8. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Remote Dial-Up
Selecting the remote dial-up icon at the Start menu will open an
application note that describes three methods of controlling
Leitch/Harris routing systems at remote sites. (For the purposes of this
manual, only the RouterWorks remote dial-up method will be
discussed.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 35

Chapter 2: Installation

Connecting the Equipment

The RouterWorks remote dial-up application requires two modems.
Note • One modem will be connected to the PC. The PC modem does
The SCE/RSCE-101 in use must not require special cabling. Connect the PC modem as directed in
be operating with Revision 3.0
the modem instruction manual.
or later software. The XPlus
frame also requires Revision 3.0 • One modem will be connected to a serial port on the router at the
or later software. remote site. The router modem must be connected to a serial port
on the remote router. A standard modem cable can be used. (The
connector on the router is a 9-pin, male connector configured
with the same pin-out as the serial port on an IBM-PC/AT.) The
remote router serial port may be an SCE-101, an RSCE-101, or
an XPlus™.

Configuring the PC Modem

The PC modem does not require special configuration for use with the
Note RouterWorks applications. See Figure 2-27 on page 37 for a picture of
Leitch/Harris has available a set the proper way to connect equipment for remote dial-up.
of preconfigured and tested
modems and required cables
(Part # RCP-MODEM-KIT) for
the remote dial-up option used
with RouterWorks, EventWorks,
and the RCP-ANXY. This
option offers a plug-and-play
solution for controlling a router
at a remote site. Contact your
local dealer for more
information.

36 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

Figure 2-27. Connecting Equipment for Remote Dial-Up

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 37

Chapter 2: Installation

Configuring the Router

To configure the routing system for remote use, follow these steps:
Caution 1. Set the DIP switches on the remote router’s serial port to the default
We recommend that you test configuration.
your system before its final
installation at the remote site. 2. Set the Echo Mode ON.
Testing will require access to 3. Set the baud rate as appropriate.
two phone lines, and should
include a complete operational 4. Refer to the router manual for baud rate and echo mode switch
test of the dial-up and control positions.
functions.

Configuring the Router Modem

To configure the router modem, temporarily connect the modem to a
PC and follow the programming instructions provided in the Remote
Dial-Up application note. To open the application note, select the
Remote Dial-Up icon from the Start menu.

Configuring RouterWorks
To configure the RouterWorks database for remote use, follow
these steps:
1. Select the RouterMapper icon from the Microsoft® Windows®
Start menu or from your desktop shortcut.
2. From the RouterMapper main window, select Comm Settings. The
Communications Settings dialog box will be displayed.
3. Select the baud rate and comm port to be used in the remote system.
4. Click the Dial-Up button located in the Connection Type group.
5. The Communications Settings dialog box will change, as shown in
Figure 2-22 on page 31.
6. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to set the baud rate.
The baud rate must match the baud rate setting of the router frame’s
serial port.
7. If necessary, click the appropriate radio button to select the COMM
port.
8. In the Phone Number edit box, enter the phone number of the
remote router. Include the area code, if required, and any additional
numbers necessary. If an outside line must be accessed before the
number is dialed, place a comma in the phone number string. The

38 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

comma will cause the modem to pause for one second before
continuing to dial the number. Additional commas may be added as
necessary (each comma equals one second). All other appropriate
Hayes-compatible commands are recognized in the phone number
string.
9. Click the appropriate Dial Mode radio button to select either Tone
or Pulse dialing. Click the appropriate mode.
10. The Modem Initialization String edit box allows the modem to be
configured before it attempts to dial the remote router. The default
string will work for most modems. If the modem includes special
features such as data compression or error correction, these special
features may have to be disabled in order for the system to work
properly. Try the default modem initialization string first. If the
modem does not operate properly, refer to the modem instruction
manual for commands to disable the special features. Enter those
commands in the Modem Initialization String edit box.
11. Change one or all of the following selections in the Dialog
Properties box:
• RouterMapper will automatically redial the remote if the
connection attempt is not successful. The Max Retries spin box
designates the maximum number of times the modem will
attempt to redial. Click the Up/Down arrows or enter the desired
number in the Max Retries edit box.
• The time required for RouterMapper to connect to the remote
router depends on the modem, the phone system and the origin of
the call (local vs. long distance), etc.
• The Wait Period spin box designates the amount of time
RouterMapper will wait for a connection before initiating a
redial. Increase the Wait Period setting if the panel continuously
times-out and redials.
• The Pause Period spin box determines the delay between a
time-out and a redial attempt. Click the Up/Down arrows, or type
the desired number directly in the edit box.
• Occasionally, a modem will report a successful connection, even
though no data is actually being transferred. The Wait After spin
box designates a delay time during which RouterMapper will
wait before attempting to access the remote router. If
RouterMapper momentarily connects and then breaks the
connection, increase the Wait After connect time.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 39

Chapter 2: Installation

12. After setting all modem parameters, click OK to close the

Communications Settings dialog box.
13. Click Save from the RouterMapper File menu to save the
modifications.
14. Click Exit to leave RouterMapper.

Controlling a Remote Router

After the router, the router modem and the RouterWorks database have
been configured for remote operations, launch the RouterWorks
application by selecting the appropriate panel icon at the Start menu.
The selected application will automatically dial the remote router, and
the Dialing Remote System dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 2-28. Dialing Remote System Dialog Box

When the connection to the remote router is established, the dialog box
will disappear from the screen, and the RouterWorks control panel will
be displayed. The on-screen control panel will now be on-line and will
operate normally. When the panel is closed, the phone connection to the
remote router will be automatically disconnected.

Automatic Disconnect Feature

If a remote router is inactive for an extended time, the automatic
disconnect feature will break the phone connection. This feature is
user-configurable, and it can be disabled. When a time-out occurs, a
dialog box will appear on the RouterWorks screen to warn the user that
a disconnect is imminent. If the Cancel button is not pressed within 10
seconds, the remote connection will be broken.
• Press Cancel to abort the disconnect.

40 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

• Press Hang Up to disconnect the remote router.

To configure the Automatic Disconnect time-out period, follow
these steps:
1. Open the RouterMapper initialization file (editrtr.ini) in any text
editor. (The editrtr.ini file is located in the Windows directory.)
2. Set the RemoteTimeOutInterval= line to the desired time period
(in minutes). The maximum is 240 minutes (4 hours), and the
minimum is 1 minute.
3. To disable the automatic disconnect, set the
RemoteTimeOutInterval= line to 0.

Opus Master Control Switcher Frame and Panels

The Opus master control switcher uses Ethernet-based communication.
The default IP addresses will function correctly in one frame and one
control panel configuration. We recommend that the PC used for
configuration, the control panel, and the frame should all be connected
directly to the hub and that the hub is not connected to a network
server/ router. If you must connect this system to an additional network,
please contact the Customer Service department for more detailed
information.
• The Opus master control switcher also supports external router
control. If the external router control functionality is used, the
router configuration should be downloaded through the serial
port to the target Opus master control frame after the Opus
master control frame configuration has been successfully
downloaded through your Ethernet connection. For details, see
“Controlling an External Router” starting on page 45 of your
RouterMapper-Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration
Utility Reference Guide.
• To change network configuration of an Opus frame, see page 8 in
your RouterMapper-Opus Master Control Switcher
Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
• To change network configuration of an Opus control panel, see
page 8 in your RouterMapper-Opus Master Control Switcher
Configuration Utility Reference Guide. Also see “Setting up
Network Information” starting on page 57 of your
RouterMapper-Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration
Utility Reference Guide.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 41

Chapter 2: Installation

• To make a configuration of multiple frames and panels, see

“Editing the Master Assignment Window” starting on page 60 of
your RouterMapper-Opus Master Control Switcher
Configuration Utility Reference Guide.

Opus Ethernet Communication Error and Diagnosis

A network communication error occurred if the following error
message appears.

Figure 2-29. Opus Ethernet Communication Error

If a communication error occurred, you need to check the physical

network link between the PC and the target frame or the target panel.
The following method can be used to verify network communication
condition.

Verify Network Communication by Using Ping

Under a DOS prompt, try the following command to clarify whether
there is a network problem.
ping <Current Frame IP Address>; then, click Enter.
Example 1: Ping response for a good network link
Example 1 shows what will be displayed if testing communication with
a frame that has the IP address 172.16.10.210.
C:\WINDOWS>ping 172.16.10.210
Pinging 172.16.10.210 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=2ms TTL=255
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=255
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=255
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=1ms TTL=255
Ping statistics for 172.16.10.210:

42 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Connecting RouterMapper to Your System

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),

Approximate round trip times in milliseconds:
Minimum = 1ms, Maximum = 2ms, Average = 1ms
Example 2: Ping response for a bad network link
Example 2 shows what will be displayed if there is a bad network link
to a frame that has the IP address 172.16.10.210.
C:\WINDOWS>ping 172.16.10.210
Pinging 172.16.10.210 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 172.16.10.210:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

Persistent Communication Errors

If Ping <Current Frame IP Address> shows a good physical link but
the communication errors persist:
1. Reboot the target frame.
2. Close and reopen the RouterMapper program.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 43

Chapter 2: Installation

Uninstalling RouterMapper
RouterMapper has a customized uninstall function to allow you to
remove it from your system.
To uninstall RouterMapper, follow these steps:
Note 1. From the Windows menu bar, select Start > Settings > Control
If you set up a desktop shortcut Panel.
to RouterMapper, you will need
to remove it separately. The 2. Click on the Add/Remove Programs icon.
uninstall process will not 3. Scroll down to the “Leitch RouterMapper” listing, and then click on
remove user-defined shortcut
icons.
it. Program usage information, as well as a Change/Remove
button, will appear.
4. The Select Uninstall Method dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-30. Select Uninstall Method Dialog Box

5. Choose the Automatic radio button to uninstall all RouterMapper

Caution software components.
Never use the custom uninstall 6. The Perform Uninstall dialog box will appear.
unless instructed to do so by
Customer Service representa-
tives.

44 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Uninstalling RouterMapper

Figure 2-31. Perform Uninstall Dialog Box

7. Follow the instructions listed on the Perform Uninstall dialog box.

• Click Back to change the uninstall options.
• Click Finish to complete the uninstall process.
• Click Cancel to exit the program without uninstalling
RouterMapper components.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 45

Chapter 2: Installation

46 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 3
Startup and Customization

Overview
This chapter provides information on starting up and customizing the
RouterMapper software application.
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Adding Devices Manually” on page 61
• “Copying Control Panel Definitions” on page 66
• “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 69
• “Editing Device Definitions” on page 64
• “Launching RouterMapper” on page 48
• “Overview of the Main Window” on page 49
• “Polling the Control System” on page 54
• “Printing Key Caps” on page 71
• “Setting up a Database” on page 53
• “Upgrading and Backing Up Panacea and Edge Firmware” on page
73

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 47

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Launching RouterMapper
1. Select the RouterMapper icon from the Start menu or from your
desktop shortcut.
2. The RouterMapper main window will be displayed, as shown in
Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1. RouterMapper Main Window

48 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Overview of the Main Window

The RouterMapper main window provides a summary of router and
control panel databases.
• The left third of the window summarizes the current router
database, and holds buttons that access the Router Level
Definitions and Edit Logical Database windows. The Router
Definition box displays a static list control that shows all levels
enabled for the system (and the levels’ respective sizes). You
cannot select items in this list, but you can scroll up and down to
view levels that are not currently viewable.
• Buttons located at the bottom of the window allow you to
perform device downloading and defining functions.
• The right side of the main window displays a list of all devices
associated with the database. Devices may include control
panels, router frames, master controllers, SPTs, and other
downloadable Leitch/Harris devices. The window is arranged in
tree format (each device is grouped by type), and can be viewed
either in expanded or minimized view. To view a list of all
devices of a certain type (for example, all control panels in the
database), click the plus (+) sign. The list will expand, as shown
in Figure 3-2 on page 50.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 49

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-2. Expanding a Top-level Root Entry

Sorting Entries in the Device List

You may sort entries in the device list by Device, Type, ID, or Status.
Click the appropriate column header to resort the list.

Pop-Up Menus
RouterMapper includes pop-up menus for quick access to commonly
used functions. Pop-up menus (accessed by clicking the right mouse
button) will only contain those options that are valid in the area where
the mouse cursor is located. For example, right-clicking on a panel
name in the device list will produce a pop-up menu similar to the one
shown in Figure 3-3.

50 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Figure 3-3. Revealing Quick Access Pop-up Menus

Device Definition Function Buttons

The Poll button is used to query the control system for any
programmable devices that may be present in the system. Polling will
obtain information about the current configuration of each physical
device, and will compare it to the information found in the database to
determine if the database information matches the actual configuration.
(See “Polling the Control System” starting on page 54, for more
information.)
The Download button downloads the device configuration information
created in RouterMapper to the physical device’s memory. (See
“Downloading Device Definitions” starting on page 69, for more
information.
The Edit button is used to modify the device’s definition. Because
different devices have different features and capabilities, the appearance
of the Edit dialog box will depend on the type of device being edited.
For more information about editing frames, see “Editing Device
Definitions” starting on page 64. Panel editing procedures are covered
in separate sections (see the table of contents for your particular panel).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 51

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

The Add button causes a new device to be added to the device list. New
devices will be assigned the next available ID, and the default source,
destination and (in the case of control panels) function key mappings.
(See “Adding Devices Manually” starting on page 61, for more
information.)
The Delete button deletes a device from the list and from the database.

Router Definition Function Buttons

The Define Levels button allows a unique name and/or color to be
assigned to each level in the system. (See “Defining the Levels” starting
on page 194, for more information.) It also allows the size of the logical
database to be set.
The Sources button opens the Edit Logical Sources dialog box. (See
“Defining the Sources” starting on page 198, for more information.)
The Destinations button opens the Edit Logical Destinations dialog
box. (See “Defining the Destinations” starting on page 220, for more
information.)
The Routing Fabric button opens the Edit Logical Database dialog
box. (See “Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric” starting on
page 231, for more information.)

Device Summary List

The user-assigned Name helps you to quickly locate the desired device.
The Type information includes the device style (e.g., ABA, GPI) and
the size of the device (e.g., 32×32, 32×8, 4RU).
The ID is the device’s physical address in the system.
The Status indicates the current status of each device. See Table 3-1 on
Note page 56 for a list of status indicators and their meanings.
The editor will not attempt to
download devices that have a
device definition error.

52 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Figure 3-4. Device Status Example

Setting up a Database
To set up a database, follow these steps:
1. Set the COMM properties (see “Communications Settings” on page
29).
2. Poll the system for frames, control panels, master controllers and
Edge products; or add them manually (see “Polling the Control
System” on page 54 and “Adding Devices Manually” on page 61;
for an Edge see “Adding Edge Configurations” on page 156).
3. Edit the frames. Set the levels, source offsets and destination
offsets, etc. (see “Editing a Frame Definition” on page 273).
4. Edit the logical database. Define the logical sources, logical
destinations, etc. (see “Editing a Logical Database” on page 193).
5. Configure the control panels (see the table of contents for your
particular panel).
6. Download all frames, control panels, master controllers, and Edge
products (see “Downloading Device Definitions” on page 69).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 53

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Polling the Control System

Polling may be used to add control panels and/or Integrator series
frames to the database. Polling may also be used to determine whether
the configuration of the physical devices is up-to-date with respect to
the database configuration. When polling is initiated, RouterMapper
will compare a version stamp stored within the device with a version
stamp stored in the editor database. If the versions do not match, the
physical device must be updated with the current database information
(device information must be downloaded again).
To initiate a Poll, follow these steps:
1. Click the Poll button at the RouterMapper main window.
2. RouterMapper will query all downloadable devices connected to
the control system to determine which devices exist, and whether
the configuration of each is up-to-date with respect to the database.
• If new devices are found, the device list (at the main window)
will be updated, as shown in Figure 3-5 on page 55. Table 3-1 on
page 56 shows a listing of the polling status designators.
• If errors are found during the polling process, RouterMapper will
Note list the errors at the main window. Table 3-2 on page 57 shows a
There are specialized dialog listing of possible problem conditions and their corrective
boxes to help you pinpoint and actions.
correct polling problems in a
Combiner system. See
“Combiner System Polling
Problems” on page 57 for
explanations and examples.

54 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Figure 3-5. Main Window after System Poll

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 55

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Polling Status Indicators

Table 3-1. Polling Status Indicators
Status Indicator Description
Configuration Errors Device has one or more errors in configuration setup
Device Type Mismatch Device’s configuration does not correlate to its device type
External Thread Failed Integrator frame in a Combiner system has invalid thread(s) connections
Flash Not Installed Integrator frame’s logic card does not have flash memory
Hardware Changed Integrator frame’s read-only data has been updated based on latest device’s
hardware setup
Multiple Devices Two or more same type devices have the same ID
Needs Download Device’s configuration and/or thread connections (only in Integrator frame)
are mismatched, or device configuration has been modified
New New device is added to the database
Not Found Device is not found
OK Device is found with matching configuration. If device is an Integrator
frame, it has valid Thread connection(s)
Out of Memory Integrator frame does not have enough memory to store configuration data
Partial Found Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that are missing
System Errors Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that have one or more
of the following errors:
• Configuration errors
• Device type mismatch
• Flash not installed
• Hardware change
• Multiple devices
• Out of memory
Thread Failed Unable to retrieve Integrator frame’s thread connection(s)
Unknown RouterMapper does not recognize the device type or needs to do a system
poll to update its database (every time a database is loaded, all devices’
status is reset to “Unknown”)

56 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Possible Polling Problems

Table 3-2. Polling Problems and Corrective Actions
Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Device did not respond The device is defined in the Verify that a device with the
database, but could not be found on specified ID is in the control
the network. system; verify the physical
device’s DIP switch settings
Device style mismatch The type setting in the database did Edit the Device Style setting
not match the type of the physical Check device IDs
device found at the specified ID.
Multiple devices at same ID Two or more physical devices of Change one of the devices to a
the same style were found sharing different ID
the same ID.
Multiple styles with same ID Two or more physical devices of Change the ID settings (all devices
different styles were found sharing sharing an ID must be the same
the same ID. style)

Combiner System Polling Problems

Specialized dialog boxes help you pinpoint and correct polling
problems in a Combiner system. These dialog boxes will pop up after
you have performed a system poll. (See page 54 for more information
about performing a system poll).
1. If there are problems in your Combiner system, RouterMapper will
display a Combiner System Error Report screen, as shown in
Figure 3-6 on page 58.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 57

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-6. Combiner System Error Report Dialog Box

In the Combiner System Issues box, you will see all of the hardware
included as part of the Combiner system. Frames with associated
errors are marked with a red “X” superimposed over the frame icon.
1. Click any of the frames with errors associated. A Device
Description dialog box will appear, which displays frame-specific
information such as Frame ID, Level, Matrix, etc. In the System
Error Description box, RouterMapper lists all Combiner system
errors.

Figure 3-7. Error Report for Specific Frame

2. Highlight any of the error descriptions; then, click the Detail button
to display the Error Description dialog box.

58 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Figure 3-8. Error Description Dialog Box

3. The Error Description dialog box describes the system issue or

error, and provides information on how to correct the error. See
Table 3-3 on page 60 on for a list of Combiner system polling
failure conditions and their associated corrective actions.
4. After reviewing the error description, click OK to return to the
Combiner System Error Report dialog box.
5. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu.
6. Perform all recommended corrective actions; then, perform another
poll to make sure that all Combiner system errors have been
corrected.
Table 3-3 provides a list of Combiner system polling failure conditions
and their associated corrective actions.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 59

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Table 3-3. Combiner System Polling Problems and Corrective Actions

Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Combiner system has old firmware One or more frame members have old Contact Customer Service
firmware version; system’s Dynamic representative to get a firmware
Routing Fabric database is incomplete upgrade
Same frame configured in multiple One or more frame members are Option 1: Configure a new system;
combiner system configured to be part of another then, download devices to update this
Combiner system system’s invalid frames
Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with
OK status) turned ON, power down the
rest of the frames that are part of this
Combiner system (make sure the
control cable is directly connected to
the frame which is turned on.
Repoll the Combiner system

If the polled system has a valid

configuration, power up the rest of the
frames and download this valid
configuration to those frames (a default
Combiner system will be rebuilt after
the system poll)
Special configuration to the system will
be lost, since one or more frames were
powered down during the poll
Frame is no longer part of a combiner One or more frame members are no Option 1: Configure a new system;
system longer part of this Combiner system then, download devices to update this
system’s invalid frames
Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with
OK status) turned ON, power down the
rest of the frames that are part of this
Combiner system.

Make sure the control cable is directly

connected to the frame which is turned
on
Repoll the Combiner system

60 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Table 3-3. Combiner System Polling Problems and Corrective Actions (Continued)
Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
If the polled system has a valid
configuration, power up the rest of the
frames and download this valid
configuration to those frames (a default
Combiner system will be rebuilt after
the system poll)

Special configuration to the system will

be lost, since one or more frames were
powered down during a poll
One or more frames are missing One or more frame members are Check the control cable and make sure
missing that the frames are powered ON
Delete this Combiner system from the
RouterMapper database
Perform another system poll (if the
hardware is unavailable, add the
necessary hardware before you repoll
the system.)
Combiner system matrix size is not One or more frame members’ Configure a new system; then,
matched configuration does not fit with this download devices to update this
Combiner system system’s invalid frames

Adding Devices Manually

An alternative to polling the system for devices is to create the device
definitions via RouterMapper’s Add function. The new device will be
assigned the next available ID, and the default source, destination and
(in the case of control panels) function key mappings. Information
specific to different Leitch/Harris router products (Integrator, Panacea,
etc.) and to the Opus master control panel is detailed in Chapter 4:
“Adding Frames” starting on page 76.
To add a new device manually, follow these steps:
1. Click the Add button. The Add a New Device to the Database
dialog box will appear.
2. Select a device type from the drop-down list box (see Figure 3-9).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 61

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-9. Add New Device to the Database Dialog Box

3. Click OK.
4. The Add Edge, Add Master Control Device, Add Panels, or Add
Router Frame dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-10. Add Edge Dialog Box

62 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Figure 3-11. Add Master Control Device Dialog Box

Figure 3-12. Add Panels Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 63

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-13. Add Router Frame Dialog Box

Editing Device Definitions

1. Double-click the device name in the list at the RouterMapper main
Note window (or select the device name; then, click the Edit button).
Because different devices 2. An Edit Panel or an Edit Frame dialog box will appear, as shown in
require different configuration
Figure 3-14 or Figure 3-15 on page 65.
settings, editing procedures for
each device supported by
RouterMapper are discussed in
separate chapters.

64 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Figure 3-14. Typical Edit Panel Window

Figure 3-15. Typical Edit Frame Window (Integrator Frames)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 65

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Copying Control Panel Definitions

In a router control system involving multiple control panels, many of
the panels will share a common definition. To avoid having to add and
edit each panel individually, use the Copy function to copy the panel
definition information from one panel to another, or to many panels
simultaneously.
To copy a panel, follow these steps:
1. Right-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main window.
2. Select Copy.
A pop-up Hint dialog box may appear. It displays information that
otherwise may be overlooked or not known, and may have a
significant effect on your choices.
You may disable this (and any other future) Hints boxes. Simply
select the check box at the bottom.

Figure 3-16. Hint Dialog Box

3. The Copy Panels dialog box will appear (see Figure 3-17 on
page 67).

66 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Overview of the Main Window

Figure 3-17. Copy Panel Definitions

The Copy Panels dialog lists all panels in the database. Each panel will
appear twice: once in the Copy From section, and once in the Copy To
section.
• The panel configuration to be copied (the one you want the other
panels to look like) is selected from the Copy From list.
• The panel or panels that will receive the new configuration are
selected from the Copy To list.
• Multiple panels may be selected from the Copy To list using
standard Windows® selection techniques (hold down the <Shift>
or <Ctrl> keys while selecting the panels).
The radio buttons at the top of the Copy Panels dialog make it easier to
find the appropriate panels by sorting the lists into panel types. Clicking

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 67

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

on the RCP-ABA button, for example, will cause the Panel Lists to
display only RCP-ABA panels.
The function buttons located between the two lists are used to select the
Note specific configuration information that is to be copied.
The Sources, Destinations and • To copy source assignments, click the Sources button.
Categories function buttons will
not be enabled until panels have • To copy destination assignments, click the Destinations button.
been selected (highlighted) in • To copy selection key assignments (categories, favorite sources,
both Copy From and Copy To
boxes. Select one panel in the
and favorite destinations), click the Categories button
Copy From box, then one or
more in the Copy To box. Press
the appropriate function
button(s).

.
Caution
Copying a panel definition will
overwrite the existing panel
definition.

68 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Downloading Device Definitions

Downloading Device Definitions

After device definitions have been created and edited, they must be
downloaded to the physical device before the new configuration can
take effect.
To download a device, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the device entry that requires downloading.
2. Click the Download button. Multiple devices may be selected
using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
3. The About to Download dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-18. About to Download Dialog Box

4. Make one of the following choices:

• Choose (Download to) Selected Device if you want the newly
created/edited device configuration information to be
downloaded to the highlighted device entry.
• Choose (Download to) Changed Devices if you want the newly
created/edited device configuration information to be

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 69

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

downloaded to all changed devices (not just the highlighted

device) in the control system.
• Choose (Download to) All Devices if you want the newly
created/edited device configuration information to be
downloaded to all devices (changed or not) in the control system.
5. Click OK.
• If the download process is completed without errors, a summary
dialog box will appear. This dialog box will list the number of
devices that were successfully downloaded. The Device List will
be updated to reflect the current status of the devices (the devices
will be marked “OK”).
• If errors are encountered during the download process, a
Download Failures dialog box will appear. This dialog box will
list the error(s) encountered for each device. After all errors are
corrected, download the devices again. (See Table 3-4 for
corrective actions.)

Table 3-4. Download Problems and Corrective Actions

Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Device did not The device is defined in the database, Verify that a device having the specified ID
respond but could not be found on the network. is in the control system and is in Program
Mode (devices that have been downloaded
must remain in Program Mode after the
download is complete); verify the physical
device’s DIP switch settings
Device style mismatch The Device Style setting in the Edit the Device Style setting
database did not match the style of the
physical device found at the specified
ID.
Multiple styles with Two or more physical devices of Change the ID settings (all devices sharing
same ID different styles were found sharing the an ID must be the same style(
same ID.

70 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Printing Key Caps

Printing Key Caps

Using RouterMapper, control panel key caps can be printed using any
standard printer. After the router database has been edited and selection
keys have been assigned, print and assemble the keycap legends so that
the markings on each key will match the key’s programming.
To print and assemble key caps, follow these steps:
1. From the RouterMapper main window, right-click the panel or
panels to be printed. (Multiple panels can be selected using
standard Windows selection techniques [hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys while selecting panels].)
2. Select Print Key Caps from the pop-up menu. A Windows print
dialog box will appear.
3. Select the printer, paper orientation, paper size, and any other setup
information that may be required. For best results, use 8 ½ ×
11-inch clear transparencies.
4. Click OK to begin printing.
5. After the key caps have been printed, carefully cut them along the
guidelines provided.
6. Assemble as shown in Figure 3-19 on page 72.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 71

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

Figure 3-19. Assembling Key Caps

72 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Upgrading and Backing Up Panacea and Edge Firmware

Upgrading and Backing Up Panacea and Edge

Firmware
RouterMapper allows you to upgrade and back up firmware for an Edge
or a Panacea enhanced module router.

Upgrading Firmware
Follow these steps to upgrade your Edge or Panacea enhanced module
firmware:
1. At the RouterMapper main window, highlight the name of the
device that you want to upgrade.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.
3. Scroll down to the Firmware option. The Upgrade .../Backup...
selection list will appear.
4. Select Upgrade....
5. RouterMapper will prompt you for the directory location and file
name of the .GZ file to send to the device. The default name is
panacea.gz.

Figure 3-20. Firmware Upgrade Window

RouterMapper will use the frame’s IP address to establish an FTP

connection. (You set up the IP address via the device’s control card.)
• See page 136 for more information about the Panacea control card.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 73

Chapter 3: Startup and Customization

• See Chapter 6: “Adding and Editing Edge Configurations” for more

information about the Edge control card.

Backing Up Firmware
Follow these steps to back up your Edge or Panacea enhanced module
firmware:
1. At the RouterMapper main window, highlight the name of the
device that you want to back up.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.
3. Scroll down to the Firmware option. The Upgrade .../Backup...
selection list will appear.
4. Select Backup....
5. RouterMapper will prompt you for the directory location and file
name for storing the retrieved firmware file from the device.

Figure 3-21. Firmware Backup Window

RouterMapper will use the frame’s IP address to establish an FTP

connection. (You set up the IP address via the device’s control card.)
• See page 136 for more information about the Panacea control card.
• See Chapter 6: “Adding and Editing Edge Configurations” for more
information about the Edge control card.

74 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 4
Adding Frames

Overview
RouterMapper supports downloading and managing Integrator,
Panacea, and Platinum series frames. Legacy frames (e.g., XPlus,
Hedco, Mixbox, NEO, VIA, and XPRESS) are not configurable via
RouterMapper; however, they should be added to the database as
outlined in the following sections so that RouterMapper will have a
complete “view” of the control system and will operate properly.
Leitch/Harris router frames can be added to the database by polling the
control network for installed frames or by manually creating entries in
the device list using the Add command.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 76
• “Adding a Frame Using the Add Command” on page 76
• “Adding Integrator Frames” on page 100
• “Adding Integrator Combiner Systems” on page 128
• “Adding Other Leitch/Harris Frames” on page 148
• “Adding Panacea Frames” on page 132
• “Adding Platinum Frames” on page 77
For information about adding a control panel, see Chapter 5.
For information about adding an Opus master controller, see Chapter 7.
For information about adding and editing an Edge configurations, see
Chapter 6.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 75

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding a Frame by Polling

1. Click the Poll button at the RouterMapper main window.
RouterMapper will query the control system, and return error
messages if errors are found.
2. If no errors are found, RouterMapper will update the Device List
with all frames that were found during the Poll.

Figure 4-1. Adding a Frame by Polling

Adding a Frame Using the Add Command

The dialogs that appear during the Add process depend on the type of
frame being added. Platinum frames, Integrator series frames, Panacea
frames, combiner systems, and non-Integrator series frames, are
covered separately.

76 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

Adding Platinum Frames

Adding a Platinum frame to the RouterMapper database is a multi-step
process that requires you to
• Select a frame size (page 77)
• Set up a matrix (page 78)
• Set up monitoring, if you have optional monitoring modules as part
of your system (page 93)
• Set up controls (page 97)

Selecting the Frame Size

1. Click the Add button at the RouterMapper main window. The Add
New Device dialog box will appear.
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select
Router Type dialog box will appear.
3. Select the frame type. A blue box will appear around the selected
frame type.
4. Click OK. The Platinum Frame Size dialog box will appear.
5. Select the Platinum frame size you want (options are 9RU, 15RU
and 28RU). A blue box will appear around the selected type.
6. Click Next. The Platinum Configured Matrices dialog box will
appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 77

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Setting Up a Matrix

Figure 4-2. Platinum Configured Matrix Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to add a new matrix, or delete or configure
an existing matrix for a Platinum frame. The Output column and the
Input column are set up with separate list box controls. You can use
standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys) to select multiple modules on each, or both, lists.
You may “quick-add” one or more matrices, for which RouterMapper
will automatically assign inputs, outputs, and formats. You also may
add new matrices one at a time, and select specific numbers of inputs
and outputs, and select a specific format.
• For information on how to quick-add matrices, go to page 79.
• For information on how to add matrices one at a time, go to
page 81.

78 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

To “quick-add” matrices, follows these steps:

1. Move the cursor display somewhere within the matrix list control area,
and then right-click the mouse. A small selection box will pop up.

Figure 4-3. Add Matrices Selection Box

2. Select Add Multiple Matrices. The Add Multiple Matrices dialog

box will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 79

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-4. Add Multiple Matrices Dialog Box

3. Fill in these fields via their associated drop-down list boxes:

a. # of Matrices: Choose the total number of matrices you want in
addition to the one that already appears in the matrix
description area. RouterMapper will evenly divide the
remaining modules into the requested matrices.
b. Starting Level: Choose the Level number that corresponds to
the level number the physical router frame will occupy in the
routing system.
c. If you want all matrices to have the same Level, click the check
box.
4. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box. The new
matrix information will appear in the description boxes. The
matrix’s module information is color-coded as described in Table
4-1.

Table 4-1. Matrix Information Color Codes

Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the
selected matrix.
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because
they are assigned to another matrix.
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be
assigned to any matrix.
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to
(or unassigned from) the selected matrix.

80 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

d. Click Next. The Monitoring Matrices window will appear.

To add a new matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click the Add button. (Alternatively, move the cursor display
somewhere within the matrix list control area, and then right-click
the mouse. A small selection box will pop up. Select Add Matrix.)
2. The Add Matrix dialog box will appear.

Figure 4-5. Add Matrix Dialog Box

3. Fill in these fields:

a. Name: Enter a name that identifies this particular Platinum
matrix.
b. Format: Choose the desired matrix format from the drop-down
list box.
c. # of Physical INs: Choose the appropriate number of inputs
from the drop-down list box. (You cannot type in the
information into this field.)
d. # of Physical OUTs: Choose the appropriate number of outputs
from the drop-down list box. (You cannot type in the
information into this field.)
e. Level: Choose the Level number that corresponds to the level
number the physical router frame will occupy in the routing
system.
f. Input Offset: Enter a number that corresponds to the point at
which input numbering will start for the specified component.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 81

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

g. Output Offset: Enter a number that corresponds to the point at

which output numbering will start for the specified component.
h. The Options box displays which options are available for your
particular matrix setup.
• If you want dual output, click the check box next to Dual
Output.
Select this option only if your Platinum modules include a
dual output module such as the PT-HSR-DOB,
PT-SR-DOB, or PT-ENC-DOB.
• If you want to automatically set up a monitoring matrix, click
the check box next to Monitoring matrix.
Select this option if you want RouterMapper to
automatically create a monitoring matrix for you. In
addition, RouterMapper will automatically update the
matrix to reflect any other changes that you make. If you
prefer to set up and update a monitoring matrix manually,
do not choose this option. You can manually set up a
monitoring matrix at the Monitoring Matrices window (see
page 93 for more information).
• If you selected AES as your format (see page 81), the Module
Plugins drop-down list box will be accessible. Choose from
the selections as described in Table 4-2.

Table 4-2. Module Plugin Selections

Selection Description
Balance AES Balanced back panel interface
Coax AES Coaxial back panel interface

i. The I/O Slots box allows you to choose slots assignments for
your I/O modules.
• Click the Auto radio button if you want RouterMapper to
automatically assign slots for the I/O modules.
• Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting
slots for the I/O modules yourself. (If you select slot
assignments that are incompatible with other settings,
RouterMapper will warn you with appropriate error
messages.)

82 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

• From the Starting IN Slot drop-down list box, select the

starting slot for your input modules.
• From the Starting OUT Slot drop-down list box, select the
starting slot for your output modules.
4. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box. The new
matrix information will appear in the description boxes. Matrix
information is color-coded as described in Table 4-1 on page 80.
5. RouterMapper will display the crosspoint locations associated with
your matrix information. You will need to make sure you have
crosspoint modules installed in these locations for crosspoint
switching to occur correctly.
If you want to enable redundant crosspoints:
Note • Right-click the mouse button, and then choose Redundant
This function is available with Crosspoint from the pop-up menu window.
256×256 frames only.

Figure 4-6. Redundant Crosspoint Pop-Up Menu

• Click on Disable to disable the redundant crosspoint function.

• Click on Enable to enable the redundant crosspoint function.
If you have enabled redundant crosspoints, you will also need to set
the crosspoint switching mode:
• Right-click the mouse button, and then choose Redundant Switch
Mode from the pop-up menu window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 83

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-7. Redundant Switch Mode Pop-Up Menu

• Click on Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new,

active crosspoint module. Existing crosspoints will not be
switched, but will remain on their original crosspoint module.
• Click on Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the
new, active crosspoint module.
6. If you want to change the sync setting assignments, follow these
steps:
• Right-click the mouse, and then choose Assign Syncs from the
pop-up menu.
Default values are Sync 1, Sync 2, Sync 3, and Sync 4. You can
change these default values at the Control Settings tab. See
page 98 for instructions on how to change the sync names and
settings.

Figure 4-8. Assign Syncs Pop-Up Menu

• Select the sync you want to assign to the selected slots. (All cards
assigned with the same sync number will have the same sync
characteristics.)

84 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

7. If you want to change the initial source mode settings, follow these
steps:
• In the Configuration box, highlight the configuration you want to
set.
• Right-click the mouse, and then choose Set On-Download Initial
Note Source Mode from the pop-up menu window.
You may also set this function at • Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or
the Monitor Matrix tab. See
disconnect outputs after download.
page 95 for more information.
• Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in
the matrix areas after download.
• Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be
connected to the first input in the matrix.
8. If you want to partition the matrix, follow these steps:
a. Highlight the matrix you want to configure.
b. Click Advanced.... The Matrix Partition window will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 85

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-9. Matrix Partition Window

At the top left of the window you will see pertinent matrix
information. You can change the name, the input partition
display color, starting level, and input and output offsets.
At the top right of the window is the Matrix Size information
box. This display is for informational purposes only; you
cannot change the matrix size here.
c. Below the Matrix Size box is the Partition Type drop-down list
box. Here you will select from these partition type components:
None, RGB, Contiguous, Wild, and Shared Inputs.
None
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type.

86 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

To choose this option, select None from the Partition Type

drop-down list box, and then go on to step d on page 91. (See
page 291 for information about additional advanced functions
associated with this partition type.)
RGB Partitioning

Figure 4-10. RGB Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into

components of equal size. You can connect the RGB outputs
from a component device to the first three physical inputs on
the router, and the RGB outputs of a second component device
to physical inputs four, five and six (each group of three inputs
will appear to the control system as a single input, and will be
switched simultaneously).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 87

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

To choose this option, select RGB from the Partition Type

drop-down list box, and then go on to step d on page 91. (See
page 292 for information about additional advanced functions
associated with this partition type.)
Contiguous Partitioning

Figure 4-11. Contiguous Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of

sources and destinations; RouterMapper automatically assigns
blocks of physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the
appropriate components (this option differs from Shared Inputs
in that input blocks cannot overlap).

88 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

To choose this option, select Contiguous from the Partition

Type drop-down list box, and then go on to step d on page 91.
(See page 294 for information about additional advanced
functions associated with this partition type.)
Wild Partitioning

Figure 4-12. Wild Partitioning

Choose this option if you want to allow any input or output to

be assigned to any component.
To choose this option, select Wild from the Partition Type
drop-down list box, and then go on to step d on page 91. (See
page 296 for information about additional advanced functions
associated with this partition type.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 89

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Shared Inputs

Figure 4-13. Shared Inputs

Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of

sources and destinations. RouterMapper automatically assigns
blocks of physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the
appropriate components (this option differs from Contiguous in
that input blocks can overlap).
To choose this option, select Shared Inputs from the Partition
Type drop-down list box, and then go on to step d on page 91.
(See page 299 for information about additional advanced
functions associated with this partition type.)

90 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

d. Under the matrix information display are the Physical Input

View and Physical Output View tabs. The information
displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of
how your selected input and output partitions will look, based
on the partition type components you selected. Choose the
appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output
partitioning.
e. You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any
physical component. Click somewhere within the read-only
area of the matrix partition list for the matrix you want to
change. (Alternatively, move your mouse to the Physical View
area, and then right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu
will appear. Select Physical Map Order.) The Physical Map
Order dialog box will appear.

Figure 4-14. Physical Map Order Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 91

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

The Physical Map Order dialog box displays the physical I/O
location of a particular component. At this dialog box, you can
change the input or output assignment of any physical
component.
To change I/O assignments, click the physical location number
for the appropriate component input or output, and then select a
new physical location number from the drop-down list box.
RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your chosen
component to the component to which the physical number was
originally assigned. For example, if you want to change the
assignment of Component Input 9 from 179 to 187 (which is
currently assigned to Component Input 17), RouterMapper will
assign 187 to Component Input 9 and 179 to Component Input
17.
9. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices window.
10. Click Next. The Monitoring Matrices window will appear.

92 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

Selecting Monitoring

Figure 4-15. Platinum Monitor Dialog Box

Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and
outputs as a set of inputs on a separate matrix (which is called the
monitor matrix). It allows you to monitor what comes out of a particular
output. If you have a monitoring module installed in your Platinum
router, you can set up monitoring information here. You can monitor
input signals, output signals, or both input and output signals. You can
set up a matrix monitoring configuration in one of two ways: via the
Quick-Physical I/O selection list, or by manually inputting the
information desired. (If you prefer to set up a monitoring matrix that
will be automatically created and updated, do not choose this option.
See page 81 through page 82 for information on having RouterMapper
create a monitoring matrix automatically.)
To “quick-add” a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix
to the list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 93

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

2. In the Quick-Physical I/O Selection List box, highlight the name of

the matrix to assign to the monitoring configuration list.
3. Click the appropriate radio button to select input or output
monitoring, or both.
4. Click Assign. The selected matrix will appear in the Monitoring
Matrix Configuration list box.
• To remove the matrix, click Delete.
• To edit matrix information, highlight the name of the matrix
assigned to the monitoring configuration list, and then click
Advanced. The Monitor Matrix dialog box will appear. (See step
5 through step 6, starting on page 95, for more instructions on
completing this dialog box.)
5. Click Next. The Control Settings window will appear.
To manually create a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix
to the list box.
2. At the matrix list control area, highlight the desired input and/or
output module slots to include in the selected monitor matrix.
3. Right-click the mouse, and select Assign to Monitor Matrix.
4. Click Advanced. The Monitor Matrix dialog box will appear.

94 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

Figure 4-16. Monitor Matrix Dialog Box

5. In the Properties box, make the following selections:

• Select the desired level on which this matrix will operate from
the drop-down list box.
• If you want input monitoring offset, set the desired input offset
number.
• If you want output monitoring offset, set the desired output offset
number.
• Select a display color.
6. In the On-Download Initial Source box, select one of the following
Note options:
If you have already set this • Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect
selection (as described on
outputs after download.
page 85), you do not have to set
it again. • Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the
matrix areas after download.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 95

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be

connected to the first input in the matrix.
If you have added more than one matrix, and some of the same
modules are assigned to both matrixes, an asterisk will appear to the
left of the name (see Figure 4-17 on page 96). The asterisk means
that this particular matrix will provide virtual output monitoring.
See the Platinum Frame and Modules Manual Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Manual for more information on real
and virtual output monitoring.

Figure 4-17. Virtual Monitoring Indicators

7. Click Next. The Control Settings window will appear.

96 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

Selecting Controls

Figure 4-18. Platinum Control Settings Dialog Box

This dialog box allows you to set up frame identifiers needed for file
transfer protocol (FTP) functions, I/O sync and reference settings, and
communications settings.
1. For FTP functions, fill in these fields in the Platinum Frame
Identification box:
• Select the frame ID (the frame’s physical address) from the
drop-down list box.
• In the Frame Name box, enter the frame’s descriptive name.
• In the Frame IP Address box, enter the frame’s IP address. This is
necessary for transferring or upgrading files via an FTP site. (The
actual frame IP address is set up via CoPilot.)
• In the Username box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers.
(The actual username is set up or changed via CoPilot.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 97

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• In the Password box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers.
(The actual password is set up or changed via CoPilot.)
• In the Confirm box, re-enter the password you just entered.
2. If you want to configure the sync settings:
a. In the Platinum I/O Sync and References box, click the Sync...
Note button. The Configure I/O Sync Settings window will appear.
The I/O Type drop-down list
box appears when the you select
Standard radio button. The Sync
Pulse Delay box appears when
you select the Advanced radio
button.

Figure 4-19. Configure I/O Sync Settings Window

(Standard Setting Selected)

b. You can configure separate settings for up to four separate sync

ports. For each port, choose the following settings:
• Choose the desired sync (1 through 4) from the drop-down list
box.
• Enter a name by which to identify a particular sync port.
• Choose Auto, Standard, or Advanced mode

98 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Platinum Frames

Table 4-3. Sync Port Mode Selections

Mode Description
Auto Switch point is determined by the detected sync
type only based on SMPTE RP-168 specifications
Standard Provides the option to pick a standard timing
reference; select which one you want from the I/O
Type drop-down list box
Advanced Provides the option to enter a sync pulse (take)
delay in microseconds; enter the delay time you
want in the Sync Pulse Delay box

c. Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box.

3. Click Finish. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu
window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 99

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Integrator Frames

1. Click the Add button at the RouterMapper main window. The Add
New Device dialog box will appear.
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select
Router Type dialog box will appear.
3. Select the frame type. A blue box will appear around the selected
frame type.
4. Click Next. The Select Frame Size dialog box will appear.
5. Select an Integrator frame size. Options are 4RU, 6RU, 8RU, and
Gold types. A blue box will appear around the selected type.
6. Click Next. The Router Frame dialog box will appear.

Figure 4-20. Select Router Frame Matrix Size Dialog Box

7. Select the Matrix Type from the drop-down list box. Options are
• SDI
• Analog video
• Analog stereo audio
• Analog mono audio

100 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Frames

• AES EBU
• High Definition (HD)
• Data router1 (the data router’s Configured Matrices dialog box is
different from other types of matrix format editing [see page 105
for instructions on adding data router frames])
• Integrator Gold multirate digital (the multirate digital router’s
Configured Matrices dialog box is different from other types of
matrix format editing [see page 111 for instructions on adding
Integrator Gold frames])
8. Click the desired matrix size. (The Max Matrix Size options
changes as the Matrix Type is changed.)
9. (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed,
select the proper check box. (See “Setting Up Output Monitoring”
starting on page 115, for more information on how to set up the
output monitoring function.)
10. Click the Add button. The matrix will be displayed in the empty
frame on the right-hand side of the dialog box.
You may continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You will
not be able to select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in
the frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the
frame. An outline will appear around the matrix to indicate that it is
selected. [The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.] Click
the Delete button.)
By default, the Stuffed As size will be the same as the selected Max
Matrix Size. In some cases, however, you may wish to override the
default in order to save slots for future use.

1 For
more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data
Routing Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 101

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-21. Frame Matrix Size with Empty Slots

11. After you finish defining the matrices, click Next. The Configured
Matrices dialog box will appear.1

1 The
Configured Matrices dialog boxes for the data router and the multirate digital
router are different from other types of matrix format editing. See page 105 for more
information on the data router. See page 111 for more information on the multirate
digital router.

102 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Frames

Figure 4-22. Configured Matrices Dialog Box

12. Fill in the following fields:

Note • Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is
Matrix type and matrix size outlined)
properties will be displayed, but
cannot be edited on this screen. • Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID
To change either the matrix type from the drop-down list box
or matrix size, click Back to
return to the previous screen.
• Frame Name (default name is “Integrator [Frame ID]”): define
the new frame name as desired
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the
Destination Offset in previous Leitch/Harris product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which
destination numbering will start for this matrix.
• First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source
Offset described in other Leitch/Harris product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 103

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

13. If the matrix should be partitioned, click the Enable Matrix

Partitioning check box; then, click Next. (See “Matrix
Partitioning” starting on page 286, for more information on matrix
partitioning.)
14. Click the Finish button. The Integrator frame will be added to the
device list at the RouterMapper main window.

104 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Data Router Frames

Adding Integrator Data Router Frames

1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in “Adding
Integrator Frames” steps 1 through 6 (pages 100 through 100).
2. At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box (Figure 4-20 on
page 100), select “Data router” from the Matrix Type drop-down
list box.
3. Click the desired matrix size.
4. Click the Add button. The matrix will be displayed in the empty
frame on the right-hand side of the dialog box.
You may continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You will
not be able to select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in
the frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the
frame. An outline will appear around the matrix to indicate that it is
selected. [The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.] Click
the Delete button.)
By default, the Stuffed As size will be the same as the selected Max
Matrix Size. In some cases, however, you may wish to override the
default in order to save slots for future use.
5. After you finish defining the matrices, click Next. The Configured
Matrices dialog box (Figure 4-23 on page 106) will appear.
The data router's1 Configured Matrices dialog box is somewhat
different from other types of matrix format editing. There are two
different items on this dialog box: a Data Router Type list box and
an Edit Ports button in the Signal Type field. (Other matrix format
editing shows a list box of signal formats instead.)

1 For
more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data
Routing Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 105

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-23. Data Router Configured Matrices Dialog Box

6. Fill in the following fields:

• Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is
outlined)
• Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID
from the drop-down list box
• Frame Name (default name is “Integrator [Frame ID]”): define
the new frame name as desired
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the
Destination Offset in previous Leitch/Harris product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which
destination numbering will start for this matrix.
• First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source
Offset described in other Leitch/Harris product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix.
• The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.

106 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Data Router Frames

7. Select the desired data router type from the drop-down list box.
Data router types are as follows:
• Dest to Controller — Point to point connection; all previous
Note connections using the new source and destination are
For a more detailed explanation disconnected when a new switch is made.
of point to point and ganged
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the
operations, see the Integrator™
Series Data Routing Switcher port used as a source in the switch command will be configured
Matrix Module Set to connect to a device (tributary); therefore, the port itself will be
Configuration and Operation a controller. The Destination is configured to be connected to a
Manual. controller; therefore, the port itself will be a device (tributary).
When ports configured as “RS422 Auto” are connected to ports
that are either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device,” they take
the opposite configuration (controller/device) from the port to
which they are being connected. “RS232 Auto” ports are always
configured as DTE when used as a destination and DCE when
used as a source.
• Dest to Device — Point to point connection; all previous
connections using the new source and destination are
disconnected when a new switch is made.
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the
port used as a source in the switch command will be configured
to connect to a controller; therefore, the port itself will be a
device. The Destination is configured to be connected to a device
(tributary); therefore, the port itself will be a controller. When
ports configured as “RS422 Auto” are connected to ports that are
either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device,” they take the
opposite configuration (controller/device) from the port to which
they are being connected. “RS232 Auto” signal types are always
configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE when
used as a source.
• Gang Dest to Controller — Ganged operation; multiple
destinations may be connected to a source.
The “return path” connection (transmit to the source, receive
from the destination) is disconnected from previous destinations
and connected to the current destination when making a
connection to a source that already has a connection.
Destinations may be switched away from a source. If the
destination switched away (or disconnected) is the “reverse path”

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 107

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

then the first physical destination connected to that source is

chosen as the new “reverse path.” Disconnecting the reverse path
(i.e. the destination associated with a source that has multiple
destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the reverse path when
the source only has one connection is allowed.
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the
port used as a source in the switch command will be configured
to connect to a device (tributary); therefore, the port itself will be
a controller. The Destination is configured to be connected to a
controller; therefore, the port itself will be a device (tributary).
When configured as “RS422 Auto” are connected to ports that
are either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device,” then they take
the opposite configuration (controller/device). “RS232 Auto” are
always configured as DTE when used as a destination and DCE
when used as a source.
• Gang Dest to Device — Ganged operation; multiple destinations
may be connected to a source. The “return path” connection
(transmit to the source, receive from the destination) is
disconnected from previous destinations and connected to the
current destination when making a connection to a source that
already has a connection. Destinations may be switched away
from a source. If the destination switched away (or disconnected)
is the “reverse path” then the first physical destination connected
to that source is chosen as the new “reverse path.” Disconnecting
the reverse path (i.e. the destination associated with a source that
has multiple destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the
reverse path when the source only has one connection is allowed.
When two “RS422 Auto” ports are connected to each other, the
port used as a source in the switch command will be configured
to connect to a controller; therefore, the port itself will be a
device. The Destination is configured to be connected to a device
(tributary); therefore, the port itself will be a controller. When
configured as “RS422 Auto” are connected to ports that are
either “RS422 Controller” or “RS422 Device,” then they take the
opposite configuration (controller/device). “RS232 Auto” are
always configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE
when used as a source.
8. Click the Edit Ports button. The Edit Ports Signal Type dialog box
will appear (see Figure 4-24 on page 109).

108 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Data Router Frames

Figure 4-24. Edit Port Signal Types Dialog Box

9. Select the desired port.

10. Choose a signal type from the Signal Type drop down list box. (To
change more than one port’s signal type, press and hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired ports.) Signal types
are as follows:
• Data RS232 Auto — This port signal type must only be used for
a port on a RS-232 card. This port will switch between DTE and
DCE, based on Source/Destination context.
• This port will be set to DTE when the Data Router Type is set
to “Dest to Controller” and the port is used as a Destination.
• This port will be set to DCE when the Data Router Type is set
to “Dest to Controller” and the port is used as a Source.
RS-232 ports do not automatically take the opposite sense of the
other port in a switch.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 109

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Data RS232 DCE — This port is always configured as DCE

regardless of its use as a Source or as a Destination in a
crosspoint Take command. It will communicate with a DTE port
through a 1:1 cable or a DCE port through a null modem cable.
• Data RS232 DTE — This port is always configured as DTE
regardless of its use as a Source or as a Destination in a
crosspoint Take command. It will communicate with a DCE port
through a 1:1 cable or a DTE port through a null modem cable.
• Data RS422 Auto — This port chooses its port configuration
based on its use as a source or destination in a switch command
depending on the Data Router Type setting. If the Data Router
Type is set to “Dest to Controller,” the port will be configured as
a tributary if used as a destination so that it may be connected to a
controller, provided that the source is not “RS422 Controller” or
“RS422 Device.” Otherwise, it take the opposite sense: If the
source is “RS422 Controller,” the port will be configured as a
controller so that it may be connected to a device. If the source is
“RS422 Device,” the port will be configured as a device so that it
may be connected to a controller.
• Data RS422 Controller — This port is always configured as a
device so that it may be connected to a controller with a 1:1
cable.
• Data RS422 Device — This port is always configured as a
controller so that it may be connected to a device with a 1:1
cable.
11. Click OK to accept your changes. You will return to the Configured
Matrices dialog box.
12. At the Configured Matrices dialog box, click OK to accept your
changes. RouterMapper will return you to the main menu screen.

110 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Gold (Multirate Digital) Routers

Adding Integrator Gold (Multirate Digital)

Routers
1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in “Adding
Integrator Frames” steps 1 through 4 (see page 100).
2. At the Select Frame Size dialog box, select the Integrator Gold
frame type.
3. Click the desired matrix size.
4. (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed,
select the proper check box. (See “Setting Up Output Monitoring”
starting on page 115, for more information on how to set up the
output monitoring function.)
5. Click the Add button. The matrix will be displayed in the empty
frame on the right-hand side of the dialog box.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the
frame. An outline will appear around the matrix to indicate that it is
selected. [The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.] Click
the Delete button.)
6. Click the Next button. The Configured Matrices dialog box
(Figure 4-25 on page 112) will appear.
The Integrator Gold multirate digital router’s Configured Matrices
dialog box is somewhat different from other types of matrix format
editing. Note that the I/O Signals field in the dialog box shows an
Edit button. (Other matrix format editing dialog boxes shows a list
box of signal formats).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 111

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-25. Integrator Gold Configured Matrices Dialog Box

7. Fill in the following fields:

• Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is
outlined)
• Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID
from the drop-down list box
• Frame Name (default name is “Integrator [Frame ID]”): define
the new frame name as desired
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the
Destination Offset in previous Leitch/Harris product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which
destination numbering will start for this matrix.
• First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source
Offset described in other Leitch/Harris product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix.
• The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.

112 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Gold (Multirate Digital) Routers

8. Click the Edit button. The Edit Component Signal Type dialog box
will appear (see Figure 4-26). You can modify only the level output
reclocker and level input EQ fields.

Figure 4-26. Integrator Gold Edit Component Signal Types

Dialog Box

• The Frame static box shows the Integrator Gold frame name.
• The Component static box shows the Integrator Gold
component name.
• The Level static box shows the Integrator Gold component level.
• The Destination Settings list view box shows all available level
outputs for the component. The list view also provides the level
output reclocker setting that each level output uses.
• The Source Settings list view box shows all available level
inputs for the component. The list view also provides the level
input EQ setting that each level input uses.
9. Modify the level output reclocker as follows:
a. Highlight the desired level output.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 113

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

b. Choose a signal type from the Reclocker Setting drop-down list

box. (To change more than one level output reclocker, press and
hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
level outputs.) Reclocker settings are as follows:

Table 4-4. Reclocker Settings

Reclocker Setting Description
143 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 143 Mb/s signal
177 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 177 Mb/s signal
270 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 270 Mb/s signal
360 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 360 Mb/s signal
540 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 540 Mb/s signal
1.485 Gb/s Reclocker only locks to 1.485 Gb/s signal
Auto pass ASI Reclocker locks to any of 143, 270, 360, 540
Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s (177 Mb/s is not allowed
as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
Auto pass 177 Reclocker locks to any of 143, 177, 270, 360,
540 Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s (ASI should not be
used as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
By-pass SDI slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output
slew rate is hard coded to the slower SDI slew
rate
By-pass HD slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output
slew rate is hard coded to the faster HD slew
rate

c. Click OK. You will return to the Configured Matrices tab.

10. Modify the level input EQ as follows:
a. Highlight the desired level input.
b. Choose a signal type from the EQ Setting drop-down list box.
(To change more than one level input EQ, press and hold down
the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired level inputs.)
c. Click OK. You will return to the Configured Matrices tab.
11. Click Finish to accept all changes and additions. You will return to
the RouterMapper main menu.

114 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Output Monitoring

Setting Up Output Monitoring1

An optional output monitoring submodule may be installed on audio
and/or video output modules in an Integrator frame.
Output monitoring is a router feature that treats the matrix destinations
as a set of sources on a separate matrix (which is called the Output
Monitoring Matrix). Its allows you to monitor what comes out of a
particular destination. For example, a 64x32 matrix with SDI format
that has output monitoring, would have another matrix of 32x1 with
SDI format.
To set up the output monitoring function, follow these steps:
1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in “Adding
Integrator Frames” steps 1 through 6 (pages 100 through 100).
2. At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box
• Highlight the desired matrix size.
• Choose the check box for output monitoring.
• Click the Add button. (Note the “OM” that has appeared in the
upper left corner of the added matrix. This “OM” may appear at
another location on the matrix, depending on which spigot the
signal is being driven to.)

1
The output monitoring option is available only on Integrator products.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 115

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-27. Output Monitoring Function Selected

3. Click the Next button.

4. Continue with steps 12 through 14 under “Adding Integrator
Frames” (pages 102 through 104). The Integrator frame will be
added to the device list at the RouterMapper main window. Notice
that the router level definition will indicate one additional
destination. (For example, in Figure 4-28, the router definition for
level 0 is 64x65.)
5. At the RouterMapper main menu screen, highlight the Integrator
with the output submodule attached; then, click the Edit button.

116 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Output Monitoring

Figure 4-28. Select Edit for Output Monitoring

6. At the Edit Frame window, select the Output Monitoring tab.

Figure 4-29. Edit Frame Window, Output Monitoring Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 117

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

7. Set the Level, Destination, and First Source parameters. Like any
other matrix, an output monitoring matrix can be configured (such
as assigning level control, starting destination, and sources).
• Level: level on which this matrix will operate
• Destination: destination number for this matrix (the point at
which destination numbering will start for this matrix)
If you choose to have the output monitoring matrix on the same
level as the matrix that the destinations will be monitored, you
must assign a different destination number (for the output
monitoring destination) that does not conflict with the
destinations that will be monitored. See Figure 4-30 on page 119
for an example of the output monitoring matrix on the same level
as the monitoring matrix. See Figure 4-31 on page 119 for an
example of the output monitoring matrix on a different level
from the monitoring matrix.
• First Source: first source for this matrix (the First Source is
analogous to the Source Offset in previous Leitch/Harris product
manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this matrix. The first source number
must be the same as the first destination number of the
destinations that will be monitored. (See “Adding Logical
Sources” starting on page 218, for more information about
logical sources.)
8. Click OK. The Integrator frame will be updated at the
RouterMapper main window.

118 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Output Monitoring

Figure 4-30. Output Monitoring Matrix — Same Level

Figure 4-31. Output Monitoring Matrix — Different Level

Defining Destinations as Sources for Output Monitoring

On some occasions, you may need to define a particular destination as a
source for output monitoring. (This may happen when you are not using
a control panel.)
1. Follow steps 1 through 8 under “Setting Up Output Monitoring”
(pages 115 through 119).
2. At the RouterMapper main widow, click the Define Levels button.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 119

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

3. Make sure that the logical router size can accommodate both levels.
(In the example shown in Figure 4-32, the logical router size is set
for 64 sources and 33 destinations.)

Figure 4-32. Setting Logical Router Size

4. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main window.

5. Click the Sources button. The Logical Sources tab will appear.
6. Scroll to the first available logical source entry to be assigned to a
destination (the “first source” entry from step 7 of “Setting Up
Output Monitoring” [page 118]).

120 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Output Monitoring

7. Set up names that match the destination names entered into the
Logical Destination database.
When assigning or editing source names, keep in mind that these
characters are “illegal”: the “~” character, the “\” character, and all
non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters).
These characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored
in the database.

Figure 4-33. Setting Up Names For New Sources

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 121

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

8. Delete all sources that precede your newly-named source(s) on the

output monitoring level only.

Figure 4-34. Deleting Sources

122 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Output Monitoring

9. Starting at your first newly named source, redefine the levels (e.g.,
“1,” “2,” etc.).

Figure 4-35. Redefining Levels

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 123

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

10. Right-click in the Levels field; then, select Clear Invalid

Assignments.

Figure 4-36. Clearing Invalid Assignments

11. Select the Logical Destinations tab.

12. Right-click in the Levels field; then, select Clear Invalid
Assignments.

124 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Output Monitoring

13. Delete all logical assignments for the output monitoring level.

Figure 4-37. Deleting Logical Assignments

14. Scroll down to the location of the destination you want to function
as the output monitor (usually the last name in the list).
15. Set up an easily-remembered name for the new output monitor.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 125

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

16. Enter the same output monitor destination number you set at the
Output Monitoring tab for the output monitoring level.

Figure 4-38. Naming the New Output Monitor

17. Click Done. You will return to the RouterMapper main window.
Figure 4-39 on page 127 illustrates a RouterWorks display that shows
the output monitoring function.

126 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Output Monitoring

Figure 4-39. Output Monitoring Function as Displayed in RouterWorks

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 127

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Integrator Combiner Systems

The combiner option allows you to join several Integrator frames to
Note provide a routing system with more than 128 inputs. Setting up systems
You cannot edit or delete in this way will allow you to have a system with up to 512 inputs × 512
dynamic routing threads in a outputs.
combiner system; however, you
can edit dynamic routing thread Internal connections for the combiner systems are managed through the
remote accessible sources in a Leitch/HarrisDynamic Routing Fabric. See page 231 for more
combiner system. information about dynamic routing threads.

Restrictions
Several restrictions exist in a potential combiner system:
1. You cannot partition any part of the combiner system.
2. All frames within the combiner system must be a single format.
(You cannot have an analog video frame and an SDI frame in one
combiner system, for example.)
3. A 6RU frame size is the smallest “building block” for your
potential combiner system.

Setting Up a Combiner System

Choose what size system you need; that is, how many inputs and how
Note many outputs.
Maximum combiner system size You may find it helpful to plan out your combiner system on paper. It
is 512×512.
will be easier for you to add and edit your choices if you have a system
setup already defined. See Figure 4-40 on page 129 and Figure 4-41 on
page 130 for examples of the types of information you will need to set
up your system.

Adding Combiner System Components

1. Click the Add button at the RouterMapper main window. The Add
New Device dialog box will appear.
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down box; then, click OK.
The Add Router Frame dialog box will appear.
3. Select the Frame type. A blue box will appear around the selected
frame type.

128 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Combiner Systems

4. Click the Next button. The Edit Combiner System dialog box will
appear. (This dialog box will look slightly different, depending on
whether or not you are configuring a combiner system for an
Integrator Gold. Figure 4-41 on page 130 shows a picture of the
Edit Combiner System dialog box for an Integrator Gold.
Figure 4-40 on page 129 shows a picture of the Edit Combiner
System dialog box for all other Integrators.)

Figure 4-40. Combiner Choices (Except Integrator Gold)

5. Make your selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows (see
Figure 4-40 and Figure 4-41 for the location of these selections):
• Name — what you want this combiner system to be named
• Level on which this combiner system will operate

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 129

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Matrix format — select the signal format that the frame will
route (all frames within the combiner system must be a single
format)
• Signal type — select the specific signal type within the format
(analog audio, mono audio, stereo audio, and AES formats use
the same signal type for input and output signals)

Figure 4-41. Combiner Choices for Integrator Gold

• Output signal1 — output signal type for Integrator Gold format

• Input signal1 — input signal EQ setting for Integrator Gold
format
1 This
option appears on the dialog box for Integrator Gold only.

130 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Integrator Combiner Systems

• Size — number of sources and number of destinations

• Source and destination offsets
• Combiner system input and output thread offsets — these
offsets must be above the Source and Destination Offsets’ values
• Dual Output
• Output Monitoring — allows you to set up a router feature that
treats the matrix destinations as a set of sources on a separate
matrix
• Starting frame ID — the physical address of the first frame in
the combiner system. At any time you may click the View
Picture button to see a block diagram and other frame details.
6. Click Done. RouterMapper will add frames to the device tree and
automatically add a set of dynamic routing threads for the combiner
system.
7. Physically set up the frames as they are specified in the
RouterMapper database (set frame IDs and wire the system).
8. Poll the entire system (click the Poll button at the RouterMapper
Caution main menu window) to verify that all frames are operating and
RouterMapper does not allow detected correctly.
you to use the dynamic routing
9. Download the new configuration to the frames (see “Downloading
thread edit function on a
connection within a combiner Device Definitions” starting on page 69).
system. 10. Make sure that the combiner system crosspoints operate correctly.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 131

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Panacea Frames

1. Click the Add button at the RouterMapper main window. The Add
Note New Device dialog box will appear.
A standard Panacea frame 2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select
cannot be downloaded.
Router Type dialog box will appear.
3. Select the frame type. A blue box will appear around the selected
frame type.
4. Click Next. The Select Frame Size dialog box will appear.
5. Select either a Standard or an Enhanced control style and a frame
size (options are 1RU and 2RU). A blue box will appear around the
selected frame type.
6. Click on Next. The Router Frame dialog box will appear.

Figure 4-42. Router Frame Dialog Box

7. Select the matrix type from the drop-down list box. (The Max
Matrix Size options will change as the Matrix Type is changed.)
8. Click on the desired matrix size.

132 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

9. (Optional) If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed,

select the proper check box under Module Options. Table 4-5 lists
matrix types with programmable I/O submodules.

Table 4-5. Matrix Types and Supported

I/O Submodules
Matrix Type Submodule Supported
AES EBU (all matrix sizes) Quiet switch
High Definition:
16×2, 32×2 only (HSC) HD clean switch
16×8, 32×8 only (HSCQ) Clean-quiet switch
SDI
16×2, 32×2 only (SC) SD clean switch
16×8, 32×8 only (SCQ) Clean-quiet switch

10. Click on the Add button. The matrix will be displayed in the empty
frame on the right side of the dialog box.
Continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You will not be
able to select matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the
frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click on the matrix in the
frame. An outline will appear around the matrix to indicate that it is
selected. The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix Type. Click
the Delete button.)
11. (RES-H or enhanced modules only) Click on the HARDWARE…
Note button to change the I/O hardware module default settings of a
The Hardware button will selected matrix in the empty frame. The I/O Hardware Module
appear only if your Panacea dialog box will appear. (See “I/O Hardware Module Tab (Panacea
router contains an enhanced Frames Only)” (page 336) for more information about this dialog
resource card.
box).
12. After you finish defining the matrices, click on Next. The
Configured Matrices dialog box will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 133

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Figure 4-43. Panacea Configured Matrices Dialog Box

To change the frame properties, click on the right side of the empty
Note frame (shown in Figure 4-43 as “Frame Settings”).
Frame control style and frame 13. Fill in the following fields for frame properties:
size properties will be
displayed, but cannot be edited • Level on which this frame will operate
on this screen. To change either • First Destination for this frame (same as Destination Offset in
the matrix type or matrix size,
click on Back to return to the
other Leitch/Harris product manuals); determines the point at
frame size selection screen. which destination numbering will start for this frame
• First Source for this frame (same as Source Offset described in
other Leitch/Harris product manuals); determines the point at
which source numbering will start for this frame
• Frame ID (the frame's physical address); select the frame ID
from the drop-down list box
• Frame Name (default name is “Panacea [Frame ID]”); define
the new frame name as desired
14. Click on the matrix (shown in Figure 4-43 as “In 1-16 / Out 1-16”).
The Matrix 2 Properties box will appear on the Configured
Matrices dialog box.

134 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

Figure 4-44. Matrix 2 Properties Box

15. Fill in the following fields for the second matrix properties:
Note • Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is
Matrix type and matrix size outlined)
properties will be displayed, but
cannot be edited on this screen. • Level on which this matrix will operate
To change either the matrix type • First Destination for this matrix (same as Destination Offset
or matrix size, click on Back to
return to the previous screen.
described in other Leitch/Harris product manuals); determines
the point at which destination numbering will start for this matrix
• First Source for this matrix (same as Source Offset described in
other Leitch/Harris product manuals); determines the point at
which source numbering will start for this matrix
• Signal Type: select a signal type for this matrix format as desired
• Matrix Name: define a new matrix name as desired
• Matrix Color: define a new matrix color as desired
16. If the matrix needs to be partitioned, click on the Enable Matrix
Partitioning check box; then, click Next. (See “Matrix Partitioning”
[page 286] for more information on this topic.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 135

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

17. Make one of the following selections:

a. If your Panacea frame has a standard resource card installed,
click Finish. The Panacea frame will be added to the device list
at the RouterMapper main window.
b. If your Panacea frame has an enhanced resource card installed,
Note click Next. The Control Card dialog box will appear.
The SNMP... and Advanced...
buttons will appear only if your
Panacea router contains an
enhanced resource card.

Figure 4-45. Panacea Control Card Dialog Box

c. Fill in the network settings as desired.

d. If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click on the SNMP...
button. The SNMP Agent Options window will appear.
The SNMP Agent Options window is a dialog box that allows
you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 138 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options
window.
• See page 138 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or
deleting Trap Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 140 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 142 for a description of the System fields.

136 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

e. Click on the Advanced… button. The advanced Control Card

window (Figure 4-49 on page 143) will appear.
The advanced Control Card window is a tabbed dialog box that
allows you to view the configuration file names that are used to
store frame’s configuration information; and displays
information and settings for virtual XY, time server, and Map
Names options.
• See page 142 for a description of the Config Files tab.
• See page 143 for a description of the Virtual XY tab.
• See page 144 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 145 for a description of the Map Names tab.
f. Click Finish. The Panacea frame will be added to the device list
at the RouterMapper main window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 137

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

SNMP Agent Options Window

The SNMP Agent Options window is a dialog box that allows you to set
up all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three separate group boxes are
displayed on this window:
• Trap Destination IP Addresses (see page 138)
• SNMP Agent (see page 140)
• System (see page 142)

Figure 4-46. SNMP Agent Options Window

Trap Destination IP Addresses

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add,
modify, or delete SNMP Trap Destinations.

138 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:

1. To add a destination, click Add... (or, to modify an destination,
click Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box will appear.

Figure 4-47. Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box

2. Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the SNMP
Trap destination.
3. Change the network port number displayed to the one desired for
the SNMP Trap destination. The port number can be from 1 to
65535.
4. From the Community drop-down list box, select the community
name.
5. From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version that
you would like to use for the SNMP Trap.
6. Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds)
before an SNMP Trap is sent to a manager if the initial attempt
failed.
7. Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a
manager if the initial attempt failed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 139

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

To delete an SNMP Trap destination:

1. At the SNMP Agent Options Window list control, select the IP
address for the SNMP Trap Destination you want to delete.
Multiple devices may be selected using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple devices).
2. Click the Delete button. The IP address(es) will be removed from
the list.
OR
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion..
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
SNMP Agent
Table 4-6 shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed
in the SNMP Agent group box.

Table 4-6. SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Window

Items Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The
network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in
SNMP terms, a “Get” operation has
to match this setting in the MIB
browser in order to read information
from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in
SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in
a MIB browser in order to write
information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps
are sent if the read or write
community does not match between
the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address pop-up
dialog box (see Figure 4-48)

140 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

The Managers Address pop-up dialog box allows you to specify the
addresses of the managers whose requests will be processed by the
SNMP Agent.

Figure 4-48. Manager Address Dialog Box

• To add a manager address:

a. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b. Click Add.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.
• To modify a manager address:
a. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b. Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box
will appear.
c. Modify the manager address as desired.
d. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 141

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• To delete a manager address:

a. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses
may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques
(hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
addresses).
b. Click the Remove button. The IP address(es) will be removed
from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion..
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.
Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently
selected in the Navigation window. This is user-defined information
that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when
it is retrieved by a MIB browser. Table 4-7 shows the fields and
function descriptions for the items listed in the System box.

Table 4-7. System Fields of SNMP Options Window

Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is “Leitch
Agent”
Location Device physical location
Contact Device contact person
Name Device name

Advanced Control Card Window

The advanced Control Card window is a tabbed dialog box that allows
you to view the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s
configuration information; and displays information and settings for
virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options.
Config Files Tab
The Config Files tab dialog box shows you the locations of
configuration files in the frame.

142 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

Figure 4-49. Config Files Tab

Virtual XY Tab
The Virtual XY tab dialog box allows you to set virtual X-Y and Telnet
ports.

Figure 4-50. Virtual XY Tab

The Virtual XY tab allows you to make the following settings:

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 143

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• Maximum number of open Telnet connections (maximum

allowable connections is 12)
• Telnet socket port ID
• Maximum number of open virtual XY connections (maximum
allowable connections is 20)
• Virtual XY socket port ID
Time Server Tab
The Time Server Tab dialog box allows you to change the frame's time
Note server settings for the web support.
This capability is only available
for enhanced resource cards
with Panacea Web support
installed.

Figure 4-51. Time Server Tab

The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
• Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)
• Maximum wait time for server connection
• Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)

144 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

Map Names Tab

The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame's source and
destination “Names Mapping” file based on the current logical database.

Figure 4-52. Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to
transfer the Map Names file to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer
(based on RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication
setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer
Protocol. (You will be asked to log in before the file transfer is
initiated.)
• From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the
Map Names file to be generated.
• With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on
the current logical database.
• With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based
on an existing file.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 145

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

• When you select Reboot After Update, the frame will reboot after
the file has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted for the
frame to use the new transfer file.
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses.

Figure 4-53. License Tab

146 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Panacea Frames

The License tab allows you to make the following settings:

Note • From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to
You must activate the SNMP transfer the license key to the frame.
Agent firmware if you ordered it
separately from your original • With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer
product purchase. If you (based on RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication
ordered the SNMP Agent setting).
firmware at the same time as
your original product purchase, • With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer
it will be factory-installed and Protocol. (You will be asked to log in before the file transfer is
you will not need to activate it. initiated.)
Before you activate the SNMP
feature, make sure you have • In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation
obtained an appropriate license code you received from your Customer Service representative (see
activation code. You will need note).
to provide the Customer Service
representative with the serial
• When you click the Update button, the frame will reboot after the
number of your product. See the file has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the
product manual for instructions. SNMP license will be recognized.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 147

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

Adding Other Leitch/Harris Frames

1. Click the Add button at the RouterMapper main window. The Add
New Device dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select Router Frame from the drop-down list box. The Select
Router Type dialog box will be displayed.
3. Select the Frame type. A blue box will appear around the selected
4. Click the Next button. The Edit Frame dialog box will be displayed.

Figure 4-54. Edit Frame Window (Non-Integrator Frames)

5. Make selections from these drop-down list boxes:

• Number of Matrices for this frame
• Matrix properties:
• Select Matrix allows a specified matrix to be displayed on the
dialog
• Matrix Type
• Matrix Size, which is the matrix dimension of the selected
matrix
• Sources1, which is the number of sources for the selected
matrix

148 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Other Leitch/Harris Frames

• Destinations1, which is the number of destinations for the

selected matrix
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Source for this matrix (same as Source Offset in other
Leitch/Harris product manuals); determines the point where
source numbering for this matrix starts
• First Destination for this matrix (same as Destination Offset
in other Leitch/Harris product manuals); determines the point
where destination numbering for this matrix starts
• Is Matrix Partitioned2 allows this matrix to partition into
multiple components
• Number of Components for this matrix to partition into
• Components1:
• Select Component allows the specified component to be
displayed on the dialog
• Component Size displays the matrix dimensions of the
specified component
• Component Level on which this component will operate
• Source Offset3 determines the point at which source
numbering will start for the specified component
• Destination Offset2 determines the point at which destination
numbering will start for the specified component
6. Click the Finish button. The frame will be added to the device list
at the RouterMapper main window.

1 Generic
frames only
1 VIA
and XPlus only
2 VIA with SDI format and XPlus only
3 VIA and XPlus only

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 149

Chapter 4: Adding Frames

150 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 5
Adding Router Control Panels

Overview
RouterMapper supports downloading and managing programmable
panel series control panels. Programmable panel series control panels
can be added by polling the system or by manually adding the panel
using the Add feature.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Adding Control Panels by Polling” on page 152
• “Adding Control Panels Using the Add Command” on page 153
For information about adding a frame, see Chapter 4.
For information about adding an Opus master controller, see Chapter 7.
For information about adding and editing an Edge configurations, see
Chapter 6.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 151

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

Adding Control Panels by Polling

1. Click the Poll button at the RouterMapper main window.
2. RouterMapper will query the control system, and return error
messages if errors are found.
3. If no errors are encountered, RouterMapper will update the Device
List with all the control panels that were found during the poll.

Figure 5-1. Adding Control Panels by Polling

152 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Control Panels Using the Add Command

Adding Control Panels Using the Add

Command
1. Click the Add button at the RouterMapper main window. The Add
New Device dialog box will appear.
2. Select Router Control Panel from the drop-down list box. The
Note Add Panel dialog box will appear.
If you have not added a Panacea
clean switch/quiet switch router,
the 32×8 CQ-S1 and -X1 panel
selections will not appear in the
Panel Style drop-down list box,
and the Associate with Frames
drop-down list box will be
greyed out.

Figure 5-2. Add Panels Dialog Box

3. Select the Panel Style from the drop-down list box.

(For Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panels only) If
you chose a 32×8 CQ-S1 or -X1 panel as the desired panel style,
select the frame to associate with this panel from the Associate with
Frame drop-down list box.
4. Select the Panel ID (the panel’s physical address) from the
drop-down list box.

1 In RouterMapper, the “32×8 CQ-S” corresponds to an R(L)CP-32×8CQp control panel

with standard clean switch/quiet switch configuration. The “32×8 CQ-X” corresponds
to an control panel R(L)CP-32×8CQp with program/preview clean switch/quiet switch
configuration. For more information about the 32×8CQp control panel, see the P-SCQ,
P-HSCQ Clean Switch/Quiet Switch Configuration, Installation, and Operation
Manual.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 153

Chapter 5: Adding Router Control Panels

5. Type the panel name into the Panel Name box.

6. If you want to add more than one panel with options identical to
Note those you just selected:
If one panel with these options a. Click on the up/down arrows to the right of the Number of Panels
is sufficient, you do not need to
to Add list box.
change the default number.
b. Select the number of additional panels you want.
7. Click OK. The control panel will be added to the device list at the
RouterMapper main window.

Figure 5-3. Added Control Panels Appearing in RouterMapper

Main Window

154 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 6
Adding and Editing Edge
Configurations

Overview
The Edge protocol gateway provides external physical connectivity to
any Leitch/Harris routing system, regardless of the type(s) of
Leitch/Harris routing switcher involved. Use of standard TCP/IP
communications allows the unit to provide connectivity over most
standard LAN, MAN, WAN, or Internet connections.
The Edge translates between Leitch/Harris protocol and the protocols
used by other manufacturers or equipment. It can be used to integrate
otherwise incompatible devices in a system, and it may be used to
expand a system beyond the normal limitations imposed by hardware or
system design. Both Edge serial port and Ethernet connection protocol
assignments are configurable in RouterMapper:
The following topics appear in this chapter:
• “Adding Edge Configurations” on page 156
• “Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values” on page 179
• “Changing Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option Values” on
page 178
• “Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values” on page 161
• “Setting Network Information for Edge” on page 181
• “Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option Values” on
page 158
• “Upgrading and Backing Up Firmware” on page 185

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 155

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Adding Edge Configurations

A Edge protocol gateway can be added to the database by polling the
control network for installed devices. You can also manually create
entries for a Edge.

Adding an Edge by Polling

1. Click the Poll button at the RouterMapper main window.
RouterMapper will query the control system, and return error
messages if errors are found.
2. If no errors are found, RouterMapper will update the Device List
with all devices that were found during the Poll.

Figure 6-1. Adding an Edge by Polling

156 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

Adding an Edge Using the Add Command

1. Click the Add button at the RouterMapper main window (or
right-click, and then choose Add Devices). The Add New Device
dialog box will appear.
2. Select Edge from the drop-down list box. The Add Edge dialog box
will appear.

Figure 6-2. Add Edge Dialog Box

The Add Edge window is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to set
protocol assignments and option values for the newly-added Edge. All
of the tabs (Serial Protocols, Ethernet Protocols, Detected Cards, and
Control Card) can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab.
Information on using those tabs can be found in pages 158 through 181.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 157

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option

Values
RouterMapper allows you to set the protocol settings for either (or both)
of an Edge serial ports. You can switch from X-Y protocol to the
“foreign” protocol resident on your Edge. In addition, you can change
some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1. At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Serial Protocols tab.

Figure 6-3. Edge Serial Protocols Tab

2. Highlight the target Edge selection; then, click the Edit button (or
double-click the item selection). The Options window will appear
(see Figure 6-4). The assigned values for the default protocol’s
baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and serial interface for the
selected serial port will be displayed.

158 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

Figure 6-4. Serial Protocol Options Window

3. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol you want to
Note switch to. Supported serial protocols include
The Edge provides bidirectional • Leitch terminal X-Y
translation of the following
router control protocols: • GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client1
• Jupiter ESswitch server and client3
Leitch/Harris pass-thru protocol
GVG SMS-7000 protocol • Jupiter ASCII server and client3
Jupiter ASCII protocol • NVision server and NVision client2
Jupiter ESswitch protocol
• NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client1
NVision protocol
NVision 9000 protocol • Utah server and Utah client3
Utah Scientific RCP-1 protocol

1 GVG SMS-7000, Jupiter ASCII, and Jupiter ESswitch protocols are product
of Thomson Grass Valley, headquartered in Paris, France.
2 NVision protocols are products of NVision Inc., headquartered in Grass
Valley, California.
3 RCP-1 protocol is a product of Utah Scientific, headquartered in Salt Lake
City, Utah.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 159

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

4. The assigned values for the selected protocol will appear. You can
Note change some of the option’s values at this window. To change a
While all relevant protocol value:
option values are displayed,
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A
some values may not be
configurable. These values are drop-down menu will appear (see Figure 6-5).
displayed for informational
purposes only; you cannot
change them through
RouterMapper.

Figure 6-5. Changing a Protocol Option’s Value

b. Select the new value.

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new
selection will appear in the Value column.
d. Click OK. You will return to the Edge serial ports window.
5. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper
main menu window.

160 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values

RouterMapper allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or
both) of an Edge client and server Ethernet connection. You cannot
switch between protocols, but you can change some option values.
1. At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Ethernet Protocols tab. The
assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the
selected Ethernet port will be displayed.

Figure 6-6. Edge Ethernet Protocols Tab

Supported protocols include

• GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client
• NVision server and NVision client
• NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client
• Leitch virtual X-Y server and Leitch virtual X-Y client
• Leitch Telnet XY server
2. Highlight the target Edge selection; then, click the Edit button. The
Options window will appear (see Figure 6-7 on page 162). The
assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the
selected Ethernet port will be displayed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 161

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-7. Ethernet Protocols Options Window

You can change some of the option’s values at this window. To

Note change a value:
While all relevant protocol a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A
option values are displayed,
drop-down menu will appear (see Figure 6-6 on page 161).
some values may not be
configurable. These values are b. Select the new value.
displayed for informational
purposes only; you cannot
c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new
change them through selection will appear in the Value column.
RouterMapper. d. Click OK. You will return to the Edge Ethernet Protocols tab.
3. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper
main menu window.

162 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

Figure 6-8. Changing a Protocol Option’s Value

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 163

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Viewing the Detected Cards Tab

Figure 6-9. Edge Detected Cards Tab

The Detected Cards tab displays back panel information for the Edge.
(This information is read-only.) The tab will show the card type, back
panel type, and version.

164 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

Setting Network Information for Edge

Figure 6-10. Edge Control Cards Tab

The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card
installed in the Edge frame. The information is updated on every Poll of
the control system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the
left, and the control card's network and configuration files setup on the
right.
System Information
• The Name field will display the Edge device name.
• The ID list box will display the Edge device ID.
• The Firmware Version and FPGA Version fields will display the
versions of the software installed on the active control card.
• The DIP switch fields will show the current positions of the control
card's DIP switches. A “0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or
OFF) position. A “1” indicates that a switch is in the (or ON)
position.
• DIP Switch, Top displays information about the top switch of the
three DIP switches on the front of the control.
• DIP Switch, Middle displays information about the middle
switch of the three DIP switches on the front of the control.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 165

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• DIP Switch, Bottom displays information about the bottom

switch of the three DIP switches on the front of the control.

Network Information
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections:
Active and Programmed settings.

Figure 6-11. Active Settings

• Active settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the Edge. When you select
the Active radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are
read-only.
• If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click on the SNMP... button.
The SNMP Agent Options window will appear.
The SNMP Agent Options window is a dialog box that allows you
to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 169 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options
window.
• See page 169 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting
Trap Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 171 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 173 for a description of the System fields.

166 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

• If you want to set up advanced control options, click on the

Advanced… button. The Advance Settings window (Figure 6-16
on page 174) will appear.
The Advance Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows
you to view the configuration file names that are used to store
frame’s configuration information; and displays information and
settings for virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options.
• See page 174 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 175 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 176 for a description of the Config Files tab.

Figure 6-12. Programmed Settings

• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address
settings that you want used with the Edge. When you select the
Programmed radio button, you can edit these settings.
• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the Edge.
• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the Edge is
attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork
to which the Edge belongs.
• If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click on the SNMP... button.
The SNMP Agent Options window will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 167

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

The SNMP Agent Options window is a tabbed dialog box that

allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 169 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options
window.
• See page 169 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or
deleting Trap Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 171 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 173 for a description of the System fields.
• If you want to set up advanced control options, click on the
Advanced… button. The Advance Settings window (Figure 6-16
on page 174) will appear.
The Advance Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows
you to view the configuration file names that are used to store
frame’s configuration information; and displays information and
settings for virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options.
• See page 174 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 175 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 176 for a description of the Config Files tab.

168 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

SNMP Agent Options Window

The SNMP Agent Options window is a dialog box that allows you to set
up all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three separate group boxes are
displayed on this window:
• Trap Destination IP Addresses (see page 169)
• SNMP Agent (see page 171)
• System (see page 173)

Figure 6-13. SNMP Agent Options Window

Trap Destination IP Addresses

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add,
modify, or delete SNMP Trap Destinations.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 169

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:

1. To add a destination, click Add... (or, to modify an destination,
click Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box will appear.

Figure 6-14. Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box

2. Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the SNMP
Trap destination.
3. Change the network port number displayed to the one desired for
the SNMP Trap destination. The port number can be from 1 to
65535.
4. From the Community drop-down list box, select the community
name.
5. From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version that
you would like to use for the SNMP Trap.
6. Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds)
before an SNMP Trap is sent to a manager if the initial attempt
failed.
7. Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a
manager if the initial attempt failed.

170 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

To delete an SNMP Trap destination:

1. At the SNMP Agent Options Window list control, select the IP
address for the SNMP Trap Destination you want to delete.
Multiple devices may be selected using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple devices).
2. Click the Delete button. The IP address(es) will be removed from
the list.
OR
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion.
3. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
SNMP Agent
Table 6-1 shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed
in the SNMP Agent group box.

Table 6-1. SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Window

Items Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The
network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in
SNMP terms, a “Get” operation has
to match this setting in the MIB
browser in order to read information
from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in
SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in
a MIB browser in order to write
information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps
are sent if the read or write
community does not match between
the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address pop-up
dialog box (see Figure 6-15)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 171

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

The Managers Address pop-up dialog box allows you to specify the
addresses of the managers whose requests will be processed by the
SNMP Agent.

Figure 6-15. Manager Address Dialog Box

• To add a manager address:

a. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b. Click Add.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.
• To modify a manager address:
a. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b. Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box
will appear.
c. Modify the manager address as desired.
d. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.

172 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

• To delete a manager address:

a. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses
may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques
(hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
addresses).
b. Click the Remove button. The IP address(es) will be removed
from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.
Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently
selected in the Navigation window. This is user-defined information
that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when
it is retrieved by a MIB browser. Table 6-2 shows the fields and
function descriptions for the items listed in the System box.

Table 6-2. System Fields of SNMP Options Window

Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is “Leitch Agent”
Location Device physical location
Contact Device contact person
Name Device name

Advance Settings Window

The Advance Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to
view the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s
configuration information; and displays information and settings for
time server and Map Names options.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 173

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Time Server Tab

The Time Server Tab dialog box allows you to change the frame's time
Note server settings for the web support.
This capability is only available
for enhanced resource cards
with Panacea Web support
installed.

Figure 6-16. Time Server Tab

The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
• Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)
• Maximum wait time for server connection
• Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)

174 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

Map Names Tab

The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame's source
and destination “Names Mapping” file based on the current logical
database.

Figure 6-17. Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to
transfer the Map Names file to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer
(based on RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication
setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer
Protocol. (You will be asked to log in before the file transfer is
initiated.)
• From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the
Map Names file to be generated.
• With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on
the current logical database.
• With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based
on an existing file.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 175

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• When you select Reboot After Update, the frame will reboot after
the file has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted for the
frame to use the new transfer file.
Config Files Tab
The Config Files tab dialog box shows you the locations of
configuration files in the frame.

Figure 6-18. Config Files Tab

176 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding Edge Configurations

License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses.

Figure 6-19. License Tab

The License tab allows you to make the following settings:

Note • From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to
You must activate the SNMP transfer the license key to the frame.
Agent firmware if you ordered it
separately from your original • With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer
product purchase. If you (based on RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication
ordered the SNMP Agent setting).
firmware at the same time as
your original product purchase, • With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer
it will be factory-installed and Protocol. (You will be asked to log in before the file transfer is
you will not need to activate it. initiated.)
Before you activate the SNMP
feature, make sure you have • In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation
obtained an appropriate license code you received from your Customer Service representative (see
activation code. You will need note).
to provide the Customer Service
representative with the serial
• When you click the Update button, the frame will reboot after the
number of your product. See the file has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the
product manual for instructions. SNMP license will be recognized.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 177

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

Editing Edge Configurations

Changing Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Option
Values
RouterMapper allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or
both) of an Edge serial ports. You can switch from X-Y protocol to the
“foreign” protocol resident on your Edge. In addition, you can change
some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1. Double click the target Edge selection on the main menu window
(or highlight the target Edge selection; then, click the Edit button).
2. The Edit Edge window will appear. If necessary, select the Serial
Protocols tab.

Figure 6-20. Edge Serial Protocols Tab

3. Highlight the target Edge selection; then, click the Edit button. The
Options window will appear (see Figure 6-4 on page 159). The
assigned values for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits,
stop bits, and serial interface for the selected serial port will be
displayed.
4. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol you want to
switch to. Supported serial protocols include
• Leitch terminal X-Y

178 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Edge Configurations

• GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client

• Jupiter ESswitch server and client
• Jupter ASCII server and client
• NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client
• NVision server and NVision client
• Utah server and Utah client
5. The assigned values for the selected protocol will appear. You can
Note change some of the option’s values at this window. To change a
While all relevant protocol value:
option values are displayed,
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A
some values may not be
configurable. These values are drop-down menu will appear (see Figure 6-8 on page 163).
displayed for informational b. Select the new value.
purposes only; you cannot
change them through c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new
RouterMapper. selection will appear in the Value column.
d. Click OK. You will return to the Edge serial ports window.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper
main menu window.

Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values

RouterMapper allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or
both) of an Edge client and server Ethernet connection. You cannot
switch between protocols, but you can change some of the option
values.
1. Double click the target Edge selection on the main menu window
(or highlight the target Edge selection; then, click the Edit button).
2. The Edit Edge window will appear. If necessary, select the Ethernet
Protocols tab. The assigned values for the default server and client
protocols for the selected Ethernet port will be displayed. (See
Figure 6-4 on page 159.)
Supported protocols include
• NVision server and NVision client
• NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client
• GVG SMS-7000 server and GVG SMS-7000 client
• Leitch virtual X-Y server and Leitch virtual X-Y client
• Leitch Telnet XY server

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 179

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

3. Highlight the target Edge selection; then, click the Edit button. The
Options window will appear (see Figure 6-7 on page 162). The
assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the
selected Ethernet port will be displayed.
You can change some of the option’s values at this window. To
Note change a value:
While all relevant protocol a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A
option values are displayed,
drop-down menu will appear (see Figure 6-8 on page 163).
some values may not be
configurable. These values are b. Select the new value.
displayed for informational
purposes only; you cannot
c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new
change them through selection will appear in the Value column.
RouterMapper. d. Click OK. You will return to the Edge Ethernet controllers
window.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper
main menu window.

180 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Edge Configurations

Viewing the Detected Cards Tab

The Detected Cards tab displays back panel information for the Edge.
(This information is read-only.) The tab will show the card type, back
panel type, and version.

Figure 6-21. Edge Detected Cards Tab

Setting Network Information for Edge

Figure 6-22. Edge Control Cards Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 181

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card
installed in the Edge frame. This information is read-only (except for
the network programmed section) and is presented as an aid in
troubleshooting a system. The information is updated on every Poll of
the control system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the
left, and the control card's network and configuration files setup on the
right.
System Information
• The Name field will display the Edge device name.
• The ID list box will display the Edge device ID.
• The Firmware Version and FPGA Version fields will display the
versions of the software installed on the active control card.
• The DIP switch fields will show the current positions of the
control card's DIP switches. A “0” indicates that a switch is in the
down (or OFF) position. A “1” indicates that a switch is in the (or
ON) position.
• DIP Switch, Top displays information about the top switch
of the three DIP switches on the front of the control.
• DIP Switch, Middle displays information about the middle
switch of the three DIP switches on the front of the control.
• DIP Switch, Bottom displays information about the bottom
switch of the three DIP switches on the front of the control.
Network Information
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections:
Active and Programmed settings.

182 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Edge Configurations

Figure 6-23. Active Settings

• Active settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the Edge. When you select
the Active radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are
read-only.
• If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click on the SNMP... button.
The SNMP Agent Options window will appear.
The SNMP Agent Options window is a dialog box that allows you
to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 169 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options
window.
• See page 169 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting
Trap Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 171 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 173 for a description of the System fields.
• If you want to set up advanced control options, click on the
Advanced… button. The Advance Settings window (Figure 6-16
on page 174) will appear.
The Advance Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows
you to view the configuration file names that are used to store
frame’s configuration information; and displays information and
settings for virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 183

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

• See page 174 for a description of the Time Servers tab.

• See page 175 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 176 for a description of the Config Files tab.

Figure 6-24. Programmed Settings

• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address
settings that you want used with the Edge. When you select the
Programmed radio button, you can edit these settings.
• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the Edge.
• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the Edge is
attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork
to which the Edge belongs.
• If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click on the SNMP... button.
The SNMP Agent Options window will appear.
The SNMP Agent Options window is a tabbed dialog box that
allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 169 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options
window.
• See page 169 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or
deleting Trap Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 171 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.

184 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Edge Configurations

• See page 173 for a description of the System fields.

• If you want to set up advanced control options, click on the
Advanced… button. The Advance Settings window (Figure 6-16
on page 174) will appear.
The Advance Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows
you to view the configuration file names that are used to store
frame’s configuration information; and displays information and
settings for virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options.
• See page 174 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 175 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 176 for a description of the Config Files tab.
• See page 177 for a description of the License tab.

Upgrading and Backing Up Firmware

Instructions on guarding and backing up Edge firmware are provided in
“Upgrading and Backing Up Panacea and Edge Firmware” on page 73.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 185

Chapter 6: Adding and Editing Edge Configurations

186 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 7
Adding and Selecting Opus Master
Controller Frames and Panels

Overview
RouterMapper supports downloading and managing Opus master
controller frames and panels.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Adding a Master Control Frame to the Device List” on page 188
• “Adding a Master Control Panel to the Device List” on page 190
• “Selecting a Master Control Frame” on page 191
• “Selecting a Master Control Panel” on page 192

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 187

Chapter 7: Adding and Selecting Opus Master Controller Frames and Panels

Adding a Master Control Frame to the Device

List
1. In the RouterMapper main window, click the Add button to add a
frame to the existing list of devices.
2. The Add a New Device in the Database dialog box will appear.
3. From the Device Type pull down menu, choose the Master Control
option.
4. Click OK. The Add Master Control Device dialog box will appear.

Figure 7-1. Add Master Control Device Dialog Box

5. Select the Opus Frame option. The RouterMapper main window

will appear with the added frame displayed.
The added Opus Frame System has two branch devices: Opus
Frame and Opus Rtr Map.
• Opus Frame allows the user to configure the target Opus frame
and download it through an Ethernet connection (see “Editing an
Opus Frame” in your RouterMapper-Opus Master Control
Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide).
• The Opus Rtr Map allows the user to configure external router
control and download through a serial port connection (see
“Controlling an External Router” in your RouterMapper-Opus
Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide).

188 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding a Master Control Frame to the Device List

Figure 7-2. Adding an Opus Master Control Frame

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 189

Chapter 7: Adding and Selecting Opus Master Controller Frames and Panels

Adding a Master Control Panel to the Device

List
1. In the RouterMapper main window, click the Add button to add a
panel to the existing list of devices.
2. The Add a New Device in the Database dialog box will appear.
3. From the Device Type pull down menu, choose the Master Control
Panel option.
4. Click OK. The Add Master Control Device dialog box will appear
(see Figure 7-1 on page 188).
5. Select the Opus Panel option. The RouterMapper main window will
appear with the added master control panel displayed.

Figure 7-3. Adding an Opus Master Control Panel

190 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Selecting a Master Control Frame

Selecting a Master Control Frame

1. Double click the target Opus master control frame (or select the
target Opus master control frame; then, click the Edit button). The
Master Control Frame window will appear.
2. Double click the target Opus Rtr Map (or select the target Opus Rtr
Map; then, click the Edit button).
3. The Edit Opus Router Control Assignment window will appear.

Figure 7-4. Edit Opus Router Control Assignment

4. Once the Edit Opus Router Control Assignment window is

displayed, you can edit or set up the frame as required.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 191

Chapter 7: Adding and Selecting Opus Master Controller Frames and Panels

Selecting a Master Control Panel

1. Double click the target Opus master control panel (or select the
target Opus master control panel; then, click the Edit button).
2. The Master Control Panel window will appear.

Figure 7-5. Opus Master Control Panel Dialog Box

• To change network configuration of an Opus frame, see

“Network Tab” in your RouterMapper-Opus Master Control
Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
• To change network configuration of an Opus control panel, see
“Setting up Network Information” in your RouterMapper-Opus
Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
• To make a configuration of multiple frames and panels, see
“Editing the Master Assignment Window” in your
RouterMapper-Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility
Reference Guide.

192 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 8
Editing a Logical Database

Overview
The logical database can be described as the overall “picture” of the
entire routing system. A database includes one or more levels, as well
as a number of logical sources and logical destinations. Editing the
database might include the following elements:
• Modifying the Edit Logical Database window’s grid appearance
• Assigning unique names, colors or icons to the levels, logical
sources and/or the logical destinations
• Remapping level inputs
• Adding or deleting logical sources
• Enabling or disabling statusing
• Editing status names
• Reassigning physical inputs (applies only to partitioned Integrator
frames)
• Assigning new or additional icons for use in the database and for
display in RouterWorks
Information on defining each property is included in the sections that
follow.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 193

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Defining the Levels

A router database can include up to 16 independent router levels. Levels
are numbered from 0 to 15. These level numbers correspond to the level
number(s) that each physical router frame will occupy in the routing
system. On Integrator, Panacea, and Platinum frames, the level number
may be specified via the RouterMapper software. For more information
on configuring the level(s) for another Leitch/Harris router type, see the
manual that was supplied with the frame.
The number of levels in a database and the physical size of each are
determined by the properties selected when router frames were added.
Levels cannot be added directly to a database.
A unique name and color can be assigned to each level in the database.
(The level color is used to differentiate the level selection buttons and
status displays on RouterWorks control panels.) To define the levels
for a database, click the Define Levels button at the RouterMapper
main window. The Edit Level window will appear (see Figure 8-1 on
page 195).
At the Edit Levels window, you can enable or disable any level (Levels
0-15) allowed in the system, regardless of if there is a router on that
level.
• The values for the Logical System Size set the maximum values
allowed in the Inputs and Outputs fields for each level.
• The Actual Inputs/Outputs are the number of actual hardware
inputs/outputs you have configured for this level in this database.
• The values that are grayed out are not editable. All other values
(Level, Color, Inputs, and Outputs) are editable.

194 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Levels

Figure 8-1. Edit Levels Window

Naming a Level
To assign a unique name to a level, type the desired name in the Level
Name edit box. You may enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 195

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Changing a Level’s Color

RouterMapper includes a standard RGB color palette from which a
unique color can be selected to represent each level. The level will be
represented by the selected color on all control panels based on this
database. You can select one of 48 preset colors, or you can use the
custom color palette to create custom colors.
To select a preset color, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Define Levels button.
The Edit Levels window will appear.
2. Click the color box for the appropriate level. The RouterMapper
preset color palette will appear.
3. Click the desired color.
4. Click OK. The selected color will now appear in all buttons and
LEDs associated with this level.

Figure 8-2. RouterMapper Preset Color Palette

To create a custom color, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Define Levels button.
The Edit Levels window will appear.

196 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Levels

2. Click the color box for the appropriate level. The RouterMapper
preset color palette will appear.
3. Click the More Colors... button. The palette will expand to include
the custom palette.
4. Enter the RGB (red / green / blue) values for the desired color in the
appropriate boxes.
OR
Click the mixing palette until the desired color appears in the
sample color box.
5. Click the Add to Custom Colors button to save the custom color.
The color will now be added to the preset color palette.

Figure 8-3. RouterMapper Custom Color Palette

Specifying the Logical Router Size

The logical router size is defined as the number of inputs and outputs
seen by the system and the operator. To specify the logical size of the
router, click the Up or Down arrows in the Logical Router Size spin
boxes OR type the appropriate number in each box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 197

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Defining the Sources

The Edit Logical Database window is a tabbed dialog that includes all
functions necessary for configuring the logical database. When this
window is accessed (click the Sources button at the RouterMapper
main window), the Logical Sources tab will be automatically selected
when the window appears. Any of the other tabs (Status Names,
Logical Destinations, Categories, Indexes, Dynamic Routing Fabric, or
Icons Management) can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab.
Information on using those tabs can be found on pages 215 through 268.
Only the Logical Sources dialog box will be discussed in this section.

Figure 8-4. Edit Logical Database Window

Throughout this section, the terms level input and physical input will be
used. If the database does not include Integrator frames that have been
partitioned, then the terms level input and physical input mean the same
thing. If, on the other hand, the database contains a partitioned
Integrator frame, then configuration of the database is a bit more
complex. The sample case (databases including only non-Integrator or
non-partitioned Integrator frames) will be explained first in pages 199

198 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

through 215. Pages 248 through 250 provide additional information

necessary for configuring partitioned Integrator frames.

Overview of the Edit Logical Sources Dialog

The Logical Sources dialog displays the definition information for each
logical source in spreadsheet-type format.
• Each row of the spreadsheet is one complete logical source (e.g.,
Source 1, Source 2, etc.).
• Each column represents one distinct property (i.e., Name, Icon,
and Physical Assignment) on each level.
• The colored cells located just to the right of the word “Icon” will
vary, depending on how the levels were defined for the database.

Modifying the Edit Logical Sources Dialog Grid

Appearance
RouterMapper will allow you to modify the grid appearance of the
Logical Sources tab. You may
• Hide a level
• Set all levels to the same width
• Set all components to the same width
• Set all components within a chosen level to the same width
• Save a modified grid appearance for future use
• Restore the grid to the last-saved grid appearance.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 199

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Hiding a Level
This operation will allow you to “hide” (not delete) a level so that you
can no longer see it while you are working.
To hide a level, follow these steps:
1. Click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main window. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear. Make sure that you
have selected the Logical Sources tab.
2. Right-click the level name (at the top of the window) of the level
you wish to hide. A pop-up menu will appear (see Figure 8-5).

Figure 8-5. Hiding a Level Dialog Box

3. Highlight Hide [Level Name]; then, click <Enter> (or click the
left mouse button). The chosen level column will be hidden from
view.

200 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Unhiding a Level
This operation will allow you to “unhide”a previously hidden Level so
that you can see it while you are working.
1. Move the cursor to the line between the hidden level column and
the level column immediately to its right. A horizontal,
double-headed arrow will appear.
2. You may “unhide” the hidden level column in one of two ways:
• Press and hold the left mouse button; then, drag your mouse to
the right until the hidden level is at the width you desire.
• Right-click any visible level. A pop-up menu will appear. Choose
Show All Levels; then, click <Enter> (or click the left mouse
button) (see Figure 8-6).

Figure 8-6. Unhiding Levels

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 201

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Set All Levels to the Same Width

This operation will set all Levels to the same width as a Level you
select.
1. Right-click the level name of the Level with the width you want to
duplicate. A pop-up menu will appear.
2. Highlight Set All Levels to [Level Name]’s Width; then, click
<Enter> (or click the left mouse button) (see Figure 8-7). All Level
columns will be reset to the same width as the Level you chose.

Figure 8-7. Set All Levels to [Level Name] Width Dialog Box

202 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Set All Components to the Same Width

This operation will set all of the components in all Levels to the same
width as a component you choose.
1. Right-click the name of the component with the width you want to
duplicate. A pop-up menu will appear.
2. Highlight Set All Components to [Level Name’s] Width; then,
click <Enter> (or click the left mouse button) (see Figure 8-8 on
page 203). All component columns will be reset to the same width
as the component you chose.

Figure 8-8. Set All Components to the Same Width Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 203

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Set All Components in the Same Level to the Same Width

This operation will set the components within a chosen Level to equal
widths.
1. Right-click the name of the component with the width you want to
duplicate. A pop-up menu will appear.
2. Highlight Set All Components in [Level Name] to [Level
Component’s] Width; then, click <Enter> (or click the left mouse
button) (see Figure 8-9 on page 204). All component columns
within that level will be reset to the same width as the Level
component you chose.

Figure 8-9. Set All Components in a Level to the Same Width

Dialog Box

204 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Save a Modified Grid Appearance

This operation will save the changes that you just made to the grid
appearance of the Logical Sources tab.
1. Right-click any level or component name. A pop-up menu will
appear (see Figure 8-10 on page 205).
2. Highlight Save Default Grid View; then, click <Enter> (or click
the left mouse button). RouterMapper will save all of your level and
component changes.

Figure 8-10. Save Default Grid View Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 205

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Restore the Last-Saved Grid Appearance

This operation will restore the last-saved (default) grid appearance of
Note the Logical Sources tab.
This operation will only restore 1. Right-click any level or component name. A pop-up menu will
your grid back to the last
appear (see Figure 8-11 on page 206).
appearance you saved. It does
not have a “history” function. 2. Highlight Restore Default Grid View; then, click <Enter> (or
click the left mouse button). RouterMapper will restore your
last-saved level and component changes.

Figure 8-11. Restore Last Saved Grid View Dialog Box

206 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Assigning a Source Name

When the database is first created, each logical source will be assigned
Note a generic name such as “Input 1,” “Input 2,” etc. Each logical source
When assigning or editing can be renamed to uniquely identify the source to a user. This is the
Source names, keep in mind that name that will appear on RouterWorks and ABA control panels, and on
certain characters are “illegal.” printed key caps for push button control panels.
These characters are the ~,\, and
all non-printable ASCII A Source Name can contain any 8 characters. To assign the Source
characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> Name, highlight the text in the Name box and over-type it with the new
characters). These characters name.
may corrupt the database, so
they cannot be stored in the If the router is to include ABA panels, be sure to consider how the
database. choice of a Source Name will impact category indexing. (Category
indexing is the primary method of selecting sources and destinations on
an ABA panel.) RouterMapper automatically generates categories and
indexes when the Source Names are assigned, and so, it is important to
understand the category indexing process before a Source Name is
selected. For a detailed explanation of category indexing, see page 250.

Using Source Names to Automatically

Create Categories and Indexes
When a Source or Destination name is entered in the database,
Note RouterMapper uses the name to automatically create a category.
For a detailed discussion of RouterMapper finds the last space in the Source or Destination name,
category indexing on ABA and then uses all characters to the left of that space as the category (the
panels, see page 250. space will be included in the category name). All characters to the right
of the space will become the index. For example, if a logical source is
named “VTR 1,” RouterMapper will create a category named “VTR.”
Similarly, if a logical source is named “Paint 1,” a category named
“Paint” will be created.
If the Source or Destination name does NOT include a space, the entire
name will be used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR1”
is typed without a space, the category “VTR1” will be created. This
may limit the number of sources that can be accessed from the panel.
Use spaces appropriately when naming sources or destinations.
If any character after the space is not a valid index character (valid
characters are any combination of numbers, 0-9), the entire name will
be used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR 10Z” is
typed, a category named “VTR 10Z” will be created (not a category
“VTR” and an index “10Z”).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 207

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Overriding the Automatic Category Name Assignment

Any part of a Source Name can be used as the category name. To use
characters other than those preceding the space (as described
previously), highlight the characters that are to be used as the category
name, and then right-click with the mouse. From the pop-up dialog,
select Make Into Category.

Using Type Assist and Error Correct

To simplify the process of assigning Source Names, RouterMapper
includes some Type Assist features. For instance, if “VTR 1” was
entered in row one, and a “V” is typed in row two, RouterMapper will
automatically fill-in “VTR 2” in the box. You can accept the suggested
name by pressing <Enter>, or continue typing a name in the box.
If RouterMapper encounters a possible error in a Source Name, it will
notify you and suggest a change. For example, if “VTR 1” was entered
in one row, and you type “Vtr 2” in another row, an Error Correct dialog
box will appear (see Figure 8-12). Remember that a category name
must match exactly. “VTR” is not the same as “Vtr.” Two different
ABA buttons would be required for these categories.

Figure 8-12. Error Correct Dialog Box

208 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Assigning an Icon
A unique icon can be assigned to each logical source. The icon will
appear on RouterWorks control panels.

Figure 8-13. Assigning an Icon

To assign an icon, follow these steps:

Note 1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
Icons are not used on ABA or Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If necessary, click the
push button hardware panels.
Logical Sources tab.)
2. Click the Icon box on the RouterMapper Sources tab. A drop-down
list box arrow will appear.
3. Click the arrow. The drop-down list containing icons for a number
of common audio/video devices will appear.
4. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of icons.
5. Click the desired icon.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 209

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Assigning the Level Inputs and Physical Inputs

The Sources tab of the Edit Logical Database window includes one
Level Input column for each level, as shown below. A logical source
can be disabled on one level and enabled on others. For example, if
your source is named “CAMERA,” you will probably want to disable
all audio levels for that source. Likewise, an audio deck source will
only require that audio levels be enabled. A dotted line in the Level
Input box indicates that the source is disabled on that level.
If the database includes partitioned Integrator frames, the Level Input
column may display BOTH the Level Input number and the Physical
Input number(s). In such cases, the level input number will be the top
number. The bottom numbers identify the physical input for each
component in the partitioned matrix (see page 248 for more information
on databases that include partitioned matrices).
To assign a Level Input, follow these steps:
Note 1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
To disable a Level Input on a Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If necessary, click the
level, select the dotted line from
Logical Sources tab.)
the drop-down list box.
2. Click the Level Input number. A drop-down list box arrow will
appear.
3. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the
desired Physical Source
OR
Type the desired Level Input number in the box.

Linking Level Inputs

When a Level Input is assigned on a level, RouterMapper will
automatically assign that same Level Input on all higher levels in that
row.
To disable this feature, follow these steps:
Note 1. Right-click the spreadsheet.
See page 219 for more
information about the Edit 2. Select Edit Preferences.
Preferences function. 3. Disable the Link Level Inputs check box.

210 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Mapping of Logical Sources to Level Inputs

A logical source need not include connections on all levels in the
system. It is possible to define video-only or audio-only logical sources.
Unused level inputs can then be used to create separate logical sources.
In the example below, the system includes several cameras (video-only
inputs). The unused audio inputs will be used to create separate logical
sources for audio-only devices. Because the audio-only devices are
defined as separate logical sources, they are independent of the cameras
and can be selected without having to perform a breakaway operation.

Figure 8-14. Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Sources

If a logical source involves multiple levels, the input numbers used by

the device need not be the same on all levels. For example, a VTR may
connect to input 5 on the video level, input 13 on the audio level and
input 3 on the time code level. Once the logical source has been

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 211

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

defined, the fact that different inputs are used on different levels is
completely hidden from the user. All appropriate inputs are selected
when the logical source is selected. This feature allows the various
levels to be of different sizes and allows them to be wired
independently of each other.

Figure 8-15. “Wild-Mapping” of Sources

Sharing Level Inputs

A level input may be assigned to more than one Logical Source on a
level. A common application of this feature is a system configuration in
which a user wishes to associate the same audio signal to multiple
video-only sources. For example, when broadcasting an auto race, you
might wish to associate the announcer’s audio with all cameras.
Whenever any camera source is connected to a video and audio
destination, the announcer’s audio will also be selected on the audio
level. By allowing multiple camera logical inputs to share the same
audio signal, level inputs are saved.

212 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Figure 8-16. Shared Level Inputs

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 213

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Statusing Shared Level Inputs

While it is important to show the current status of some levels, it may
not be necessary to show the status of all levels on the control panel. For
example, in the configuration discussed above, it is important to status
the video level in order to indicate which camera is selected, but it is not
necessary to status the audio level since it will always be the
announcer’s audio. To eliminate clutter on the display, statusing should
only be enabled on sources that require it. The default condition is
Statusing Enabled.
To disable statusing on a shared input, follow these steps:
Note 1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
Currently, only RouterWorks Edit Logical Database window will appear. Right-click the Level
supports the Disable Status
Input number. A popup dialog box will appear.
feature.
2. Select Status from the popup dialog. Statusing is disabled if the
Status line is not checked. An indicator will appear in the Level
Input box to indicate that statusing is disabled on that level.

Figure 8-17. Disabling Statusing on a Shared Input

214 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Status Names
The RCP-ABA control panels include four windows that can be used to
Note display the current status of the router (i.e., which sources and
When assigning or editing destinations are connected on each level). The name assigned to the
Status names, keep in mind that source or destination is displayed in the window, and a status LED is lit
certain characters are “illegal.” to indicate that the panel is operating in statusing mode.
These characters are the ~,\, and
all non-printable ASCII
characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl>
characters). These characters
may corrupt the database, so
they cannot be stored in the
database.

Figure 8-18. RCP-ABA Statusing

If a level input is assigned to more than one Logical Source on a level,

Note how does the panel know which Source Name to display in the status
Sharing level inputs is discussed window? For example, consider a router database that includes two
in “Sharing Level Inputs” logical sources named “Test 1” and “Test 2.” When Test 1 is selected,
starting on page 212. you want BARS to be connected on the video level, and SILENCE on
the audio level. When Test 2 is selected, you want BARS to be
connected on the video level, and TONE on the audio level. The logical
source-to-level input mapping would look like Figure 8-19.

Figure 8-19. Status Name Mapping Example

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 215

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

But if both logical sources in our example share the BARS input, how
would the ABA panel know which Source Name to display on the video
level? Should it display “Test 1” or “Test 2?” To solve this problem, the
ABA panels display Status Names in the status windows instead of the
Source Names. In our example, the status windows would look like
Figure 8-20.

Figure 8-20. RCP-ABA Status Name Usage

Editing a Status Name

By default, RouterMapper creates Status Names when the logical
sources are named. “Test 1,” then, would be automatically assigned a
Status Name of “Test 1.” But, as we have seen in our example, more
complex databases might require different status names.
To edit a Status Name, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box will
appear, as shown in Figure 8-21 on page 217.
3. Click the cell that contains the Status Name.
4. Type the new name in the box. RouterMapper will break the default
link between the Logical Source Name and the Status Name.
From this point on, changes made to the Logical Source Name will not
Note affect the Status Name.
The broken link will be
indicated by a broken chain icon
in the cell.

216 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Figure 8-21. Edit Logical Database Window,

Status Name Tab

To restore a broken link, follow these steps:

5. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
6. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box will
appear, as shown in Figure 8-21.
7. Right-click in the Status Name cell.
8. Select Link Status Name to Logical Source from the pop-up
menu. Future changes to the Logical Source Name will be copied to
the Status Name.
To display Status Names, follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box will
appear, as shown in Figure 8-21.
3. Click the Status Names tab at the Edit Logical Database window.
OR

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 217

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Right-click anywhere on the Logical Sources spreadsheet.

4. Select Show Status Names from the pop-up menu.

Adding Logical Sources

Logical sources can be added in one of two ways:
1. Method 1
• At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button.
The Edit Logical Database window will appear.
• Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box will
appear, as shown in Figure 8-21 on page 217.
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet, and select Edit Router
Size from the popup dialog. Change the logical router size
attributes.
2. Method 2
• At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button.
The Edit Logical Database window will appear.
• Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box will
appear, as shown in Figure 8-21 on page 217.
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet, and select Add Logical
Sources from the popup dialog.
• Enter the desired number of new sources in the list box.
• Click OK. The sources will be added to the end of the list. (The
Insert After Current Row option is currently not available.)

Deleting Logical Sources

1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box will
appear, as shown in Figure 8-21 on page 217.
3. Right-click anywhere within the row that contains the logical
source.
4. Select Delete Logical Source from the popup dialog.
5. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.

218 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Editing Sources Preferences

1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Sources button. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Status Names tab. The Status Names dialog box will
appear, as shown in Figure 8-21 on page 217.
3. Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
4. Select Edit Preferences from the popup dialog.
5. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 8-22. Edit Logical Source Grid Preferences Dialog Box

• To disable the automatic check for spaces in a Source Name,

check Don’t Check for Spaces.
• To set RouterMapper to automatically add spaces where they
appear to belong, check Add Spaces Automatically.
• To disable the automatic check for matching Category Names
(i.e., VTR vs. Vtr), check Don’t Check Capitalization.
• To set RouterMapper to automatically correct capitalization
without prompting, check Correct Capitalization Errors
Automatically.
• To disable the Type Assist for Physical Index assignments,
uncheck Link Level Inputs (see page 210 for more information).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 219

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

• To reset all preferences to their original default values, click

Reset All Preferences.
• To configure RouterMapper to warn you when you attempt to
duplicate a physical source, check Treat Duplicate Level Inputs
as Warnings.

Defining the Destinations

The Edit Logical Database window is a tabbed dialog that includes all
functions necessary for configuring the logical database. When this
window is accessed by pressing the Destinations button at the main
RouterMapper window, the Logical Destinations tab will be
automatically selected when the window appears. Any of the other tabs
(Status Names, Logical Sources, Categories, or Indexes) can be selected
by clicking on the appropriate tab. Only the Logical Destinations dialog
box will be discussed in this section.
Throughout this section, the terms level output and physical output will
be used. If the database does not include Integrator frames that have
been partitioned, then the terms level output and physical output mean
the same thing. If, on the other hand, the database contains a partitioned
Integrator frame, configuration of the database is more complex.

Overview of Edit Logical Destinations Dialog

The Logical Destinations dialog displays the definition information for
each logical destination in spreadsheet-type format. Each row of the
spreadsheet is one complete logical destination (i.e., Dest 1, Dest 2,
etc.). Each column represents one distinct property (i.e., Name, Icon,
and Physical Assignment on each level). The colored cells located just
to the right of the word “Icon” will vary depending on how the levels
were defined for the database.

220 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Assigning a Destination Name

When the database is first created, each logical destination will be
Note assigned a generic name such as “Output 1,” “Output 2,” etc. Each
When assigning or editing logical destination can be renamed to uniquely identify the destination
Destination names, keep in to a user. This is the name that will appear on RouterWorks and ABA
mind that certain characters are control panels, and on printed key caps for push button control panels.
“illegal.” These characters are
the ~,\, and all non-printable A Destination Name can contain any 8 characters. To assign the
ASCII characters (<Alt> and Destination Name, highlight the text in the Name box and over-type it
<Ctrl> characters). These with the new name.
characters may corrupt the
database, so they cannot be If the router is to include ABA panels, be sure to consider how the
stored in the database. choice of a Destination Name will impact category indexing. (Category
indexing is the primary method of selecting sources and destinations on
an ABA panel.) RouterMapper automatically generates categories and
indexes when the Destination Names are assigned, so it is important to
understand the category indexing process before a Destination Name is
selected. For a detailed explanation of category indexing, see page 250.

Using Destination Names to Automatically Create

Categories and Indexes
When a Source or Destination name is entered in the database,
RouterMapper uses the name to automatically create a category and
index. RouterMapper finds the last space in the Source or Destination
name, and then uses all characters to the left of that space as the
category (the space will be included in the category name). All
characters to the right of the space will become the index. For example,
if a logical destination is named “VTR 1,” RouterMapper will create a
category named “VTR.” Similarly, if a logical destination is named
“SAT 1,” a category named “SAT “will be created.
If the Source or Destination name does NOT include a space, the entire
name will be used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR1”
is typed WITHOUT a space, the category “VTR1” will be created. This
may limit the number of destinations that can be accessed from the
panel. Care should be taken to use spaces appropriately when naming
sources or destinations.
If any character after the space is not a valid index character (valid
characters are any combination of numbers, 0-9), the entire name will
be used to create the category name. For example, if “VTR 10B” is
typed, a category named “VTR 10B” will be created (not a category
“VTR” and an index “10B”).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 221

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Overriding the Automatic Category Name Assignment

Any part of a Destination Name can be used as the category name. To
Note use characters other than those preceding the space (as described
For a detailed discussion of previously), follow these steps:
category indexing on the ABA
1. Highlight the characters that are to be used as the category name
panels, see page 250.
2. Right-click with the mouse.
3. From the pop-up dialog, select Make Into Category.

Using Type Assist and Error Correct

To simplify the process of assigning Destination Names, RouterMapper
includes some Type Assist features. For instance, if “VTR 1” was
entered in row one, and a “V” is typed in row two, RouterMapper will
automatically fill-in “VTR 2” in the box. You can accept the suggested
name by pressing the <Enter> key, or continue typing a name in the
box.
If RouterMapper encounters a possible error in a Destination Name, it
will notify you and suggest a change. For example, if “VTR 1” was
entered in one row, and you type “Vtr 2” in another row, a dialog box
(like that shown below) will appear. Remember that a category name
must match exactly. “VTR” is not the same as “Vtr.” Two different
ABA buttons would be required for these categories.

Figure 8-23. Error Correct Dialog Box

222 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Assigning an Icon
A unique icon can be assigned to each logical destination. This icon will
Note be displayed on RouterWorks control panels as shown in Figure 8-24.
Icons are not used on ABA or
hardware panels.

Figure 8-24. Assigning an Icon Dialog Box

To assign an icon, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Destinations button.
The Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If necessary, click
the Logical Destinations tab.)
2. Click the Icon box. A drop-down list box arrow will appear.
3. Click the arrow. The drop-down list containing icons for a number
of common audio/video devices will appear.
4. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of icons.
5. Click the desired icon.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 223

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs

To understand how level outputs, physical outputs and logical
destinations work together within a router, consider the following
scenario:
An operator wishes to connect VTR 1 to a destination. He selects
the logical source VTR 1 on the control panel. The control panel
requests a switch on level input one. The router interprets the
request as a switch on physical inputs 1, 2, and 3. When VTR 1 is
pressed on the control panel, the router performs the RGB switch
on physical inputs 1, 2, and 3.

Figure 8-25. Matrix Partitioning Example

224 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

The Destinations tab of the Edit Logical Database window includes one
Level Output column for each level, as shown below. A logical
destination can be disabled on one level and enabled on others. For
example, if your destination is named “MONITOR,” you will probably
want to disable all audio levels for that destination. A line in the Level
Output box indicates that the destination is disabled on that level.
If the database includes partitioned Integrator frames, the Level Output
column may display both the Level Output number and the Physical
Output number(s). In such cases, the level output number will be the top
number. The bottom numbers identify the physical output for each
component in the partitioned matrix (see page 248 for more information
on databases that include partitioned matrices).

Figure 8-26. Logical Destinations Tab

To assign a Level Output, follow these steps:

1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Destinations button.
The Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If necessary, click
the Logical Destinations tab.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 225

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

2. Click the Level Output number. A drop-down list box arrow will
Note appear.
To disable a Level Output on a 3. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the
level, select the dotted line from
desired Physical Destination
the drop-down list box.
OR
Type the desired Level Output number in the box.

Using Type Assist

When a Physical Destination is assigned on a level, RouterMapper will
automatically assign that same Physical Destination on all higher levels
in that row.
To disable this feature, follow these steps:
Note 1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Destinations button.
See page 229 for more The Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If necessary, click
information about the Edit
the Logical Destinations tab.)
Preferences function.
2. Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
3. Select Edit Preferences.
4. Disable the Link Level Inputs check box.

Mapping of Level Outputs

A logical destination need not include connections on all levels in the
system. It is possible to define video-only or audio-only logical
destinations. Unused outputs can then be used to create separate logical
destinations. In the example below, the system includes a pair of router
outputs that feed a Still Store (video-only). The unused audio outputs
will be used to create separate logical destinations for audio-only
devices such as audio monitoring speakers. Because the audio
monitoring speakers are defined as separate logical destinations, they
are independent of the Still Stores and can be selected without having to
perform a breakaway operation. The use of video-only and audio-only
destinations helps maximize use of router outputs.

226 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Figure 8-27. Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Destination

If a logical destination involves multiple levels, the output numbers

used by the device need not be the same on all levels. For example, a
VTR may connect to output 5 on the video level, output 13 on the audio
level and output 3 on the time code level. Once the logical destination
has been defined, the fact that different outputs are used on different
levels is completely hidden from the user. All appropriate outputs are
selected when the logical destination is selected. This feature allows the
various levels to be of different sizes and allows them to be wired
independently of each other.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 227

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-28. “Wild-Mapping” of Logical Destinations

Adding Logical Destinations

Logical destinations can be added in either of two ways:
1. Method 1
• At the RouterMapper main window, click the Destinations
button. The Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If
necessary, click the Logical Destinations tab.)
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
• Select Edit Router Size from the popup dialog.
• Change the Logical Router Size attributes.
2. Method 2
• At the RouterMapper main window, click the Destinations
button. The Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If
necessary, click the Logical Destinations tab.)
• Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.

228 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

• Select Add Logical Destinations from the popup dialog.

• Enter the desired number of new destinations in the list box.
• Click OK.
• The destinations will be added to the end of the list. (The Insert
After Current Row option is currently not available.)

Deleting Logical Destinations

1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Destinations button.
The Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If necessary, click
the Logical Destinations tab.)
2. Right-click anywhere within the row that contains the logical
destination.
3. Select Delete Logical Destination from the popup dialog. You will
be prompted to confirm the deletion.

Editing Destination Preferences

1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the Destinations button.
The Edit Logical Database window will appear. (If necessary, click
the Logical Destinations tab.)
2. Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
3. Select Edit Preferences from the menu.
4. The Edit Logical Destination Grid Preferences dialog box will
appear (see Figure 8-29 on page 230).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 229

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-29. Edit Logical Destination Grid Preferences Dialog

Box

• To disable the automatic check for spaces in a Destination Name,

check Don’t Check for Spaces.
• To set RouterMapper to automatically add spaces where they
appear to belong, check Add Spaces Automatically.
• To disable the automatic check for matching Category Names
(i.e., VTR vs. Vtr), check Don’t Check Capitalization.
• To set RouterMapper to automatically correct capitalization
without prompting, check Correct Capitalization Errors
Automatically.
• To disable the Type Assist for Physical Index assignments,
uncheck Link Level Inputs.
• To reset all preferences to their original default values, click
Reset All Preferences.

230 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

A dynamic routing thread (DRT) is a physical or logical connection
between two or more frames that allows the sources from one frame
(the upstream frame) to be available to another frame or frames (the
downstream frame[s]).

Figure 8-30. “Upstream” and “Downstream” Frames

Dynamic routing threads help you expand the size of your system, make
resources available to several users at the same time, or to restrict
remote user access to available sources.
The dynamic routing fabric management process consists of
• Adding dynamic routing threads
• Editing dynamic routing threads when necessary
• Editing remote access lists when necessary

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 231

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

• Deleting dynamic routing threads when necessary

• Optimizing dynamic routing threads and creating a dynamic
routing thread database file (RouterMapper performs this
function automatically)
• Downloading dynamic routing thread information to frames.

Adding Dynamic Routing Threads

The number of dynamic routing threads you may add is limited by the
Note number of outputs available on the downstream frames.
You cannot edit or delete • You may divide all of your upstream outputs equally between
dynamic routing threads in a
your downstream frames.
combiner system; however, you
can edit dynamic routing thread • You may send some of your upstream outputs to a single
remote accessible sources in a downstream frame.
combiner system.
• You may divide some of your upstream outputs between your
downstream frames, with one downstream frame receiving more
dynamic routing threads than the other downstream frame.
Figure 8-31 on page 233 shows examples of different ways in which
you can add dynamic routing threads.

232 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Figure 8-31. Dynamic Routing Thread Distribution Examples

To add dynamic routing threads, follow these steps:

1. Set up and partition your router frames. (These steps are described
in “Matrix Partitioning” starting on page 286.)
2. Click the Dynamic Routing Threads button at the RouterMapper
main window (or choose Edit > Dynamic routing threads from
the menu bar). The Edit Logical Database window will appear (see
Figure 8-32 on page 234).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 233

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-32. Edit Logical Database Window, Dynamic Routing

Threads Tab

3. Click the Add button. The Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog
box will appear (see Figure 8-33).

Figure 8-33. Add Dynamic Routing Threads Dialog Box

4. Make your selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows.

234 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Upstream
Frame ID: Choose the upstream frame.
Level: Choose the upstream level.
Starting Level Output: Choose the first upstream source.
Downstream
Frame ID: Choose the downstream frame.
Level: RouterMapper will automatically fill in the level for you.
Starting Level Input: Choose the first downstream destination.
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
Caution How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of
Dynamic routing threads must dynamic routing thread connections you want to add.
be on the same level. This
RouterMapper version does not 5. Click OK. The Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog box will
support dynamic routing threads close.
that span levels.
RouterMapper will create dynamic routing threads based on
information entered in the Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog
boxes. The dynamic routing threads will appear in the dynamic
routing threads list control of the Dynamic Routing Threads tab on
the Edit Logical Database window (see Figure 8-34 on page 236).
Notice that RouterMapper sequentially numbers the level outputs
Note and level inputs, based on your beginning selection and the number
All dynamic routing thread of dynamic routing thread connections you add.
entries will be highlighted when
they first appear in the Edit
Logical Database window. To
deselect them, click on the left
or right mouse button.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 235

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-34. Dynamic Routing Thread List, After Dynamic

Routing Threads Have Been Added

6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.

Editing Dynamic Routing Threads

You may edit dynamic routing thread entries from the Dynamic Routing
Threads tab on the Edit Logical Database window.
1. Choose Dynamic Routing Threads at the RouterMapper main
Note menu. The Edit Logical Database window will appear; all existing
RouterMapper does not allow dynamic routing thread connections will be displayed.
you to use the dynamic routing
2. Double-click the dynamic routing thread connection you want to
thread Edit function on a
connection within a combiner edit (or highlight the dynamic routing thread connection; then, click
system. Edit).
3. The Edit Dynamic Routing Thread dialog box will appear. All
currently-selected options will fill the drop-down boxes.

236 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Figure 8-35. Editing Dynamic Routing Threads

4. Make any editing changes in the drop-down list boxes as necessary.

You do not have to re-enter items that will not change:
Upstream
Frame ID: Upstream frame
Level: Upstream level
Starting Level Output: First upstream source
Downstream
Frame ID: Downstream frame
Level: Downstream level
Starting Level Input: First downstream destination
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of
dynamic routing thread connections you want to add.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 237

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

5. Click OK. The Edit Dynamic Routing Threads dialog box will
Note close and you will return to the Edit Logical Database window. All
Dynamic routing threads must of the newly-edited dynamic routing thread connections will be
be on the same level. This highlighted.
version of RouterMapper does
not support dynamic routing 6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
threads that span levels.

Editing Remote Access Lists

RouterMapper allows you to limit one or more downstream frame’s
access to upstream sources through the use of the remote access list
editing function.
The example in Figure 8-36 on page 239 shows how remote access lists
can be used to restrict frame 3 from accessing frame 1’s sources, while
still allowing frame 2 to access all of frame 1’s sources and frame 3 to
access frame 2’s sources.

238 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Figure 8-36. Limiting Remote Access Example

1. Choose Dynamic Routing Threads at the RouterMapper main

menu window. The Edit Logical Database window will appear and
all existing dynamic routing thread connections will be displayed.
2. Highlight the dynamic routing thread connection you want to edit;
then, click Access List. The Edit Remote Access List dialog box
will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 239

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-37. Edit Remote Access List Dialog Box

This dialog lists all dynamic routing thread connections for the
upstream frame and for the downstream frame to which it is physically
connected.
• By default, each connection will appear twice: once in the Inputs
Frame section, and once in the Inputs Accessible section.
• The source(s) you want the others to access is selected from the
Inputs Frame list.
• The Thread Request Wait time is the time required (in seconds)
for waiting on a thread connection before timing out.
The function buttons located between the two lists are used to select the
specific configuration.

240 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

• The Assign button allows you to assign a source from the Inputs
Frame list to the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
• The Delete button allows you to delete an assigned source from
the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
• The Assign All button allows you to assign all sources from the
Inputs Frame list to the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
• The Delete All button allows you to delete all assigned sources
from the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
To assign a specific source to the remote access list, follow these
steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID
for the dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is
physically connected.
2. Click the Delete All button to clear the assigned sources from the
Inputs Accessible remote access list.
3. Highlight the specific source that you want to assign to the remote
access list.
4. Click the Assign button. The source name will appear in the Inputs
Accessible list.
5. Click OK when you are finished assigning specific sources. You
will return to the Edit Logical Database window.
6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
To assign all sources to the remote access list, follow these steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID
for the dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is
physically connected.
2. Click the Assign All button to add the assigned sources to the
Inputs Accessible remote access list.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Logical Database window.
4. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
To delete a specific source from the remote access list, follow these
steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID
for the dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is
physically connected.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 241

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

2. Highlight the specific source that you want to delete from the
remote access list.
3. Click the Delete button. The source name will be removed from the
Inputs Accessible list.
4. Click OK when you are finished deleting specific sources. You will
return to the Edit Logical Database window.
5. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
To delete all sources from the remote access list, follow these steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID
for the dynamic routing thread to which the downstream frame is
physically connected.
2. Click the Delete All button to clear the assigned sources from the
Inputs Accessible remote access list.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Logical Database window.
4. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.

Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads

You may delete your dynamic routing thread entries from the Edit
Logical Database window.
To delete one dynamic routing thread entry, follow these steps:
Note 1. Highlight the dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted.
RouterMapper does not allow
you to use the dynamic routing 2. Click Delete.
thread Delete function on a 3. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message:
connection within a combiner
system.

242 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Figure 8-38. Deleting One Dynamic Routing Thread Connection

4. Click Yes. The selected dynamic routing thread connection will be

removed from the list.
5. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main window.
To delete several dynamic routing thread entries not adjacent to
one another, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the first dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted.
2. Hold down the <Ctrl> key on the keyboard; then, select the next
dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted. Only the chosen
dynamic routing thread entries will be highlighted.
3. Click Delete.
4. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message (see
Figure 8-39):

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 243

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-39. Deleting Several Non-Adjacent Dynamic Routing

Thread Connections

5. Click Yes. All highlighted dynamic routing thread connections will

be removed from the list.
6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main window.
To delete all dynamic routing thread entries or several dynamic
routing thread entries adjacent to one another, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the first dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted.
2. Hold down the <Shift> key on the keyboard; then, select the last
dynamic routing thread entry to be deleted. All dynamic routing
thread entries between the first chosen and the last chosen will be
highlighted.
3. Click Delete.
4. RouterMapper will prompt you with this message (see
Figure 8-40):

244 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Figure 8-40. Deleting All Dynamic Routing Thread Connections

5. Click Yes. All dynamic routing thread connections will be removed

from the list.
6. Click Done to return to the RouterMapper main window.

Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads

RouterMapper automatically performs dynamic routing thread
optimization for you after you have performed an Add, Delete, Edit, or
Inputs Access function at the Edit Logical Database window. When you
click the Done button to return to the main window, RouterMapper
creates and optimizes a dynamic routing thread connection database,
then generates a dynamic routing fabric database file (*.DRF) in the
database subdirectory.
This dynamic routing fabric database file is used for the Dynamic
Routing Fabric Monitoring software application. Contact your dealer or
our Sales Department for a copy of this application.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 245

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread Information

After dynamic routing threads have been created and edited, they must
be downloaded to the physical device before the new configuration can
take effect.
To download dynamic routing thread information, follow these
Note steps:
REMEMBER! Download any 1. Highlight the device entry.
device in the Device List that
does not display an “OK” status. 2. Click the Download button. Multiple devices may be selected
using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
3. The About to Download dialog box will appear.
• Choose the Selected Device radio button to download dynamic
routing thread information for the highlighted device only.
• Choose the Changed Device radio button to download dynamic
routing thread information for devices that have information that
changed since the last download.
• Choose the All Device radio button to download dynamic routing
thread information for all devices in the database.
4. Click OK. The Downloading Devices box will appear.

Figure 8-41. Downloading Devices Box

246 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing the Dynamic Routing Fabric

• If the download process is completed without errors, a summary

dialog box will appear. This dialog box will list the number of
devices that were successfully downloaded. The Device List will
be updated to reflect the current status of the devices (the devices
will be marked “OK”).
• If there are errors during the download process, a Download
Failures dialog box will appear. This dialog box will list the error
or errors encountered for each device. After all errors are
corrected, download the devices again.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 247

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Editing a Database that Includes Partitioned

Matrices
If the database includes partitioned Integrator frames, the Level Input
column may display both the Level Input number and the Physical
Input number(s) as shown below. In such cases, the level input number
will be the top number. The bottom numbers identify the physical input
for each component in the partitioned matrix.

Figure 8-42. Identifying Level and Physical Inputs

Procedures for assigning a level input/output are identical to those for

non-partitioned frames. See pages 210 (sources) and 224 (destinations)
for more information.
Physical inputs/outputs can only be assigned if the matrix partitioning
type is “Wild.” Physical inputs and outputs are automatically assigned
to RGB and Contiguous matrices and cannot be changed. For those
matrices, the assignments will be displayed, but will be “read-only.”

248 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing a Database that Includes Partitioned Matrices

If Wild partitioning has been selected for a frame, the physical

assignments can be changed by typing the number into the field, or by
clicking on the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box. Any
physical input can be assigned to any level input on any component
(likewise for outputs).
To assign a Physical Input (partitioned matrices only), follow these
Note steps:
Physical inputs are 1. Click the component’s physical input number. A drop-down list box
automatically assigned for
arrow will appear.
matrices using RGB or
contiguous partitioning. These 2. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the
physical inputs cannot be desired input number.
changed unless the partitioning
type is changed to OR
“wild-mapping.” Wild-mapping Type the desired physical input number in the box.
partitioning must be selected for
a matrix if the physical inputs
are to be changed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 249

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Understanding and Managing Category/

Indexing
As mentioned previously, category indexing is the primary method of
selecting sources and destinations on an RCP-ABA panel. With
category indexing, both a category (i.e., VTR, CAM, MIC, etc.) and an
index (i.e., 21, 2, 36, etc.) are required to identify a device. The first
click of a button selects the category; the second click selects the index
(see Figure 8-43).

Figure 8-43. Selecting Sources and Destinations via Category Indexing

(ABA Panels Only)

This method of category indexing allows many sources to be accessed

from a single panel without the need for hundreds of selection buttons.
A Broadcast Center, for example, could contain twenty monitors, each
of which could be accessed using the one button labeled “MON”
followed by the appropriate index number. Similarly, each of twenty
cameras could be selected using only one button labeled “CAM”
followed by the appropriate index number. Up to 16 categories can be
used with a 1RU ABA panel (48 categories on a 2RU panel). For that
reason, the use of generic category names (i.e., MON, CAM, Edit, SAT,
etc.) is generally recommended to minimize the number of categories
required.
RouterMapper simplifies the creation of categories by automatically
creating an appropriate category name when the Source or Destination
name is entered in the database. In most cases, the assigned category
name will not require editing. However, for more complex databases, a

250 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Understanding and Managing Category/Indexing

powerful interface for managing and editing categories is included in

the RouterMapper application (on the Categories tab).
To access the Categories tab of the Edit Logical Database dialog,
follow these steps:
1. Click either the Sources or Destinations button at the
RouterMapper main window.
2. Select the Categories tab (see Figure 8-44).

Figure 8-44. Edit Logical Database Window,

Categories Tab

The Categories list box contains a list of all category names in the
database. To the right of the list box are function buttons for managing
the category list. The Sources Affected and Destinations Affected list
boxes contain lists of all logical sources and destinations that use the
selected category.
The Errors group includes two list boxes: one for sources and one for
destinations. If any sources or destinations in the router database can
not be accessed via the current set of categories and indexes, those
sources and destinations will be displayed in the Errors boxes.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 251

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Adding a New Category

To add a new category, follow these steps:
Note 1. Click the New button to the right of the category list box. The new
REMEMBER! Only 16 category will be added to the bottom of the list.
categories can be used with a
1RU ABA panel (48 categories 2. Overtype the default text with the desired category name.
on a 2RU panel). For that
reason, we recommend the use
of generic category names (e.g.,
MON, CAM, Edit, SAT, etc.) to
minimize the number of
categories required.

Figure 8-45. Adding a New Category

252 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Understanding and Managing Category/Indexing

Viewing Sources Affected by a Category

To view a list of the sources affected by a particular category, click
the category name. The Sources Affected list box will display all the
logical sources associated with that category.

Figure 8-46. Viewing Sources Affected by a Category

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 253

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category

To view a list of the destinations affected by a particular category,
click the category name. The Destinations Affected list box will display
all the logical destinations associated with that category.

Figure 8-47. Viewing Destinations Affected by a Category

254 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Understanding and Managing Category/Indexing

Deleting a Category
To delete a category, follow these steps:
1. Click the category name in the category list box. Select multiple
categories by holding down either <Shift> or <Ctrl> while clicking
on the names.
2. When all desired categories are selected, click the Delete button.
You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.

Figure 8-48. Deleting a Category

To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion.
To delete all categories that are not assigned to logical sources or
destinations, click the Delete Unused button. You will be prompted to
confirm the deletion.

Generating Category Names

To generate categories for all logical sources and destinations
according to the rules described in “Assigning a Source Name” click
Generate.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 255

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Changing a Category Name

To change a category name, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the name in the category list box to produce the edit
box.
2. Overtype the highlighted text with the new name.

Correcting Source and Destination Errors

To correct a source or destination error, follow these steps:
Note 1. Double-click the error entry.
For quick access to the
functions described, right-click 2. The Add New Category/Index dialog box will be displayed as
anywhere within the Categories shown in Figure 8-49. The dialog box will offer a default category
list box, then select the function that will allow access to the logical source/destination.
from the pop-up menu.

3. Click OK to accept the default category (or type a new category

Note name in the edit box).
REMEMBER! Only 16
categories can be used with a
1RU ABA panel (48 on a 2RU
panel). Using generic category
names (i.e., SAT, CAM, Edit,
etc.) will minimize the number
of categories required.

Figure 8-49. Correcting Source/Destination Errors

256 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating and Managing Indexes

Creating and Managing Indexes

To access the Indexes tab of the Edit Logical Database dialog, click
Sources or Destinations at the RouterMapper main window. Select the
Indexes tab.

Figure 8-50. Edit Logical Database Window, Indexes Tab

The Indexes list box contains a list of all index names in the database.
To the right of the list box are function buttons for managing the index
list.
The Errors group includes two list boxes, one for sources and one for
destinations. If any sources or destinations in the router database can
not be accessed via the current set of categories and indexes, those
sources and destinations will be displayed in the Errors boxes.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 257

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Adding a New Index

To add a new index, follow these steps:
Note 1. Click the New button to the right of the indexes list box.
The total number of characters
on a selection key (Category 2. The new index will be added to the bottom of the list.
and Index combined) cannot 3. Overtype the default text with the desired index name.
exceed 8 characters.

Figure 8-51. Adding a New Index

258 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating and Managing Indexes

Deleting an Index
To delete an index, follow these steps:
1. Click the index name in the indexes list box. Multiple indexes can
be selected by holding down either the <Shift> or the <Ctrl> key
while clicking on the names.
2. When all desired indexes are selected, click Delete. You will be
prompted to confirm the deletion.

Figure 8-52. Deleting an Index

Deleting All Indexes

Click the Delete All button. You will be prompted to confirm the
deletion.

Changing an Index Name

To change an index name, follow these steps:
1. Click the name in the index list box once.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 259

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

2. Pause briefly, and then click it a second time to produce the edit
box.
3. Overtype the highlighted text with the new name.

Correcting Source and Destination Errors

To correct source and destination errors, follow these steps:
Note 1. Double-click the error entry.
For quick access to other
functions, right-click anywhere 2. The Add New Category/Index dialog box will be displayed as
within the Indexes list box, then shown below. The dialog box will offer a default category that will
select the function from the allow access to the logical source/destination.
pop-up menu.
• Click OK to accept the default category
• Type a new category name in the edit box.

Figure 8-53. Add New Category/Index Dialog Box

260 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing Custom Icons

Managing Custom Icons

You can add and delete unique icons assigned to logical sources and
destinations via the Icons Management tab. These icons will be
displayed on the Icon box on the Logical Sources and Logical
Destinations tabs, and RouterWorks control panels. You can add new
icons, remove icons, or restore the default icons that come with
RouterMapper.

Figure 8-54. Edit Logical Database Window, Icons Management

Tab

The Available Icons list box displays a thumbnail view of each one of
the icons currently used in a database. These are the icons that will
appear in the icon list boxes in the Logical Sources/Logical
Destinations tabs and RouterWorks control panels.
When you click on one or more icons in the Available Icons list box,
any sources and destinations that would be affected by any change in
the selected icon(s) are listed:
• Any sources are listed in the Affected Sources list box.
• Any destinations are listed in the Affected Destinations list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 261

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Adding Icons
The Add button brings up a dialog that allows you to extract a single
icon from any icon file or executable file (*.ico, *.dll, or *.exe). You
can use the dialog to select a file to extract the icon from, then to select
the icon you want from within the file.
To add a custom icon, follow these steps:
Note 1. Click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main window. The
This option allows you to Edit Logical Database window will appear.
choose one icon at a time. To
select multiple icons, use the 2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-54 on page 261).
Add Multiple option. 3. Click Add. The Change Icon dialog box (Figure 8-55) will appear.
The file name and path for Microsoft® Windows standard icons
will be highlighted in the File Name box and thumbnail views of all
of these standard icons will be displayed in the Current Icon box.

Figure 8-55. Change Icon Dialog Box

• If the icon you want is displayed:

a. Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to add.
b. Click OK. The selected icon’s thumbnail will appear in the
Available Icons list box.
• If the icon you want is not displayed:
a. Click Browse.... The Change Icon browse box will appear.

262 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing Custom Icons

b. Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the

location of the file you want to display.
c. Highlight the name of the file you want; then, click Open.
A thumbnail view of the icon file you selected will appear
in the Change Icon browse box (Figure 8-56).
d. Click OK. The selected icon’s thumbnail will appear in the
Available Icons list box.

Figure 8-56. Change Icon Browse Box with Selected Icon

Displayed

To add multiple custom icons, follow these steps:

1. Click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main window. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-54 on page 261).
3. Click Add Multiple. The Add Multiple Open dialog box
(Figure 8-57) will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 263

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Figure 8-57. Add Multiple Open Dialog Box

4. Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the

files you want to add.
5. Highlight the names of the files you want; then, click Open.
(Multiple files may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques. Hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select
multiple files). The selected icons’ thumbnails will appear in the
Available Icons list box.

Importing Icons
Importing Icons from Another Database
To import all of the icons from a different RouterMapper database,
Note follow these steps:
RouterMapper databases can be 1. Click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main window. The
identified via their “ICS” file
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
name extension.
2. Select the Icons Management tab.
3. Click Import. The Open Leitch Icon List window will appear
(Figure 8-58).

264 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing Custom Icons

Figure 8-58. Open Leitch Icon List Window

• If the database you want to import from is in the window

display:
• Select it.
• Click Open.
• If the database you want to import from is not in the window
display:
• Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the
location of the database you want to import.
• Select it.
• Click Open.
The icons from the selected database will be appended to the end of
the existing icon display in the Available Icons list box.

Importing Individual Icons

This option differs from adding a custom icon in that it allows you to
import JPG, GIF, or BMP files as icons.
1. Click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main window. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Icons Management tab.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 265

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

3. Click Import Image. The Import Icon window will appear

(Figure 8-59).

Figure 8-59. Importing Individual Icons

You can select these different bitmap image types:

• BMP
• GIF
• JPG
If necessary, use Windows navigation techniques to move to the
location of the files you want to add.
4. Highlight the names of the files you want; then, click Open.
(Multiple files may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques. Hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select
multiple files). The selected images will be appended to the end of
the existing icon display in the Available Icons list box.

Restoring Default Icons

To restore the default list of icons, follow these steps:
1. Click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main window. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-54 on page 261).

266 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Managing Custom Icons

3. Click Reset. RouterMapper will restore the default icons

Removing Icons
To remove selected icons, follow these steps:
1. Click the Sources button at the RouterMapper main window. The
Edit Logical Database window will appear.
2. Select the Icons Management tab (see Figure 8-54 on page 261).
3. Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to remove.
4. Click Remove. The selected icon will be removed from the
Available Icons list box.
To remove all icons, click Remove All. Any icons listed in the
Available Icons list box will be removed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 267

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

System Limitations
Table 8-1 lists RouterMapper system limitations.

Table 8-1. RouterMapper System Limitations

System Item Limitation
Maximum number of levels 16
Maximum number of logical sources 3072
Maximum number of logical destinations 3072
Maximum number of sources usable with non Power-PC 128
based alphanumeric panels (panels that do not have serial
& Ethernet ports) when in program mode (DIP switch
mode is only limited by router system size)
Maximum number of panels in one router system 128
Maximum number of salvos (the actual number of salvos 254
that can be downloaded to panels is limited by panel
memory and the number of buttons on the panel, but RW/
RM supports up to 254 salvos total)
Maximum number of Integrator frames in one router 128
system
Maximum number of matrices per Integrator frame 8
Maximum number of components per Integrator frame 5
matrix

268 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Printing a Database

Printing a Database
1. Select Print Logical Database from the RouterMapper File menu,
or press <Ctrl> P.
2. The Print Database dialog box will appear.

Figure 8-60. Print Database Dialog Box

3. Click the proper radio button to sort the data.

4. Click OK. Your local Printer Setup dialog box will appear.
5. Choose the desired options (e.g., paper size, paper source,
orientation); then, click OK.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 269

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

Backing Up and Restoring Databases

RouterMapper allows you to back up and restore your created
databases. Back up your databases frequently to make sure you do not
lose important configuration information because of a system or hard
disk crash, power outage, database corruption, or other “disaster.”

Backing Up a Database
You can either back up the database in use or select other databases to
back up.
To back up a database, follow these steps:
1. Select Backup Database from the RouterMapper File menu, or
press <Ctrl> B.
2. The Backup RouterMapper Database dialog box will appear.

Figure 8-61. Backup RouterMapper Database Dialog Box

3. Verify the database listed in the Reference Database box is the one
you want to back up information from.
• Click the Current Database button if it is the database you want.
• Click Browse… if you want to choose a database different from
the one listed.
4. Verify the database listed in the Target Database box is the one you
want to back up information to.

270 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Backing Up and Restoring Databases

• Click the Original Database button if it is the database you

want.
• Click the Browse… button if you want to choose a database
different from the one listed.
5. When you have the correct source and target databases selected,
click the Backup button.
6. When RouterMapper finishes backing up the database, click the
Exit button.

Restoring a Database
RouterMapper allows you to restore databases you backed up via the
RouterMapper backup utility. (See “Backing Up and Restoring
Databases” starting on page 270, for more information about the
backup utility.)
You may either restore the database in use or select other databases to
restore.
To restore a database, follow these steps:
1. Select Restore Database from the RouterMapper File menu, or
press <Ctrl> R.
2. The Restore RouterMapper Database dialog box will appear.

Figure 8-62. Restore RouterMapper Database Dialog Box

3. Verify the database listed in the Reference Database box is the one
you want to restore information from.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 271

Chapter 8: Editing a Logical Database

• Click the Current Database button if it is the database you want.

• Click the Browse… button if you want to choose a database
different from the one listed.
4. Verify the database listed in the Target Database box is the one you
want to restore information to.
• Click the Original Database button if it is the database you
want.
• Click the Browse… button if you want to choose a database
different from the one listed.
5. When you have the correct source and target databases selected,
click the Restore button.
6. When RouterMapper finishes restoring the database, click the Exit
button.

272 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 9
Editing a Frame Definition

Overview
This chapter covers the various facets involved in editing a frame
definition via RouterMapper, as well as editing the various tab settings
that make up a router matrix.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Editing a Frame’s Configuration” on page 274
• “Editing the Router Frame” on page 275
• “Editing the Router Matrix” on page 278

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 273

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Editing a Frame’s Configuration

1. Select (or double-click the left mouse button on) the frame name
from the device list at the RouterMapper main window.
2. Click Edit. The Edit Frame dialog box will appear. (See Figure 9-1
on page 275, Figure 9-2 on page 276, and Figure 9-3 on page 276
for pictures of the various Edit Frame window variations that
appear in RouterMapper.)
The Edit Frame window is a tabbed dialog box that includes all
functions necessary for configuring a router frame. Any of the tabs
[Router Frame, Configured Matrices, Partitioning, Detected Matrices,
Detected Cards or Control Card(s)] can be selected by clicking on the
appropriate tab. Information on using those tabs can be found in pages
275 through 332.

274 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Editing the Router Frame

The type and size of the matrices in a frame can be edited from the Edit
Note Router Frame tab.
For Platinum frames, this type
of information is edited from the
Configured Matrices tab (see
page 278).

Figure 9-1. Edit Frame Window, Router Frame Tab Selected

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 275

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-2. Edit Frame Window, Router Frame Tab Selected

(Integrator Gold Only)

Figure 9-3. Edit Frame Window, Router Frame Tab Selected

(Panacea Only)

276 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

To change the matrix type, follow these steps:

1. Select the new matrix type from the drop-down list box. Valid
options are listed below. (Max Matrix Size options change as the
Matrix Type is changes.)
• AES EBU1
• Analog mono audio
• Analog stereo audio1
• Analog video
• High Definition (HD)
• Stereo audio1
• SDI
• Data router1
• Integrator Gold multirate digital1 2
2. Change the size of each matrix in the frame by clicking on the
desired matrix size and then clicking on the Add button.
To increase the size of a matrix, you may have to delete one or more
matrices, as you cannot select matrix sizes bigger than the space
remaining in the frame.
To delete a matrix from the frame, follow these steps:
Note 1. Click the matrix in the frame.
By default, the “Stuffed As”
size will be the same as the 2. Click the Delete button. (An outline will appear around the matrix
selected Max Matrix Size. In when it is selected.)
some cases, however, you may
wish to override the default in
(Panacea frames only) To indicate an installed submodule, include
order to save slots for future these steps:
use. For example, when adding 1. If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the
a 64x64 matrix, two slots would
proper check box in the Module Options. The matrix types with
be left empty by stuffing the
matrix as a 32x32. programmable I/O submodule are listed in Table 4-5 on page 133.
2. Click the Hardware… button to change the I/O hardware module
default settings of a selected matrix in the empty frame.

1 This
matrix type is not available for Panacea products.
2 This option appears on the dialog box for Integrator Gold only. Its Configured Matrices

dialog box is different from other types of matrix format editing. See page 111 for more
information.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 277

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

3. The I/O Hardware Module tab will appear. See “I/O Hardware
Module Tab (Panacea Frames Only)” on page 336 for more
information about this selection.

Editing the Router Matrix

Configured Matrices Tab
The Frame ID, Level, First Source, First Destination and Signal Type can
be changed from the Configured Matrices tab. In addition, matrix
partitioning can be set up through the Configured Matrices tab.
• See page 278 — page 282 for information about the Configured
Matrices tab for Platinum routers.
• See page 282 — page 278 for information about the Configured
Matrices tab for Integrator and Panacea routers.

Configured Matrices Tab (Platinum Routers)

Figure 9-4. Configured Matrices Tab (Platinum)

278 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

At the Configured Matrices tab, you can add a new matrix, or delete or
configure an existing matrix for a Platinum frame. Matrix information
(name, inputs, outputs, format, partition) is displayed in the matrix list
control area. Corresponding input and output modules are displayed on
the right side of the dialog box. The Output column and the Input
column are set up with separate list box controls. The matrix’s module
information is coded as described in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1. Matrix Information Color Codes

Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the
selected matrix.
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because
they are assigned to another matrix.
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be assigned
to any matrix.
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to
(or unassigned from) the selected matrix.

There are two icons that show module information, as shown in Table
9-2. RouterMapper may display both icons for a particular slot; see
Figure 9-4 on page 278 for an example.

Table 9-2. Matrix Informational Icons

Icon Description
RouterMapper has detected a module in this slot; you
can identify its parameters via the Detected Matrices
Tab

RouterMapper has determined that the module detected

in this slot is different from what the slot was
configured to be

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 279

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• To select items from the Input or Output column, use standard

Note Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
If you have several editing keys) to select multiple modules on each, or both, lists. The selected
functions to perform, you may items will appear green until you deselect them. Unselecting will
want to do them all at once via remove the green color information from the slot, but will not
the Advanced function (see
remove the slot from the assigned matrix.
page 281).
• To deselect items from the Input or Output column, highlight
the appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and then select Unselect
from the pop-up menu. Unselecting will remove the green color
information from the slot, but will not remove the slot from the
assigned matrix.
• To deselect multiple items at once, right-click the mouse, and then
select Unselect All from the pop-up menu. Unselecting will remove
the green color information from the slot, but will not remove the
slot from the assigned matrix.
• To assign a module to a different matrix, highlight the matrix you
want to assign a module to, highlight the available slot (displayed
as light grey), right click the mouse, and then select Assign to
<matrix name>. The assigned slot will display green color
information until you unselect it.
• To remove a module from a matrix, highlight the slot you want to
remove from the matrix, right click the mouse, and then select
Unassign from <matrix name>. The removed slot will display green
color information until you unselect it.
• To change the matrix name, click the name box of the appropriate
matrix, and then type in a new name. (You may also click the right
mouse button to copy the existing name, paste in a new name, or
delete the name completely.)
• To change the matrix format, click the format box of the
appropriate matrix, and then select a new format type.
Alternatively, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the mouse,
and then select Change Format from the pop-up menu. Choose the
new format from the display list.
• To change the sort order of the listed matrixes, click the title of
the column by which you want to sort. Click the title box once to
sort in ascending order (A-Z or 0-512); click the title box again to
sort in descending order (Z-A or 512-0).
• To add a new matrix, click Add. The Add Matrix dialog box will
appear. See page 81 for information on how to complete this dialog.

280 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• To delete an individual matrix, highlight the appropriate matrix,

and then click Delete.
• To delete all listed matrixes, click Delete All.
• To perform multiple edit functions click Advanced.... The
Matrix Partitioning tab will appear. See page 288 for a description
of this tab. At this tab you will be able to change these selections:
• Matrix name
• Matrix format
• Matrix sort order
• Color for matrix partitioning display
• Level
• Input offset
• Output offset
• Partition type
• Number of partitions
• Physical map order
• To assign dual outputs, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click
the mouse, and then select Dual Output from the pop-up menu.
Select this option only if your Platinum modules include a dual
output module such as the PT-HSR-DOB, PT-SR-DOB, or
PT-ENC-DOB.
• To enable redundant crosspoints, right-click the mouse button,
Note and then choose Redundant Crosspoint from the pop-up menu
This function is available with window.
256×256 frames only.
• Click on Enable to enable the redundant crosspoint function.
• Click on Disable to disable the redundant crosspoint function.
• To set the crosspoint switching mode, right-click the mouse
button, and then choose Redundant Switch Mode from the pop-up
menu window.
• Click on Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new,
active crosspoint module. Existing crosspoints will not be
switched, but will remain on their original crosspoint module.
• Click on Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the
new, active crosspoint module.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 281

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• To assign sync settings, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click

the mouse, and then select Assign Sync from the pop-up menu.
Choose the new sync setting from the display list.
You can change the default sync setting values at the Control
Settings tab. See page 322 for instructions on how to change the
sync names and settings.

Configured Matrices Tab (Integrator and Panacea Routers)

Integrator data routers and Panacea routers each have a Configured
Note Matrices dialog box that is somewhat different from other types of
Go to page 278 for Configured matrix format editing.
Matrices Tab information for
• See Figure 9-5 on page 282 for a picture of the Configured Matrices
Platinum routers.
tab for most Integrator and Panacea routers.
• See Figure 9-6 on page 283 for a picture of the Integrator data
router Configured Matrices dialog box.
• See Figure 9-7 on page 283 for a picture of the Panacea Configured
Matrices dialog box.

Figure 9-5. Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab

Selected

282 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Figure 9-6. Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab

Selected (Integrator Data Router Only)

Figure 9-7. Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab

Selected (Panacea Only)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 283

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To edit the matrix configuration, select a configuration from these

drop-down list box(es).
• Frame ID1 is the physical address of the router frame. This
setting must match the DIP switches on the frame.
• Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides.
Matrices with the same level number will switch together. The
matrices in a frame can have different level numbers.
• First Source (same as Source Offset in previous Leitch/Harris
product manuals; this setting determines the point at which
source numbering will start for this matrix.
• First Destination (same as Destination Offset in previous Leitch/
Harris product manuals); this setting determines the point at
which destination numbering will start for this matrix.
• Signal Type describes how the matrix will be used in the system,
and is for informational purposes only. Changing the signal type
does not affect system operation.
• (Panacea frames only) Matrix Name & Color identify the
matrix by name instead of by ID number. These settings are for
informational purposes only; changing them will not affect
system operation.

1 This
item may not appear on some Panacea Configured Matrices windows.

284 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

(Panacea frames only) To change the frame settings, follow these

steps:
1. Click the Frame Settings component of the 1|2RU Frame
Note illustration on the Configured Matrices tab (see Figure 9-8 on
You cannot edit a Panacea page 285). The information on the right side of the tab will change
frame’s level, starting to reflect the Frame properties for that particular frame.
destination, and starting source
at this window. These settings
are automatically updated on
every Poll of the control system.

Figure 9-8. Panacea Configured Matrices Tab with Frame

Properties Displayed

Select a new configuration from these drop down list box(es).

• Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting
must match the DIP switches on the frame.
• Frame Name appears for informational purposes only. Changing
the frame name will not affect system operation.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 285

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Matrix Partitioning
Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller
switching units called components. This might be used in
configurations where RGB signals are to be switched (the matrix is split
into three separate components – one for red, one for green, and one for
blue), or in configurations where both component and composite
signals are to be switched within the same frame. Matrix partitioning
allows each component to appear to the control system as a different
level.
Each component in a matrix has a level configuration, a first source,
and a first destination. (See page 278 for more information on levels,
first source, and first destination parameters.) Any physical input or
output can be assigned to any component.

Matrix Partitioning Types

RGB Partitioning
Selecting RGB partitioning divides a matrix into components of equal
size. This configuration allows a user to connect the RGB outputs from
a component device to the first three physical inputs on the router, and
the RGB outputs of a second component device to physical inputs four,
five and six. Each group of three inputs will appear to the control
system as a single input, and will be switched simultaneously.
When you select RGB, RouterMapper automatically assigns all
physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to appropriate components.
For example, if 3 components are selected, physical input 1 will be
assigned to the first red, physical input 2 to the first green, physical
input 3 to the first blue, physical input 4 to the second red, physical
input 5 to the second green, etc.
Contiguous Partitioning
Selecting Contiguous Partitioning divides a matrix into blocks of
sources and destinations. When Contiguous partitioning is selected,
RouterMapper automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and
outputs of the matrix to the appropriate components. For example, if
three components are selected for a 32×32 matrix, physical inputs 1-10
will be assigned to the first component, physical inputs 11-20 to the
second component, and physical inputs 21-30 to the third component.

286 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Wild Partitioning
In configurations where maximum flexibility is required, matrices can
be partitioned to allow wild mapping of physical inputs and outputs.
Selecting Wild Partitioning allows any input or output to be assigned to
any component.
Shared Inputs (Platinum routers only)
Selecting shared inputs divides a matrix into blocks of sources and
destinations as shown below. When Contiguous partitioning is selected,
RouterMapper automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and
outputs of the matrix to the appropriate components. For example, if
three components are selected for a 32x32 matrix, physical inputs 1-10
will be assigned to the first component, physical inputs 11-20 to the
second component, and physical inputs 21-30 to the third component.
This option differs from Contiguous partitioning in that input blocks
can overlap, whereas in Contiguous partitioning the input blocks cannot
overlap.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 287

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Matrix Partitioning (Platinum Routers)

To enable matrix partitioning follow these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main menu window, double-click the name of
the frame you want to partition. The Configured Matrices screen
will appear.
2. Click Advanced.... The Matrix Partition window will appear.

Figure 9-9. Matrix Partitioning Tab, Platinum Routers

3. At the top left of the window you will see pertinent matrix
information. You can change the name, the input partition display
color, starting level, and input and output offsets.
• To change the sort order of the listed matrixes, click the title
of the column by which you want to sort. Click the title box once

288 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

to sort in ascending order (A-Z or 0-512); click the title box again
to sort in descending order (Z-A or 512-0).
• To change the matrix name, click the name box of the
appropriate matrix, and then type in a new name. (You may also
click the right mouse button to copy the existing name, paste in a
new name, or delete the name completely.)
• To change the input matrix partition display color, click the
color box of the appropriate matrix, and then choose the color
you want.
• To change the starting level of a matrix, click the drop-down
list box under the Levels column. (You cannot type in the
information into this field.)
• To change the input offset number, type in the desired offset
number into the field under the Input Offset column.
• To change the output offset number, type in the desired offset
number into the field under the Output Offset column.
• To change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical
component, click somewhere within the read-only area of the
matrix partition list for the component you want to change.
(Alternatively, move your mouse to the Physical View area, and
then right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear.
Select Physical Map Order.) The Physical Map Order dialog box
will appear (see Figure 9-10 on page 290).
The Physical Map Order dialog box displays the physical I/O
location of a particular component. At this dialog box, you can
change the input or output assignment of any physical
component.
Click the physical location number for the appropriate
component input or output, and then select a new physical
location number from the drop-down list box. RouterMapper
will assign the new number to your chosen component, and
assign the original number from your chosen component to the
component to which the physical number was originally
assigned. For example, if you change the assignment of
Component Input 9 from 179 to 187 (which is currently
assigned to Component Input 17), RouterMapper will assign
187 to Component Input 9 and 179 to Component Input 17.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 289

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-10. Physical Map Order Dialog Box

4. At the top right of the window is the Matrix Size information box.
This display is for informational purposes only; you cannot change
the matrix size here.
5. Below the Matrix Size box is the Partition Type drop-down list box.
Note Here you will select from these partition type components: None,
See page 286 for descriptions of RGB, Contiguous, Wild, and Shared Inputs.
the matrix partitioning types.
• For instructions on configuring for no partition type, see
page 291.
• For instructions on configuring for RGB partitioning, see
page 292.
• For instructions on configuring for Contiguous partitioning, see
page 294.
• For instructions on configuring for Wild partitioning, see
page 296.
• For instructions on configuring for Shared Inputs partitioning,
see page 299.

290 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

a. No Partitioning
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type.
To choose this option, select None from the Partition Type
drop-down list box. You will only have one partition with this
option, so the # of Partitions box is greyed out.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any
physical component within the None partition type.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then
right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog
box will appear (see Figure 9-10 on page 290).
• Click the physical location number for the appropriate
component input or output, and then select a new physical
location number from the drop-down list box.
• RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your
chosen component to the component to which the physical
number was originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical
Input View and Physical Output View tabs. The information
displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of
how your selected input and output partitions will look. Choose
the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output
partitioning.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes,
go on to step 6 on page 300.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 291

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

b. RGB Partitioning

Figure 9-11. RGB Partitioning

To choose this option, select RGB from the Partition Type

drop-down list box, and then select the number of partitions
from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any
physical component within the RGB partition type.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then
right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog
box will appear (see Figure 9-10 on page 290).

292 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• Click the physical location number for the appropriate

component input or output, and then select a new physical
location number from the drop-down list box.
• RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your
chosen component to the component to which the physical
number was originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical
Input View and Physical Output View tabs. The information
displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of
how your selected input and output partitions will look, based
on the partition type components you selected. Choose the
appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output
partitioning.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and
outputs to a different partition (component). The steps for
completing this function are the same for both inputs and
outputs.
• Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want
to reassign.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the
inputs in the Physical Input View that you want to assign to
a different component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Unassign from
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections
will appear light grey.
• Highlight the component to which you want to assign the
inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the
inputs you just unassigned.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections
will receive that component’s color assignment.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes,
go on to step 6 on page 300.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 293

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

c. Contiguous Partitioning

Figure 9-12. Contiguous Partitioning

To choose this option, select Contiguous from the Partition

Type drop-down list box, and then select the number of
partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
The initial appearance of the matrix (as illustrated in the
Physical I/O View box) shows boxes equal in shape and size;
the number of boxes will match the number of partitions you
have selected. You can change the I/O number per partition:
• Click on the component box you want to expand or reduce.
A blue border with small “handles” on it will appear around
the component box.

294 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number
Note of inputs in the selected component. The selected
If you pull slowly you will see a component box will get larger and the contingent
display message showing how component will get smaller.
many inputs and how many
outputs the component contains. • Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number
of outputs in the selected component. The selected
component box will get larger and the contingent
component will get smaller.
• Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs
and outputs in the selected component. The selected
component box will get larger and both contingent
components will get smaller.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes,
go on to step 6 on page 300.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 295

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

d. Wild Partitioning

Figure 9-13. Wild Partitioning

To choose this option, select Wild from the Partition Type

drop-down list box, and then select the number of partitions
from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any
physical component within the Wild partition type.
• Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then
right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear.
• Select Physical Map Order. The Physical Map Order dialog
box will appear (see Figure 9-10 on page 290).

296 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• Click the physical location number for the appropriate

component input or output, and then select a new physical
location number from the drop-down list box.
• RouterMapper will assign the new number to your chosen
component, and assign the original number from your
chosen component to the component to which the physical
number was originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical
Input View and Physical Output View tabs. The information
displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of
how your selected input and output partitions will look, based
on the partition type components you selected. Choose the
appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output
partitioning.
The default view for Wild partitioning is that the inputs and
outputs for each component are continuous (e.g., inputs 1, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6...32) and contiguous to one another (where the inputs
from one component end the inputs from the next component
begin; e.g., component 1 input 1...32; component 2 input
1,2,3,...; etc.). You can change that view to RGB, so that inputs
1, 2, and 3 from each component fall in a row; then inputs 4, 5,
and 6; and so forth. The steps for completing this function are
the same for both inputs and outputs.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing
order:
• Move your mouse into the Physical Input View space.
• Right-click the mouse button and select one of the
following from the pop-up menu:
• Click Make RGB Inputs to make the Physical Input
View space appear in RGB order. The Physical Output
View space will remain in contiguous order.
• Click Make RGB All to make the both the Physical
Input View space and the Physical Output View space
appear in RGB order.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing
order:
• Move your mouse into the Physical Input View space.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 297

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Right-click the mouse button and select one of the

following from the pop-up menu:
• Click Make Contiguous Inputs to make the Physical
Input View space appear in contiguous order. The
Physical Output View space will remain in RGB order.
• Click Make Contiguous All to make the both the
Physical Input View space and the Physical Output
View space appear in contiguous order.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and
outputs to a different component. The steps for completing this
function are the same for both inputs and outputs.
• Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want
to reassign.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the
inputs in the Physical Input View that you want to assign to
a different component.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Unassign from
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections
will appear light grey.
• Highlight the component to which you want to assign the
inputs.
• Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the
inputs you just unassigned.
• Right-click the mouse button and select Assign to
<component name> from the pop-up menu. Your selections
will receive that component’s color assignment.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes,
go on to step 6 on page 300.

298 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

e. Shared Inputs

Figure 9-14. Shared Inputs

To choose this option, select Shared Inputs from the Partition

Type drop-down list box, and then select the number of
partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
The initial appearance of the matrix as illustrated in the
Physical I/O View box shows boxes equal in shape and size; the
number of boxes will match the number of partitions you have
selected. You can change the I/O number per partition:
• Click on the matrix box you want to expand or reduce. A
blue border with small “handles” on it will appear around
the matrix box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 299

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number
Note of inputs in the selected matrix. The selected matrix box
If you pull slowly you will see a will get larger or smaller but contingent matrixes will stay
display message showing how the same size.
many inputs and how many
outputs the matrix contains. • Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number
of outputs in the selected matrix. The selected matrix box
will get larger and the contingent matrix will get smaller.
• Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs
and outputs in the selected matrix. The selected matrix box
will get larger and the contingent matrix will get smaller.
When you have finished making your matrix partition changes,
go on to step 6 on page 300.
6. When all of your selections are complete, click OK. You will return
to the Configured Matrices tab.
7. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.

300 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Matrix Partitioning (Integrator and Panacea Routers)

To enable matrix partitioning, follow these steps:
Note 1. Double-click the name of the frame you want to partition. The Edit
Data router matrices cannot be Frame screen will appear.
partitioned.
2. If it is not already chosen, select the Configured Matrices tab.
3. Click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
4. The Matrix Properties group will change, as shown in Figure 9-15.

Figure 9-15. Enable Matrix Partitioning

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 301

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

5. To edit the individual components of the matrix, click the Edit

Components button, or select the Partitioning tab. The following
screen will appear.

Figure 9-16. Matrix Partitioning Type, RGB Partitioning

6. Select the matrix partitioning type from the drop-down list box.
To partition a matrix into RGB components, follow these steps:
Note 1. Select RGB from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
See page 286 for descriptions of The Partitioning dialog box will appear (see Figure 9-16 on
the matrix partitioning types.
page 302).
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the
dialog box will change to reflect the number of components
selected. The component size will be automatically designated, and
cannot be changed directly.
3. Click the component in the block diagram at the left of the screen to
select it for editing. The component will be outlined when it is
selected. All changes made in the component properties group will
be applied to the component selected.
4. Set the first destination, first source, and level number for each
component.

302 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

5. You may assign a unique name and color to each component if

desired.
• Type a unique name into the Name edit box.
• Select a color for the component by clicking on the Color button.
To partition a matrix into contiguous components, follow these
Note steps:
See page 286 for descriptions of 1. Select Contiguous from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list
the matrix partitioning types.
box. The following screen will appear.

Figure 9-17. Matrix Partitioning Type, Contiguous Partitioning

2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the
fields in the dialog box will change to reflect the number of
components selected.
3. Select a component for editing by clicking on the component in the
block diagram at the left of the screen. A colored outline will
appear around the component to indicate that it is selected. In the
example above, component number one is selected. Note the nodes
(the squares) along the sides of the box outline. You can change the
size of the component by dragging these nodes into a new position.
4. Select the level number from the drop-down list box to specify the
level on which this component will operate.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 303

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

5. Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down
list box. (The First Destination is like the Destination Offset in
previous Leitch/Harris product manuals.) The First Destination
setting determines the point where destination numbering will start
for this component.
6. Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list
box. (The First Source is like the Source Offset in previous Leitch/
Harris product manuals.) The First Source setting determines the
point where source numbering will start for this component.
7. You may assign a unique name and color to each component if
desired.
• Type the new name into the Name edit box.
• Select the color by clicking on the Color button.
To partition a matrix for wild partitioning, follow these steps:
Note 1. Select Wild from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
See page 286 for descriptions of A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 9-18 on page 305 will
the matrix partitioning types.
appear.
2. Select a component for editing by clicking on the component name
in the list box at the left of the screen. The component name will be
highlighted to indicate that it is selected. Specify the level on which
this component will operate by selecting the level number from the
drop-down list box.

304 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Figure 9-18. Matrix Partitioning Type, Wild Partitioning

3. Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down
list box. The First Destination setting determines the point at which
destination numbering will start for this component.
4. Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list
box. The First Source setting determines the point at which source
numbering will start for this component.
5. You may assign a unique name and color to each component if
desired.
• Type the new name into the Name edit box.
• Select the color by clicking on the Color button.
6. Change the physical assignments to match the actual configuration
of the matrix as described in “Editing a Logical Database” on page
193.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 305

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Detected Matrices Tab

When a system poll is initiated, RouterMapper will query all devices
attached to the system to determine the configuration of each. The
properties of the detected frame will be displayed on the Detected
Matrices tab. This information is read-only (it cannot be edited).
If the first output card in a matrix has failed, or if the wrong card has
been placed into the frame, the frame’s control card will not be able to
determine a valid matrix. In this case, the graphic of the frame shown
on the Detected Matrices tab will be empty. However, the frame will
still report exactly which cards it has found in each slot. This
information can be viewed on the Detected Cards tab, and can assist in
troubleshooting the system.

Detected Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames)

Figure 9-19. Detected Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames)

To view the details of a particular matrix, click View Detail. The

Matrix Partition tab will appear. You will not be able to change matrix
information.

306 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the

matrix you are configuring, click the Copy to Configured Matrix
button.
You can view some hardware details at the Detected Matrices tab:
module parameters, frame settings, and the hardware snapshot file.
To determine the parameters for a particular module:
• Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input
list box.
• Right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear.
• Select View <type> Module. The Module Parameters list box will
appear. The information listed here corresponds to the controllable
parameter settings for that particular module type. See the Platinum
Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation
Manual for more information about controllable parameters.

Figure 9-20. Module Parameters List Box for Modules

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 307

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

To determine the settings for the frame in which a particular

module is located:
• Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input
list box.
• Right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear.
• Select View <type> Module. The Module Parameters list box will
appear. The information listed here corresponds to the controllable
parameter settings for that particular module type. See the Platinum
Frame and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation
Manual for more information about controllable parameters.

Figure 9-21. Module Parameters List Box for Frames

To view a “snapshot” of system settings:

• Position the screen cursor above any module in the Output or Input
list box.
• Right-click the mouse button. A pop-up menu will appear.

308 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• Select View Hardware Snapshot File. A “snapshot” (non-editable)

version of the frame's settings will appear. You can use this image
as a diagnostics tool, to make sure that the frame configuration
setup file corresponds with your desired frame setup.

Figure 9-22. Hardware Snapshot File

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 309

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Detected Matrices Tab (Integrator and Panacea Frames)

Note
“Detected Matrices” refers to
the system configuration that a
frame will use if it is in DIP
Switch mode. If the frame is in
Program mode, it will attempt to
use the configuration reported in
the Configured Matrices tab.

Figure 9-23. Detected Matrices Tab (Integrator and Panacea

Frames)

To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the

matrix you are configuring, click the Copy to Configured Matrix
button.

310 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Detected Cards Tab

Figure 9-24. Edit Frame Window, Detected Cards Tab

Figure 9-25. Edit Frame Window, Detected Cards Tab (Integrator

Gold Only)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 311

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-26. Edit Frame Window, Detected Cards Tab (Panacea

Only)

The Detected Cards tab will contain information on all modules found
Note in the frame during a system poll. This information is read-only. The tab
The same elevators and back will show a graphic of the Integrator frame filled with the cards
panels are used for different reported by the frame. Each card can be selected by clicking on it with
cards. For example, a video the mouse. The detailed properties of the selected card will be shown on
output back panel can be used
the right side of the dialog box.
with an analog video output
card or an SDI output card. For all routers except for Panacea models, the router properties
Also, the same elevator is used displayed include
for analog video, SDI, and
AES-EBU matrices. Detailed • Type of card (e.g., analog video)
information about which • Whether the card is an input or an output card
combinations are valid is not
presented here. Please refer • Type of elevator to which the card is connected (all cards of the
questions to a Customer Service same matrix should report the same elevator type; if not, the card
representative. that is not reporting is probably inoperable)
• Type of back panel attached to the card (this should match the
card type)
• FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be
useful to Customer Service when diagnosing a problem)
• Whether the optional output monitoring card is installed in the
selected slot.

312 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• Controls that present information about the daughter cards

installed in the selected slot (this information varies for each card
type and will not be detailed here; it may, however, be useful to
Customer Service)
For Panacea models, the router properties displayed include
• Type of I/O card (e.g., analog video)
• Type of back panel interface:
• Coaxial
• Balanced
• Balanced with 600Ω
• FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be
useful to Customer Service when diagnosing a problem)
• Controls that present information about the daughter cards
installed in the selected slot (this information varies for each card
type and will not be detailed here; however, it may be useful to
Customer Service)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 313

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Monitoring Matrices Tab (Platinum Frames Only)

Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and
outputs as a set of inputs on a separate matrix (which is called the
monitor matrix). It allows you to monitor what comes out of a particular
output. If you have a monitoring module installed in your Platinum
router, you can set up monitoring information here. You can monitor
input signals, output signals, or both input and output signals. You can
set up a matrix monitoring configuration in one of two ways: via the
Quick-Physical I/O selection list, or by manually inputting the
information desired. (If you prefer to set up a monitoring matrix that
will be automatically created and updated, do not choose this option.
See page 81 through page 82 for information on having RouterMapper
create a monitoring matrix automatically.)
To “quick-add” a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix
to the list box.
2. In the Quick-Physical I/O Selection List box, highlight the name of
the matrix to assign to the monitoring configuration list.
3. Click the appropriate radio button to select input or output
monitoring, or both.
4. Click Assign. The selected matrix will appear in the Monitoring
Matrix Configuration list box.
• To remove the matrix, click Delete.
• To edit matrix information, highlight the name of the matrix
assigned to the monitoring configuration list, and then click
Advanced. The Monitor Matrix dialog box will appear. (See
step 5 through step 6, starting on page 315, for more
instructions on completing this dialog box.)
5. Click Next. The Control Settings window will appear.
To manually create a monitoring matrix, follow these steps:
1. Click Add. RouterMapper will assign a default monitoring matrix
to the list box.
2. At the matrix list control area, highlight the desired input and/or
output module slots to include in the selected monitor matrix.
3. Right-click the mouse, and select Assign to Monitor Matrix.
4. Click Advanced. The Monitor Matrix dialog box will appear.

314 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Figure 9-27. Monitor Matrix Dialog Box

5. In the Properties box, make the following selections:

• Select the desired level on which this matrix will operate from
the drop-down list box.
• If you want input monitoring offset, set the desired input offset
number.
• If you want output monitoring offset, set the desired output
offset number.
• Select a display color.
6. In the On-Download Initial Source box, select one of the following
options:
• Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or
disconnect outputs after download.
• Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in
the matrix areas after download.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 315

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be

connected to the first input in the matrix.
If you have added more than one matrix, and some of the same
modules are assigned to both matrixes, an asterisk will appear to the
left of the name (see Figure 9-28 on page 316). The asterisk means
that this particular matrix will provide virtual output monitoring.
See the Platinum Frame and Modules Manual Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Manual for more information on real
and virtual output monitoring.

Figure 9-28. Virtual Monitoring Indicators

316 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Firmware Tab
(Platinum Frames Only)

Figure 9-29. Firmware Tab (Platinum Routers Only)

The Firmware tab allows you to quickly update to the most current
Platinum firmware versions for detected, selected modules; or for all
detected, installed modules.
To update the firmware for a Platinum module, follow these steps.
1. Download the firmware upgrade to the PC where the update
procedure will be performed.
You can check for firmware upgrades on our Web site at
www.broadcast.harris.com/leitch>downloads. We recommend that
you download the upgrade to <drive>\Leitch\RtrWrks\bin32\Firm-
ware, as this is the location where RouterMapper first looks for
firmware upgrade files.
2. Perform a Poll on the selected frame to obtain the latest detected
modules and firmware versions. (For information on how to
perform a poll, see “Adding a Frame by Polling” on page 76.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 317

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

3. At the RouterMapper main menu window, double-click the name of

the frame that contains the modules you want to upgrade. If
necessary, switch to the Firmware tab.
4. From the selected matrix list, click the modules you want to
upgrade. Multiple modules may be selected using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys to select multiple modules).
5. Right-click the mouse to bring up the pop-up menu, and then click
Note Assign. The selected module names will appear in the firmware
A quick way to determine the upgrade list.
installed firmware version is to
Note that in the firmware upgrade list, the slot location and name of
“hover” the mouse over the
module icon to the right of the the module appears, as well as the installed firmware version of that
module name. module and the version number for any known upgrades.
If you downloaded your firmware upgrade file to a directory
different from the recommended one:
• Right-click on the appropriate module in the firmware list. A
pop-up menu will appear.
• Click Change Firmware.
• Use standard Windows navigation techniques to move to the
location of the firmware upgrade file you want to use.
6. In the firmware list, click on the module you want to upgrade, and
then click Upgrade.
OR
Click Upgrade All to upgrade all of the modules at once.
7. The Firmware Upgrade message window will appear, which will
display the steps in the upgrade process as they occur.

318 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Figure 9-30. Firmware Upgrade Message Window

If you need to stop the upgrade procedure, click Cancel. The

window will display a message that says “Aborting firmware
upgrade...Please wait.”
8. When the process is complete, click the Close (X) box in the upper
right corner of the Firmware Upgrade message window.
9. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 319

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Control Card(s) Tab and Control Settings Tab

The Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s)
that are installed in the frame. This information is presented as an aid in
troubleshooting a system. The information is updated on every Poll of
the control system.
Platinum routers have a Control Settings tabbed dialog box that is
somewhat different from other types of matrix format editing. See
page 321 for a picture of the Platinum Control Settings tab and a
corresponding explanation of how to fill in the card fields.
Panacea routers have a Control Card tabbed dialog box that is
somewhat different from other types of matrix format editing. See
page 333 for a picture of the Panacea Control Card tab and a
corresponding explanation of how to fill in the card fields.

320 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Control Settings Tab (Platinum Frames)

Figure 9-31. Control Settings Tab

This dialog box allows you to set up identifiers needed for file transfer
protocol (FTP) functions, I/O sync and reference settings, and
communications settings.
1. For FTP functions, fill in these fields in the Platinum Frame
Identification box:
• Select the frame ID (the frame’s physical address) from the
drop-down list box.
• In the Frame Name box, enter the frame’s descriptive name.
• In the Frame IP Address box, enter the frame’s IP address. This
is necessary for transferring or upgrading files via an FTP site.
(The actual frame IP address is set up via CoPilot or card-edge
controls.)
• In the Username box, enter the user name used for FTP
transfers. (The actual username is set up or changed via
CoPilot.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 321

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• In the Password box, enter the user name used for FTP
transfers. (The actual password is set up or changed via
CoPilot.)
• In the Confirm box, re-enter the password you just entered.
2. If you want to configure the sync settings:
a. In the Platinum I/O Sync and References box, click the Sync...
Note button. The Configure I/O Sync Settings window will appear.
The I/O Type drop-down list
box appears when the you select
Standard radio button. The Sync
Pulse Delay box appears when
you select the Advanced radio
button.

Figure 9-32. Configure I/O Sync Settings Window

b. You can configure separate settings for up to four separate sync

ports. For each port, choose the following settings:
• Choose the desired sync (1 through 4) from the drop-down list
box.
• Enter a name by which to identify a particular sync port.
• Choose Auto, Standard, or Advanced mode (see Table 4-3 on
page 99 for sync port mode selection descriptions)
c. Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box.
3. If you will be using SNMP with your Platinum router, click on the
SNMP... button. The SNMP Agent Options window will appear.
• See page 323 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options
window.

322 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• See page 324 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or

deleting Trap Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 326 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 328 for a description of the System fields.
4. To set up license keys and Map Names information settings for
your Platinum router, click Advanced.... The Advanced Settings
window will appear.
• See page 329 for more information about the Advanced
Settings window.
• See page 330 for Map Names fields.
• See page 331 for a description of Licensing fields.
SNMP Agent Options Window
The SNMP Agent Options window is a dialog box that allows you to set
up all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three separate group boxes are
displayed on this window:
• Trap Destination IP Addresses (see page 324)
• SNMP Agent (see page 326)
• System (see page 328)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 323

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Figure 9-33. SNMP Agent Options Window

Trap Destination IP Addresses

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add,
modify, or delete SNMP Trap Destinations.
• To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:
a. Click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box will appear.

324 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Figure 9-34. Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box

b. Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the

SNMP Trap destination.
c. Change the network port number displayed to the one desired
for the SNMP Trap destination. The port number can be from 1
to 65535.
d. From the Community drop-down list box, select the community
name.
e. From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version
that you would like to use for the SNMP Trap.
f. Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds)
before an SNMP Trap is sent to a manager if the initial attempt
failed.
g. Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to
a manager if the initial attempt failed.
• To delete an SNMP Trap destination:
a. At the SNMP Agent Options Window list control, select the IP
address for the SNMP Trap Destination you want to delete.
Multiple devices may be selected using standard Windows
selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple devices).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 325

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

b. Click the Delete button. The IP address(es) will be removed

from the list.
OR
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You will
be prompted to confirm the deletion.
c. Click OK to return to the RouterMapper main menu window.
SNMP Agent
Table 9-3 shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed
in the SNMP Agent group box.

Table 9-3. SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Window

Items Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The
network port used by the SNMP
agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in
SNMP terms, a “Get” operation has
to match this setting in the MIB
browser in order to read information
from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in
SNMP terminology, a “Set”
operation has to match this setting in
a MIB browser in order to write
information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps
are sent if the read or write
community does not match between
the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address pop-up
dialog box (see Figure 9-35)

The Managers Address pop-up dialog box allows you to specify the
addresses of the managers whose requests will be processed by the
SNMP Agent.

326 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Figure 9-35. Manager Address Dialog Box

• To add a manager address:

a. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b. Click Add.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.
• To modify a manager address:
a. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b. Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box
will appear.
c. Modify the manager address as desired.
d. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.
• To delete a manager address:
a. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses
may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques
(hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
addresses).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 327

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

b. Click the Remove button. The IP address(es) will be removed

from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You
will be prompted to confirm the deletion.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options window.
Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently
selected in the Navigation window. This is user-defined information
that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when
it is retrieved by a MIB browser. Table 9-4 shows the fields and
function descriptions for the items listed in the System box.

Table 9-4. System Fields of SNMP Options Window

Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is “Leitch
Agent”
Location Device physical location
Contact Device contact person
Name Device name

328 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Advanced Settings
The Advanced Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows you
to view the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s
configuration information; and displays information and settings for
Map Names and license options.

Figure 9-36. Advanced Settings Window

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 329

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Map Names Tab

The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame’s source
and destination “Names Mapping” file based on the current logical
RouterMapper database.

Figure 9-37. Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to
transfer the Map Names file to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer
(based on RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication
setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer
Protocol. (You will be asked to log in before the file transfer is
initiated.)
• From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the
Map Names file to be generated.
• With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on
the current logical database.
• With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based
on an existing file.

330 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• When you click the Update button, the frame will reboot after the
file has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted for the frame
to use the new transfer file.
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses.

Figure 9-38. License Tab

The License tab allows you to make the following settings:

• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to
transfer the license key to the frame.
• With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer
(based on RouterMapper’s serial or TCP/IP communication
setting).
• With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer
Protocol. (You will be asked to log in before the file transfer is
initiated.)
• In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation
code you received from your Leitch representative.
• When you click the Update button, the frame will reboot after the
file has been transmitted. A frame must be rebooted before the
SNMP license will be recognized.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 331

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Control Card Tab (Integrator Frames)

Figure 9-39. Edit Frame Window, Control Card(s) Tab

The Control Card tab window shows information for the bottom control
card (CPU A) on the left, and the top control card (CPU B) on the right.
If both control cards are installed, the Present indicator will be “Yes”
for both. However, only one of the two control cards will be active at
one time. Only the details for the active card will be shown on the
Control Card(s) tab.
The mode of the active control card will be either DIP switch or
Program. This mode is set via the DIP switches on the front of the
control card. See the frame manual for DIP switch settings. However,
note that the frame must be in Program mode to operate with a
downloaded configuration. The firmware version and FPGA version
controls will display the versions of the software installed on the active
control card.
The DIP switch controls will show the current positions of the control
card’s DIP switches.
• DIP Switch, Left is the leftmost of the two DIP switches on the
front of the control.

332 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• DIP Switch, “Right” is the switch on the right front of the control
card. A “0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF)
position. A “1” indicates that a switch is in the ON position.
• DIP Switch, “Internal” indicates the settings of the DIP switch
located on the center of the card (this switch is only visible when
the card is removed from the frame).

Control Card (Panacea Frames)

Figure 9-40. Edit Frame Window, Control Card(s) Tab (Panacea

Only)

The Panacea Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control
card(s) that are installed in the frame. This information is read-only
(except for the network programmed section) and is presented as an aid
in troubleshooting a system. The information is updated on every Poll
of the control system.
The dialog box shows information for the control card on the left, and
the control card's network and configuration files setup on the right. If
the control card is installed, the details for the active card will be shown
on the Control Card tab.
• The mode of the active control card will be DIP Switch, Simple
Partitioning, or Advanced Partitioning. This mode is set via the DIP

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 333

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

switches on the front of the control card. (See the Panacea Series
Frame and Modules Configuration Installation and Configuration
Manual for DIP switch settings.) The frame must be in Program
mode to operate with a downloaded configuration.
• The Firmware Version and FPGA Version controls will display the
versions of the software installed on the active control card.
• The DIP switch controls will show the current positions of the
control card's DIP switches.
• DIP Switch, “Top” is the top switch of the three DIP switches on
the front of the control.
• DIP Switch, “Center” is the DIP switch in the middle.
• DIP Switch, “Bottom” is the last switch of the control card.
• A “0” indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A
“1” indicates that a switch is in the (or ON) position.
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections: the
Active (read-only) and the programmed (editable) settings.
Programmed settings include
• IP address
• Gateway address
• Subnet Mask address
• MAC address
Only IP, Gateway, and Subnet Mask addresses are configurable by
clicking on the Programmed radio button.
Click on the SNMP button to set up SNMP Agent settings.
• See page 138 for a description of the SNMP Agent Options
window.
• See page 138 for a instructions on adding, modifying, or deleting
Trap Destination IP Addresses.
• See page 140 for a description of the SNMP Agent fields.
• See page 142 for a description of the System fields.
Click on the Advanced… button to view the configuration file names
that are used to store a frame's configuration information. Tabs on the
Advanced... button allow you to set up a frame’s virtual X-Y settings,
Time Server (for Web support) and Map Names files.
• See page 142 for a description of the Config Files tab.

334 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• See page 143 for a description of the Virtual XY tab.

• See page 144 for a description of the Time Servers tab.
• See page 145 for a description of the Map Names tab.
• See page 146 for a description of the License tab.
Figure 9-41 on page 335 shows a picture of the Configuration Files tab
that appears after you click on the Advanced... button.

Figure 9-41. Panacea Control Card Window, Config Files Tab

Selected

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 335

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

I/O Hardware Module Tab (Panacea Frames Only)

The I/O Hardware Module window is a tabbed dialog box that allows
Note you to change hardware for a selected Panacea matrix. All of the tabs
The I/O Hardware Module tab is (Destinations, Sources, Alarm, and General) can be selected by clicking
displayed only if the Panacea on the appropriate tab. Information on using those tabs can be found in
has an enhanced resource card pages 336 through 341.
installed.
You can “travel” to the I/O Hardware Module window via the Edit
Frame > Router Frame path. At the Router Frame window, click on the
Hardware... button to reach the I/O Hardware Module window.
You can change the input/output hardware for a Panacea matrix via the
I/O Hardware Module tab dialog box display (see Figure 9-42 on
page 336).

General Tab

Figure 9-42. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Window, General

Tab

336 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

The Synchronous Timing Mode, Source to be Used as a Restore Source

after a Frame Reset, and Module Options can be changed from the
General tab. Fill in the desired information as described below.
To change the synchronized timing mode, click on either the Auto,
Standard, or Advance radio buttons.
• In Auto mode, the switch point is determined by the detected
sync type only based on SMPTE RP-168 specifications.
• The Standard mode provides the option to pick a standard timing
reference.
• The Advance mode provides the option to enter a take delay in
milliseconds.
To change the source to be used as a Restore Source after a frame
reset, select an option from the Misc. drop-down list box.
If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper
check box in the Module Options area. The matrix types with
programmable I/O submodule are listed in Table 4-5 on page 133.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 337

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Alarm Tab

Figure 9-43. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Window, Alarm Tab

The Alarm tab allows you to enable or disable any I/O alarms that the
frame supports.
Click on the I/O Module drop-down list box to select an I/O module for
which you want to display the extended alarm names.
The main list box shows all available extended alarms in the matrix.
To enable or disable an alarm type, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired alarm.
2. Click on either the Enable or Disable button.
To enable/disable more than one alarm type, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
desired alarms.
2. Click on either the Enable or Disable button.

338 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Sources Tab

Figure 9-44. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Window, Sources

Tab

The Sources tab displays the EQ bypass settings for a matrix. You can
turn the EQ settings on or off at this tab.
The EQ By-Pass Settings list box shows all sources’ EQ bypass settings
available in the matrix.
To turn a source's EQ By-Pass on or off, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired source.
2. Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list
box.
To turn the EQ By-Pass of more than one source on or off at the
same time, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
desired sources.
2. Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list
box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 339

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Destinations Tab

Figure 9-45. Panacea I/O Hardware Module Window,

Destinations Tab

The Destinations tab allows you to change the reclocker and slew rate
settings for a particular destination.
The Reclocker Settings list box on the left side of the tab shows all
destinations’ reclocker settings available in the matrix.
To change the reclocker setting of a destination, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired destination.
2. Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.
To change the reclocker setting of more than one destination at one
time, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
desired destinations.
2. Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.

340 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

The Slew Rate Settings list box on the right side of the tab shows all
destinations’ Slew Rates available in the matrix.
To change the slew rate of a destination, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired destination.
2. Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list
box.
To change the slew rate of more than one destination at the same
time, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
desired destinations.
2. Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list
box.

Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings

Parametric settings are used to change clean switch and quiet switch
Note support settings.
The clean switch option is Panacea parametric settings can be configured from the RouterMapper
available on Panacea serial
main window pop-up menu display. You can only configure the
digital video routing switchers.
The quiet switch option is parametric settings for a Panacea frame with matrices that are
available on Panacea AES configured with clean and/or quiet switch support. The matrix types
digital audio routing switchers. with programmable I/O submodule are listed in Table 4-5 (page 133).
Both clean switch and quiet
switch options are available on To select the parametric settings option, follow these steps:
Panacea P-SCQ and P-HSCQ 1. At the RouterMapper main window, highlight the name of the
routing switchers.
Panacea router that you want to modify.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.
3. Scroll down to the Parametric Settings... option; then, click
<Enter>.
4. The Parametric Settings tab will appear.

Parametric Settings Tab

The Parametric Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows you
Note to change the parametric settings for a selected Panacea matrix. The tab
If you are in Demo mode, you choices of this window will differ, based on the matrix type you choose.
will not be able to access the See Table 4-5 on page 133 for information on matrix types and
Parametric Settings tab. supported I/O submodules.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 341

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

• Clean Switch tab information appears as follows:

• Information on the Clean Switch tab appears on page 342.
• Information on the Clean Switch tab for P-SCQ and
P-HSCQ routing switchers appears on page 345.
• Information on the Quiet Switch tab appears on page 344.
• Information on the Transitions tab for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ
routing switchers appears on page 346.
• Information on increased control over individual audio channels
appears on page 352.
Any of the tabs (Clean Switch, Quiet Switch, or Transition) can be
selected by clicking on the appropriate tab at the Parameter Settings

Clean Switch Tab

Note
Corresponding information for
P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing
switchers appears on page 345.

Figure 9-46. Clean Switch Tab

You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean

switch submodule at this tab.

342 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is
located.
• The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.
To include or remove the clean switching support of a source, follow
these steps:
1. Select the desired source.
2. To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click on either
the Enable or Disable button.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at
one time:
• Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
desired sources.
• Click on either the Enable or Disable button.
3. Click on the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4. Click on the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and
horizontal timing, and the status of the source’s auto timing.
The Querying Status box displays the current source query/set
operation.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 343

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Quiet Switch Tab

Note
Corresponding information for
P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing
switchers appears on page 346.

Figure 9-47. Quiet Switch Tab

You can include or remove support for a Panacea’s quiet switch

submodule at this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is
located.
The Quiet Switch Destination list box shows all available destinations
in the matrix.
To include or remove the quiet switching support of a destination,
follow these steps:
1. Click on the check box to the left of the destination name of a
desired destination (the “check” mark will toggle back and forth).
2. Move the slide bar from left to right to increase the fade duration/
time (in milliseconds).
A module must have valid reference frequency to set a correct fade
time. The following frequencies are valid:
• 32 kHz

344 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• 44.1 kHz
• 48 kHz
3. Click on the Set button to invoke the changes.
4. Click on the Refresh button to get the current destination’s quiet
switch support and quiet switch fade duration.
The Querying Status box displays the current destination query/set
operation.

Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)

Figure 9-48. Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)

You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean

switch submodule at this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is
located.
The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.
1. Select the desired source.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 345

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

2. To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click on either

the Enable or Disable button.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at
one time:
• Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting
desired sources.
• Click on either the Enable or Disable button.
3. Click on the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4. Click on the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and
horizontal timing, and the status of the source’s auto timing.
The Status box displays the current source query/set operation.

Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)

Figure 9-49. Transition Tab

You can set up or change audio and video transition selections for a
Panacea clean switch/quiet switch at this tab.

346 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

1. At the Matrix ID drop-down list box select either 0 or 1:

• Select 0 for a 1RU setup
• Select 0 for the top frame in a 2RU setup
• Select 1 for the bottom frame in a 2RU setup
2. At the Output combo box in the Reclocker Settings group box,
make these choices:
a. In the first drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
• Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
Note • Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.
A matrix’s physical output
corresponds to its location on
the back of the frame.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 347

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

b. In the Reclocker drop-down list box, select the actual duration

frequency you want.

Table 9-5. SD Format Actual Duration Frequency

Valid Settings
Reference
Standard
Standard
ANY • Auto mode
• Delay Auto mode
NTSC • 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
PAL • 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)

Table 9-6. HD Format Actual Duration Frequency

Valid Settings
Reference
Standard
Standard
ANY • Auto mode
• Delay Auto mode
NTSC • 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
PAL • 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-59.9 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
720p-59.9 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
1080i-50.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-60.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
720p-60.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)

348 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

3. At the Video Transition Group box, make these choices:

a. In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of
transition you want to use:
• Select Cross Fade to perform a dissolve from current
source to next source.
• Select Cut to cut from current source immediately into next
source.
• Select Cut Fade to perform a cut from current source and
fade to next source.
• Select Fade Cut to perform a fade from current source to
black, and cut into next source.
• Select V Fade to perform a fade-to-black from current
source and a fade-from-black to next source.
b. For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following
(you cannot do both):
• In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during
which you want the transition to occur. RouterMapper will
automatically adjust the number of corresponding seconds
it will take.
OR
• Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the
number of seconds it will take for the transition to occur.
RouterMapper will automatically adjust the number of
corresponding frames it will take.
c. If you want audio processing, click the Enable Audio
Processing check box.
d. If you want audio-follow-video, click in the Audio Follow
check box. This will allow an audio signal associated with any
given video signal to be recorded, switched, or mixed with that
video signal. If you make this section, skip to step 5.
4. If you do not want audio-follow-video, at the Audio Transition
Group box, make these choices:
a. In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of
transition you want to use:

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 349

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Table 9-7. Transition Types

Selection Function
Cross Fade Dissolves from current source to next
source
Cut Fade Cuts from current source and fades to
next source
Fade Cut Fades from current source to black
and cuts into next source
Hard Cut Cuts from current source immediately
Soft Cut into next source
V Fade Fades-to-black from current source
and fades-from-black to next source

b. For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following

(you cannot do both):
• In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during
which you want the transition to occur. RouterMapper will
automatically adjust the number of corresponding seconds
it will take.
OR
• Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the
number of seconds it will take for the transition to occur.
RouterMapper will automatically adjust the number of
corresponding frames it will take.
5. Make one of the following selections:
Caution • Click the Advanced button to access advanced audio processing
Audio transition settings will be settings.
disabled if all PGM 1 and PGM
2 channels have audio The Advanced button will take you to these audio processing
processing set to OFF (i.e., the settings tabs: Audio Gain, Audio Effect, and Audio Source. See
audio processing check box not page 352 for more detailed information on using the advanced
selected). See “Audio audio gain, audio effect, and audio source tabs for more precise
Processing Settings” on page
352 for more information.
audio processing settings.
• Click Restore Defaults to set all transition settings back to the
factory defaults.
• Click Set to send the changes you made in the Transition tab to
the frame.

350 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

• Click Refresh to reset the tab entries to their current setting from
the frame.
6. Click OK to leave the Parametric Settings window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 351

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Audio Processing Settings

The audio processing settings allow you to have increased control over
individual audio channels. These settings provide you with selections
beyond the basic audio transition types provided in the Transition tab.
To access these advanced settings, click on the Advanced button on the
Transition tab.

Audio Gain

Figure 9-50. Audio Gain Tab

The Audio Gain tab allows you more precise control of the strength of
the audio signal. To control the audio gain, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
• Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
• Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.

352 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

2. Select the radio button next to the group you want to control.
Note (Always make sure that the Audio Processing check box is
A group consists of four audio selected.) Each group contains four separate channels.
channels, as defined in SMPTE
3. For each channel in the group that you want to adjust, move the
272M and SMPTE 299M.
corresponding slider bar up and down. You can adjust the slider bar
between 6 dbV (the maximum voltage expressed in decibels you
can choose) and -INF (negative infinity, or no audio output). Any
negative number (that is, a number less than 0) should be preceded
by a minus sign.
OR
If you know the exact amount by which you want to increase or
decrease the gain, enter the number into the box at the bottom of the
slider bar.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each group that you want to adjust.
Note 5. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Gain tab to
If you do not want to include the the frame, or click Refresh to reset the tab entries to the default
audio group in the output’s
settings from the frame.
audio processing, deselect
(uncheck) the Audio Group 6. Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings window.
Present In Output” check box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 353

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Audio Effects

Figure 9-51. Audio Effects Tab

The Audio Effects tab allows you change the embedded audio for a
given video signal on the designated output.
To control the audio effects, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
• Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
• Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.
2. Select the radio button next to the group you want to control.
(Always make sure that the Audio Processing check box is
selected.) Each group contains four separate channels.
3. At the Channel 1 & 2 drop-down list box, select the type of channel
signal effect you want. (See Table 9-8 on page 355 for a list of
effects and their corresponding results.)

354 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

Table 9-8. Channel Signal Effects

Channel Signal Result
Copy Left to Right Copies signal from left channel to
right channel
Copy Right to Left Copies signal from right channel to
left channel
Mute Channel No audio signal
None Allows audio group to pass through
both channel pairs without audio
effects; any transitions, levels, and/or
sources will take effect (embedding
and de-embedding will take place)
Swap Left and Right Switches signal from left channel to
right channel

4. At the Channel 3 & 4 drop-down list box, select the type of channel
signal effect you want. (See Table 9-8 for a list of effects and their
corresponding results.)
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each group that you want to adjust.
Note 6. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Effects tab to
If you do not want to include the the frame, or click Refresh to reset the tab entries to the default
audio group in the output’s
settings from the frame.
audio processing, deselect
(uncheck) the Audio Group 7. Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings window.
Present In Output” check box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 355

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

Audio Source

Figure 9-52. Audio Source Tab

The Audio Source tab allows you to map input signals of the audio
channels to a video signal. To set the audio source(s) for a video
signal, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select PGM 1 (if the matrix’s
physical output is 1) or PGM 2 (if the matrix’s physical output is 5):
2. Select the radio button next to the group you want to control.
(Always make sure that the Audio Processing check box is
selected.) Each group contains four separate channels.
3. From the Channel 1 drop-down list box, select the audio channel
for the video source you selected at the Transitions tab. This will
map the input signals of audio channels on a video signal to the
audio channels of the output.

356 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Router Frame

4. Repeat step 3 for each channel and/or group that you want to adjust.
Note 5. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Source tab to
If you do not want to include the the frame, or click Refresh to reset the tab entries to the default
audio group in the output’s
settings from the frame.
audio processing, deselect
(uncheck) the Audio Group 6. Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings window.
Present In Output” check box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 357

Chapter 9: Editing a Frame Definition

358 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 10
Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Overview
Use the Edit Button Function dialog box to assign functions to
Note user-definable selection keys on the ABA, RCP-p, and Opus-embedded
You can access the Edit Button ABA control panels. The following topics are explained in this chapter:
Function dialog box by
• “Assigning Button Functions” on page 360
right-clicking on any button at
the Edit Panel dialog box. • “Creating an Alarm Key” on page 383
• “Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key” on page 381
• “Creating a Category/Index Key” on page 366
• “Creating a Command Select Key” on page 372
• “Creating a Crosspoint Select Key” on page 365
• “Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key” on page 392
• “Creating a Destination Select Key” on page 364
• “Creating a Function Key” on page 374
• “Creating a Lock Key” on page 378
• “Creating an On-Air Swap Key” on page 394
• “Creating a Page Key” on page 377
• “Creating a Panel Status Key” on page 376
• “Creating a Parametric Key” on page 395
• “Creating a Protect Key” on page 380
• “Creating a Salvo Select Key” on page 367
• “Creating a Source Alarm Select Key” on page 390
• “Creating a Source Select Key” on page 363

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 359

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Assigning Button Functions

Figure 10-1. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog includes a drop-down list box that is
used to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group
that is used to define the specific parameters of the button. The
appearance of the Properties group will depend on the type of button
selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:
1. If you haven’t done so already, set up a control panel (see Chapter
5: “Adding Router Control Panels” for information on how to
perform this task).
2. In the RouterMapper main window, highlight the control panel
name, then click Edit. The Edit Panel window will appear.
3. Click on the tab (e.g., Sources, Destinations, Auxiliary Keys) that
contains the buttons for which you want to assign functions.
4. Right-click on the specific button for which you want to assign a
function. The Edit Button Function dialog box (Figure 10-1) will
appear.

360 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Assigning Button Functions

5. Select the function from the drop-down list box. The Properties
group on the Edit Button Function dialog box will change when the
selection is made. Possible button functions are shown in
Table 10-1 on page 361.
6. Select the button properties from the options available in the
Properties group.
7. Click Done. You will return to the Edit Panel window.

Table 10-1. Button Functions Programmable via RouterMapper

Control Panels
(• = available)

RCP-16×1SBAp

RCP-12×2BAp
RCP-ABA
Button Functions

RCP-p
Alarm (page 383)
Monitors specified hardware alarms
• • •
Breakaway-Follow (page 381)
Functions as either breakaway or follow button
• • •
Category (page 366)
Functions as additional category/index key
•
Command (page 372)
Functions as a command key
• • • •
Crosspoint (page 365)
Functions as a crosspoint select key
• •
Destination (page 364)
Functions as additional destination select key
• • •
Destination Alarm (page 392)
Allows use of a push button panel to select logical destination(s) for logical crosspoint • • •
switch(es); provides capability to monitor specified hardware alarms
Function Button (page 374)
Functions as a function button
• • • •
Locks (page 378)
Prevents all users from changing the destination • • • •
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCP-p panels do not support this feature.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 361

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Table 10-1. Button Functions Programmable via RouterMapper (Continued)

Control Panels
(• = available)

RCP-16×1SBAp

RCP-12×2BAp
RCP-ABA
Button Functions

RCP-p
None
Disabled
• • • •
On-Air Swap (page 394)
Exchanges sources on one destination with sources on another destination
•
Page (page 377)
Functions as a page key
•
Panel Status (page 376)
Functions as a panel status key
• •
Parametric (page 395)
Allows selection of individual parameters affecting inputs and outputs (currently •
available for P-R(L)CP-32X8CQp panels only)
Protects (page 380)
Prevents all users from changing the destination except the user who initiated the
Protect
• • • •
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCP-p panels do not support this feature.)
Salvo (page 367)
Functions as a salvo select key
• • • •
Source (page 363)
Functions as an additional source select key
• •
Source Alarm Select (page 390)
Allows use of a push button panel to select logical source(s) for logical crosspoint • • •
switch(es); provides capability to monitor specified hardware alarms

362 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Source Select Key

Creating a Source Select Key

1. Select the Source option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
list box.
2. The Edit Button Function dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-2. Creating an Additional Source Select Key

3. Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the
source to associate with the key.
4. Scroll through the list and select the desired source.
5. Click Done.
• Use a Status-Only Source Select key to create a monitoring
Note panel that is intended to display, but not control, the status of a
On RCP-p series panels, you router. If Status Only is checked, the button will light when the
will also have an option to select source is active, but the router will not be affected if you press
Status-Only or Joystick the button.
Override (these options will be
disabled on RCP-ABA series • Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary
panels). changes. While you hold down the button, the source will be
switched. When you release the button, the router will switch
back to the previous source.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 363

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Destination Select Key

1. Select the Destination option from the Edit Button Function
Note drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.
If this is the only change or the
last change to be made to the
panel, you can download the
new settings by clicking
Download on the Edit Panel
screen. To print new key caps,
click Print Key Caps.

Figure 10-3. Creating an Additional Destination Select Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select
the destination that will be associated with the key.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list and select the desired destination.
4. Click Done.

364 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Crosspoint Select Key

Creating a Crosspoint Select Key

A crosspoint is a connection between a specific source and a specific
destination. Whenever a crosspoint key is pressed on an ABA panel, the
associated source and destination will be connected.
To create an additional Crosspoint Select key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Crosspoint option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-4. Creating an Additional Crosspoint Select Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select
the crosspoint destination.
3. Scroll through the list and select the desired destination.
4. Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the
crosspoint source.
5. Scroll through the list and select the desired source.
6. Click Done.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 365

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

• Use a Status-Only Crosspoint Select key to create a monitoring

Note panel that is intended to display the status of a router, but not
On RCP-p series panels, you control it. If Status Only is checked, the button will light when
will also have an option to select the crosspoint is active, but the router will not be affected if you
Status-Only or Joystick press the button.
Override (these options will be
disabled on RCP-ABA series • Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary
panels). changes. While you hold down the button, the crosspoint will
be switched. When you release the button, the router will
switch back to the previous crosspoint.

Creating a Category/Index Key

(ABA Series Panels Only)
1. Select the Category option from the Edit Button Function
Note drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.
For more detailed information
on category indexing, click here
see “Understanding and
Managing Category/Indexing”
on page 250.

Figure 10-5. Creating an Additional

Category/index Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Category box to
select the category to associate with the key.
3. Scroll through the list and select the desired category.
4. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Index box to select
the index that will be associated with the key.

366 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Salvo Select Key

5. Scroll through the list and select the desired index.

6. Click Done.

Creating a Salvo Select Key

A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint operations that occur
Note simultaneously. Salvos can be used to store commonly used, complex
To add a new salvo, click the router setups involving multiple destinations for instant recall with one
Add button. To edit an existing button press. A salvo could be created, for example, that would send a
salvo, click Edit. The Salvo test signal to every monitor in an Edit Suite. Executing a salvo changes
Editor will open.
only the crosspoints defined by the salvo. Other crosspoint connections
in the system are not affected.
To create a Salvo Select key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Salvo option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
Note list box. The following dialog box will appear.
In newer version control panels,
the salvo button will light up
(tally) whenever the crosspoints
that are part of the salvo are
initiated, no matter where the
crosspoint Take occurs.

If any of the salvo’s crosspoints

change status, the salvo button
light will turn off. For more
information about control
panels, see the Programmable
Panel Series Configuration and
Operation Manual.

Figure 10-6. Creating a Salvo Select Key

2. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Salvo box to select
the salvo that will be associated with the key.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list and select the desired salvo.
4. Click Done.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 367

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Adding or Editing a Salvo

When creating a Salvo Select key, new salvos may be added and
existing salvos may be edited from the Edit Button Function dialog.
• To add a new salvo, click the Add button.
• To edit an existing salvo, click the Edit button.
The Salvo Editor window will appear (see Figure 10-7).

Figure 10-7. Adding a New Salvo

368 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Salvo Select Key

The Salvo Editor is an off-line RouterWorks matrix panel. The sources

and destinations in the database are displayed as a row of control
buttons along the top and right sides of the panel (sources on the top,
and destinations on the side). Each control button includes the source or
destination name and icon, although names and icons may not be
readable in full-screen view. For greater legibility, any portion of the
panel may be enlarged using the Zoom-In button.
Crosspoints on the panel are indicated via colored markers at the
intersection of the source and destination lines. The markers are
displayed as pie-shaped wedges that correspond to the level colors (for
information on assigning level colors, see page 196). For example:
• If a video level is assigned the color blue, a blue marker at the
intersection of a source and destination line indicates that the source
is connected to the destination on the video level.
• If more than one colored marker is present at an intersection, the
source is connected on each level displayed.
• If a source is selected on all levels in the system (AFV switching),
the marker will appear as a multicolored circle, consisting of all
colors of the active levels.
To select a crosspoint on the Salvo Editor screen, follow these steps:
1. Select the level(s) on which the source should be connected by
clicking on the appropriate level buttons (the level buttons are
located at the top of the window). If a button is colored, the level is
enabled and the source will be connected on that level.
2. Click the intersection of the source and destination lines. A colored
marker will appear.
A salvo may be defined in one of several ways. The Capture option
takes a “snapshot” view of the current state of the router and stores it as
a salvo. This salvo can then be edited (crosspoints added or deleted) as
needed.
A salvo may also be created by copying an existing salvo. The copied
salvo may serve as a starting point for the definition of the new salvo.
Crosspoints can be added or deleted as necessary.
A salvo may also be created “from scratch” by selecting the crosspoints
(the sources and destinations) on the off-line Salvo Editor panel.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 369

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

To capture the existing state of the router, follow these steps:

1. Assign an appropriate name to the new salvo by highlighting the
default name contained in the Name Edit box and typing a new
name in the box.
2. Click Capture at the Salvo Editor main window. The current router
crosspoint assignments will be copied to the off-line Salvo Editor
panel.
3. Edit the salvo displayed on the off-line panel by adding or deleting
crosspoint assignments as necessary.
4. Click Done to exit the Salvo Editor.
To add a crosspoint to a salvo, follow these steps:
Click at the intersection of the source and destination lines. The
crosspoint will be added to the salvo.
To delete a crosspoint from a salvo, follow these steps:
1. Position the cursor over the crosspoint to be deleted and click the
right mouse button. The Lock / Protect / Clear pop-up menu will
appear.
2. Select Clear. The crosspoint will be deleted.
OR
Select Clear All at the Salvo Editor window to clear all crosspoints.
To copy an existing salvo, follow these steps:
1. Click Copy at the Salvo Editor window. The Copy Salvo dialog
box will appear.
2. In the Copy Salvo From box, select the salvo that will be copied to
the new salvo. The new salvo name will already be displayed in the
Copy To box.
3. Click Overwrite to completely overwrite any crosspoints
previously selected in the new salvo. Any previously existing
crosspoints will be deleted from the new salvo.
OR
Click Merge to merge the two salvos. Existing crosspoints from
both salvos will be stored in the new salvo. No crosspoints will be
deleted.

370 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Salvo Select Key

Figure 10-8. Copying a Salvo

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 371

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Command Select Key

The Command Select key allows you to assign an arbitrary X-Y
command to a panel’s key. For details on X-Y commands, refer to your
Leitch/Harris Serial Protocol Reference, or contact Customer Service.
To create a Command Select key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Command option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-9. Creating a Command Select Key

2. Select the command that will be associated with the key by clicking
on the arrow located to the right of the Select Command box.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list.
4. Select the desired command.
5. Click Done.

Adding, Editing, or Deleting Commands

To add a command, follow these steps:
1. Click Add Command. A default name will appear in the Edit
Name box.
2. Type over the default name in the Edit Name box with a new name.

372 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Command Select Key

3. Select the type of command string you wish to use (ASCII or Hex)
by clicking on the appropriate radio button.
4. Enter the command string in the Edit Command box.
To edit a command, follow these steps:
1. Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to
the right of the Select Command box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the command to be edited.
4. Highlight the name and/or command string and type over with the
new information.
To delete a command, follow these steps:
1. Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to
the right of the Select Command box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the command to be deleted.
4. Click Delete.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 373

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Function Key

1. Select the Function option from the Edit Button Function
Note drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.
In the RCP-ID and
RCP-12×2BAp panels, several
radio button selections will be
“greyed” to indicate that they
are not available as an option.

Figure 10-10. Creating a Function Key

Figure 10-11. Creating a Function Key (RCP-IDe Panels)

374 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Function Key

2. Select the function that will be associated with the key by clicking
on the appropriate radio button. Available options are shown in
Table 10-2 on page 375.
Table 10-2. Edit Button Function Key Options
Option Description
Take Executes any preset crosspoint assignments
Panel Enable When enabled, causes the panel to function
normally; when disabled, source polls are
performed, but no crosspoint changes are made
Shift Requires you to press the <Shift> key to fire a salvo
(to prevent inadvertent execution of salvos)
Clear All Clears all preset crosspoint assignments
Back Space Clears the last preset crosspoint assignment entered
(not available on RCP-12×2BAp)
Scroll Up Increments the source by one
Scroll Down Decrements the source by one
Window Select* Allows you to select which panel window (display)
you want to preset
Window Clear * Allows you to clear any presets from a panel window
(display)
Page Up† Increments set-up button pages by one
Page Down† Decrements set-up button pages by one
Destination Status† Displays the status and bitmap of a particular
destination
Source Status† Displays the status and bitmap of the lowest level
source connected to a particular destination
* ABA panels only
†
RCP-IDe panels only

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 375

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Panel Status Key

A Panel Status key is used to indicate whether the control panel is
connected to a routing switcher. With a Panel Status key configured, the
router system will be polled periodically to determine if the panel is
connected. If the key on the control panel is lit, the panel is connected to
a router. If the key is not lit, the panel is not connected to a router.
Pressing a Panel Status key will have no effect on the router.
To create a Panel Status key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Panel Status option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-12. Creating a Panel Status Key

2. In the Poll Interval list box, select the time interval in seconds at
Note which the system should be polled. (For example, if “5” is selected,
Polling the system uses the router will be polled every 5 seconds.)
bandwidth, so the time interval
3. Click Done.
should be as long as possible to
save bandwidth for other
operations such as firing salvos.

376 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Page Key

Creating a Page Key

(ABA Series Panels Only)
Although ABA panels have only four display windows and can status a
limited number of levels at one time, it is possible to create multiple
pages, each with a different definition. For example, one page on an
ABA-XY panel might be configured to display the video, audio and
time code levels separately (one in each window); a second page could
be configured to display the video in one window, the left and right
channels of audio in one window, and the time code in the third
window.
To create multiple pages, first create a Page key.
To create a Page key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Page option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
Note list box. The following dialog box will appear.
You can also create Page keys
by double-clicking on any
selection button displayed on
the control panel bitmap on the
Windows + Paging tab.

Figure 10-13. Creating a Page Key

2. Click the up or down buttons to the right of the Number of Pages

box to select the number of pages to be included on this panel.
3. Click the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Page Number
box to select the page number that is to be associated with this
selection key.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 377

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

4. Scroll through the list of choices and select the appropriate page
number.

Creating a Lock Key

The Locks option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent
Caution inadvertent changes to the Destination. Locking a destination prevents
Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and anyone from changing the Destination.
4×1 RCP-p panels do not
support the Lock feature. To create a Lock key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Locks option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-14. Creating a Lock Key

378 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Page Key

Figure 10-15. Creating a Lock Key (RCP-IDe Panels)

2. Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio

button (any features not applicable to your panel will be greyed
out).
• Choose XY to allow a panel to lock the current selected
destination.
• Choose Dual to allow a panel to lock up to two specified
destinations.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 379

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Protect Key

The Protects option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent
Caution inadvertent changes to the Destination. With the Protects feature
Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and enabled, whoever enabled the Protect will be able to change the
4×1 RCP-p panels do not destination at will, but other users will be prevented from changing that
support the Protect feature. destination until the Protect is removed.
To create a Protect key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Protects option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-16. Creating a Protect Key

380 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

Figure 10-17. Creating a Protect Key (RCP-IDe Panels

2. Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio

button (any features not applicable to your panel will be greyed
out).
• Choose XY to allow a panel to protect the current selected
destination.
• Choose Dual to allow a panel to protect up to two specified
destinations.

Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

The Breakaway/Follow option defines a selection key to function as
either a Breakaway or a Follow key.
• A Breakaway key allows the operator at a push-button panel to
select only the levels assigned to the button. For example, if a
video breakaway button is pressed, and then a source is
selected, the source will be connected to the current destination,
but only on the video level. The audio level will be unaffected.
• A Follow key allows the operator to return the panel to AFV
mode with a single key press.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 381

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

To create a Breakaway/Follow key, follow these steps:

1. Select the Break-away/Follow option from the Edit Button
Function drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-18. Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

2. Click the appropriate radio button to select either Breakaway or

Follow.
3. For a breakaway button, also select the levels that will be controlled
by the button.
4. The lowest level will be statused.

382 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating an Alarm Key

Creating an Alarm Key

(RCP-IDe, RCP-32×8p, 16×2CS, and 32×2CS Panels Only)
The Alarm option allows you to monitor specified hardware alarms.
To create an alarm key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down
list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-19. Creating an Alarm Key

2. In the Edit Name box, type over the default name with a new name.
3. Click the Configure... button. The Edit Source Alarm list box will
open to allow you to define an alarm definition for the new alarm
key. (See “Using the Alarm Editor” for more information about
using this function.)
4. After the Alarm Editor list box returns you to the Edit Button
Function list box, click OK to accept all changes and additions.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 383

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Using the Alarm Editor

Figure 10-20. Edit Source Alarm List Box

The Edit Source Alarm list box shows the alarm type(s) for an
associated alarm key. That alarm key will be monitored by the
push-button panel.
The list box also displays the following types of information about
existing items:
• Device ID
• Device type
• Level
• Alarm type
• Alarm description

Adding Alarm Types

To add an alarm type, follow these steps:
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, click the Add... button. The Add
Alarm Entry dialog box will appear. (The Add Alarm Entry dialog
box defaults to a “General” detection style.)
• Use the “General” default detection style (Figure 10-21) for all
panels (except ABA panels) when you want to monitor alarms
for an entire frame.

384 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating an Alarm Key

• Use the “Extended” detection style (see Figure 10-22 on

Note page 387) when you want to monitor alarms for a specific
The “Extended” detection style module’s behavior.
currently works only with
Panacea or Integrator Gold To use the General detection style, follow these steps:
modules.

Figure 10-21. Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (General

Detection Style Selected)

a. Leave the radio button selection at “General.”

b. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box;
then, select the Level that will be associated with the alarm
type.
c. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box;
then, select the frame address that will be associated with the
alarm type.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 385

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

d. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box:

Note
Clicking on a second alarm type Table 10-3. Alarm Types
will not deselect the first alarm Alarm Type Description
type you chose. You must
deselect an Alarm type by 0x1 Fan 1 failure
clicking on its name so that it is
0x2 Fan 2 failure
no longer highlighted.
0x4 Power supply 1 failure
0x8 Power supply 2 failure
0x100 System power supply 1 failure
0x200 System power supply 2 failure
0x400 System power supply 3 failure
0x800 System power supply 4 failure
0x1000 System fan 1 failure
0x2000 System fan 2 failure
0x4000 System fan 3 failure
0x8000 System fan 4 failure
0x10000 System fan 5 failure
0x20000 System fan 6 failure
0x40000 XY bus 1 error
0x80000 XY bus 2 error
0x100000 No flash
0x200000 Old database

e. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
f. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog
box.
g. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
h. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

386 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating an Alarm Key

To use the Extended detection style, follow these steps:

Figure 10-22. Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (Extended

Detection Style Selected)

a. Click the radio button selection next to “Extended.”

b. Click the arrow to the right of the Level list box; then, select the
Level that will be associated with the alarm type.
c. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID list box; then,
select the frame address that will be associated with the alarm
type.
d. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame Type list box; then,
Note select the frame type that will be associated with the alarm type.
The “Frame Type” list box e. Click the arrow to the right of the Module list box; then, select
currently lists only Panacea or
the module type that will be associated with the alarm type.
Integrator Gold.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 387

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

f. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.

Note Extended alarm values range from decimal number 0 to 255.
Clicking on a second alarm type The actual meaning of each alarm value is defined differently,
will not deselect the first alarm
depending on the module type that is “stuffed” in the frame.
type you chose. You must
deselect an Alarm type by See the specific frame's configuration and operation manual for
clicking on its name so that it is details.
no longer highlighted. g. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
h. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog
box.
i. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
j. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Editing Alarm Types

The process for editing an alarm type is similar to that for adding an
Note alarm type.
The Edit Alarm Entry dialog 1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that
boxes look almost exactly like
you want to edit.
the Add Alarm Entry dialog
boxes. Only the dialog box title 2. Click the Edit... button. The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box will
is different. Figure 10-21 on appear. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a “General”
page 385 and Figure 10-22 on detection style.)
page 387 show what these
dialog boxes look like. • Use the “General” default detection style for all panels (except
ABA panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire
frame.
• Use the “Extended” detection style when you want to monitor
Note alarms for a specific module’s behavior.
The “Extended” detection style 3. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box; then,
currently works only with
select the Level that will be associated with the alarm type.
Panacea or Integrator Gold
modules. 4. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box;
then, select the frame address that will be associated with the alarm
type.
5. (If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to
Note the right of the Frame Type drop-down list box; then, select the
The “Frame Type” list box frame type that will be associated with the alarm type.
currently lists only Panacea or
6. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.
Integrator Gold.
7. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
8. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.

388 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating an Alarm Key

9. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
10. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Deleting Alarm Types

To delete an alarm type, follow these steps:
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that
you want to delete. To select more than one alarm types, using
standard Windows® selection techniques (hold down the <Shift>
or <Ctrl> keys while selecting the alarm entries.)
2. Click the Delete button. You will receive a system prompt that asks
you if you want to continue.
3. Click Yes. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
4. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
5. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete all alarm types, follow these steps:
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, click the Delete All button. You
will receive a system prompt that asks you if you want to continue.
2. Click Yes. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
4. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 389

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

The Source Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to select a
Note logical source for a logical crosspoint switch. It also provides you with
This option is not available for the capability to monitor specified hardware alarms.
ABA panels.
To create a Source Alarm key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Source Alarm option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-23. Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

2. Click the arrow located on the right of the Source box; then, select
the desired source.
3. To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name
box.
4. Click Configure.... The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box will appear.
(The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a “General” detection
style.)
• Use the “General” default detection style for all panels (except
ABA panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire
frame.

390 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

• Use the “Extended” detection style when you want to monitor

Note alarms for a specific module’s behavior.
The “Extended” detection style 5. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box; then,
currently works only with
select the Level that will be associated with the alarm type.
Panacea or Integrator Gold
modules. 6. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box;
then, select the frame address that will be associated with the alarm
type.
(If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to
Note the right of the Frame Type drop-down list box; then, select the
The “Frame Type” list box frame type that will be associated with the alarm type.
currently lists only Panacea or
7. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.
Integrator Gold.
8. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Source Alarm list box.
9. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
Note 10. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
Clicking on a second alarm type
will not de-select the first alarm 11. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
type you chose. You must
deselect an Alarm type by
clicking on its name so that it is
no longer highlighted.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 391

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

The Destination Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to
Note select a logical destination for a logical crosspoint switch. It also
This option is not available for provides you with the capability to monitor specified hardware alarms.
ABA panels.
To create a Destination Alarm key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Destination Alarm option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-24. Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

2. Click the arrow located on the right of the Destination box.

3. Scroll through the drop-down list; then, select the desired
destination.
4. To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name
box.
5. Click Configure... button. The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box will
appear. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a “General”
detection style.)
• Use the “General” default detection style for all panels (except
ABA panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire
frame.

392 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

• Use the “Extended” detection style when you want to monitor

Note alarms for a specific module’s behavior.
The “Extended” detection style 6. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box; then,
currently works only with
select the Level that will be associated with the alarm type.
Panacea or Integrator Gold
modules. 7. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box;
then, select the frame address that will be associated with the alarm
type.
8. (If using the “Extended” detection style only) Click the arrow to
Note the right of the Frame Type drop-down list box; then, select the
The “Frame Type” list box frame type that will be associated with the alarm type.
currently lists only Panacea or
9. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.
Integrator Gold.
10. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Destination Alarm list box.
11. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
Note 12. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
Clicking on a second alarm type
will not de-select the first alarm 13. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
type you chose. You must
deselect an Alarm type by
clicking on its name so that it is
no longer highlighted.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 393

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

Creating an On-Air Swap Key

(RCP-12×2BAp only)
The Swap function allows you to take the sources on one destination
and exchange them with sources on the other destination. This function
enables you to use one destination as a preview (or cue) bus and the
other as an on-air bus.
To create an On-Air Swap key, follow these steps:
1. Select the On-Air Swap option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-25. Creating an On-Air Swap Key

2. Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination A icon box.
A drop-down list containing icons for currently defined destinations
will appear.
3. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for
Destination A.
4. Click the destination you want to swap the resources from.
5. Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination B icon box.
A drop-down list containing icons for currently defined destinations
will appear.

394 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Parametric Key

6. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for
Destination B.
7. Click the desired destination you want to swap the resources to.
To disable this function, select None from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box.

Creating a Parametric Key

(P-SCQ/P-HSCQ Only)
The Parametric option allows you to set up individual parameters
affecting inputs and outputs for Panacea P-SCQ and/or P-HSCQ clean
switch/quiet switch routing switchers. It is available for 32×8CQp
panels only.
To create a Parametric key, follow these steps:
1. Select the Parametric option from the Edit Button Function
drop-down list box. The following dialog box will appear.

Figure 10-26. Creating a Parametric Key

2. In the Edit Name dialog box, enter a name for the parametric key
you are creating.
3. To access the Parametric Editing Setup main display, choose one of
the following options:

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 395

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

• Click on Configure... in the Control combo box if you want to

create or edit a list of parametric settings assigned to control
buttons on a 32X8CQp control panel.
• Click on Blink... or Monitor... in the Monitor combo box if you
want to create or edit a list of parametric settings assigned to
monitoring/alarm or blinking/alarm buttons on a 32×8CQp
control panel.
4. The Parametric Editing Setup list box will appear.
5. The Parametric Editing Setup list box will open to allow you to
define a controlling, monitoring, or blinking setup for the new
control key. (See “Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability”
for more information about using this function.)
6. After the Parametric Editing Setup list box returns you to the Edit
Button Function list box, click OK to accept all changes and
additions.

Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability

Figure 10-27. Parametric Editing Setup List Box

The Parametric Editing Setup list box shows the parametric settings for
Note an associated control panel key. That key will be monitored by the
The parametric setup list boxes push-button panel. If you chose Monitor... or Blinking... setups, the
for configuring, monitoring, and control panel will report alarm conditions via a steady or a blinking
blinking look almost exactly light on the button.
alike. Only the dialog box title
is different. The list box also displays the following types of information about
existing items:
• Frame ID

396 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Parametric Key

• Matrix/Level
• Input/Output
• Parameter
• Condition
• Value
• Logical Operator (Blink and Monitoring options only)

Adding Parametric Settings

To add a parametric setting, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click the Add... button.
The Edit Parametric Information dialog box (Figure 10-28) will
appear.

Figure 10-28. Edit Parametric Information Dialog Box

2. From the Frame ID box, select the Panacea clean switch/quiet

switch router associated with this control panel button.
3. From the Parameter box, select the appropriate parametric setting.
4. From the Matrix box, select the matrix ID number that corresponds
to the one you selected at the Transitions tab (see Figure 9-49 on
page 346).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 397

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

5. From the Output box, select the physical output location on the
frame back panel. (This option may not appear for all Parameter
selections.)
6. From the Condition box, select the monitoring condition you want
to associate with this control panel button. The conditions listed
will vary, depending on whether you selected Configure, Blink, or
Monitor at the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.(In
addition, the conditions listed may or may not be appropriate for
your selected parameter.)
• If you are in Configure mode:
• Choose Decrement By to decrease by a set quantity through
a range of values.
• Choose Increment By to increase by a set quantity through
a range of values.
• Choose Toggle to switch back and forth between two
options.
• Choose Set to apply a specific value.
• If you are in Monitor or Blink mode, choose the appropriate
mathematical operator.
7. From the Value box, select the item value that corresponds to the
Condition you chose.
8. (Monitor and Blink modes only) From the Operator box, choose the
appropriate Boolean operator that corresponds to the Condition you
chose.
9. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
10. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

Editing Parametric Settings

To edit a parametric setting, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click the Edit... button.
The Edit Parametric Information dialog box (Figure 10-28) will
appear.
2. Change the setting for the list box you want to edit. Descriptions of
the list box drop-down options are described on page 397 through
page 398.

398 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Creating a Parametric Key

Deleting Parametric Settings

To delete a parametric setting, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, highlight the parametric
setting that you want to delete. To select more than one setting,
using standard Windows® selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting the setting entries.)
2. Click the Delete button. The setting will disappear from the list
box.
3. Click OK. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
4. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.
To delete all parametric settings, follow these steps:
1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click the Delete All
button. The settings will disappear from the list box.
2. Click Yes. You will return to the Edit Button Function dialog box.
3. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 399

Chapter 10: Editing Control Panel Button Functions

400 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 11
Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Overview
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
Note • “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 406
To determine which panel type
you are using, refer to “Models” • “Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key” on
on page 402. page 414
• “Clearing Selection Key Assignments” on page 417
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 408
• “Editing Details of a Panel Definition” on page 418
• “Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel” on
page 410
• “Moving a Selection Key” on page 409

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 401

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Models
The RCP-ABA (1RU) is available in three models: the XY, the SB, and
the AFV/MB models. These panels differ in appearance and
functionality, but use similar configuration procedures. Configuration
information in this chapter applies to all 1RU models, except where
noted.

ABA(1)-XY Models
The ABA(1)-XY models provide XY operation and source selection
with 4 levels of breakaway. (The ABA1E-XYp contains an Ethernet
connector for use with CCS Gateway products or with network-ready
routers). The panel includes five display windows (one destination, four
sources) with associated select keys, four user-definable auxiliary keys,
and 16 user-definable destination/source select keys.

Figure 11-1. ABA-XYp Model

402 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Models

Figure 11-2. ABA1(E)-XYp Model

ABA(1)-SB Models
The ABA(1)-SB models provide control of a single destination with
four levels of breakaway. The panel includes one destination display
window, four source display windows with associated select keys, four
user-definable auxiliary keys, and 16 user-definable source select keys.

Figure 11-3. ABA-SBp Model

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 403

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-4. ABA1-SBp Model

ABA-AFV, ABA(1)-MB Models

The ABA-AFV and ABA(1)-MB models provide audio-follow-video
(no breakaway) source selection on 4 destinations. A specific
destination is assigned to each of the four display windows when the
panel is initially configured. These destinations cannot be changed from
the front of the control panel. The source connected to each destination
is displayed in the control windows.

Figure 11-5. ABA-AFV Model

404 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Models

Figure 11-6. ABA-MBp Model

Figure 11-7. ABA1-MBp Model

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 405

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit a panel, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main window (or
click the panel name; then, click the Edit button).
2. The Edit Panel dialog box will appear, as shown in Figure 11-8.

Figure 11-8. Edit Panel Dialog Box

When an ABA(1) panel is added (as described in Chapter 5: “Adding

Router Control Panels”), it will be created with a panel definition. This
definition may be the RouterMapper default definition (if the panel was
added before the database was edited) or it may be a unique definition
based on your particular database (if the panel was added after the
database was created.)
• If the ABA(1) panel was added after the database was edited, it will
be configured to access the complete set of sources and destinations
included in the database. All necessary category index keys will be
assigned, and the panel will be completely functional without
further definition. In many cases, it will not be necessary to proceed
further with the panel editing process. If, however, you wish to
change anything in the definition (move the selection keys, limit

406 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

access to a specific set of sources or destinations, change the

auxiliary key functions, etc.), you will find the information
necessary in this chapter.
• If the panel carries the default definition, the panel will have to be
manually edited as described in “Editing Details of a Panel
Definition” on pages 418 through 436. As an alternative, the panel
can be deleted from the database and then added back to the
database using the Poll method (refer to “Polling the Control
System” starting on page 54). All necessary categories will be
assigned at that time.

For information on how to Refer to

Assign a category key Pages 432-434
Assign Favorite Keys Pages 414-417
Change panel name, ID, style Pages 436-437
Delete selection key Pages 417-418
assignments
Limit access to Sources and Pages 410-414
Destinations
Move a selection key Pages 409-410
Reconfigure auxiliary keys Pages 419-420
Set Levels affected Pages 420-423

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 407

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCP-p control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.) The Edit Button
Function dialog box is described in detail in Chapter 10: “Editing
Control Panel Button Functions”.

Figure 11-9. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that
is used to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group
that is used to define the specific parameters of the button. The
appearance of the Properties group will depend on the type of button
selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:
1. Select the function from the drop-down list box. The Properties
group on the Edit Button Function dialog box will change when the
selection is made. Possible button functions are shown in
Table 10-1 on page 361.
2. Select the button properties from the options available in the
Properties group.

408 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Edit Button Function Dialog Box

3. Click Done. You will be returned to the Edit Panel window.

Moving a Selection Key

To rearrange the order of the selection keys on an ABA(1) panel,
Note click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel window. A dialog box
The “drag and drop” operation similar to that shown in Figure 11-10 will appear (the actual appearance
will not move an index will depend on the style of the ABA(1) panel being edited).
definition. To move the index
definition to a new key, you To move a selection key, follow these steps:
must reassign the key definition. 1. Position the cursor over the selection key that is to be moved.
For more information about this
function, see “Editing Details of 2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
a Panel Definition” starting on
3. Drag the selection key to its new position.
page 418.
4. Release the mouse button. The selection keys will appear in their
new positions.

Figure 11-10. Moving a Selection Key

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 409

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Limiting the Sources and Destinations

Available to a Panel
When a panel is created, it will have access to the complete set of
sources and destinations in the database (assuming the panel was
created after the database was edited). It is possible, however, to limit
panel access to a specific set of sources and destinations. To change the
panel access list, click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel window.
(The actual appearance will depend on the style of the ABA(1) panel
being edited.)

Figure 11-11. Edit Panel Window, Assignments Tab

410 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel

Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel

RouterMapper allows you to assign the type of view order you want to
see on the Assignments tab list boxes and on a particular panel. You
may sort in either alphabetical or logical order.

Figure 11-12. Assigning View Order

• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
alphabetical order, the Assignments tab will display these lists
in numeric-alphabetic order.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 411

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
logical order, the Assignments tab will display these lists in the
order in which you first assigned the Sources and Destinations.
• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in alphabetical order,
Note RouterMapper will “instruct” the panel to display Source
You must perform a download Selection and Destination Selection information in
before this sort takes effect. See numeric-alphabetic order.
“Downloading Device
Definitions” on page 69. When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in logical order,
RouterMapper will “instruct” the panel to display Source Selection
and Destination Selection information in the order in which you
first assigned the Sources and Destinations.(For more information
about logical order, see “Overview of the Edit Logical Sources
Dialog” on page 199 and “Overview of Edit Logical Destinations
Dialog” on page 220).

Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations

The simplest way to deny panel access to one or two sources or
destinations is to remove them from the access list by dragging them
from the This Panel list to the Global Database list (you can also
remove a source or destination using the Delete button). Deleting a
source or destination from the access list only removes it from this
panel’s definition. It does not remove it from the database or from other
panels based on this database.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source or destination name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source or destination from the This Panel list box to the
Global Database box (or click Delete). The source will be removed
from the panel list.

Allowing Access to a Limited Set of

Sources or Destinations
To create a very limited set of sources and destinations to which the
panel will have access, remove all source and destination assignments
from the panel access list using the Delete All button. Add the desired
sources and destinations to the panel access list using the Assign button.
To remove all sources and destinations, follow these steps:
1. Click the Delete All button.

412 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel

2. The sources and destinations will be removed from the panel list.
(The ABA-SB model only has one destination, so it does not have a
Delete All button in the Destinations group.)
You may also use the Clear All button to delete all source and
destination assignments at one time.
To add a source or destination to the panel access list, follow these
Note steps:
When viewing the Assignments 1. Click the source or destination name in the Global Database list
dialog box on a VGA monitor,
box.
the Assign and Delete buttons
may not contain text 2. Drag (or double-click) the source or destination from the Global
descriptions. See Figure 11-13 Database box and drop it in the This Panel box (or click the Assign
for the VGA equivalents. key).
3. The source/destination will be added to the panel list.

Figure 11-13. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 413

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Assigning a Favorite Source or

Destination to a Selection Key
On the ABA(1) panels, sources and destinations can be selected via
either Category/Index or Favorite Key selection techniques. With
Favorite Key selection, a source or destination selection requires only
one key press. One of the 16 user-definable selection keys is configured
to select a specific source or destination for rapid access. For example, a
selection key could be defined as CAM12. When pressed, the key
would select Camera 12.

Figure 11-14. Selecting a Source via Favorite Key

To assign a favorite source or destination, click the Assignments tab

Note at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to that shown in
For information on assigning a Figure 11-15 on page 415 will appear. (The actual appearance of the
category/index key, refer to dialog box will depend on the type of ABA(1) panel being edited.)
“Assigning a Category Key” on
page 432.

414 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key

To assign a Favorite Source to a selection key, follow these steps:

Note 1. Select the source name from the panel list in the Source group.
A favorite source can also be
assigned to a selection key via 2. Drag the source name to the selection key.
the Edit Button Function dialog 3. The selection key will change to reflect the new assignment.
box. Right-click the selection
key to access the dialog. This
dialog box is described in detail
in “Edit Button Function Dialog
Box” on page 408.

Figure 11-15. Assigning a Favorite Source

To assign a Favorite Destination to a selection key, follow these

Note steps:
A favorite destination can also 1. Select the destination name from the panel list in the Destinations
be assigned to a selection key
group. The selected destination will be highlighted.
via the Edit Button Function
dialog box. Right-click the 2. Drag the destination name to the selection key. The selection key
selection key to access the will change to reflect the new assignment.
dialog. This dialog box is
described in detail in “Edit
Button Function Dialog Box”
on page 408.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 415

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-16. Assigning a Favorite Destination

416 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Clearing Selection Key Assignments

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To clear a single selection key assignment, drag the selection key to
Note the trash can. The identifying information in the selection key will
A default index assignment disappear to indicate that it is unassigned.
cannot be removed by dragging
the key to the trash can. You
must manually assign the key
index to None. For more
information on this function, see
“Assigning a Category Key” on
page 432.

Figure 11-17. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

To clear all selection key assignments, click the Clear All button. The
identifying information in the selection keys will disappear to indicate
that they are unassigned.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 417

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Editing Details of a Panel Definition

If you add a panel before the database is edited, it will be created with a
default definition. Only two categories will be assigned: “In” and
“Dest.” You may either create a panel definition “from scratch,” or
delete the panel from the panel list and add it again using the Poll
method (refer to “Setting up a Database” on page 53). Adding a panel
after the database is edited will cause RouterMapper to automatically
create a panel definition to match the database.
Sometimes you may also need to perform more than just the basic
editing functions described earlier in this chapter. This section contains
information on performing more complex editing functions.
To create a panel definition “from scratch,” or to create a more
complex panel definition, double-click the panel name at the
RouterMapper main window (or click the panel name; then, click the
Edit button). The Edit Panel dialog box will appear. (The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being
edited.)

Figure 11-18. Edit Panel Window, Auxiliary Keys Tab

418 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All ABA, ABA1, and ABA2 (1RU) panels include four user-definable
Note auxiliary keys. When a new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given
You may also access the Edit default assignments (ENABLE, BACk [if an SB panel, the default
Button Function dialog box assignment is LOCK], TAKE, and CLEAR). To change any of the key
from either the Window + assignments, click the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. A
Paging tab or the Assignments
dialog box similar to Figure 11-18 on page 418 will appear.
tab. To change any button’s
function while on these tabs, The user-definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog. The
right-click the button, and refer arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the auxiliary
to “Edit Button Function Dialog keys. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
Box” on page 408.
The Edit Button Function dialog will appear, as shown in Figure 11-19.

Figure 11-19. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The same Edit Button Function dialog box is used to define the
auxiliary keys and function buttons on the ABA(1), ABA(2), and
RCP-p panels. You can find a detailed description of this dialog (as well
as instructions for creating various types of buttons) in Chapter 10:
“Editing Control Panel Button Functions”.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 419

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

If RouterMapper notes selection key definition errors that will not allow
Note the panel to be successfully downloaded, a Warning group will appear
When redefining the auxiliary on the Auxiliary Keys tab. To view the error message(s), click the
keys, remember that you must View Errors button. The Panel Errors dialog box will appear.
have a TAKE key for the panel
to download and operate
properly.

Figure 11-20. Panel Errors Dialog Box

Setting the Levels Affected

Each source selection window on an ABA-XY and ABA-SB panel
represents a different level and displays the source connected to the
current destination on that level. For example, an ABA-XY panel may
be configured to control the Video, Audio, and Timecode levels. One
source select window will be configured to display the source
connected to the current destination on the Video level; a second source
select window will display the source connected to the destination on
the Audio level; and the third source select window will display the

420 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

source connected to the current destination on the Timecode level. (The

current destination is displayed in the first window.)
An ABA-SB panel may be configured to control the Video, Audio 1,
Audio 2, and Timecode levels. One window will be configured to
display the source connected to the destination on the Video level; the
second window will display the source connected to the destination on
the Audio 1 level; the third window will display the source connected to
the destination on the Audio 2 level; and the fourth window will display
the source connected to the destination on the Timecode level.
On an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel, each of the four source
selection windows represents a different destination and displays the
source connected to that destination on each level or group of levels.
To select the level to be associated with each selection window, fol-
low these steps:
1. Click the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
2. A dialog box similar to Figure 11-21 on page 421 will appear. (The
actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the
panel being edited.)

Figure 11-21. Edit Panel Window, Windows + Paging Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 421

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

When you move the mouse cursor over the graphic in the dialog, you
will notice that the cursor changes as it encounters hots spots on the
graphic. When the cursor changes to a pointing index finger, it indicates
that the button can be configured from this dialog. If you pause
momentarily over a button, a text description of the button’s current
assignment will appear.
The Controlled Levels check boxes are used to select the levels that will
be controlled by the Source Selection keys for this window. Only those
levels that have been enabled in the database will be displayed.
The Status Level group contains a Follow Lowest Controlled Level
check box, and a level drop-down list box (the drop-down list box will
only be enabled if the check box is not checked).
If the Follow Lowest Controlled Level box is checked, the Source
Select window will status the lowest level checked in the Controlled
Levels group.
If you wish to select a different level to be statused, disable the Follow
Lowest Controlled Level check box; then, select the level from the
drop-down list box.
To configure the Source Selection window, follow these steps:
1. Click the Source Selection window. A blue outline will appear
around the selected window. The Edit Window x group will change
to reflect the current settings for that window.
2. Enable the level(s) that are to be controlled by the Source Selection
keys associated with this window. Enable a level by clicking on the
check box next to the Level Name. A level is enabled if the check
box is checked.
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of the
lowest controlled level, check the Follow Lowest Controlled
Level check box. The level drop-down list box will become
disabled.
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of a level
other than the lowest level, uncheck the Follow Lowest
Controlled Level check box. Select the desired level from the
drop-down list.
3. Click Done. You will return to the main window.

422 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Configuring Levels on Multiple Pages

To display and control more levels than would normally be available on
a panel, multiple pages can be created, each with a different definition.
For example, one page on an ABA-XY panel could be configured to
display the video, audio and time code levels separately, while a second
page might display the video in one window, the left and right channels
of audio in one window, and the time code in the remaining window.
To create an additional page, create a Page key as outlined in Editing
Panel Button Functions. Each page must have its own Page key. Any of
the 4 auxiliary keys or the 16 selection keys may be used. Right-click
the button, then define the key via the Edit Button Function dialog; or
double-click the button, then select the Make Page Button option.

Determining Destinations Accessible to a Panel

Determining Destinations Accessible to XY Models
The ABA-XY panel includes one destination selection window. This
window and its associated selection keys allow a user to select the
destination being controlled and statused. A panel can be configured to
have access to all destinations in the router database, or to only a limited
subset of the destinations.
To define the set of destinations available to a panel, follow these
steps:
1. Click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen.
2. The following dialog box will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 423

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-22. Edit Panel Window, Assignments Tab

On the Assignments tab, Destinations are assigned at the Destinations

group on the left side of the dialog. The Global Database list box
displays all destinations available in the database. The This Panel list
box displays the destinations currently assigned to the panel. Assigning
destinations to a panel is a simple matter of transferring the destinations
from the Global Database box to the This Panel box.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global
Database box to the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-23.

424 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 11-23. Adding a Destination by Dragging and Dropping

You may also add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign
Note and Delete buttons located between the Global Database box and the This
When viewed on a VGA Panel box, or double-click a destination from the Global Database box.
monitor, the Assign and Delete
buttons may not contain text
descriptions. See Figure 11-24
for the VGA equivalents.

Figure 11-24. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

To give the panel access to ALL destinations in the database, follow

these steps:
1. Click the Assign All button in the Destinations group.
2. All destinations will be listed in the This Panel list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 425

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To add a destination to the panel, follow these steps:

1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click the Assign
key).
3. The destination will be added to the panel list.
To remove a destination from the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the destination to the trash can (or click the Delete key).
3. The destination will be removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the Delete All key.
2. All destinations will be removed from the panel list.

Determining Destinations Accessible to SB Models

The ABA(1)-SB allows control of one destination with four levels of
breakaway. To select the destination available to this panel, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen. The following dialog box will
appear.

Figure 11-25. Edit Panel Window, Assignments Tab

426 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

The destination is assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of

the dialog. The Global Database list box displays all destinations
available in the database. The This Panel list box displays the
destination currently assigned to the panel. To assign a destination to a
panel, transfer the destination from the Global Database box to the This
Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-23 on page 425.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global
Database box to the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-23 on
page 425.
You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and
Delete buttons located between the Global Database box and the This
Panel box, or double-click a destination from the Global Database box.
To assign the destination, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click the Assign
key). The destination will appear in the panel list.

Determining Destinations Accessible to AFV/MB Models

The ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB allows control of four destinations.
Each is assigned to one of the four status display windows on the panel.
The source connected to the destination is displayed in the window.
To select the destinations available to this panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel screen. The
following dialog box will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 427

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-26. Edit Panel Window, Windows + Paging Tab

2. The destinations are assigned via the Controlled Destinations

drop-down list box.

428 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 11-27. Controlled Destination Drop-Down List Box

To assign the destinations on an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel,

follow these steps:
1. Click the status display window that is to be assigned to the
destination.
2. Select the destination that is to be associated with this window by
clicking on the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
Scroll through the list of choices, and select the destination.
3. Enable the level(s) on that this destination should switch.

Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel

The source select windows and their associated selection keys allow a
user to select the source connected to the current destination. A panel
can be configured to have access to all sources in the router database, or
to only a limited subset of the sources.
To define the set of sources available to a panel, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to
Figure 11-28 on page 430 will appear. (The actual appearance of the
dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 429

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Figure 11-28. Defining the Set of Sources Available

Sources are assigned via the Sources group on the right side of the
dialog. The Global Database list box displays all sources available in
the database. The This Panel list box displays the sources currently
assigned to this panel.

Assigning Sources to a Panel

Assigning sources to a panel is a simple matter of transferring the
sources from the Global Database box to the This Panel box.
To add a source to the panel access list, drag it from the Global
Database box to the This Panel box, as shown in Figure 11-29 on
page 431.

430 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 11-29. Adding a Source by Dragging and Dropping

You may also add sources to the panel access list using the Assign and
Note Delete buttons located between the Global Database box and the This
When viewed on a VGA Panel box, or double-click a source from the Global Database box.
monitor, the Assign and
DELETE buttons may not
contain text descriptions. See
Figure 11-30 for the VGA
equivalents.

Figure 11-30. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

To give the panel access to all sources in the database, follow these
steps:
1. Click Assign All in the Sources group.
2. All sources will be listed in the panel list.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 431

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

To add a source to the panel access list, follow these steps:

1. Click the source name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the source to the This Panel list box (or click the Assign key).
3. The source will be added to the panel list.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source to the trash can (or click the Delete key).
3. The source will be removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the Delete All key.
2. All sources will be removed from the panel list.

Assigning a Category Key

On the ABA(1) panels, sources and destinations can be selected via
either Category/Index or Favorite Key selection techniques.
With category indexing, both a category (i.e., VTR, CAM, etc.) and an
index (i.e., 21, 36, etc.) are required to identify a device. The first press
of a button selects the category; the second and subsequent presses
select the index. For example, to select CAM12, a user would press the
CAM button (the category), followed by the number 1 and number 2
keys (the index 12).

Figure 11-31. Selecting a Source via Category Indexing

432 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

To assign a category to a selection key, follow these steps:

Note 1. Click the Assignments tab. A dialog box similar to Figure 11-25 on
For a detailed discussion of page 426 will appear. (The actual appearance of the dialog box
category indexing, refer to
depends on the style of the panel being edited.)
“Understanding and Managing
Category/Indexing” on page 2. The Categories group is located on the far right side of the
250. For information on Assignments dialog. The 16 buttons at the top of the dialog box
assigning a favorite key, refer to correspond to the Selection keys on the ABA(1) panels.
“Assigning a Favorite Source or
Destination to a Selection Key” 3. Select the category name from the Categories list box. The selected
on page 414. category will be highlighted.
4. Drag the category name to the selection key, as shown in
Figure 11-32 on page 433.
5. The selection key will change to reflect the new assignment.

Figure 11-32. Assigning a Category to a Selection Key

To assign a category and an index to a selection key, follow these

Note steps:
Double-click a category in the 1. Click the selection key. The Edit Button Function dialog box will
Categories list box to assign the
appear. (Category should be already selected in the Button
selected category to the first
available key. Function list box.)
2. From the Select Category list box, select the desired category name.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 433

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

3. From the Select Index list box, select the index number.
4. Click OK. You will return to the Assignments tab.

Figure 11-33. Assigning a Category and an Index to a Selection

Key

Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

If sources or destinations on the Assignments tab are highlighted in red
(or if the Summary text indicates that one or more sources/destinations
are “inaccessible”), then there is a potential problem with the selection
key assignments. Those sources and/or destinations that are in error
(highlighted red) will not be available from the control panel using the
current selection key assignments. An example of one such problem
and a possible resolution is shown in Figure 11-34.

434 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 11-34. Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 435

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce
the dialog box shown in Figure 11-35. The screen displays the current
Panel Name, Panel ID and Panel Style settings. The Version box
displays the hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the
panel must have been polled previously for the Version information to
be correct).

Figure 11-35. Edit Panel Window, Name, ID, Style Tab

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name
text box. (Up to 15 characters may be used.) Typically, the Panel Name
would indicate where the panel is located (e.g., Edit B, Master Control,
etc.)

436 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel ID, follow these steps:

Note 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
The panel ID is the control
panel’s physical address. If the 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
ID is changed in the 3. Select the new panel ID.
RouterMapper database, it must
also be changed on the physical
panel (for information on
changing the ID on the physical
panel, refer to the manual that
was supplied with the panel).

To change the panel style, follow these steps:

Note 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
Changes made to a panel’s
definition will not take effect 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
until the definition has been 3. Select the new panel style.
downloaded to the physical
panel. Download the new
settings by pressing the
Download button on the Edit
Panel screen (or refer
to“Downloading Device
Definitions” on page 69). To
print new key caps, click the
Print Key Caps button.

Caution
A panel style change will
initialize the current
configuration to the default
setting. All previous
modifications will be lost.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 437

Chapter 11: Editing RCP-ABA (1RU) Panels

438 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 12
Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Overview
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
Note • “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 441
To determine which panel type
you are using, refer to “Models” • “Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key” on
on page 440. page 449
• “Clearing Selection Key Assignments” on page 452
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 443
• “Editing Details of a Panel Definition” on page 453
• “Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel” on
page 445
• “Moving a Selection Key” on page 444

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 439

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Models
The RCP-ABA (2RU) (currently available only in the XY model)
Note provides XY operation and source selection on eight independent
Although the ABA (2RU) panel levels. The panel includes 5 display windows (1 destination, 4 sources)
is currently available only in the with associated select keys, 4 user-definable auxiliary keys, 48
XY model, it can be configured user-definable push button source/destination select keys, and a scroll
to function as an SB or an AFV
knob. (The ABA2-EXYp model contains an Ethernet connector for use
or MB panel. For more
information on configuring the with CCS Protocol products or with network-ready routers.) Sources
panel as an AFV, MB, or SB; or and destinations are selected from the front of the panel using push
for information on obtaining an button keys or a scroll knob.
appropriate front panel legend,
contact your Customer Service
representative.

Figure 12-1. ABA2(E)-XYp Panel

440 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit a panel, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the panel name at the RouterMapper main window (or
click the panel name; then, click the Edit button). The Edit Panel
dialog box will appear.

Figure 12-2. Edit Panel Dialog Box

2. When an ABA panel is added, it will be created with a panel

definition. This definition may be the RouterMapper default
definition (if the panel was added before the database was edited) or
it may be a unique definition based on your particular database (if
the panel was added after the database was created).
3. If the ABA panel is added after the database edit, it will be
configured to access the complete set of sources and destinations
included in the database. All necessary category index keys will be
assigned, and the panel will be completely functional without
further definition. In many cases, it will not be necessary to proceed
further with the panel editing process. If, however, you wish to
change anything in the definition (move the selection keys, limit

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 441

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

access to a specific set of sources or destinations, change the

auxiliary key functions, etc.), you will find the information
necessary in this chapter.
4. If the panel carries the default definition, the category/index keys,
source selection keys, sources available, destinations available and
levels affected will have to be manually edited as described in
Editing the Details of a Panel Definition. As an alternative, the
panel can be deleted from the database and then added back to the
database using the Poll method (refer to “Polling the Control
System” starting on page 54). All necessary categories will be
assigned at that time.

For information on how to Refer to

Assign a category key Pages 462-465
Assign Favorite Keys Pages 449-452
Change panel name, ID, or style Pages 466-467
Delete selection key assignments Page 452
Limit access to sources and destinations Pages 445-449
Move a selection key Page 444
Reconfigure auxiliary keys Pages 453-455
Set Levels affected Pages 455-458

442 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Edit Button Function Dialog Box

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCP-p control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.) The Edit Button
Function dialog box is described in detail in Chapter 10, Editing
Control Panel Button Functions.

Figure 12-3. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that
is used to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group
that is used to define the specific parameters of the button. The
appearance of the Properties group will depend on the type of button
selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:
1. Select the function from the drop-down list box. The Properties
group on the Edit Button Function dialog box will change when the
selection is made. Possible button functions are shown in
Table 10-1 on page 361.
2. Select the button properties from the options available in the
Properties group.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 443

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

3. Click Done. You will be returned to the Edit Panel window.

Moving a Selection Key

To rearrange the order of the selection keys on an ABA(2) panel, click
the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel window. A dialog box similar to
that shown in Figure 12-4 will appear (the actual appearance will
depend on the style of the ABA(2) panel being edited).
To move a selection key, follow these steps:
Note 1. Position the cursor over the selection key to be moved.
The “drag and drop” operation
will not move an index 2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
definition. To move the index 3. Drag the selection key to its new position.
definition to a new key, you
must reassign the key definition. 4. Release the mouse button. The selection key will appear in its new
For more information about this positions.
function, see “Editing Details of
a Panel Definition” starting on
page 453.

Figure 12-4. Moving a Selection Key

444 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel

Limiting the Sources and Destinations

Available to a Panel
When a panel is created, it will have access to the complete set of
sources and destinations in the database (assuming the panel was
created after the database was edited). It is possible, however, to limit
panel access to a specific set of sources and destinations. To change the
panel access list, click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel window.
(The actual appearance will depend on the style of the ABA(2) panel
being edited.)

Figure 12-5. Edit Panel Window, Assignments Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 445

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel

RouterMapper allows you to assign the type of view order you want to
see on the Assignments tab list boxes and on a particular panel. You
may sort in either alphabetical or logical order.

Figure 12-6. Assigning View Order

446 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel

• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
alphabetical order, the Assignments tab will display these lists
in numeric-alphabetic order (see Figure 12-6).
When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in
logical order, the Assignments tab will display these lists in the
order in which you first assigned the Sources and Destinations (see
Figure 12-6).
• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in alphabetical order,
Note RouterMapper will “instruct” the panel to display Source
You must perform a download Selection and Destination Selection information in
before this sort takes effect. See numeric-alphabetic order (see Figure 12-6 on page 446).
“Downloading Device
Definitions” on page 69. When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in logical order,
RouterMapper will “instruct” the panel to display Source Selection
and Destination Selection information in the order in which you
first assigned the Sources and Destinations (see Figure 12-6 on
page 446).
For more information about logical order, see “Overview of the Edit
Logical Sources Dialog” on page 199 and “Overview of Edit Logical
Destinations Dialog” on page 220.

Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations

The simplest method of denying panel access to one or two sources or
destinations is to remove them from the access list by dragging them
from the This Panel list to the Global Database list (you can also
remove a source or destination using the Delete button). Deleting a
source or destination from the access list only removes it from this
panel’s definition. It does not remove it from the database or from other
panels based on this database.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source from the This Panel list box and drop it in the
Global Database box (or click the Delete key).
3. The source will be removed from the panel list.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 447

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Allowing Access to a Limited Set of

Sources and Destinations
To create a very limited set of sources and destinations to which the
panel will have access, follow these steps:
1. Remove all source and destination assignments from the panel
access list using the Delete All button.
2. Add the desired sources and destinations to the panel access list by
dragging and dropping them in the This Panel box (or by using the
Assign button).
To remove all sources and destinations, follow these steps:
1. Click the Delete All button.
2. All sources and destinations will be removed from the panel list.
To add a source or destination to the panel access list, follow these
steps:
1. Click the source or destination name in the Global Database list
Note box.
When viewing the Assignments 2. Drag or double-click the source or destination from the Global
dialog box on a VGA monitor,
Database box; drop it in the This Panel box (or click the Assign
the Assign and Delete
buttons may not contain text key).
descriptions. See Figure 12-7 3. The source or destination will be added to the panel list.
for the VGA equivalents.

Figure 12-7. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

448 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key

Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a

Selection Key
On ABA panels, you can select sources and destinations via Category/
Index or Favorite Key selection techniques. With Favorite Key
selection, source or destination selection requires only one key press.
One of the 48 user-definable selection keys is configured to select a
specific source or destination for rapid access. For example, a selection
key could be defined as MON2. When pressed, the key would select
Monitor 2.

Figure 12-8. Selecting a Source via Favorite Key

To assign a favorite source or destination, click the Assignments tab

at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to that shown in
Figure 12-9 on page 450 will appear.
To assign a Favorite Source to a selection key, follow these steps:
1. Select the source name from the panel list in the Source group.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 449

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

2. Drag the source name to the selection key. The selection key will
change to reflect the new assignment.
A favorite source can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit
Button Function dialog box. (Right-click the selection key to access the
dialog.) The Edit Button Function dialog box is described in detail in
Chapter 10, Editing Control Panel Button Functions.

Figure 12-9. Assigning a Favorite Source

To assign a Favorite Destination to a selection key, follow these

steps:
1. Select the destination name from the panel list in the Destinations
group. The selected destination will be highlighted.
2. Drag the destination name to the selection key. The selection key
will change to reflect the new assignment.
A favorite destination can also be assigned to a selection key via the
Edit Button Function dialog box. (Right-click the selection key to
access the dialog.) The Edit Button Function dialog box is described in
detail in Chapter 10, Editing Control Panel Button Functions.

450 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key

Figure 12-10. Assigning a Favorite Destination

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 451

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To clear a selection key assignment, drag the selection key to the trash
Note can. The identifying information in the selection key will disappear to
A default index assignment indicate that it is unassigned.
cannot be removed by dragging
the key to the trash can. You
must manually assign the key
index to “None.” See page 462
for more information on this
function.

Figure 12-11. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

To clear all selection key assignments, click the Clear All button. The
identifying information in the selection keys will disappear to indicate
that they are unassigned.

452 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Editing Details of a Panel Definition

As discussed earlier in this chapter, if a panel is added before the
database is edited, it will be created with a default definition. Only two
categories will be assigned (“In” and “Dest”). At this point, you can
either create a panel definition “from scratch,” or delete the panel from
the panel list and add it again using the POLL method (refer to “Polling
the Control System” in Getting Started). Adding a panel after the
database is edited will cause RouterMapper to automatically create a
panel definition that matches the database.
You may also need to perform more than just the basic editing functions
described earlier in this chapter. This section contains information on
performing more complex editing functions.
To create a panel definition “from scratch,” or to create a more
complex panel definition, double-click the panel name at the
RouterMapper main window (or click the panel name; then, click the
Edit button). The Edit Panel dialog box will appear.

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All ABA (2RU) panels include four user-definable auxiliary keys.
Note When a new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default
You may also access the Edit assignments (ENABLE, BACK [if an SB panel, the default assignment
Button function dialog box from is LOCK], TAKE, and CLEAR). To change any of the key
the Window + Paging tab or the assignments, click the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window.
Assignments tab. To change any
The dialog box shown in Figure 12-11 on page 452 will appear.
button’s function while on these
tabs, right-click the button. The user-definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog. The
arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the auxiliary
keys. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
The Edit Button Function dialog box will appear, as shown in
Figure 12-12 on page 454.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 453

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-12. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

You can find a detailed description of this dialog (as well as instructions
for creating various types of buttons) in Chapter 10, Editing Control
Panel Button Functions.

Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

If RouterMapper notes selection key definition errors that will not allow
Note the panel to be successfully downloaded, a Warning group will appear
When redefining the auxiliary on the Auxiliary Keys tab. To view the error message(s), click the View
keys, remember that you must Errors button. The Panel Errors dialog box will appear, as shown in
have a TAKE key for the panel Figure 12-13 on page 455.
to download and operate
properly.

454 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 12-13. Panel Errors Dialog Box

Setting the Levels Affected

Each source selection window on an ABA (2RU) panel represents a
different level and displays the source connected to the current
destination on that level. For example, a panel may be configured to
control the Video, Audio 1, Audio 2 and Timecode levels. One window
will be configured to display the source connected to the current
destination on the Video level; the second window will display the
source connected to the destination on the Audio 1 level; the third
window will display the source connected to the current destination on
the Audio 2 level; and the fourth window will display the source
connected to the destination on the Timecode level.
To select the level that is to be associated with each selection
window, click the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel dialog.The
following dialog box will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 455

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-14. Setting the Levels Affected

When you move the mouse cursor over the graphic in the dialog, you
will notice that the cursor changes as it encounters “hot spots” on the
graphic. When the cursor changes to a pointing index finger, it indicates
that the button can be configured from this dialog. If you pause
momentarily over a button, a text description of the button’s current
assignment will appear.
To configure a Source Selection window, click the window. The
configuration options in the Edit Window x group will change to reflect
the current assignments. On the Edit Panel dialog, the Source Selection
window reflects the current assignments.
The Controlled Levels check boxes are used to select the levels that will
be controlled by the Source Selection keys for this window. Only those
levels that have been enabled in the database will be displayed. (Refer
to “Defining the Levels” in Editing a Logical Database for information
on defining levels.)
The Status Level group contains a Follow Lowest Controlled Level
check box, and a Level drop-down list box (the drop-down list box will
only be enabled if the check box is not checked).

456 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

• If the Follow Lowest Controlled Level box is checked, the

Source Select window will status the lowest level checked in the
Controlled Levels group.
• If you wish to select a different level to be statused, disable the
Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box; then, select the level
from the drop-down list box.
To configure the Source Selection window, follow these steps:
1. Click the Source Selection window. A blue outline will appear
around the selected window. The Edit Window x group will change
to reflect the current settings for that window.
2. Enable the level(s) that are to be controlled by the Source Selection
keys associated with this window: Click the check box next to the
Level Name. (A level is enabled if the check box is checked.)
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of the
lowest controlled level, check the Follow Lowest Controlled
Level check box. The level drop-down list box will become
disabled.
• If the Source Selection window is to display the status of a level
other than the lowest level, uncheck the Follow Lowest
Controlled Level check box, and then select the desired level
from the drop-down list.
3. Click Done. You will be returned to the Edit Panel window.

Configuring Levels on Multiple Pages

To display and control more levels than would normally be available on
a panel, multiple pages can be created, each with a different definition.
To create an additional page, create a Page key as outlined in
“Creating a Page Key” on page 377. Each page must have its own Page
key. Any of the auxiliary keys or the selection keys can be used.
Right-click the button, and then define the key via the Edit Button
Function dialog; or double-click the button and select the Make Page
Button option.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 457

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Determining Destinations Accessible to the Panel

The ABA (2RU) panel includes one destination selection window. This
window and its associated selection keys allow a user to select the
destination being controlled and statused. A panel can be configured to
have access to all destinations in the router database, or to only a limited
subset of the destinations.
To define the set of destinations available to a panel, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen. The following dialog box will
appear.

Figure 12-15. Defining the Set of Destinations Available to a

Panel

Destinations are assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of

the dialog. The Global Database list box displays all destinations
available in the database. The This Panel list box displays the
destinations currently assigned to the panel. Assigning destinations to a
panel is a simple matter of transferring the destinations from the Global
Database box to the This Panel box.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global
Database box and drop it in the This Panel box, as shown in
Figure 12-16.

458 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 12-16. Adding a Destination by Dragging and Dropping

You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and
Note Delete buttons located between the Global Database box and the This
When viewed on a VGA Panel box, or double-click a destination from the Global Database box.
monitor, the Assign and
Delete buttons may not
contain text descriptions. See
Figure 12-17 on page 459 for
the VGA equivalents.

Figure 12-17. Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

To give the panel access to all destinations in the database, click the
Assign All button in the Destinations group. All destinations will be
listed in the This Panel list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 459

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

To add a destination to the panel, follow these steps:

1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click the Assign
key). The destination will be added to the panel list.
To remove a destination from the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the destination to the trash can (or click the Delete key). The
destination will be removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, click the Delete All key. All destinations
will be removed from the panel list.

Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel

The source select windows and their associated selection keys allow a
Note user to select the source connected to the current destination. A panel
You may sort the Assignments can be configured to have access to all sources in the router database, or
tab list boxes in alphabetical to only a limited subset of the sources.
order (numeric, then A-Z) or
logical order (the order in which To define the set of sources available to a panel, click the
you assigned the Sources and Assignments tab at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to
Destinations). d the Sources and Figure 12-18 will appear. (The actual appearance of the dialog box
Destinations). For more depends on the style of the panel being edited.)
information about logical order,
see “Overview of the Edit
Logical Sources Dialog” on
page 199 and “Overview of Edit
Logical Destinations Dialog” on
page 220.

460 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 12-18. Defining the Set of Sources Available to a Panel

Sources are assigned via the Sources group on the right side of the
dialog box. The Global Database list box displays all sources available
in the database. The This Panel list box displays the sources currently
assigned to this panel. To assign sources to a panel, transfer the
sources from the Global Database box to the This Panel box.

Assigning Sources to a Panel

To add a source to the panel access list, drag it from the Global
Database box and drop it in the This Panel box, as shown in
Figure 12-19.
You may add sources to the panel access list using the Assign and
Note Delete buttons located between the Global Database box and the This
When viewed on a VGA Panel box, or double-click a source from the Global Database box.
monitor, the Assign and Delete
To give the panel access to all sources in the database, click the
buttons may not contain text
descriptions. See Figure 12-17 Assign All button in the Sources group. All sources will be listed in the
for the VGA equivalents. panel list.
To add a source to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the Global Database list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 461

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Figure 12-19. Adding a Source by Dragging and Dropping

2. Drag (or double-click) the source to the This Panel list box (or click
the Assign key). The source will be added to the panel list.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source to the trash can (or click the Delete key). The
source will be removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, click the Delete All key. All sources will
be removed from the panel list.

Assigning a Category Key

On the ABA panels, sources and destinations can be selected via
selecting either Category/Index or Favorite Key category keys.
With category indexing, both a category (e.g., VTR, CAM, etc.) and an
index (e.g., 21, 36, etc.) are required to identify a device. The first press
of a button selects the category; the second and subsequent presses
select the index. For example, to select AUX9, a user would press the
AUX button (the category), followed by the number 9 key (the index 9).

462 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Figure 12-20. Selecting a Source via Category Indexing

To assign a category to a selection key, follow these steps:

Note 1. Click the Assignments tab. A dialog box similar to that shown in
For a detailed discussion of Figure 12-21 will appear. The Edit Panel dialog box will appear.
category indexing, see page 250
through page 257. For
information on assigning a
favorite key, see page 449.

Figure 12-21. Assigning a Category to a Selection Key

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 463

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

The categories group is located on the far right side of the

Assignments dialog. The buttons at the top of the dialog box
correspond to the Selection keys on the ABA panels.
2. Select the category name from the Categories list box. The selected
category will be highlighted.
3. Drag the category name to the selection key, as shown in
Figure 12-21
4. The selection key will change to reflect the new assignment.
To assign a category and an index to a selection key, follow these
Note steps:
Double-click a category in the 1. Click the selection key. The Edit Button Function dialog box will
Categories list box to assign the
appear. (Category should be already selected in the Button
selected category to the first
available key. Function list box.)
2. From the Select Category list box, select the desired category name.
3. From the Select Index list box, select the index number.
4. Click Done. You will be returned to the Assignments tab.

Figure 12-22. Assigning a Category and an Index to a Selection

Key

464 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing Details of a Panel Definition

Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

If sources or destinations on the Assignments tab are highlighted in red
(or if the Summary text indicates that one or more sources/destinations
are “inaccessible”), then there is a potential problem with the selection
key assignments. Those sources and/or destinations that are in error
(highlighted red) will not be available from the control panel using the
current selection key assignments. Figure 12-23 on page 465 shows an
example of such a problem and its possible resolution.

Figure 12-23. Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 465

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce
Note the dialog box shown in Figure 12-24 on page 466. The list boxes on
Remember! Changes made to a the Name, ID, Style tab’s screen displays the current Panel Name, Panel
panel’s definition will not take ID and Panel Style settings. The Version box displays the hardware and
effect until the definition has software versions reported by the panel (the panel must have been
been downloaded to the
polled previously for the Version information to be correct).
physical panel. Download the
new settings by pressing the
Download button on the Edit
Panel screen (or refer to
“Downloading Device
Definitions” on page 69). To
print new key caps, click the
Print Key Caps button.

Figure 12-24. Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name
Note text box. Up to 15 characters can be used. Typically, the Panel Name
Remember! The panel ID is the would indicate where the panel is located (i.e., Edit B, Master Control,
control panel’s physical address. etc.)
If the ID is changed in the
RouterMapper database, it must To change the panel ID, follow these steps:
also be changed on the physical 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
panel (for information on
changing the ID on the physical 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
panel, refer to the manual that
3. Select the new panel ID.
was supplied with the panel).

466 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel style, follow these steps:

Caution 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
A panel style change will
initialize the current 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
configuration to the default 3. Select the new panel style.
setting. All previous
modifications will be lost.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 467

Chapter 12: Editing RCP-ABA (2RU) Panels

468 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 13
Editing RCP-p Panels

Overview
The RCP-p series programmable panels are available in several
different styles, and are customizable for almost any system design.
“Configuration Options” on page 470 lists some of the available
options.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
Note • “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 471
Refer to Chapter 14: “Editing • “Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style” on page 489
RCP-16×1SBAp Panels” for
information on editing an • “Configuring Breakaway Keys” on page 475
RCP-16×1SBAp. Refer to
• “Configuring the Auxiliary Keys” on page 474
Chapter 15: “Editing
RCP-12×2BAp Panels” for • “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 488
information on editing an
RCP-12×2SBAp.
• “Controlling Backlight Intensity” on page 501
• “Defining the Destinations” on page 477
• “Defining the Sources” on page 482
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 472
• “Editing LCD Button Displays” on page 491
• “Monitoring Device Addresses” on page 509
• “Setting Up Button Pages” on page 504

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 469

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Configuration Options
The following panel options are controllable via RouterMapper. Only
RouterMapper-configurable information is included in this manual. For
installation, hardware configuration, and operation information, see the
pertinent manual, as indicated.
• 1RU control panels
• 4×1
• 4×4
• 8×1
• 8×8
• 16×1
• 16×1 RCP-ID
• 16×1 RCP-IDe
• 16×4
• 16×8
• 16×16
• 32×1
• 32×8
• 32×8CQp
• 2RU control panels
• 16×16 RCP-ID
• 32×1 RCP-ID
• 32×4
• 32×32
• 32×32 RCP-ID
• 32×32 RCP-IDe
• 64×1 RCP-ID
• 64×1 RCP-IDe

470 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit the RCP-p panels, double-click the panel name at the
Note RouterMapper main window (or click the panel name; then, click the
The LCD Display tab will Edit button). The Edit Panel dialog box will appear.
appear for RCP-ID control
panels only.

Figure 13-1. Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box

• The Auxiliary Keys tab is used to configure the user-definable

auxiliary keys.
• The Destinations tab is used to define the destinations available.
• The Sources tab is used to define the sources available.
• The Levels tab is used to define the levels affected.
• The Address, Style tab is used to change the panel name, ID, or
panel style.
• The LCD Display tab is used to set up and edit LCD displays on
RCP-ID control panels.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 471

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
Caution user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCP-p control panels.
Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5 ×1, and (Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.) See Chapter 10:
4×1 RCP-p panels do not “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for more detailed
support the lock/protect feature. information about this dialog box.

Figure 13-2. RCP-p Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that
is used to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group
that is used to define the specific parameters of the button. The
appearance of the Properties group will depend on the type of button
selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:
1. If you haven’t done so already, set up a control panel (see
Chapter 5: “Adding Router Control Panels” for information on how
to perform this task).
2. In the RouterMapper main window, highlight the control panel
name, then click Edit. The Edit Panel window will appear.

472 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Edit Button Function Dialog Box

3. Click on the tab (e.g., Sources, Destinations, Auxiliary Keys) that

contains the buttons for which you want to assign functions.
4. Select the function from the drop-down list box. The Properties
group on the Edit Button Function dialog box will change when the
selection is made. Possible button functions are shown in
Table 10-1 on page 361.
5. Select properties from the options available in the Properties group.
6. Click Done. You will be returned to the Edit Panel window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 473

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All RCP-p panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys. When a
new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default assignments
(Enable and Lock). To change either assignment, click the Auxiliary
Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. The following dialog box will
appear.

Figure 13-3. Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The
Edit Button Function dialog box will appear. (Refer to Chapter 10:
“Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for detailed instructions on
using this dialog box.)

474 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Configuring Breakaway Keys

Configuring Breakaway Keys

RCP-p panels include two user-definable breakaway keys, each of
which can control a different level. For example, one key could be
assigned to the video level, and the second key to the audio level. A
control panel operator could then perform a video-only switch by
pressing the Video key before selecting the source. Likewise, an
audio-only switch could be performed by pressing the Audio key before
selecting the source. To perform an AFV switch, you would press both
breakaway keys simultaneously before selecting the source.
To configure the breakaway keys, follow these steps:
1. Click the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box
similar to the one in Figure 13-4 will appear.

Figure 13-4. Edit Panel Window, Auxiliary Keys Tab

2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The
Edit Button Function dialog box will appear.
3. Select Breakaway\Follow from the drop-down list box.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 475

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Figure 13-5. Configuring a Breakaway\Follow Key

Detailed instructions on using this dialog box to create a breakaway key

start on page 381.

476 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Destinations

Defining the Destinations

To assign a destination select key, click the Destinations tab at the Edit
Panel screen. A dialog box similar to Figure 13-6 (Figure 13-7 for 32×8
CQ-X) will appear. The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on
the configuration of the RCP-p panel.

Figure 13-6. Edit Panel Window, Destinations Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 477

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Figure 13-7. Edit Panel Window, Destinations Tab for 32×8

CQ-X Panel Only

Destination Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32×8 CQ-X Panels
Destinations are assigned at the Logical Destinations group. The list
box lists all destinations available in the database. The button icon
shows the key currently assigned to each destination.

Destination Tab Assignments for 32×8 CQ-X Panels

The Destination Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default destination
Note buttons defined as follows:
See page 349 for the • Button 1: Cut
descriptions of these transition • Button 2: Crossfade
types.
• Button 3: Cut fade
• Button 4: Fast
• Button 5: Timing alarm
• Button 6: V fade
• Button 7: Fade cut
• Button 8: Slow

478 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Destinations

Assigning Selection Keys

To assign a destination to a selection key, drag the destination from
the Logical Destinations group and drop it on the desired key, as shown
in Figure 13-8 on page 479.

Figure 13-8. Assigning a Destination

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 479

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

You may also create a destination select key by using the Edit Button
Function dialog box. To access the dialog box (see Figure 13-9 on
page 480), follow these steps:
1. Right-click the selection key.
2. Select Destination from the drop-down list.
3. In the Properties group, select the destination to be associated with
this key.

Figure 13-9. Creating a Destination Select Key

480 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Destinations

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a destination select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in
Figure 13-10. The key will be “greyed” to indicate that it is unassigned.

Figure 13-10. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 481

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Defining the Sources

To assign a source select key, click the Sources tab at the Edit Panel
screen. A dialog box similar to that shown in Figure 13-11
(Figure 13-12 for 32×8 CQ-S; Figure 13-13 for 32×8 CQ-X) will
appear. The actual appearance of the dialog box depends upon the
configuration of the RCP-p panel.

Figure 13-11. Edit Panel Window, Defining Sources Tab

482 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Figure 13-12. Edit Panel Window, Defining Sources Tab for 32×8
CQ-S

Figure 13-13. Edit Panel Window, Defining Sources Tab for 32×8
CQ-X

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 483

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Source Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32×8 CQ-S and 32×8 CQ-X Panels
Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group. The list box lists all
sources available in the database. The button icon shows the key
currently assigned to each source.

Source Tab Assignments for 32×8 CQ-S Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-S panel has the default source buttons
Note defined as follows:
See page 349 for the • Buttons 1 to 16: Source Alarm buttons (Src1 to Src16)
descriptions of these transition
types.
• Button 26: Cut
• Button 27: Crossfade
• Button 28: V fade
• Button 29: Cut fade
• Button 30: Fade cut
• Button 31: Slow
• Button 32: Fast

Source Tab Assignments for 32×8 CQ-X Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default source buttons
defined as follows:
• Button 1 to 16: Cross-point buttons (PGM1 for Src1 to Src16)
• Button 17 to 32: Cross-point buttons (PGM2 for Src1 to Src16)

Assigning Selection Keys

To assign a source to a selection key, drag the source from the Logical
Sources group and drop it on the desired key, as shown in Figure 13-14
on page 485.

484 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Figure 13-14. Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a source select key by using the Edit Button
Function dialog box. To access this dialog box (see Figure 13-15 on
page 486), follow these steps:
1. Right-click the selection key.
2. Select Source from the Button Function drop-down list.
3. In the Properties group, select the source to be associated with this
key.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 485

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Figure 13-15. Assigning a Source by Using the Edit Button

Function Dialog Box

486 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in
Figure 13-16 on page 487. The key will be “greyed” to indicate that it is
unassigned.

Figure 13-16. Clearing a Source Selection Key Assignment

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 487

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Configuring the Levels Affected

The Levels tab specifies what levels will be affected when sources are
selected from the panel. If all levels are enabled on the Levels tab,
pressing a source select button on the panel will affect all levels defined
for that source.
The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to
specific levels on the panel. For example, a panel could be created with
only the video level enabled. In this case, even if audio/video sources
were selected, only the video level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the
appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled for
this panel.

Figure 13-17. Assigning Levels for a Panel

488 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

Click the Address, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this
Note tab.
Figure 13-18 shows this tab as it • The list box on this screen displays the current Panel Name.
appears for a Panacea clean
switch/quiet switch control
• The two combo boxes display the Panel ID and Panel Style settings.
panel. For other panels, the • The Associate with Frame combo box displays the controlling and
“Associate with Frame” monitoring Panacea P-SCQ or P-HSCQ frame associated with a
drop-down list box will not
corresponding Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panel.
appear.
• The Version box displays the hardware and software versions
reported by the panel (the panel must have been polled previously
for the Version information to be correct).

Figure 13-18. Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name
text box. The descriptive name may contain up to 15 characters.
Typically, the Panel Name would indicate where the panel is located
(e.g., Edit B, Master Control, etc.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 489

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

To change the panel ID, follow these steps:

Note 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
Remember! The panel ID is the 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
control panel’s physical
address. If the ID is changed in 3. Select the new panel ID.
the RouterMapper database, it
must also be changed on the To change the panel style, follow these steps:
physical panel (for information 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
on changing the ID on the
physical panel, refer to the 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
manual that was supplied with 3. Select the new panel style.
the panel).

Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the
Caution definition has been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the
A Panel Style change will new settings by clicking the Download button on the Edit Panel screen
initialize the current (or refer to “Downloading Device Definitions” starting on page 69). To
configuration to the default print new key caps, click the Print Key Caps button.
setting. All previous
modifications will be lost.
(For Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panels only) To change
the associated Panacea frame, follow these steps:
1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new frame to associate with the parametric buttons on
this panel.

490 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing LCD Button Displays

Editing LCD Button Displays

(RCP-ID Panels Only)
Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this
tab. A series of tabbed dialog boxes allow you to add or edit text, add or
change button icon displays, and change active or inactive button
display brightness.
The default button setup is
• Text displayed
• Default Font
• Icon not displayed
• Color display green
• Color intensity brightest

Figure 13-19. Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab

Setting Up Button Text

RouterMapper will allow you to customize your LCD buttons with
different text information. You can format the text in terms of font type,

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 491

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

font size, and font features (bold, italics, underline), as well as align text
within a button. You can display text in conjunction with, or instead of,
icon display information.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original
settings you must select Cancel, which will return you to the
RouterMapper main menu window.

Adding Text
1. Click an LCD button to which you want to add text.
Note 2. The Show Text check box is selected, so that you can display the
The Button Definition box to default or new text as well as an image. (If you want display an
the right of the Text tab shows image as well as text, you will also have to set up the image via the
how the selected button was Icon tab. See “Setting Up Button Images” on page 495 for more
originally configured. This
option is provided as a quick
information.)
reference, so that you do not If you want to display an image only, uncheck this box.
have to refer back to another tab
to see its original configuration. 3. Click the OB button to provide an opaque background between the
text and any image displayed. The button stays depressed when this
feature is on.
4. To use the default text entries, leave the Use Default Text box
checked. RouterMapper will display the text assigned via the
logical source or logical destination setup. See “Assigning a Source
Name” on page 207 for information on how to name logical
sources. See “Assigning a Destination Name” on page 221 for
information on how to name logical destinations.
5. To insert customized text
a. Uncheck the Use Default Text box.
b. Enter any combination of up to eight letters and/or numbers in
the Line 1 box. If desired, enter any combination of up to eight
letters and/or numbers in the Line 2 box.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each LCD button to which you want to
add text.
7. Set up the text characteristics for each LCD button.

492 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing LCD Button Displays

Setting Up Text Characteristics for Individual Buttons

1. Click an LCD button that you want to configure.
2. Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (i.e., Bold,
Italic, Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you will
not be able to modify its text size or other features.
3. Click the Center Text button to align the button text in the center of
the button. The button stays depressed when this feature is on.
You can also manually align text within a button (for example, you
Note can move the text below a button image). The arrow keys to the
The Align Text feature is right of the Line 1/Line 2 boxes allow you to move text within a
especially useful when you want button. You can move the text up, down, right, or left. If you would
to align text within an image. rather align text manually, make sure the Center Text button is off,
and then use the arrow keys to manipulate text locations.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each LCD button you want to
configure.
5. When you have completed your configurations, select from among
these options:
• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on
page 495)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up
Button Colors” on page 498)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page
500)

Setting Up Text Characteristics for Multiple Buttons

1. Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices), select the other
buttons that you want to configure.
3. Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (i.e., Bold,
Italic, Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you will
not be able to modify the text type, size, or other features.
4. Click the Center Text button to align the button text in the center of
the button. The button stays depressed when this feature is on.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 493

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

You can also manually align text within multiple several buttons at
Note once (for example, you can move the text below a button image).
The Align Text feature is The arrow keys to the right of the Line 1/Line 2 boxes allow you to
especially useful when you want move text within a button. You can move the text up, down, right,
to align text within an image. or left. If you would rather align text manually, make sure the
Center Text button is off, and then use the arrow keys to manipulate
text locations.
5. When you have completed your configurations, select from among
these options:
• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on
page 495)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up
Button Colors” on page 498)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page
500)

494 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing LCD Button Displays

Setting Up Button Images

RouterMapper will allow you to customize your LCD buttons with
different images, or icons. You can display icons in conjunction with, or
instead of, text display information. You can use the RouterMapper
default icons, or you can add customized icons.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original
settings you must select Cancel, which will return you to the
RouterMapper main menu window.

Setting Up Images for Individual Buttons

1. If necessary, click on the Icon tab.
Note
If you want to add customized
icons to the default icon list, you
must add them via the Icon
Management tab in RouterMap-
per. See “Managing Custom
Icons” on page 261 for more
information.

Figure 13-20. LCD Icons Tab

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 495

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

2. Click an LCD button to which you want to add an image.

Note 3. Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.
The Button Definition box to 4. To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box
the right of the Icon tab how the
selected button was originally
checked.
configured. This option is 5. To insert a different icon
provided as a quick reference,
so that you do not have to refer a. Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
back to another tab to see its b. Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.
original configuration.
6. The icon will appear in the center of the LCD button. Move the
Icon Size slider to the left to decrease icon size, and to the right to
increase icon size. The increased/decreased (in percentage of
original size) size will appear in the Icon Size box.
7. If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show
Text check box).
8. If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to
the left of the drop-down list box allows you to move an image up,
down, left, or right within a button.
9. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for each LCD button to which you want to
add an image.
10. When you have completed your configurations, select from among
these options:
• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page
491)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up
Button Colors” on page 498)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page
500)

496 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing LCD Button Displays

Setting Up Identical Images for Multiple Buttons

RouterMapper will allow you to simultaneously customize several LCD
buttons with the same image and image characteristics.
1. Click the first LCD button that you want to set up.
Note 2. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
If you want to add customized <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices), select the other
icons to the default icon list, you buttons that you want to set up.
must add them via the Icon
Management tab in RouterMap- 3. Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.
per. See “Managing Custom 4. To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box
Icons” on page 261 for more
checked.
information.
5. To insert a different icon
a. Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
b. Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.
6. The icon will appear in the center of the LCD button. Move the
Icon Size slider to the left to decrease icon size, and to the right to
increase icon size. The increased/decreased (in percentage of
original size) size will appear in the Icon Size box.
7. If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show
Text check box).
8. If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to
the left of the drop-down list box allows you to move an image up,
down, left, or right within a button.
9. When you have completed your configurations, select from among
these options:
• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page
491)
• Configure inactive and active button colors (see “Setting Up
Button Colors” on page 498)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page
500)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 497

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Setting Up Button Colors

RouterMapper will allow you to customize your LCD buttons with
different shades of three colors: green, red, or amber. You can assign
one color to all of the LCD buttons, or assign different colors to
individual buttons. In addition, you can adjust the color intensity for
active and inactive display.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original
settings you must select Cancel, which will return you to the
RouterMapper main menu window.

Setting Up Colors for Individual Buttons

1. Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2. If necessary, click on the Color tab.

Figure 13-21. LCD Display Color Tab

3. (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box.
An example of how buttons will appear with a new color
assignment will appear in the Inactive Preview box.

498 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing LCD Button Displays

4. (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from

the drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to
15 (brightest).
5. (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the
drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15
(brightest).
6. Click the next LCD button that you want to configure, and select its
colors, as explained in steps 3 through 5.
7. When you have completed your configurations, select from among
these options:
• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page
491)
• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on
page 495)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page
500)

Setting Up Colors for Multiple Buttons

1. If necessary, click on the Color tab.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the
<Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices), select the other
buttons that you want to configure.
3. (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box.
An example of how buttons will appear with a new color
assignment will appear in the Inactive Preview box.
4. (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from
the drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to
15 (brightest).
5. (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the
drop-down list box. Intensity settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15
(brightest).
6. If you want the selected color and intensities to be assigned to all of
the LCD buttons on the panel, click Apply to All. (The selected
color and intensities will be assigned to all of the LCD buttons on
the panel, not just the selected buttons.)
7. When you have completed your configurations, select from among
these options:

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 499

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

• Configure button text (see “Setting Up Button Text” on page

491)
• Configure button images (see “Setting Up Button Images” on
page 495)
• Download configuration information (see “Finishing” on page
500)

Finishing
1. Click Download to download all device configuration information
(e.g., changes to sources and destinations), as well as the LCD
display characteristics, to the RCP-IDe panel.
OR
Click Update LCD Display to download the LCD display
characteristics only to the RCP-IDe panel
2. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu
window.

500 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Controlling Backlight Intensity

Controlling Backlight Intensity

In most cases, you will not need to adjust the contrast on your control
panel buttons. As your RCP-ID control panel ages, however, the degree
of difference between the lightest and darkest areas on a a button may
fade. In such a case, you should adjust the Contrast.

CAUTION
Adjusting the backlight intensity too often will
cause the LCDs to burn out prematurely.

Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this
tab.

Figure 13-22. Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab

Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys

1. Click on the auxiliary key for which you want to change the
intensity. The Text, Icon, and Color tabs display will disappear and
the Brightness box will appear.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 501

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

2. Click on the drop-down arrow for the button state (active or

inactive) you want to change. A series of color gradation samples
will appear.

Figure 13-23. Adjusting Color Intensity for Auxiliary Keys

3. Click the color intensity you want. That color will appear in the
button state brightness display box.

Changing Intensity for Panel Keys

1. Click on the Panel button on the lower left side of the LCD Display
tab. The Text, Icon, and Color tabs display will disappear and the
Panel LCD Contrast box will appear.

502 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Controlling Backlight Intensity

Figure 13-24. LCD Contrast

2. In the Panel LCD Contrast box, move the Brightness slider.

• Move the slider to the left for greater backlight intensity.
• Move the slider to the right for less backlight intensity.
• Click the Restore Default button to restore the panel’s original
backlight intensity.
3. Click OK. You will return to the RouterMapper main menu
window.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 503

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Setting Up Button Pages

RCP-IDee LCD control panels support button paging, which allows you
Note to select alternate button definitions, or “pages,” for the same control
Standard RCP-IDe control panel.This allows panels with a limited number or buttons to provide a
panels do not support button virtual panel of much greater size. You can add up to 20 pages to
paging. RCP-IDee LCD control panels; page 1 is always the original, or default,
setup.

MON MON MON AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX AUX
Page 1 VR 1 VR 2 VR 3
1 2 3 Tx 1 Tx 2 O1 02 03 04 05 06 07 AIR

UP

Blac LOC
Page 2 Bars
k SAT A SAT B SAT C CAM 1 CAM 2 CAM 3 Rx 1 Rx 2 Rx 3 VTR 1 VTR 2 VTR 3 VTR 4 K
DN

Test Test Test Still Still Still Still Still Blac

Page 3 Bars
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 k
12P
6PM
Salv Salv M XPT XPT XPT
Page 4 New Stat Shift
o1 o2 DUB ingest GoLive New 1 2 3
s
s

Figure 13-25. Example of 16×1 Panel with Four Button Pages

In the example shown in Figure 13-25, a 16×1 panel has been

configured with 4 pages of buttons. To access the additional pages, the
operator presses the function buttons that have been reconfigured as
“Page Up/Page Down” keys. Pressing the “Page Up” key selects
lower-numbered pages, while the “Page Down” key selects higher
numbered pages. When the highest- (or lowest-) numbered pages have
been reached, the selection “wraps” to the lowest- (or highest-)
numbered page.

504 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Button Pages

To set up button pages, follow these steps:

1. Click the Address, Style Tab. If necessary, check the Enhanced
LCD Panel check box. The paging information section will appear
on the Address, Style tab (see Figure 13-26).

Figure 13-26. Paging Information

If you have added the control panel via the Add command but are
not sure if the panel you added is an enhanced version, click the
Poll to Check if Enhanced button. RouterMapper will do a poll of
your existing system to see if the panel is an enhanced version.
2. Under Paging Information, enter the total number of pages
(including the default first page) you want to set up. For example,
enter “4” in the Number Pages box if you want 3 pages in addition
to the default page.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 505

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

3. If you want the existing auxiliary keys to be reassigned to act as

Note paging (page up and page down) keys, click the Auxiliary Up/
When a panel has pages, each Down check box.
page requires a Page Up and a 4. Click Apply.
Page Down button. If you do
not want to use the auxiliary 5. Select the Destinations tab. In the lower right corner you will see a
keys for these functions, you drop-down list box that allows you to select whatever page you
will need to set up the Page want to configure.
Up/Down activity via the
Function Button function. See 6. Define the Destinations for the appropriate pages. (See “Defining
page 374 for more information. the Destinations” on page 477 for instructions on how to define
destinations.)
You can copy page definition information from one page to another.
See step 506 on page 506 for more information.
7. Select the Sources tab. In the lower right corner you will see a
drop-down list box that allows you to select whatever page you
want to configure.
8. Define the Sources for the appropriate pages. (See “Defining the
Sources” on page 482 for instructions on how to define sources.)
You can copy page source information from one page to another.
See step 506 on page 506 for more information.
9. Select the Address, Style tab again. To copy information from one
page to another:
a. Select the page you want to copy from (highlight the page
number in the From box).
b. Select the page you want to copy to (highlight the page number
in the To box).
c. Choose one of the following options.
• Click Sources to copy the source setup from one page to
another. If you want an exact copy, uncheck the Increment
Sources check box; otherwise, RouterMapper will
automatically assign the other active sources in increasing
numerical order (see Figure 13-27).

506 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Up Button Pages

Figure 13-27. Incrementing Sources

• Click Destinations to copy the destination setup from one

page to another. If you want an exact copy, uncheck the
Increment Dests check box; otherwise, RouterMapper will
automatically assign the other active destinations in
increasing numerical order.
• Click Functions to copy the button function setup from one
page to another.
• Click LCDs to copy the LCD button setup from one page
to another.
• Click From Page Smart Apply to copy source,
destination, function, and LCD setups from one page to all
of the other pages.
10. Enter the control panel IP address, gateway address, and subnet
mask (address used to identify the subnetwork to which the control
panel belongs).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 507

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

11. Click OK. You will be returned to the RouterMapper main menu
window.

508 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Monitoring Device Addresses

Monitoring Device Addresses

The RCP-IDe allows you to monitor any specific IP addresses to make
sure the associated device is still active. You can also enable an alarm
condition to notify you when the associated device is inactive (both
auxiliary buttons will blink simultaneously to indicate the “inactive”
alarm condition).
1. Click the Address, Style tab.
2. Click the Protocols... button. The Edit Protocols window will
appear. The assigned values for the default server and client
protocols for the selected Ethernet port will be displayed.

Figure 13-28. Edit Protocols Window

3. Highlight the target selection; then, click the Edit button. The
Options window will appear (see Figure 13-29 on page 510). The
assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the
selected Ethernet port will be displayed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 509

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Figure 13-29. Ethernet Protocols Options Window

You can change some of the option’s values at this window. To

Note change a value:
While all relevant protocol a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change. A
option values are displayed, drop-down menu will appear (see Figure 13-30 on page 511).
some values may not be
configurable. These values are b. Select the new value.
displayed for informational c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new
purposes only; you cannot
selection will appear in the Value column.
change them through
RouterMapper. d. Click OK. You will return to the Ethernet Protocols tab.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the RouterMapper
main menu window.

510 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Monitoring Device Addresses

Figure 13-30. Changing a Protocol Option’s Value

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 511

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

Setting Network Information for RCP-IDe

Panels

Figure 13-31. Control Cards Tab

The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card
installed in the RCP-IDe LCD control panel. The information is
updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows the control card's network setup on the right.
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections:
Active and Programmed settings.

512 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting Network Information for RCP-IDe Panels

Figure 13-32. Active Settings

• Active settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address
settings that are currently being used for the panel. When you select
the Active radio button, these settings are displayed, but they are
read-only.

Figure 13-33. Programmed Settings

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 513

Chapter 13: Editing RCP-p Panels

• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address
settings that you want used with the RCP-IDe. When you select the
Programmed radio button, you can edit these settings.
• IP Address: Enter an IP address for the RCP-IDe.
• Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the
RCP-IDe is attached.
• Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork
to which the RCP-IDe belongs.

514 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 14
Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Overview
The RCP-16×1SBAp is one of several different control panel styles
Note available in the RCP-p Programmable Panels series. The panel is shown
Refer to Chapter 13: “Editing in Figure 14-1.
RCP-p Panels” For information The following topics are explained in this chapter:
on configuring other RCP-p
Series panels. • “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 517
• “Configuring the Auxiliary Keys” on page 519
• “Configuring Breakaway Keys” on page 522
• “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 529
• “Changing Panel Name or ID” on page 530
• “Defining the Destinations” on page 523
• “Defining the Sources” on page 526
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 518

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 515

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Models
The RCP-16×1SBAp provides control of a single destination with two
levels of breakaway. The panel includes two user-definable function
keys, two breakaway keys and 16 source select keys with associated
LEDs.

Figure 14-1. RCP-16×1SBAp Panel

516 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit the RCP-16×1SBAp panels, double-click the panel name at
the RouterMapper main window (or click the panel name; then, click
the Edit button). The Edit Panel dialog box will appear.

Figure 14-2. Edit Panel Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 517

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCP-p control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.) See Chapter 10:
“Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for more detailed
information about the Edit Button Function dialog box.

Figure 14-3. RCP-16×1SBAp Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that
is used to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group
that is used to define the specific parameters of the button. The
appearance of the Properties group will depend on the type of button
selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:
Note 1. Select the function from the drop-down list box.
Possible button functions are The Properties group on the Edit Button Function dialog box will
shown in Table 10-1, page 361.
change when the selection is made.
2. Select the button properties from the options available in the
Properties group.
3. Click Done. You will be returned to the Edit Panel window.

518 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All RCP-16×1SBAp panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys.
When you add a new panel, the auxiliary keys are given default
assignments (Enable and Lock). To change either assignment, click
the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. The following dialog
box will appear.

Figure 14-4. Configuring Auxiliary Keys

The user-definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog. The
arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the auxiliary
keys. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
The Edit Button Function dialog box will appear (see Figure 14-5).

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 519

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Figure 14-5. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

See Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for a

detailed description of this dialog (as well as instructions for creating
various types of buttons).

520 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

If RouterMapper notes selection key definition errors that will not allow
the panel to be successfully downloaded, a Warning group will appear
on the Auxiliary Keys tab.
To view the error message(s), click the View Errors button. The Panel
Errors dialog box will appear.

Figure 14-6. Resolving Panel Errors

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 521

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Configuring Breakaway Keys

The RCP-16×1SBAp includes two user-definable breakaway keys, each
of which can control a different level. For example, one key could be
assigned to the video level, and the second key to the audio level. You
tor could then perform a video-only switch by pressing the Video key
before selecting the source. Likewise, an audio-only switch could be
performed by pressing the Audio key before selecting the source. To
perform an AFV switch, you would press both breakaway keys
simultaneously before selecting the source.
To configure the breakaway keys, click the Breakaway Keys tab at the
Edit Panel screen.

Figure 14-7. Configuring Breakaway Keys

The user-definable breakaway keys are circled in blue on the dialog.

The arrows point to the RouterMapper buttons used to define the
breakaway keys. Click the button associated with the key you want to
configure. The Edit Button Function dialog box will appear. For
detailed instructions on using this dialog box to create a breakaway key,
refer to page 381.

522 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Destinations

Defining the Destinations

Assigning Selection Keys
To assign the destination to the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the Destination tab at the Edit Panel screen. The Destination
Select dialog box will appear.
The destination is assigned at the Logical Destinations group on the
left side of the dialog. The list box lists all destinations available in
the database.
2. Drag the destination from the Logical Destinations group and drop
it on the Dest box, as shown in Figure 14-8.

Figure 14-8. Assigning a Destination by Dragging and Dropping

Alternatively, the destination can be assigned using the Edit Button

Function dialog. To access the dialog box, follow these steps:
1. Click the Dest box.
2. Select Destination from the Button Function drop-down list.
3. In the Properties group, select the destination to be associated with
this panel.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 523

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

The RCP-16×1SBAp panel can be configured with more than one

destination. Either of the two auxiliary keys or the two breakaway keys
can be used as destination select keys. Click the button; then, select
Destination from the Edit Button Function drop-down list.

Figure 14-9. Assigning a Destination by Using the Edit Button

Function Dialog Box

524 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Destinations

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a destination select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in
Figure 14-10. The key will be “greyed” to indicate that it is unassigned.

Figure 14-10. Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 525

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Defining the Sources

Assigning Selection Keys
To assign a source select key, click the Sources tab at the Edit Panel
screen. The Source Select dialog box will appear.
Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group on the left side of the
dialog. The list box lists all sources available in the database. The
button icon shows the key currently assigned to each source.
To assign a source to a selection key, drag the source from the Logical
Sources group and drop it on the desired key, as shown in Figure 14-11.

Figure 14-11. Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a source select key using the Edit Button Function
dialog box (see Figure 14-12).
1. Right-click the selection key.
2. Select Source from the Button Function drop-down list.
3. In the Properties group, select the source to be associated with this
key. (See Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for
more information on using the Edit Button Function dialog.)

526 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Figure 14-12. Assigning a Source by Using the Edit Button

Function Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 527

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown in
Figure 14-13. The key will be “greyed” to show it is unassigned.

Figure 14-13. Clearing Selection Key Assignment

528 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Configuring the Levels Affected

Configuring the Levels Affected

The Levels tab specifies what levels will be affected when sources are
Note selected from the panel. If all levels are enabled on the Levels tab,
If the panel is configured with pressing a source select key on the panel will affect all levels defined
Breakaway keys, the Levels tab for that source.
will be disabled. All check The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to
boxes will be greyed.
specific levels on the panel. For example, a panel could be created with
only the video level enabled. In this case, even if audio/video sources
were selected, only the video level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the
appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled for
this panel.

Figure 14-14. Assigning Levels for the Panel

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 529

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

Changing Panel Name or ID

CAUTION
The RCP-16×1SBAp can only function as an
RCP-16×1SBAp. The Panel Style group will be
disabled (greyed).

Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce
the Name, ID, Style dialog box shown in Figure 14-15. The list box on
this screen displays the current Panel Name. The two combo boxes
display the Panel ID and Panel Style settings. The Version box displays
the hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the panel
must have been polled previously for the Version information to be
correct).

Figure 14-15. Changing the Panel Name or ID

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name
text box. Up to 15 characters can be used. Typically, the Panel Name
would indicate where the panel is located (e.g., Edit B, Master Control,
etc.)

530 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Changing Panel Name or ID

To change the panel ID, follow these steps:

Note 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
Remember! The panel ID is the 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
control panel’s physical address.
If the ID is changed in the 3. Select the new panel ID.
RouterMapper database, it must
Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the
also be changed on the physical
panel (for information on definition has been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the
changing the ID on the physical new settings by clicking the Download button on the Edit Panel screen
panel, refer to the manual that (or refer to “Downloading Device Definitions” starting on page 69). To
was supplied with the panel). print new key caps, click the Print Key Caps button.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 531

Chapter 14: Editing RCP-16×1SBAp Panels

532 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 15
Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Overview
The RCP-12×2BAp is one of several different control panel styles in
Note the RCP-p programmable panels series The panel is shown in
See Chapter 13: “Editing RCP-p Figure 15-1 on page 534.
Panels” for information on con-
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
figuring other RCP-p series pan-
els. • “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog” on page 534
• “Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style” on page 546
• “Configuring the Auxiliary Keys” on page 536
• “Configuring Breakaway Keys” on page 537
• “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 545
• “Defining the Destinations” on page 538
• “Defining the Sources” on page 541
• “Edit Button Function Dialog Box” on page 535

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 533

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Models

Figure 15-1. RCP-12×2BAp Panel

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

To edit RCP-12×2BAp panels, double-click the panel name at the
RouterMapper main window (or click the panel name; then, click the
Edit button). The Edit Panel dialog box will appear.

Figure 15-2. Edit Panel Dialog Box

• Use the Auxiliary Keys tab to configure the user-definable

auxiliary keys.
• Use the Breakaway Keys tab to select levels you want to control.
• Use the Destinations tab to define the destinations available.

534 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Models

• Use the Sources, Dest-A and Sources-Dest-B tabs to define the

sources available.
• Use the Levels tab to define the levels affected.
• Use the Name, ID, Style tab to change the panel name, ID, or
panel style.

Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to
user-definable selection keys on the ABA and RCP-p control panels.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.) The Edit Button
Function dialog box is described in detail in Chapter 10: “Editing
Control Panel Button Functions.”

Figure 15-3. Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that
is used to select the function of the selection key, and a Properties group
that is used to define the specific parameters of the button. The
appearance of the Properties group will depend on the type of button
selected in the drop-down list box. The functions available in the
drop-down list will depend on the type of panel being edited.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 535

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

To assign a button function, follow these steps:

1. Select the function from the drop-down list box. The Properties
group on the Edit Button Function dialog box will change when the
selection is made. Possible button functions are shown in
Table 10-1 on page 361.
2. Select the button properties from the options available in the
Properties group.
3. Click Done. You will be returned to the Edit Panel window.

Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All RCP-12×2BAp panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys.
When a new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default
assignments (Enable and Dual Locks). To change either assignment,
click the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. The following
dialog box will appear.

Figure 15-4. Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The
Edit Button Function dialog box will appear, as shown in Figure 15-3

536 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Models

on page 535. (Refer to Chapter 10: “Editing Control Panel Button

Functions” for detailed instructions on using this dialog box.)

Configuring Breakaway Keys

All RCP-12×2BAp panels include two user-definable breakaway keys.
When a new panel is added, the breakaway keys are given default
assignments (Video and Audio).
To change either assignment, follow these steps:
1. Click the Breakaway Keys tab at the Edit Panel window. The
following dialog box will appear.

Figure 15-5. Configuring the Breakaway Keys

2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure. The
Edit Button Function dialog box will appear. (Refer to Chapter 10:
“Editing Control Panel Button Functions” for detailed instructions
on using this dialog box.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 537

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Defining the Destinations

Assigning Selection Keys
To assign a destination select key, click the Destinations tab at the Edit
Panel screen. A dialog box similar to Figure 15-6 will appear. The
actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the configuration of the
RCP-12×2BAp panel.

Figure 15-6. Edit Panel Window, Destinations Tab

Destinations are assigned at the Logical Destinations group. The list

box lists all destinations available in the database. The button icon
shows the key currently assigned to each destination.
To assign a destination to a selection key, drag the destination from
the Logical Destinations group and drop it on the desired key, as shown
in Figure 15-7 on page 539.

538 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Destinations

Figure 15-7. Assigning a Destination to a Selection Key by

Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a destination select key by using the Edit Button
Function dialog box. To access the dialog box (see Figure 15-8 on
page 540), follow these steps:
1. Right-click the selection key.
2. Select Destination from the Button Function drop-down list.
3. In the Properties group, select the destination to be associated with
this key.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 539

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Figure 15-8. Creating a Destination Select Key

540 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Defining the Sources

Assigning Selection Keys
To assign a source select key, click the Sources – Dest. A or the
Note Sources – Dest. B tab at the Edit Panel screen. A dialog box similar to
The RCP-12×2BAp is a dual that shown in Figure 15-9 will appear.
bus panel. The top row of but-
tons controls the first destina-
tion source select (Destination
A). The bottom row of buttons
controls the second destination
source select (Destination B).
The Edit Panel screen contains
separate tabs to allow you to
control the sources for the sepa-
rate destinations.

Figure 15-9. Defining Sources

Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group. The list box lists all
sources available in the database. The button icon shows the key
currently assigned to each source.
To assign a source to a selection key, follow these steps:
1. Drag the source from the Logical Sources group
2. Drop the source on the desired key, as shown in Figure 15-10 on
page 542.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 541

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Figure 15-10. Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping

You may also create a source select key by using the Edit Button
Function dialog box. To access this dialog box (see Figure 15-11 on
page 543), follow these steps:
1. Right-click the selection key.
2. Select Source from the Button Function drop-down list.
3. In the Properties group, select the source to be associated with this
key.

542 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Defining the Sources

Figure 15-11. Assigning a Source by Using the Edit Button

Function Dialog Box

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 543

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Clearing Selection Key Assignments

To clear or delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown
in Figure 15-12. The key will be “greyed” to show it is unassigned.

Figure 15-12. Clearing Source Select Key

544 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Configuring the Levels Affected

Configuring the Levels Affected

The Levels tab specifies what levels will be affected when sources are
Note selected from the panel. If all levels are enabled on the Levels tab,
If the panel is configured with pressing a source select button on the panel will affect all levels defined
Breakaway keys, the Levels tab for that source.
will be disabled. All check
boxes will be greyed. The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to
specific levels on the panel. For example, a panel could be created with
only the video level enabled. In this case, even if audio/video sources
were selected, only the video level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the
appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled for
this panel.

Figure 15-13. Assigning Levels for a Panel

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 545

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

Clicking on the Name, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box will
produce the Name, ID, Style dialog box. The list box on this screen
displays the current Panel Name. The two combo boxes display the
Panel ID and Panel Style settings. The Version box displays the
hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the panel must
have been polled previously for the Version information to be correct).

Figure 15-14. Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name
text box. The descriptive name may contain up to 15 characters.
Typically, the Panel Name would indicate where the panel is located
(i.e., Edit B, Master Control, etc.)

546 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

To change the panel ID, follow these steps:

Note 4. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
The panel ID is the control
panel’s physical address. If the 5. Scroll through the list of choices.
ID is changed in the Router- 6. Select the new panel ID.
Mapper database, it must also
be changed on the physical
panel (for information on
changing the ID on the physical
panel, refer to the manual that
was supplied with the panel).

To change the panel style, follow these steps:

Caution 1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
A Panel Style change will
initialize the current 2. Scroll through the list of choices.
configuration to the default 3. Select the new panel style.
setting. All previous
modifications will be lost. Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take effect until the
definition has been downloaded to the physical panel. Download the
new settings by pressing the Download button on the Edit Panel screen
(or refer to “Downloading Device Definitions” starting on page 69). To
print new key caps, click the Print Key Caps button.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 547

Chapter 15: Editing RCP-12×2BAp Panels

548 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 16
Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Overview
The RCP-GPIp series panels are general purpose interfaces that provide
Note contact closure inputs and outputs for Hedco, MixBox, XPlus and VIA
To determine which panel type series routers. The RCP-GPIp panels are available in two different
you are using, refer to “Models” styles. The GPI32p provides 32 input and output contact closures. The
on page 550. GPI64p provides 64 input and output contact closures. Both can be
configured using RouterMapper.
The following topics are explained in this chapter:
• “Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box” on page 551
• “Configuring the Levels Affected” on page 554
• “Configuring Contact Aux Functions” on page 555
• “Example of GPI Configuration” on page 557
• “Setting the Panel ID and Name” on page 553

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 549

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Models

Figure 16-1. RCP-GPIp Rear Panels

550 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box

Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box

To edit the RCP-GPI panels, double-click the panel name at the
RouterMapper main window (or click the panel name; then, click the
Edit button). If this is a new GPI panel, the following dialog box will
appear.

Figure 16-2. New GPI Panel Dialog Box

To edit the panel, click the Edit File button. The Microsoft®
Windows® Notepad application will launch with the GPI Panel
Definition file displayed.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 551

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Figure 16-3. GPI Definition File

GPI Panel Definition File Layout

A single GPI Definition File is used for all GPI panels in the database.
Note The definition file includes a separate section for each GPI panel, with
There will only be one GPI all the configuration information for that panel contained within the
Definition File regardless of the section. A panel section begins with the indicator BeginGPI and ends
number of GPI panels in the with the indicator EndGPI. The entries in between the BeginGPI and
RouterMapper panel list.
EndGPI indicators define the panel.
Each entry in a panel definition section begins with an identifier that
indicates which parameter is being defined in that line. Possible
identifiers are PanelID, PanelNAME, ValidLevels, Aux1, Aux2,
Contact1 . . . Contact64. An equals sign (=) will follow each
parameter identifier. The configuration information will appear to the
right of the equals sign. For example, a PanelID=10 entry means that
the Panel ID for this panel is 10. A PanelNAME=Tally 3 entry means
that this panel is named “Tally 3.”

552 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting the Panel ID and Name

Setting the Panel ID and Name

To set the panel ID and name for a GPI panel:
1. Locate the appropriate panel section in the GPI Panel Definition file
(look for the GPIBegin indicator, as shown in Figure 16-4 on
page 554).
2. On the PanelID= line, enter the panel ID that will be associated
with this panel.
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is
changed in the RouterMapper database, it must also be changed on
the physical panel (for information on changing the ID on the
physical panel, refer to the manual that was supplied with the
panel).
3. On the PanelName= line, enter a descriptive for the panel. Up to 15
characters can be used. Typically, the Panel Name indicates where
the panel is located (e.g., Edit B, Master Control, etc.)

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 553

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Configuring the Levels Affected

1. Locate the appropriate panel section in the GPI Panel Definition
File.
2. On the ValidLevels= line, enter the number of levels to be
associated with the panel. Valid entries are numbers 0 through 7.
(Refer to Figure 16-4 for an illustration.)

Figure 16-4. Setting the Panel ID, Name, and Levels Affected

554 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Configuring Contact Aux Functions

Configuring Contact Aux Functions

The Aux and Contact entries define the functions that each GPI contact
will perform. There are 64 main contacts, each with a separate
definition entry (i.e., Contact1, Contact2, etc.). The Aux entries are
identical to the Contact entries, except that they correspond to contacts
that are out of sequence with regard to the others.
To configure the Contact and/or Aux functions, enter the contact’s
function on the right side of the Aux= or Contact= line, as shown in
Figure 16-5. For example, if a contact is to act as a source, enter
“Source” in the Contact= line.

Figure 16-5. Configuring the Contacts

In addition to the function type, contacts also require additional

configuration information. For example, if you enter “Source” in the
Contact= line, you must also define which source will be associated
with the contact.
To enter additional information in a Contact line, place a comma
after the function; then, enter the additional information after the
comma. A list of function types and the additional information required
can be found in Table 16-1.

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 555

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Table 16-1. GPI Function Types

Function Type Description Additional Information
None No effect on either the GPI input or None required
output.
Source GPI Input: selects the source Index of the logical source associated with the
GPI Output: tallies the source contact
Contact1=Source, 12
Destination GPI Input: selects the destination Index of the logical destination associated with
GPI Output: tallies the destination the contact
Contact1=Destination, 12
CrossPoint GPI Input: selects the crosspoint Index of the logical source & destination
GPI Output: tallies the crosspoint Contact1=Crosspoint,3,4
StatusOnlyCrossPoint GPI Input: no effect Index of the logical source & destination
GPI Output: tallies the crosspoint Contact1=Crosspoint,3,4
LocalSalvo Fires a salvo Index of the local salvo
Contact1=LocalSalvo, 2
Shift Requires Shift to be selected and None required
held when salvos are fired Contact1=Shift
Take Causes the panel to be operated in None required
Preset/Take mode (Take must be Contact1=Take
pressed to make the switch).
Clear Allows the operator to abort a None required
preset switch before the Take Contact1=Clear
StatusOnlySource GPI Input: no effect Index of the logical source associated with the
GPI Output: tallies the source only contact
while the contact is held closed Contact1=StatusOnlySource, 12
JoyStickSource GPI Input: selects the source only Index of the logical source associated with the
while the contact is held closed contact
Contact1=JoyStickSource, 12
GPI Output: tallies the source only
while the contact is held closed
JoyStickCrossPoint GPI Input: selects the crosspoint Index of the logical source & destination
only while the contact is held Contact1=JoyStickCrosspoint,3,4
closed
GPI Output: tallies the crosspoint
only while the contact is held
closed

556 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Example of GPI Configuration

Example of GPI Configuration

See Figure 16-7 on page 558 for an illustration of the GPI Panel
Definition file entries for this example.

Figure 16-6. RCP-GPI32p as a 32×1 Single Destination (on

Destination 5) with Control and Tally

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 557

Chapter 16: Editing RCP-GPIp Panels

Figure 16-7. GPI Panel Definition File Entries for RCP-GPI32p as a 32×1 Single Destination
(on Destination 5) with Control and Tally

558 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Index

Keywords

A router frame 76
Prophecy series. See Legacy frames, adding
ABA(1)-MB, -SB, -XY. See RCP-ABA 1RU control router control panels 153–154
panels
Via series. See Legacy frames, adding
ABA2(E)-XYp. See RCP-ABA 2RU control panels
XPlus series. See Legacy frames, adding
ABA-AFV. See RCP-ABA 1RU control panels
XPRESS series. See Legacy frames, adding
Adding commands 372–373
Adding dynamic routing threads 232–236
Adding control panels 151–154
Adding frames 75–149
Adding devices
Adding indexes 258
adding by polling 54, 76, 76
Adding parametric settings 397–398
adding manually 61–64
Adding salvos 368–369
Edge protocol gateway 157–167, 169–173
Addresses, monitoring device 509–511
generic Leitch⁄Harris routers. See Legacy
Alarm editor
frames, adding
adding alarm types 384–388
Hedco (HD-16) series. See Legacy frames,
deleting alarm types 389
adding
editing alarm types 388–389
Integrator data router frames 105–110
Alarm key 383
Integrator frames 100–104
Allowing access to destinations 412–413, 448
Integrator Gold frames 111–114
Allowing access to sources 412–413, 448
MixBox series. See Legacy frames, adding
Assembling key caps 72
NEO series. See Legacy frames, adding
Assigning button functions 408–409, 443–444, 472–
Opus master control frames 188–189
473, 518, 536
Opus master control panels 190
Assigning category keys 432–434, 462–464
other frames 148–149
Assigning destination selection keys 414, 449, 479,
output monitoring setup 115–127
523–524, 538–540
Panacea frames 132–147
Assigning favorite sources to selection keys 414–415,
Platinum frames 77–99
449, 484, 526–527, 541–543
polling
Assigning source selection keys 414–415, 449, 484,
Edge protocol gateway 156
526–527, 541–543
router control panel 152
Assigning sources 430–432, 461–462

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 559

Index

Assigning view order 411–412, 446–447 Configuration options for RCP-p panels 470
Audio processing settings Configuring auxiliary keys 419, 453, 474, 519–521, 536–
audio effects 354–355 537
audio gain 352–353 Configuring Breakaway keys 475, 522, 537
audio source 356–357 Configuring contact aux functions 555
Automatic disconnect feature 40–41 Configuring Edge protocol gateway 155–185
Configuring levels 488, 529, 545, 554
B–C Connecting RouterMapper to your system 18–22
Backing up databases 270–271 creating an additional serial port 20
Breakaway⁄Follow key 381, 476 downloading router frame and control panel
Button colors, editing 28–29 configurations 18
Button pages setup 504–508 Contacting us
Category indexing product information 8
adding categories 252 technical support 8
changing names 256 Contiguous partitioning 286
correcting destination errors 256 Control panels
correcting source errors 256 12×2BAp models 534
deleting categories 255 16×1SBAp models 516
generating names 255 ABA(1)-MB models 404
introduction 250–251 ABA(1)-SB models 403
viewing destinations affected by categories 254 ABA(1)-XY models 402
viewing sources affected by categories 253 ABA1(E)-XY models 403
Category⁄Index key 366–367 ABA2(E)-XYp models 440
Changing index names 259–260 ABA-AFV models 404
Changing panel IDs 436–437, 466, 489–490, 530–531, adding salvos 368–369
546–547 adding to database by polling 152
Changing panel names 436, 466, 489, 530, 546 adding to database using Add command 153
Changing panel styles 436–437, 466–467, 489–490, 546– Alarm key 383
547 allowing access to destinations 412–413, 448
Clean switch 342–343, 345–346 allowing access to sources 412–413, 448
Clearing destination selection keys 417, 452, 481, 525 assigning button functions 360
Clearing source selection keys 417, 452, 487, 528, 544 assigning category keys 432–434, 462–464
Commands assigning destination selection keys 414, 449, 479,
adding commands 372–373 523–524, 538–540
Command Select key 372 assigning source selection keys 414–415, 449, 484,
deleting commands 373 526–527, 541–543
editing commands 373 assigning sources 430–432, 461–462
Communication dependencies 4 assigning view order 411–412, 446–447
Communication settings 29–35 Breakaway⁄Follow key 381
demo mode setting 33 Category⁄Index key 366–367
dial-up setting 33 changing panel IDs 436–437, 466, 489–490, 530–
selecting settings 30 531, 546–547
serial setting 30 changing panel names 436, 466, 489, 530, 546
TCP/IP setting 31 changing panel styles 436–437, 466–467, 489–490,
Configuration options for RCP-ID panels 470 546–547

560 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Index

clearing destination selection keys 417, 452, 481, RCP-ABA 2RU panels 439–467
525 RCP-GPIp panels 549–558
clearing source selection keys 417, 452, 487, 528, RCP-p panels 469–514
544 resolving auxiliary key definition errors 420, 454,
Command Select key 372 521
configuration options for RCP-ID panels 470 resolving inaccessibility errors 434, 465
configuration options for RCP-p panels 470 Salvo Select key 367
configuring auxiliary keys 419, 453, 474, 519–521, setting GPIp panel IDs 553
536–537 setting GPIp panel names 553
configuring Breakaway keys 475, 522, 537 setting levels associated with selection windows
configuring contact aux functions 555 420, 455
configuring levels 488, 529, 545, 554 Source Alarm Select key 390
copying control panel definitions 66 Source Select key 363
creating panel definitions 418, 453 Correcting destination errors 260
Crosspoint Select key 365 Correcting source errors 260
defining destinations 477, 523–525, 538–540 Creating an additional serial port 20
defining sources 482–486, 526–528, 541–544 Creating control panel definitions 418, 453
denying access to destinations 412, 447 Creating indexes 257
denying access to sources 412, 447 Crosspoint Select key 365
Destination Alarm Select key 392 Crosspoint switching mode 83, 281
Destination Select key 364 Crosspoints, redundant 83, 281
determining destinations accessible to panels 423–
429, 458–460 D
determining sources accessible to panels 429–430, Data router frames 105–110
460–461 Database setup 53
downloading configurations 18 Deleting commands 373
Edit Button Function key 374 Deleting dynamic routing fabric manager threads 242
editing salvos 368–371 Deleting indexes 259
GPI configuration examples 557 Deleting parametric settings 399
GPI function types 556 Demo mode communication connection setting 33
GPI panel definition file layout 552 Denying access to destinations 412, 447
GPI32p models 550 Denying access to sources 412, 447
GPI64p models 550 Destination Alarm Select key 392
limiting available destinations 410, 445 Destination Select key 364
limiting available sources 410, 445 Destinations
Lock key 378 adding logical destinations 228
moving a selection key 409, 444 assigning
On-Air Swap key 394 icons 223
Page key 377 level outputs 224
Panel Status key 376 names 221
Parametric key 395 physical outputs 224
Protect key 380 defining 220, 477, 523–525, 538–540
RCP-12×2BAp panels 533–547 deleting logical destinations 229
RCP-16×1SBAp panels 515–531 editing preferences 229
RCP-ABA 1RU panels 401–437

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 561

Index

Determining destinations accessible to panels 423–429, RCP-ABA 1RU 406

458–460 RCP-ABA 2RU 441
Determining sources accessible to panels 429–430, RCP-GPIp 551
460–461 RCP-ID 471
Device addresses, monitoring 509–511 RCP-p 471
Device definition function buttons 51 Editing a frame definition
Device summary list 52 audio processing settings 352
Dial-up communication connection setting 33 control cards 320
Download problems and corrective actions 70 detected cards 311
Downloading configurations detected matrices 306
control panel 18 editing configuration 274
router frame 18 editing router frames 275
Downloading device definitions 69 editing router matrices 278
Downloading dynamic routing fabric manager thread firmware upgrades 317–319
information 246 matrix partitioning 286
Dynamic routing fabric manager 231 Panacea I⁄O hardware module 336
adding threads 232–236 Panacea parametric settings 341
deleting threads 242 Editing a logical database 193–272
downloading thread information 246 adding icons 262–264
editing remote access lists 238–242 backing up databases 270–271
editing threads 236–238 category indexing 250–256
optimizing threads 245 defining destinations 220
defining levels 194
E defining sources 198
Edge dynamic routing fabric manager 231
supported Ethernet protocols 161 importing icons 264–266
supported serial protocols 159 managing custom icons 261
Edge protocol gateway partitioned matrices 248
adding by polling 156 printing databases 269
adding manually 157–167 removing icons 267
configuring 155–180 restoring databases 271–272
detected cards 164, 181 restoring default icons 266
Ethernet port protocol option values 161–163, 179– Editing button colors 28–29
180 Editing commands 373
serial port protocol assignments 158–160, 178–179 Editing control panel button functions 359–399
serial port protocol option values 158–160, 178– adding salvos 368–369
179 Alarm key 383
setting network information 165–176, 181–185 assigning functions 360
SNMP Agent 169–173 breakaway⁄follow 381
Edit button function dialog box 360, 408, 443, 472, 518, category⁄index 366–367
535 Command Select 372
Edit Button Function key 374 Crosspoint Select 365
Edit panel dialog box destination alarm select 392
RCP-12x2BAp 534 destination select 364
RCP-16×1SBAp 517 edit button function 374

562 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Index

editing salvos 368–371 G–H

lock 378
Gateway. See Setting network information
on-air swap 394
Generic Leitch⁄Harris routers. See Legacy frames,
page 377
adding
panel status 376
GPI configuration examples 557
parametric 395
protect 380 GPI function types 556
salvo select 367 GPI panel definition file layout 552
source alarm select 390 GPI32p model control panel. See RCP-GPIp control
panels
source select 363
GPI64p model control panels. See RCP-GPIp control
Editing device definitions 64
panels
Editing dynamic routing fabric manager remote access
Hard panel fonts 27
lists 238–242
Editing dynamic routing fabric manager threads 236– Hedco (HD-16) series. See Legacy frames, adding
238
I–J
Editing frame configuration 274
Editing frame definitions 273–357 Icons
Editing parametric settings 398 adding 262–264
Editing RCP-12×2BAp panels 533–547 assigning icons for destinations 223
Editing RCP-16×1SBAp panels 515–531 assigning icons for sources 209
Editing RCP-ABA 1RU panels 401–437 importing 264–266
Editing RCP-ABA 2RU panels 439–467 managing 261
Editing RCP-GPIp panels 549–558 removing 267
Editing RCP-p panels 469–514 restoring defaults 266
Editing router frames 275 Indexes
Editing router matrices 278 adding 258
Editing salvos 368–371 changing names 259–260
Editor preferences 23 correcting destination errors 260
Ethernet port protocol option values, Edge protocol correcting source errors 260
gateway 161–163, 179–180 creating 257
deleting 259
F managing 257
Indicators, polling status 56
4×1p, 4×4p model control panels. See RCP-p control
panels Initiating a poll 54, 76
Firmware upgrades 317–319 Installation
communication settings 29–35
Frames
adding 75–149 connecting RouterMapper 18–22
adding to database by polling 76 creating an additional serial port 20
adding to database by using Add command 76 downloading router frame and control panel
configurations 18
downloading configurations 18
editing frame definitions 273–357 installing RouterMapper software 10
editing matrices 278 installing RouterMapper v.5.06 17
editing router frames 275 Opus master control switcher 41, 42
matrix partitioning 286 preferences 23–29
remote dial-up 35–41

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 563

Index

uninstalling RouterMapper 44 editing components 302

Integrator frames enabling 288, 301
adding 100–104 RGB 286
data router 105–110 shared inputs 287
Integrator Gold 111–114 Wild 287
editing 301–306, 310–313, 320, 332–333 MixBox series. See Legacy frames, adding
Introduction Monitoring device addresses 509–511
communication dependencies 4 Moving a selection key 409, 444
contacting us 8 NEO series. See Legacy frames, adding
new features 2 Network information, setting (RCP-IDe panels) 512–
system requirements 3 514
using RouterMapper on-line help 6–7 New features 2
using this manual 4 On-Air Swap key 394
IP address. See Setting network information Optimizing dynamic routing fabric manager threads
245
K–L Opus master control switcher
Key caps adding frames 188–189
assembling 72 adding panels 190
printing 71 Ethernet communication error and diagnosis 42
Launching RouterMapper 48 introduction 41
LCD buttons selecting frames 191
controlling backlight intensity 501 selecting panels 192
editing displays 491–503 Opus master controller. See Opus master control
setting up pages 504–508 switcher
setup 491–508 Output monitoring 115–127
Legacy frames, adding 148–149
Levels P
changing a level’s color 196 Page key 377
defining 194 Panacea frames
specifying logical router size 197 adding 132–147
Limiting destinations available to a panel 410, 445 editing 275–278, 282–285, 301–306, 310–313, 320,
Limiting sources available to a panel 410, 445 333–357
Lock key 378 SNMP Agent 138–142
Panel defaults 26
M–O Panel Status key 376
Main window overview 49 Parametric editing setup 396
device definition function buttons 51 adding settings 397–398
device summary list 52 deleting settings 399
pop-up menus 50 editing settings 398
router definition function buttons 52 Parametric key 395
sorting entries 50 Parametric settings 341
Managing indexes 257 Partitioned matrices 248
Matrix partitioning 286 P-HSC modules. See Clean Switch; Quiet Switch
contiguous 286 P-HSCQ modules. See Clean Switch
P-HSCQ modules. See Clean Switch; Transition

564 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Index

Platinum frames, adding 77–99 definition errors, resolving 521

Polling Breakaway keys, configuring 522
initiating a poll 54 destination selection keys
polling problems and corrective actions 57 assigning 523–524
polling problems and corrective actions, combiner clearing 525
system 57–61 destinations, defining 523–525
polling the control system 54 levels, configuring 529
Polling status indicators 56 panel IDs, changing 530–531
Pop-up menus 50 panel names, changing 530
Preferences 23–29 source selection keys
Editing button colors 28–29 assigning 526–527
editor preferences 23 clearing 528
hard panel fonts 27 sources, defining 526–528
panel defaults 26 RCP-ABA 1RU control panels 401–437
soft panel fonts 27 ABA(1)-MB models 404
zero-based export 29 ABA(1)-SB models 403
Printing databases 269 ABA(1)-XY models 402
Printing key caps 71 ABA1(E)-XY models 403
Product information contact information 8 ABA-AFV models 404
Prophecy series. See Legacy frames, adding auxiliary keys
Prophecy series. See RCP-12×2BAp control panels configuring 419
Protect key 380 definition errors, resolving 420
P-SC modules. See Clean Switch; Quiet Switch category keys, assigning 432–434
P-SCQ modules. See Clean Switch; Transition destination selection keys
assigning 414
Q–R clearing 417
Quiet switch 344–345 destinations
RCP-12×2BAp control panels 533–547 allowing access to 412–413
12×2BAp models 534 denying access 412
auxiliary keys, configuring 536–537 determining accessibility 423–429
Breakaway keys, configuring 537 limiting 410
destination selection keys, assigning 538–540 inaccessibility errors, resolving 434
destinations, defining 538–540 levels, setting 420
levels, configuring 545 panel definitions, creating 418
panel IDs, changing 546–547 panel IDs, changing 436–437
panel names, changing 546 panel names, changing 436
panel styles, changing 546–547 panel styles, changing 436–437
source selection keys selection keys, moving 409
assigning 541–543 source selection keys
clearing 544 assigning 414–415
sources, defining 541–544 clearing 417
RCP-16×1SBAp control panels 515–531 sources
16×1SBAp models 516 allowing access to 412–413
auxiliary keys assigning 430–432
configuring 519–521 denying access 412

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 565

Index

determining accessibility 429–430 configuring

limiting 410 auxiliary keys 474
view order, assigning 411–412 Breakaway keys 475
RCP-ABA 2RU control panels 439–467 destination selection keys, assigning 479
auxiliary keys destination selection keys, clearing 481
configuring 453 destinations, defining 477
definition errors, resolving 454 LCD buttons setup 491–508
category keys, assigning 462–464 levels, configuring 488
destination selection keys panel IDs, changing 489–490
assigning 449 panel names, 489
clearing 452 panel styles, changing 489–490
destinations source selection keys, clearing 487
allowing access 448 sources, defining 482–486
denying access 447 RCP-p control panels 469–514
determining accessibility 458–460 configuration options 470
limiting 445 configuring
inaccessibility errors, resolving 465 auxiliary keys 474
levels, setting 455 Breakaway keys 475
panel definitions, creating 453 control panels
panel IDs, changing 466 source selection keys, assigning 484
panel names, changing 466 destination selection keys, assigning 479
panel styles, changing 466–467 destination selection keys, clearing 481
selection keys, moving 444 destinations, defining 477
source selection keys levels, configuring 488
assigning 449 panel IDs, changing 489–490
clearing 452 panel names, changing 489
sources panel styles, changing 489–490
allowing access 448 source selection keys, clearing 487
assigning 461–462 sources, defining 482–486
denying access 447 Redundant crosspoints 83, 281
determining accessibility 460–461 Redundant switch mode 83
limiting 445 Reference standard
view order, assigning 446–447 HD format 348
RCP-GPIp control panels 549–558 SD format 348
configuration examples 557 Remote dial-up 35–41
contact aux functions, configuring 555 automatic disconnect 40–41
function types 556 configuring RouterWorks 38
GPI panel definition file layout 552 configuring the PC modem 36
GPI32p models 550 configuring the router 38
GPI64p models 550 configuring the router modem 38
levels, configuring 554 connecting equipment 36
panel IDs, setting 553 controlling a remote router 40
panel names, setting 553 Resolving auxiliary key definition errors 420, 454, 521
RCP-ID control panels Resolving inaccessibility errors 434, 465
configuration options 470 Restoring databases 271–272

566 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Index

RGB partitioning 286 deleting logical sources 218

Router definition function buttons 52 editing sources preferences 219
modifying grid appearance 199
S sharing level inputs 212
16×1SBAp. See RCP-16×1SBAp control panels Source Alarm Select key 390
Salvos 368–371 Source Select key 363
adding crosspoints 370 status names 215
capturing existing states 370 Startup and customization 47–72
Copying existing salvos 370 adding devices manually 61–64
copying existing salvos 370 assembling key caps 72
deleting crosspoints 370 copying control panel definitions 66
Salvo Select key 367 database setup 53
selecting crosspoints 369 downloading device definitions 69
Selecting communication connection settings 30 editing device definitions 64
demo mode 33 launching RouterMapper 48
dial-up 33 main window overview 49
serial 30 polling status indicators 56
TCP/IP 31 polling the control system 54
Selecting Opus master control frames 191 printing key caps 71
Selecting Opus master control panels 192 Subnet mask. See Setting network information
Serial communication connection setting 30 Switching mode, crosspoint 83, 281
Serial port protocol assignments, Edge protocol System limitations 268
gateway 158–160, 178–179 System requirements 3
Serial port protocol option values, Edge protocol
gateway 158–160, 178–179 T–Z
Setting GPIp panel IDs 553 12×2BAp. See RCP-12×2BAp control panels
Setting GPIp panel names 553 TCP/IP communication connection setting 31
Setting levels associated with selection windows 420, Technical support contact information 8
455 Transition 346
Setting network information for RCP-IDe panels 512– Troubleshooting
514 download problems 70
Setting up a database 53 polling problems 57
Shared inputs partitioning 287 polling problems, combiner system 57–61
SNMP Agent Uninstalling RouterMapper 44
Edge protocol gateway 169–173 Upgrades, firmware 317–319
Panacea frames 138–142 Using RouterMapper on-line help 6–7
Soft panel fonts 27 context-sensitive 6
Sources full-text search 6
adding logical sources 218 general 6
assigning Using this manual 4
icons 209 Via series. See Legacy frames, adding
level inputs 210 Wild partitioning 287
names 207 XPlus series. See Legacy frames, adding
physical inputs 210 XPRESS series. See Legacy frames, adding
defining 198, 482–486, 526–528, 541–544 Zero-based export function 29

RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide 567

Index

568 RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Opus Master Control Switcher
Configuration Utility
Reference Guide

Edition I
RM-OPUSMAN
RouterMapper ™
Opus™ Master Control Switcher

Configuration Utility Reference

Guide

Edition I
March 2006
Trademarks and Copyrights
CCS, CCS CoPilot, CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, Command Control
System, CineTone, CinePhase, CineSound, DigiBus, DigiPeek, Digital
Glue, DigiWorks, DTV Glue, EventWORKS, EZ HD, Ez ID, Genesis,
Harris, HDTV Glue, Image Q, Inca, Inca Station, InfoCaster, Inscriber,
Inscriber CG—FX, Icon, IconLogo, IconMaster, IconMaster Nav,
IconSet, IconStation, Integrator, LeFont, Leitch, LogoMotion,
MediaFile, MIX BOX, NEO, the NEO design, NEOSCOPE,
NewsFlash, Nexio, Opus, Panacea, PanelMAPPER, Platinum, Portal,
PROM-Slide, RouterMAPPER, RouterWORKS, Signal Quality
Manager, SpyderWeb, SuiteView, TitleMotion, UNIFRAME, Velocity,
VelocityHD, VideoCarte, Videotek, and X75 are trademarks of Harris
Corporation, which may be registered in the United States, Canada,
and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Copyright 2005, Leitch Technology International Inc. and Harris
Corporation. All rights reserved. This publication supersedes all
previous releases. Printed in Canada.

Warranty Information
The Leitch Limited Warranty Policy provides a complete description of
your warranty coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as
procedures for obtaining warranty service. To view the complete
warranty, visit www.leitch.com>Support>Warranties.
 Contents

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Configuring an Opus Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Adding a Master Control Frame to the Device List . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Selecting a Master Control Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Primary Input Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Selecting the Primary Input Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Selecting a Primary Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Editing the Primary Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Network Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Single Frame and Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Multiple Frames and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Keyer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Selecting the Keyer Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Selecting a Keyer Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Editing a Keyer Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Selecting the Audio Over Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Selecting an Audio Over Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Editing an Audio Over Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Audio Input / Audio Output Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selecting the Audio I/O Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selecting an Audio Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Transition Control Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selecting the Transition Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selecting a Transition Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selecting the Breakaway Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Assigning AES Paths to AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide v

Contents

Selecting the Preroll Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Selecting an Input Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Enabling Preroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Checking the GPO Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Checking the Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Setting Up Preroll Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Resetting Preroll Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
GPI Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting the GPI Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Selecting a GPI Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Assigning the GPI Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Specifying the GPI Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting a Trigger Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Enabling the GPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Selecting the GPO Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Selecting a GPO Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Assigning the GPO Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Specifying the GPO Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Setting the Duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Genlock Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting the Genlock Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting an Operating Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting an AES DARS Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Selecting a Genlock Source Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Adjusting the Timing Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Miscellaneous (Misc) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Selecting the Misc Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Quick Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Opus ABA Panel Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Time Display Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting a Time Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Timeout Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Effects Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Selecting the Effects Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Editing an Effect Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Disabling and Re-Enabling an Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Adding a Second Channel to an Effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Setting the Second Channel for Preview Operations . . . . . . . . . . . 42

vi Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Contents

Selecting a Channel to Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Changing the Position of a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Enabling the Correct Aspect Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Changing the Squeeze Ratio of a Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Changing a Border Size and Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Changing a Border Softness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing a Crop Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing a Background Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Changing the Layer Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Chapter 2: Controlling an External Router

Editing RouterMapper’s Logical Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Accessing Opus Router Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Assignments Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Selecting the Assignments Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Editing the Selection Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Router Sources Accessible to Opus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Inaccessibility Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Opus Primary Inputs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Selecting the Opus Primary Inputs Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Assigning a Router Destination to an Opus Primary Input . . . . . . 51
Name, ID Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Selecting the Name, ID Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Assigning a Name to the Opus Panel Router Control Section . . . 54
Assigning an ID to the Opus Panel Router Control Section . . . . . 54

Chapter 3: Editing an Opus Panel

Selecting a Master Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting up Network Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Single Frame and Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Multiple Frames and Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Changing the IP Address and Host Name of a Target Panel . . . . . 57
Editing the Master Assignment Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Adding a Frame to the Master Assignment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Deleting a Frame from the Master Assignment Table . . . . . . . . . . 61
Querying the Master Assignment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Chapter 4: Frequently Asked Questions

Ethernet Communication Error and Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide vii

Contents

Changing IP Addresses for an Existing Panel and Frame . . . . . . . . . . 67

Adding a New Panel to an Existing Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Opus Embedded ABA Panel Download Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
OpusView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Index
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

viii Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 1
Editing an Opus Frame

Configuring an Opus Frame

Adding a Master Control Frame to the Device List
1. At the RouterMapper main window, click Add to add a frame to the
existing device summary list.

Figure 1-1. RouterMapper Main Window

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 1

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

2. The Add a New Device in the Database dialog box will appear.

Figure 1-2. Add a New Device to the Database Dialog Box

3. From the Device Type pull-down menu, choose the Master Control
option.
4. Click OK to display the Add Master Control Device dialog box.

Figure 1-3. Add Master Control Device Dialog Box

5. Select the Add Master Control Frame option. The RouterMapper

main window will display the Opus Frame System device entry.

2 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Configuring an Opus Frame

6. Click the “+” icon to expand the Opus Frame system entry. The
Opus Frame appears as a sub-entry.
Please refer to Figure 1-4 for an illustration of the updated Devices list.

Figure 1-4. Updated Device List

The same procedure is used to add an Opus panel to the Devices list.
Instead of selecting the Master Control Frame button, select the
Master Control Panel button from the Add Master Control Device
window.

Selecting a Master Control Frame

1. Double-click the target master control frame.
OR
Select the target master control frame.
2. Click Edit. The Master Control Frame window will appear.
Once the Master Control Frame window appears, you may edit or setup
the Frame as required.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 3

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

The Master Control Frame window allows you to configure the

following Opus functions:
• Primary Input
• Network Information
• Keyer
• Audio Over
• Transition
• Breakaway
• Preroll
• GPI
• GPO
• Genlock
• Miscellaneous
• Time Display
• Effects

4 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Primary Input Tab

Primary Input Tab

Figure 1-5. Primary Input Tab

The Primary Input tab allows you to

• Choose an input source
• Follow a router source
• Edit the source names
• Select physical inputs
• Set machine control functions.

Selecting the Primary Input Tab

To make changes to the Primary Input section, select the Primary
Input tab from the Master Control Frame window.
The Primary Input list box displays the source name and number, router
source, and machine control features for the selected Primary Input
source.
See Figure 1-5 for an picture of the Primary Input tab.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 5

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Selecting a Primary Input Source

1. Select a source (and its corresponding properties) from the Primary
Input list box.
2. The selection (source number and name, router source, and
machine control properties) is highlighted in blue.

Editing the Primary Input Source

Following a Router Source
1. From the Primary Input list box, select an input source.
Note 2. In the Edit logic source box, select the Follow Router Source check
The Follow Router Source box.
function applies only when the
selected Opus input is 3. The router source name and number are automatically retrieved
physically connected to a router from the RouterMapper database.
destination. Double-click the
Opus Rtr Map entry in the
RouterMapper main window to
edit router destinations (every
Opus frame in the device list has
a corresponding Opus Rtr Map
section, thereby allowing you to
have router control).

Changing an Input Source Name

1. In the Primary Input list box, select an input source row.
2. In the Edit logic source box, enter a new name in the Source Name
text box.
The source name is automatically retrieved and cannot be changed if
the selected input follows a router source.
For example: Dest 7 is the assigned name (retrieved from the router
database) for input source 7, whereas input 2 is named CAM 2 by you.

Assigning a Quick Select to a Preset Input

Use the pull-down box to assign a quick select to the input. (The default
Note selection is “None.”)
This assignment is used only for
a selection made on the Preset
bus.

6 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Primary Input Tab

Assigning Background Only to a Primary Input

In the Edit Logic Source box, for each source use the Set to Background
pull-down boxes to activate any or all of Key1, Key2, Key3, Key4,
AO1 and AO2.
When the ON option (the active state) is selected, the corresponding
key or audio over will be transitioned off when the corresponding
source goes to Program.

Setting up Machine Control

1. In the Machine Control box, select the type of output (for machine
control) using the Type pull-down menu.
2. Follow these instructions depending on the chosen output type.
• Disable No further settings are required.
• GPO Use the pull-down menu boxes to choose a GPO
source (1 to 36) to control the PLAY, STOP, CUE,
MARK, BLANK, REW, or FF function. If the
selected GPO is already in use, you will be asked to
confirm the selection. If a specific machine control
function is not needed, the assignment should be
left as No Source.
• Serial Select a Device ID for the machine control func-
tions using the drop down boxes. The selected ID is
the same for all functions. The ID should match the
DIP switches of the SPT used on this machine.
Any changes made to the machine control drop-down boxes on the
Primary Input tab will automatically be made to the machine control
drop-down boxes on the Keyer tab (see Figure 1-8).

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 7

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Network Tab

Figure 1-6. Network Tab

The Network tab allows you to

• Set up network information for an Opus system with only one
frame and one panel
• Set up network information for a system with multiple frames and
multiple panels.

Single Frame and Panel

The Opus master control switcher works with the default values
unchanged when there is only one panel and one frame on the network.
The Opus system is shipped to you with the following default values:
• Opus Frame Host Name = FRAME1
IP Address = 172.16.10.210
• Opus Panel Host Name = PANEL1
IP Address = 172.16.10.211

8 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Network Tab

Multiple Frames and Panels

If the Opus system consists of multiple Opus panels and frames, you are
required to change the default IP Address and Host Name of the target
frames and panels so that each panel and frame has a unique IP Address
and Host Name.

Changing the IP Address and

Host Name of a Target Frame
1. The default settings for the Host Name and IP Address are
displayed in the Master Control Frame box.
2. Select the Change network IP / Host name of the target frame check
box. The Host Name and IP Address text boxes appear.

Figure 1-7. Host Name and IP Address Text Boxes

3. Enter a new Host Name in the Host Name (8 character limit) text
box.
4. Enter a new IP address in the IP Address text box.
5. Click OK to accept all changes.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 9

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

6. At the RouterMapper main menu screen, click Download.

7. Reboot the frame to complete the process.
8. Save the file after the download and reboot processes are complete.

Changing the Gateway and Subnet Mask of a Target Frame

The default settings for Gateway and Subnet mask can work with the
default Frame and Panel settings for a stand-alone network. When the
Opus network is connected to another network, the Gateway and Subnet
mask settings need to be changed. Advise your network administrator
before changing the default settings.

Gateway Settings
1. In the Gateway box, delete the current IP Address and Host Name.
2. Enter a new IP address and Host Name (8 character limit) in the IP
Address and Host Name text boxes.
3. Click OK to accept all entries.
4. At the RouterMapper main menu, click Download.
5. Reboot the frame to complete the process.

Subnet Mask Settings

1. In the Subnet Mask box, delete the current Subnet Mask value.
2. Enter a new value in the Subnet Mask text boxes.
3. Click OK to accept all entries.
4. At the RouterMapper main window, click Download.
5. Reboot the frame to complete the process.

10 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Keyer Tab

Keyer Tab

Figure 1-8. Keyer Tab

The Keyer tab allows you to

• Choose a keyer source
• Edit the source name
• Select physical inputs
• Set machine control functions.

Selecting the Keyer Tab

To make changes to Keyer functions, select the Keyer tab from the
Master Control Frame window.
The Keyer list box displays the source name and number, input matrix,
and machine control features for the selected keyer source.

Selecting a Keyer Source

1. Select a source (and its corresponding properties) from the Keyer
list box.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 11

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

2. The selection (source number and name, input matrix, and machine
control properties) is highlighted in blue.
There are a total of four inputs that can be assigned to any Key or Fill
source.
The default source name for each keyer source is as follows:
• Source 1 = KEY SRC1
• Source 2 = KEY SRC2
• Source 3 = KEY SRC3
• Source 4 = KEY SRC4

Editing a Keyer Source

Changing the Default Source Name
1. In the Keyer list box, select a source.
2. In the Source Name text box, enter a new Source name.
3. Click OK to accept the entry.

Selecting Physical inputs (Input Matrix)

This feature is not available for this software release.

Setting up Machine Control

1. In the Machine Control box, select the type of output (for machine
control) using the Type pull-down menu.
2. Follow these instructions depending on the chosen output type.
• Disable No further settings are required.
• GPO Use the pull-down menu boxes to choose a GPO
source (1 to 36) to control the PLAY, STOP, CUE,
MARK, BLANK, REW, or FF function. If the
selected GPO is already in use, you will be asked to
confirm the selection. If a specific machine control
function is not needed, the assignment should be
left as No Source.
• Serial Select a Device ID for the machine control func-
tions using the drop down boxes. The ID should
match the DIP switches of the SPT used on this
machine. The ID is the same for all functions.

12 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Keyer Tab

Choosing a Keyer
Select the Keyer 1 or Keyer 2 option button from the Keyer Options
box.

Activating the On Air Lockout Function

1. In the Keyer Options box, select the On Air Source Change
Lockout check box.
2. The On-Air lockout function is active when the check box is
selected.

Setting External Keyers

1. On the A/O Tab, select the Use Audio Over 1 for external Key
control check box. (If desired, also select the Use Audio Over 2 for
external Key control check box.)
2. Within the External Keyers section, select either Key 3 or Key 4 via
the drop-down list.
3. Enter the desired 8-character alphanumeric name for the Keyer.
4. Select a corresponding GPI and GPO from the pull-down menus.
Any changes made at the External Keyers box will automatically
change functions at these tabs as well as from the Keyer tab:
• GPI tab
Note • Any changes made to the GPI drop-down box will automatically
Reassigning a previously used be made to the Edit GPI 1 Assignment drop-down box on the
GPI or GPO will result in a
GPI tab (see Figure 1-16).
message box confirming the
change. • Any changes made to the Edit GPI 1 Assignment drop-down
box will automatically be made to the GPI drop-down box on the
Keyer tab.
• GPO tab
• Any changes made to the GPO drop-down box will automatically
be made to the Edit GPI 1 Assignment drop-down box on the
GPO tab (see Figure 1-17).
• Any changes made to the Edit GPO 1 Assignment drop-down
box will automatically be made to the GPO drop-down box on
the Keyer tab.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 13

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

• Primary Input tab

• Any changes made to the machine control drop-down boxes will
automatically be made to the machine control drop-down boxes
on the Primary Input tab (see Figure 1-5).
• Any changes made to the machine control drop-down boxes on
the Primary Input tab will automatically be made to the machine
control drop-down boxes on the Keyer tab.

Audio Over Tab

Figure 1-9. Audio Over Tab

The Audio Over tab allows you to

• Choose an audio over source
• Edit the source names
• Select physical inputs
• Set machine control functions.

14 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Keyer Tab

Selecting the Audio Over Tab

To make changes to the Audio Over functions, select the Audio Over
tab from the Master Control Frame window.
The Audio Over list box shows the source name and number, cross
point, and machine control features for the selected Audio Over source.
See Figure 1-9 for an illustration of the Audio Over tab.

Selecting an Audio Over Source

1. Select a source (and its corresponding properties) from the Audio
Over list box.
2. The selection (source number & name, crosspoint, machine control
properties) is highlighted in blue.
A total of 8 inputs (plus the ability to use the audio from the selected
Note source on the PST bus) can be assigned to any Audio Over source. The
The A/O PST option provides default source name for each Audio Over source is as follows:
available inputs so that any
• Source 1 = A/O SRC1
Preset source can also be used
as an Audio Over source. This • Source 2 = A/O SRC2
feature is particularly useful in
situations using a dual channel
• Source 3 = A/O SRC3
effect where it is desirable to • Source 4 = A/O SRC4
have both Program and Preset
bus sources on-air at the same • Source 5 = A/O SRC5
time (e.g., two talking heads, • Source 6 = A/O SRC6
news interviews).
• Source 7 = A/O SRC7
• Source 8 = A/O SRC8
• Source 9 = A/O PST

Editing an Audio Over Source

Changing the Default Source Name
1. In the Audio Over list box, select a source.
2. In the Source Name text box, enter a new Source name.
3. Click OK to accept the entry.

Selecting Physical inputs (Crosspoint)

This feature is not available for this software release.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 15

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Selecting for External Key Control

If Audio Over 1 and/or Audio Over 2 are to be used for external key
control in the Edit Audio Input box:
1. Select the Use Audio Over 1 for External Keyer Control check box
AND/OR
2. Select the Use Audio Over 2 for External Keyer Control check box

Setting up Machine Control

1. In the Machine Control box, select the type of output (for machine
control) using the Type pull-down menu.
2. Follow these instructions depending on the chosen output type.
• Disable No further settings are required.
• GPO Use the pull-down menu boxes to choose a GPO
source (1 to 36) to control the PLAY, STOP, CUE,
MARK, BLANK, REW, or FF function. If the
selected GPO is already in use, you will be asked to
confirm the selection. If a specific machine control
function is not needed, leave the assignment as No
Source.
• Serial Select a Device ID for the machine control func-
tions using the drop down boxes. The ID is the same
for all functions. The ID should match the DIP
switches of the SPT used on this machine. The ID is
the same for all functions.

Activating the On Air Lockout Function

1. In the Edit Audio Over Input box, select the On Air Source Change
Lockout check box.
2. The On-Air lockout function is active when the check box is
selected.

16 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Audio Input / Audio Output Tab

Audio Input / Audio Output Tab

Figure 1-10. Audio Input / Audio Output Tab

The Audio Input / Output tab allows you to

• Select an audio data type for each AES path
• Select the word size of every input and output
• Choose how to handle user data.

Selecting the Audio I/O Tab

To make changes to Audio I/O functions, select the Audio I/O tab
from the Master Control Frame window.
The Audio Input / Output tab is divided into two sections:
• The Audio Input box (upper part of the tab)
• The Audio Output box (lower part of the tab).
See Figure 1-10 for an illustration of the Audio I/O tab.
An audio data type can be selected for each AES path. You can either
select the Process (real audio) or Unprocess (non audio) option.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 17

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Selecting an Audio Data Type

1. Click the Process or Unprocess option button for each AES path.
Note 2. The Unprocess option will maintain a fixed 0dB gain and prevent
The Unprocess option is any transition. Forced transitions will be an instant switch.
intended for non-audio or
compressed data.

Processing an Audio Input

1. Determine the type of process required for the audio input.
• Automatically: The input will pass or delete the Least
Significant Bits (LSBs), depending on the word size specified in
the audio data. Data indicating non audio will be treated as a
24-bit.
• 20 Bit - Suppress LSBs: The input will turn the 4 LSBs to 0
regardless of the specified data word size.
• 24 Bit - Pass LSBs: The input will pass all 24 bits unless the data
indicates that it is only 20 bits
2. From the Process Type pull-down menu, select the required
process.

Selecting a Word Size for an Audio Output

1. In the Audio Output box, select a Word Size option button (20 bit
or 24 bit).
2. The 20 bits option will force the 4 LSBs to 0. The 24 bits option
will pass all available bits unless the input is 20 bit. (In this case the
4 LSBs will be 0 except during a transition.)

Handling User Data

1. Select the User Bit Pass check box to allow user data to pass
through.
2. Deselect the check box to stop user data from passing through.
Selecting the User Bit Pass option will allow passing of all user data
contained in the U bits and C bits. The input / output word size selection
may overwrite some of the C bit values.

18 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Audio Input / Audio Output Tab

Audio Embed
1. At the Audio I/O tab (see Figure 1-10), select the Enable Embedded
Note Audio check box to set up the Embedder function.
The Embedder function is only
useful if the option module is
SD MCS-GP-E-S
fitted: HD MCS-GP-E-H
2. Set up the Embedder options:
• The existing embedded data can be deleted.
• If the existing data is deleted, the new data is written using
SMPTE distribution.
• The new AES data can be embedded.
• If the existing data is not deleted, the new data overwrites the
existing data using the existing distribution.
3. Click Existing Audio Delete to select this function.
• Select Embed AES 1-2 to embed AES 1 and AES 2.
• Select Embed AES 3-4 to embed AES 3 and AES 4.
4. Click the appropriate button to embed AES1-2 (as group 1 or 2) and
Note AES3-4 (as group 3 or 4).
The default setting is to delete 5. The next selections are contingent on whether you have an SD or an
all existing embedded audio,
HD system.
then write new audio data. This
prevents any problems with • For an SD system:
broken frame sequences caused
by sources that have different
• Select Word Size = 20 bits
distributions. • Select Process Type = 20 bit suppress LSBs
• For an HD system:
• Select Word Size = 24 bits
• Select Process Type = 24 bit pass LSBs (or Auto)
This allows audio inputs 1 to 12 to be set as embedded or discrete AES
inputs.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 19

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Figure 1-11. Audio Inputs as Embedded or Discrete AES Inputs

Embedded Audio List Box

The Embedded Audio list box shows the following:
Note • Source name
When the option Embedder
module is fitted, inputs 13, 14, • Source number
15, and 16 are always • Audio type
embedded.
• AES to group assignments.

Selecting an Audio Source to Be Embedded

1. Select a source (and corresponding properties) from the list box.
Note The selection will be highlighted in blue.
The same group may not be 2. Select the chosen source: Embed or Discrete.
used for AES 1-2 and AES 3-4.
3. Select which group should be used as AES 1-2.
4. Select which group should be used as AES 3-4.

20 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Transition Control Tab

Transition Control Tab

Figure 1-12. Transition Tab

The Transition Control tab allows you to select

• Transition rates
• Fade to silence transition rates
• Fade to black transition rates
• Transition abort direction
• Audio-video mix transition mapping.

Selecting the Transition Tab

To make changes to the Transition Control section, select the
Transition tab from the Master Control Frame window.

Selecting a Transition Rate

Transition rates can be setup for the slow, medium, fast, and cut
transition.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 21

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

1. In the Transition Rate box, enter a transition rate (numeric: 1 to 300

frames) in the SLOW, MED, FAST, or CUT text box.
2. The rate applies to both audio and video selections.

Selecting a Fade to Silence Transition Rate

1. In the Silent transition rate text box, enter a transition rate (numeric:
1 to 300 frames).
2. The default transition rate is 10 frames.

Selecting a Fade to Black Transition Rate

1. In the Fade to Black transition rate text box, enter a transition rate
(numeric: 1 to 300 frames).
2. The default transition rate is 10 frames.

Selecting the Transition Abort Direction

Every transition can be cancelled by a new transition set up. The
transitions are cut to the start or the end.
1. In the Abort box, select the Cut to Start or Cut to End option
button for each of the three (TAKE, SILENT, FTB) options.
2. The default setting for the Abort function is Cut to Start.

Selecting an Audio-Video Mix Transition

This feature allows you to set up the audio transition type during a
video X fade.
In the Audio transition type with video X fade box, select the V Fade or
Follow video option button to enable an Audio-Video mix transition.

Enabling VBI Processing

1. In the VBI Increase box, select the Increase to Line 21 check box to
allow VBI processing for line 21.
2. The default VBI processing is line 20.

Enabling Rate Change during Transition

1. Select the Enable rate change during transition check box to allow
rate change during a transition.
OR
2. Deselect the check box to restrict rate change during a transition.

22 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Transition Control Tab

3. Select Enable Effects to enable the effects module and allow editing
of the Effects tab.
4. Follow these steps to enable the FTB, Silence, and Hold push
buttons:
• To enable the FTB button, select the FTB check box.
• To enable the FT Silence button, select the Silence check box.
• To enable the Hold button, select the Hold check box.

Breakaway Tab

Figure 1-13. Breakaway Tab

The Breakaway tab allows you to set up Audio Breakaway by assigning

AES paths to the AUDIO ONE and AUDIO TWO push buttons on the
Opus panel (Breakaway cluster).

Selecting the Breakaway Tab

To make changes to the Breakaway section, select the Breakaway tab
from the Master Control Frame window.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 23

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Assigning AES Paths to AUDIO 1 and AUDIO 2

1. Select the AUDIO 1 (or AUDIO 2) selection button in the
Note Breakaway tab.
The same AES path cannot be 2. Select a combination of AES path option buttons for each of the
selected simultaneously for
Audio inputs.
Audio 1 and Audio 2

Preroll Tab

Figure 1-14. Preroll Tab

The Preroll tab allows you to

• Select an input (primary, keyer, or audio over) source
• Enable the preroll status
• Check the GPO and Device ID entry
• Set the preroll duration
• Reset the preroll duration

24 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Transition Control Tab

Selecting the Preroll Tab

To make changes to the Preroll section, select the Preroll tab from the
Master Control Frame window.
The Preroll list box displays the input source, preroll status, GPO and
Device entry, and preroll duration for the selected source.

Selecting an Input Source

1. Select a source (and its corresponding properties) from the Preroll
Note list box.
The input source can be a 2. The selection (input source, preroll status, and GPO and Device ID)
primary input, keyer input, or an
is highlighted in blue.
audio over input.

Enabling Preroll
1. In the Edit preroll box, select Enable from the Type pull-down
menu.
2. The Preroll list box will change the Status entry to display Enable.

Checking the GPO Entry

1. The GPO is automatically retrieved from the GPO selections in the
Note Primary Input, Keyer, or Audio Over sections.
The GPO entry displayed is the 2. From the Master Control Frame window, select the Primary Input,
source selected for the Play
Keyer, or Audio Over tab to change the current GPO entry.
button.

Checking the Device ID

1. The Device ID is automatically retrieved from the Device ID
selections in the Primary Input, Keyer, or Audio Over sections.
2. From the Master Control Frame window, select the Primary Input,
Keyer, or Audio Over tab to change the current Device ID entry.

Setting Up Preroll Duration

1. In the Edit preroll box, enter a numeric value in the Duration
(Seconds) text box.
2. Make sure the entry is between 0 to 100 seconds.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 25

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Resetting Preroll Duration

1. In the Edit preroll box, click Reset. A Preroll Duration Reset dialog
box will appear.

Figure 1-15. Preroll Duration Reset Dialog Box

2. Enter a numeric value in the text box.

3. Make sure the entry is between 0 to 100 seconds.
4. All input sources will be reset to have the selected preroll duration.
5. Click OK to return to the Preroll tab.

26 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 GPI Tab

GPI Tab

Figure 1-16. GPI Tab

The GPI tab allows you to

• Select a GPI source
• Assign the GPI source
• Specify the polarity
• Set up the trigger function
• Enable the GPI source

Selecting the GPI Tab

To make changes to the GPI section, select the GPI tab from the
Note Master Control Frame window.
Any changes made to the Edit The GPI list box displays the selected GPI source, GPI Assignment,
GPI 1 Assignment drop-down
Polarity, Trigger function, and GPI state.
box will automatically be made
to the GPI drop-down box on There are 36 GPI input contacts. Each one has the following features:
the Keyer tab (see Figure 1-8).
• Polarity — High or Low
• Trigger — Level or Edge

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 27

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

The examples below provide a scenario where a GPI source is used to

select between two assignments (A and B):
1. If High Polarity is used for the Level option:
Note • When the Polarity = Low (not set) and Trigger = Level, select
GPI sources are assignable to source A.
Program Special, Quickselects,
Bus selections, and different • When the Polarity = High (set) and Trigger = Level, select
Transition types and rates. source B.
2. If High Polarity is used for the Edge option:
• When the Polarity changes from Low to High and Trigger =
Edge, switch from source A to source B. Nothing happens when
the Polarity changes back from High to Low.
• When the Polarity changes again from Low to High and Trigger
= Edge, switch from source B to source A. Nothing happens
when the Polarity changes back from High to Low.

Selecting a GPI Source

1. In the GPI list box, click a GPI source.
2. The GPI Assignment, Polarity, Trigger function, and State are also
highlighted for the selected GPI source.

Assigning the GPI Selection

1. In the Edit GPI box, select an assignment option from the
Assignment pull-down menu.
2. The Assignment option will change to reflect the new selection in
the GPI list box.

Specifying the GPI Polarity

1. In the Edit GPI section, select High or Low from the Polarity
pull-down menu.
2. The selected Polarity will be displayed in the GPI list box.

Selecting a Trigger Type

1. In the Edit GPI section, select Level or Edge from the Trigger
pull-down menu.
2. The selected Trigger function will be displayed in the GPI list box.

28 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 GPI Tab

Enabling the GPI

In the Edit GPI section, select Enable from the Inactive State pull-down
menu.
OR
Select the Disable option to disable the selected GPI.

GPO Tab

Figure 1-17. GPO Tab

The GPO tab allows you to

• Select a GPO source (1 of 36)
• Assign the GPO source
• Specify the polarity
• Set up the duration

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 29

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Selecting the GPO Tab

To make changes to the GPO section, select the GPO tab from the
Note Master Control Frame window. The GPO list box shows
Any changes made to the Edit • Selected GPO source
GPO 1 Assignment drop-down
box will automatically be made • Assignment
to the GPO drop-down box on • Polarity
the Keyer tab (see Figure 1-8).
• Duration
See Figure 1-17 for an illustration of the GPO tab.

Selecting a GPO Source

In the GPO list box, click a GPO source. (The GPO Assignment,
Polarity, and Duration are also highlighted for the selected GPO
source.)

Assigning the GPO Selection

1. In the Edit GPO box, select an assignment option from the
Assignment pull-down menu.
2. The new Assignment option will be displayed in the GPO list box.

Specifying the GPO Polarity

1. In the Edit GPO section, select High or Low from the Polarity
pull-down menu.
2. The selected Polarity will be displayed in the GPO list box.

Setting the Duration

In the Edit GPO section, enter a numeric value no higher than 1000
milliseconds in the Duration text box.
OR
Leave the text box empty for the GPO to stay on.

30 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Genlock Tab

Genlock Tab

Figure 1-18. Genlock Tab

The Genlock tab allows you to

• Select an Operating Standard
• Select an AES Reference
• Select a Genlock Source Type
• Adjust the Timing Setup

Selecting the Genlock Tab

To make changes to the Genlock section, select the Genlock tab from
the Master Control Frame window.

Selecting an Operating Standard

1. RouterMapper will automatically retrieve the current operation
standard from the target frame.
2. To change the operating standard, select the required standard
from the Operating Standards pull-down menu.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 31

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

When the Genlock tab is opened, the program tries to retrieve the
current operating standard for the target frame, a communication error
will occur if the Network information for the target frame has not been
configured correctly or if there is no physical connection to the frame.
IMPORTANT! The AES processor and the video processor are
separate references; therefore, both AES and Genlock references
must be used.

Selecting an AES DARS Reference

Select the Coax or Balanced option from the AES Reference
pull-down menu. (The default AES reference setting is Coax.)

Selecting a Genlock Source Type

Select the Composite or Tri-Level option from the Genlock Source
Type pull-down menu.
The default Genlock source type setting is Composite. To select the
Tri-Level option, you must also change the physical connection on the
MK module. On the front left corner of the MCS-HD16-MK card, there
is a jumper connector labeled J4. Place the jumper in the “Comp”
position to enable the Tri-Level sync.

Adjusting the Timing Setup

1. Select Timing Set Up.
2. A progress bar is displayed while RouterMapper queries the frame
information and builds a table with all the available primary, key,
and fill inputs.
3. The Timing Adjustment dialog box appears with the Sources, H
Phase, and V Phase values.

32 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Genlock Tab

Figure 1-19. Timing Adjustment Dialog Box

4. Select all available sources by clicking the Select All button OR

select individual sources by clicking the required sources one by one.
5. Click Change to start the timing setup. RouterMapper will
calculate and recommend H/V phases based on the selected
sources.
6. The Timing Setup dialog will appear with recommended H / V
phase values displayed.
7. Click OK to accept the recommended values OR manually adjust
the values using the up/down arrows provided; click OK to accept
the new changes.
8. The Timing Adjustment dialog will reappear with the new H / V
phase values displayed.
9. Click OK if the adjustment results for the V phase values of most
inputs is 0.
OR
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 33

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Miscellaneous (Misc) Tab

Figure 1-20. Misc Tab

The Misc tab allows you to

• Configure the Quick Select feature
• Enter an Opus ABA panel device ID
• Select a time display format
• Assign timeout values.

Selecting the Misc Tab

To make changes to the Misc section, select the Misc tab from the
Master Control Frame window.

Quick Select
The Quick Select push buttons (1/5, 2/6, 3/7, 4/8) on the Opus control
panel allow you to access eight user defined sets of functions.

34 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Miscellaneous (Misc) Tab

RouterMapper allows you to design the eight sets of functions by

Note enabling or disabling any combination of the following features:
The default value for all of these • Keyer 1
features is Disable.
• Keyer 2
• Audio Over 1
• Audio Over 2
• Transition functions
• External Reference (not available for this software release)

Configuring the Quick Select Feature

1. Select a button number from the Quick Select list box. The
corresponding row with the Keyer1, Keyer2, A/O1, A/O2,
Transitions, and Ref are also selected.
2. Select the Keyer 1, Keyer 2, Audio Over 1, Audio Over 2,
Transition, or External Reference check box to enable the required
combination of features.
3. In the Quick Select list box, choose a new row to check if the
selected combination of features have been enabled.

Opus ABA Panel Device ID

The Opus ABA Panel Device ID is only useful if the Master Control
Switcher is connected to a Leitch Router. If the system is connected to a
Router, the ID is automatically retrieved from the Panel ID entered in
the Opus Router Control Assignment section.
The Opus ABA panel is a “soft” panel. It is not a panel on its own. A
part of the Opus control panel is referred to as the “Opus ABA panel.”
This section of the Opus panel allows you to control router destinations
and router sources when the Opus system is connected to a Leitch
router.

Retrieving the Opus ABA Panel Device ID

1. The Opus ABA panel device ID is automatically retrieved from the
Device ID setup in the Opus Router Control Assignment section.
2. If Opus is not connected to a router, the Opus ABA Panel section
does not apply.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 35

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Automation
The Automation feature allows you to configure and link quick selects
to the Preset bus through automation.

Enabling the Automation Feature

To enable this feature, check the Enable Quick Selects Through
Automation check box on the Misc tab.

Time Display Tab

Figure 1-21. Time Display Tab

The Time Display tab allows you to

• Select a time display format
• Assign Timeout values
• Select Timer Configuration options
• Select Take Setup options

36 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Miscellaneous (Misc) Tab

Selecting a Time Display Format

In the Time Display Format box, select either the 12 hours or the 24
hours option button. (Default clock setting is 12 hours.)

Timeout Setup
Assigning Timeout Values
Enter a numeric value in the Timeout After Take and the Timeout
Note Before Take text boxes.
This timeout value refers to the • The value cannot exceed 1,000 seconds.
Take operation in the
Assignment and Setup cluster • The default value is 5 seconds.
on the Opus control panel.

Timer Configuration
Select one of these Timer Configuration options:
• Ignore Time Since Transition
This option causes the timer to function independently from the
time since the last transition.
• Start Up Timer from Transition
This option will reset the time to zero and start the timer counting
up when the transition take occurs.
• Set Timer Time from Transition
This option allows the timer function to account for the time since
last transition. For instance, you may want to set the timer to do a
transition 10 minutes from the last take. You will enter the time as
previously described, by entering 10 minutes and pressing the Take
button in the Setup cluster. The timer will subtract the time since
the last take from the entered time. The new time will be displayed
in the timer window.
The time since last take can be determined at the start or end of the
transition. This can be selected by choosing the required option.
• Start Timer from Beginning of Transition
The time since last take is determined from the transition start.
• Start Timer from End of Transition
The time since last take is determined from the transition end.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 37

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Take Setup
The Take Setup group of options allows the modification of the Take
button in the Setup cluster when in the Timer mode.
• No Options
Pressing the Take button will result in time value entered being
displayed in the timer display (or modified by the timer
configuration options).
• Next Event
This option causes the next event function to be enabled when the
take is entered.
• Count Down
This option allows the countdown function to be enabled when the
take is entered.
• Timer Start
This option starts the timer when the Take button is pressed.
• Store Last Time
This option stores the last time entered as the default for the timer.
The last entered value is used until a new value is entered.

38 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Effects Tab

Effects Tab

Figure 1-22. Effects Tab

The Effects tab selections allow you to move, crop, add a background,
or change a border on pre-existing graphics or photos achieve a
particular result.
The Effects tab allows you to
• Edit an Effect name
• Disable and re-enable an Effect1
• Add a second channel to an Effect
• Set Channel B for preview
• Select a channel to edit
• Change the position of a channel
• Change the squeeze ratio of a channel
• Change a border size and color
• Change a border softness

1 This
feature is only available in RouterMapper versions 5.0 or higher.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 39

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

• Change a crop size

• Change a background source
• Change the layer priority.
There are some things you must remember before you begin to modify
effects:
• Each effect should be viewed as a sequence of events, or as a
“snapshot.”
• Each effect must be defined horizontally and vertically.
• All effects start with the Program (A) full size. This is defined as
Start A.
For a single channel effect:
1. Segment 1 defines the position and size at the end of the first
transition.
2. There is an entry only for Program (A).
3. The background may be ExtBackground or Present (B).
4. The end of the effect is set by End A. For a single channel effect
it must end as a full-size Program (A) or Preset (B).
For a two-channel effect:
Note 1. Segment 1 defines the position and size at the end of the first
For both single channel and two transition.
channel effects, the sequence
must end with either Program 2. There is an entry for both Program (A) and Preset (B).
(A) or Preset (B) as the only full 3. The background may be ExtBackground or Preset (B).
size on-screen image.
4. The end of the effect is set by End A and End B.
5. For a two channel effect it must end as one of these options:
• A full-size Program A and a zero size Preset (B)
• A full-size Program A and a full-size Preset B fully on
screen.
RouterMapper allows 16 effects to be used. Six single-channel effects
are preloaded into RouterMapper and the Opus effects module:
SQ B-RT A squeeze into a box to the upper right
SQ B-LT A squeeze into a box to the upper left
SQ Rht A full-height squeeze to the right

40 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Effects Tab

SQ B-RT A squeeze into a box to the upper right

SQ Lft A full-height squeeze to the left
SQ UP-RT A squeeze into the top right corner
SQ UP-LT A squeeze into the top left corner
The remaining 10 effects are set as defaults to full-size settings.

Selecting the Effects Tab

To make changes to the Effect section, select the Effects tab from the
Master Control Frame window (see Figure 1-22).

Editing an Effect Name

To edit the Effect name, highlight the Name box, then edit the name.

Disabling and Re-Enabling an Effect

The default value is “Enable” for each Effect, which is indicated by a
Note check mark to the left of the Effect name.
Disabled Effects will not
display on an Opus panel;
To disable an Effect 1, click on the entire Effect line. The check
therefore, scrolling through the mark will turn to an X-mark.
Effects list on the panel will
only display enabled Effects.
To re-enable an Effect 1, click on the entire Effect line. The X-mark
will turn to a check mark.

Adding a Second Channel to an Effect

To add a second channel to an Effect, select the Channel B Enable
Note check box.
If the second channel is selected
on an Effects assembly with
only one channel, the effect may
not operate as expected.

1 This
feature is only available in RouterMapper versions 5.0 or higher.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 41

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Setting the Second Channel for Preview Operations

To use a second channel to preview effects, select the Set Channel
Note B for Preview check box.
The second channel can only be When this is done (and a second channel installed), the Preset video
used in one mode; that is,
output will always show the upcoming segment of the selected effect.
“Channel B enabled” and “Set
Channel B for preview” are
mutually exclusive.

Selecting a Channel to Edit

To select a channel to edit, select the appropriate Channels box.

Changing the Position of a Channel

To change the position of a channel, follow these steps:
1. Select the H (horizontal) or the V (vertical) position box.1
2. Enter the new percentage value. The range of values equals ±
100%.
• A positive (+) value will move the channel down (horizontally)
or to the right (vertically).
• A negative (–) value will move the channel up (horizontally) or
to the left (vertically).

Enabling the Correct Aspect Ratio

To enable the correct aspect ratio, click the Maintain Aspect Ratio
Note box to the right of the Effects tab. When this box is checked, editing
To maintain the aspect ratio, either the Position or Squeeze Ratio boxes will cause the values in the
select the Maintain Aspect Ratio appropriate box to automatically increase or decrease by a
box to the right of the Effects corresponding amount.
tab. When this box is checked,
editing one value will cause the
other value to automatically
increase or decrease by the same
percentage.

1 Position
values always refer to the full, uncropped size.

42 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Effects Tab

Changing the Squeeze Ratio of a Channel

To change the squeeze ratio of a channel, follow these
Note steps:
To maintain the aspect ratio,
check the Maintain Aspect
1. Click the H (horizontal) or V (vertical) position box.1
Ratio box to the right of the 2. Enter the new percentage value. The range of values ranges from 0
Effects tab. When this box is to 100%.
checked, editing one value will
cause the other value to • A positive (+) value will squeeze the channel ratio out.
automatically increase or • A negative (–) value will squeeze the channel ratio in.
decrease by the same
percentage.

Changing a Border Size and Color

To change a border size and color, follow these steps:
1. Select the Enable Borders check box.
2. Enter a value for the border with into the Width box. (The limit for
border width is 10%.)
3. Enter the border color parameters into the Lum Sat Hue boxes. The
Color Preview box will show the final color when you have
completed your choices.
• Lum refers to the luminosity, or intensity, of a color. This value
Note will make your border color darker or lighter. Values range from
The Lum and Sat values are 0 (black) to 100 (white).
corrected to allow only “legal”
• Sat refers to the amount, or depth, of the hue color. This value
colors; that is, only colors that
can be reproduced. will make your border color a paler shade. Values range from 0
(all white) to 100 (no white).
• Hue refers to a “pure” color with no other color mixed in. Values
range from 0 to 359.
Some examples of hue values are
• Red 104
• Green 240
• Blue 347
• Cyan 284
• Magenta 60
• Yellow 166
1 Position
values always refer to the full, uncropped size.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 43

Chapter 1: Editing an Opus Frame

Changing a Border Softness

To change a border softness, follow these steps:
1. Select the Soft Border check box.
2. Enter a value for the border softness desired. Values range from 5
(hard edge) to 100 (soft edge).

Changing a Crop Size

To change a crop size, follow these steps:
Note 1. Select the Enable Crop check box.
The limit for crop width is 25%.
2. Enter a percentage value for the crop width into the Width box.

Changing a Background Source

For each stage in the sequence the background source can be changed
via the pull-down Background Source box. You may change a
background source for each segment; however, changes during the
sequence should be done carefully since some may give unpredictable
results.
For a single channel effect, your choices are
• Preset (B)
• ExtBackground (External Squeeze Background Input)
For a two-channel effect, when neither channel is full size, choose the
ExtBackground option.

Changing the Layer Priority

To change the layer priority, check the Layer Priority box. This option
Note will cause the selected source to appear on top of the other source.
This option has no meaning on a
single channel effect.

44 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 2
Controlling an External Router

This feature is provided for users who have a Leitch router connected to
their Opus Master Control Switcher. The Edit Opus Router Control
Assignment section allows you to configure router sources and
destinations.

Figure 2-1. Opus Master Control Panel

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 45

Chapter 2: Controlling an External Router

A group of push buttons in the Assignment and Setup cluster of the

Note Opus panel can be configured to act like a router panel, providing router
Before you can edit the Edit control to the master control user. For more details, please refer to the
Opus Router Control Assign- Operation section of the Opus manual.
ment section, you must edit the
RouterMapper logical database. The Edit Opus Router Control Assignment window is divided into three
See Chapter 8, Editing a Logi- different sections, The Assignment tab, Opus Primary Inputs tab, and
cal Database, in the Router- the Name, ID tab.
Mapper Configuration Utility
Reference Guide.
Please refer to Figure 2-1 on page 45 for an illustration of the Edit Opus
Router Control Assignment window and its three sections.

Editing RouterMapper’s Logical Database

Please refer to Chapter 8, Editing a Logical Database, in the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.

Accessing Opus Router Control

To edit the Edit Opus Router Control Assignment section, follow
these steps:
1. At the RouterMapper main window, click the “+” icon to expand
the Opus Frame System device entry.
2. Double-click the Opus Rtr map sub entry or select Opus Rtr map
and click Edit. The Opus Router Control Assignment window
appears.
When the Edit Router Control Assignment section is added, it will be
Note created with a panel definition. This definition may be the
The Opus Frame System device RouterMapper default definition (if the section was added before the
entry will only appear in the database was edited), or it may be a unique definition based on your
device list if you have already particular database (if the section was added after the database was
added the Master Control Frame
edited).
section to the list. See “Adding
Devices” in the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference
Guide for more information.

46 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Assignments Tab

Assignments Tab

Figure 2-2. Assignments Tab

The Assignments tab allows you to assign router sources to push

buttons on the Opus control panel.

Selecting the Assignments Tab

To make changes to the Assignments section, select the Assignments
tab from the Edit Opus Router Control Assignment window.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 47

Chapter 2: Controlling an External Router

Editing the Selection Buttons

Rearranging Selection Buttons
1. Position the cursor over the selection button to be moved.
Note 2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
The selection buttons represent
the physical push buttons in the 3. Drag and drop the selection to its new position.
Assignment and Setup cluster of 4. Release the mouse button. The button category will appear in its
the Opus Control Panel. new position. If the button moved has a source assignment from the
This Panel list, the category and index will move to its new
position.
In most cases only the button category moves to the new button
position. However, when you moves a favorite source button (refer to
“Assigning a Favorite Source to a Selection Button,” starting on
page 49, for instructions on how to set up a favorite source button), the
button category and index both move to the new button position.

Assigning a Category and an Index to a

Selection Button
1. Click a selection button. The Edit Button Function dialog box will
Note appear. Category should already be selected in the Button
For more information, see Function pull-down menu.
Chapter 10, Editing Control
2. From the Select Category pull-down menu, select the desired
Panel Button Functions, in the
RouterMapper Configuration category name.
Utility Reference Guide. 3. From the Select Index pull-down menu, select the index number.
4. Click Done to accept all the selections and return to the Assignment
window.

Assigning Only a Category to a Selection Button

1. Select a category type from the Categories list box (next to the
Sources box).
2. Hold the left mouse button down and drag the selection to the
desired selection button.
3. Release the mouse button. The category will appear in its new
position.

48 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Assignments Tab

Assigning a Favorite Source to a Selection Button

Assigning a favorite source to a selection key allows you to access both
the category and index in one key press from the Opus control panel.
1. Select the required source name (category & index) from the This
Panel list box (in the Sources box).
2. Hold the left mouse button down and drag the selection to the
desired selection button.
3. The selection button will be highlighted in Blue to reflect the new
assignment.

Clearing a Selection Key Assignment

1. Hold the left mouse button down and drag the selection button to
the trash can.
2. The assigned information for the button will disappear to indicate
that it is no longer assigned.

Router Sources Accessible to Opus

A group of push buttons in the Assignment & Setup cluster of the Opus
Control Panel can be configured to allow access to all sources in the
RouterMapper global database, or to only a limited subset of the
sources.
The sources are assigned via the Sources box (lower right side). In this
box, the Global Database list box displays all sources available in the
RouterMapper database. The This Panel list box displays the sources
currently assigned to the Assignment & Setup cluster (Opus Control
Panel).

Adding ALL Available Sources to the

This Panel List Box
1. All sources listed in the Global Database list box will automatically
be listed in the This Panel list box.
2. If the list has been edited and does not include all the sources, click
Assign All in the Sources box.
3. All sources listed in the Global Database list box will appear in the
This Panel list box.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 49

Chapter 2: Controlling an External Router

Adding Individual Sources to the

This Panel List Box
1. Select a source name from the Global Database list box.
2. Hold the left mouse button down and drag the selection to the This
Panel list box.
OR
Click Assign. The source will appear in the This Panel list box.

Removing Individual Sources from the

This Panel List Box
1. Select the source name to be removed from the list.
2. Hold the left mouse button down and drag the selection to the trash
can.
OR
Click Delete. The source will be removed from the This Panel list
box.

Removing ALL Sources from the This Panel List Box

1. Click Delete All.
2. All sources will be removed from the This Panel list box.

Inaccessibility Errors
If sources in the Assignments window are highlighted in red (or if the
summary text located at the bottom of the Sources box indicates that
one or more of the sources are inaccessible), then there is a potential
problem with the selection button assignments. The sources highlighted
in red are in error and will not be available from the control panel.

50 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Opus Primary Inputs Tab

Opus Primary Inputs Tab

Figure 2-3. Opus Primary Input Tab

The Opus Primary Inputs tab allows you to assign control of a specific
Router destination to one of the Opus primary inputs.
The Opus Primary Inputs window is divided into two sections. The 16
green windows represent the Opus primary inputs.

Selecting the Opus Primary Inputs Tab

To access the Input Windows section, click the Opus Primary Inputs tab
in the Edit Opus Router Control Assignment window.

Assigning a Router Destination to an Opus Primary Input

1. Select an Opus primary input window (green window). A blue
outline will appear around the window.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 51

Chapter 2: Controlling an External Router

2. In the Edit Window box, select a router destination from the

Controlled Destination pull-down menu. The selected destination
will be highlighted in blue.
3. Click Done to accept all selections.
The Window Type, Controlled Levels, and Status Level options are
not available for the Opus Router Control Assignment section in this
release.
IMPORTANT: Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take
effect until the definition has been saved and downloaded to the
physical panel. The new settings can be downloaded by pressing the
Download button in the RouterMapper main window or the
Download button (located at the bottom left corner of the Edit
Opus Router Control Assignment window-not available for this
software release).

52 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Name, ID Tab

Name, ID Tab
The Name, ID window allows you to assign a Panel Name and Panel
ID. It also includes a Version box that displays the hardware and
software version information reported by the panel.

Selecting the Name, ID Tab

To access the Name, ID section, click the Name, ID tab in the Edit Opus
Router Control Assignment window.

Figure 2-4. Name, ID Tab

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 53

Chapter 2: Controlling an External Router

Assigning a Name to the Opus Panel Router Control

Section
1. Place the cursor in the Panel Name text box.
2. Type in a name (15 character limit) to identify the Opus Router
Control Assignment section of the Opus panel. The default Panel
Name is Opus Rtr map.

Assigning an ID to the Opus Panel Router Control Section

1. Select an ID from the Panel ID drop down menu.
2. The selected ID must be different from all other available panels.
3. Click Done to accept all settings. The RouterMapper main window
appears.
4. Save all settings in the RouterMapper main window.
5. Download the Opus frame.
6. Download the Opus ABA panel. (This step applies to version 5.00
and higher.)
IMPORTANT: Changes made to a panel’s definition will not take
effect until the definition has been downloaded to the physical
panel. The new settings can be downloaded by pressing the
Download button in the RouterMapper main window or the
Download button (located at the bottom left corner of the Edit
Opus Router Control Assignment window-not available for this
software release).

54 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 3
Editing an Opus Panel

The Opus master control switcher has the ability to accommodate

multiple control panels and frames on a dedicated Ethernet connection.
This provides the ability to utilize control panels and frames in an
“n” x “m” configuration.
To allow “n” x “m” operation, the panels must be interconnected
Note through a hub/router. Normally, one panel is connected to a single
Please refer to the “Operation” frame, but it is possible to have a single panel controlling multiple
section of the Opus Installation frames; in this case only one frame is allowed to tally back status
and Operation Manual for more information.
information.
The control panel maintains a Master Assignment table that shows a list
of the available frames for use. The table keeps the IP address, host
name, and status information for each frame. Each frame falls under
one of the following status classifications:
• Primary A frame that can receive and send information back
to a control panel.
• Secondary A frame that can only receive information from a
control panel.
• Unassigned A frame that is on a control network but is not
currently receiving or sending back information.
RouterMapper provides a visual way to view and edit the Master
Assignment table. Before making any changes to the Master
Assignment table, set up the network information for the target Opus
panel.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 55

Chapter 3: Editing an Opus Panel

Selecting a Master Control Panel

Figure 3-1. RouterMapper Main Window

1. In the RouterMapper main window, double-click the target control

panel.
OR
Select the target Master Control Panel.
2. Click the Edit button. The Master Control Panel window will
appear.
Once the Master Control Panel window is displayed, you can set up the
panel’s network information.
Refer to the “Adding Devices” section in the RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for instructions on how to add a
master control panel.

56 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting up Network Information

Setting up Network Information

The Network window allows a user to set up network information for
an Opus panel.

Single Frame and Panel

The Opus master control switcher works with the default values
unchanged when there is only one panel and one frame on the network.
The Opus system is shipped to you with the following default values:
• Opus Frame Host Name = FRAME1
IP Address = 172.16.10.210
• Opus Panel Host Name = PANEL1
IP Address = 172.16.10.211

Multiple Frames and Panels

If the Opus system consists of multiple Opus panels and frames, you are
required to change the default IP Address and Host Name of the target
panel and frame so that each panel and frame has a unique IP Address
and Host Name. For information on changing network settings for a
frame, see “Editing an Opus Frame,” starting on page 8.

Changing the IP Address and Host Name of a Target Panel

1. Default settings for the Host Name and IP Address are displayed in
the Master Control Panel box.
2. Click the Change network IP / Host name of the target panel check
box. The Host Name and IP Address text boxes appear.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 57

Chapter 3: Editing an Opus Panel

Figure 3-2. IP Address and Host Name Text Boxes

3. Enter a new IP Address and Host Name in the IP Address and Host
Note Name text boxes.
The IP Address and Host Name 4. Click the Update Network Settings button to update all
text boxes have an 8-character
changes.
limit.
5. After a successful download, the Update network configuration
dialog box will prompt you to reboot the target control panel and
save the updated network information.

Figure 3-3. Update Network Configuration Dialog Box

6. Click OK to return to the Network tab.

58 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Setting up Network Information

7. In the RouterMapper main window, save all changes.

A communication error will appear if the network information is
incorrect. Please refer to “Frequently Asked Questions,” starting on
page 64, for more information.

Figure 3-4. Communication Error

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 59

Chapter 3: Editing an Opus Panel

Editing the Master Assignment Window

1. From the Master Control Panel window, select the Master
Assignment tab.
2. Once the Master Assignment window is displayed, you can add or
Caution delete frames.
Target control panel network A communication error message will appear if the network
properties should be configured
configuration for the target panel is incorrect.
prior to operation of the Master
Assignment section.

Figure 3-5. Master Assignment Tab

60 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Editing the Master Assignment Window

Adding a Frame to the Master Assignment Table

1. Click the Add button to display the Add Frame dialog box.
Note
The default status for a new
frame is unassigned. To change
the frame’s status, please refer
to the Operation section of the
Opus Installation and Operation
Manual.

Figure 3-6. Add Frame Dialog Box

2. Enter the Host Name and IP Address of the new frame.

3. Click OK. The new frame will appear in the Master Assignment
table.

Deleting a Frame from the Master Assignment Table

1. From the Master Assignment table, select the frame to be deleted.
2. Click the Delete button. The Delete Frame dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-7. Delete Frame Dialog Box

3. Click the Yes button. The selected frame will be removed from the
Master Assignment table.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 61

Chapter 3: Editing an Opus Panel

Querying the Master Assignment Table

The Master Assignment window always displays the last saved table, to
Query (or update) the Master Assignment table:
1. In the Master Assignment window, click the Query Master
Assignment button. A progress bar will appear.
2. After the table is updated, save the new Master Assignment table in
the RouterMapper main window.

62 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 4
Frequently Asked Questions

The Opus Master Control Switcher uses Ethernet-based

communication. The default IP addresses function correctly in a single
frame and panel configuration. It is recommended that the PC (used for
configuration), the control panel, and the frame be connected to a hub
that is not connected to your local area network. To connect the system
to your local area network, please contact your IS department or the
Leitch Customer Service department.
The Opus master control switcher supports external routing control of
all Leitch routers (see Chapter 2: “Controlling an External Router”). If
you use the external router control function:
1. Download the Opus master control frame configuration through an
Ethernet connection.
2. Once the frame configuration is successfully downloaded,
download the Leitch router configuration to the target Opus frame
using the RS-232 serial port.
• To change the network settings of an Opus frame, see “Editing an
Opus Frame” starting on page 8.
• To change the network settings of an Opus panel, see “Editing an
Opus Panel” starting on page 57.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 63

Chapter 4: Frequently Asked Questions

Ethernet Communication Error and Diagnosis

Question I’m seeing a network communication error. How do I diag-
nose the problem?

Figure 4-1. Communication Error

Answer To diagnose the problem, follow these steps:

1. Is there a correct physical connection between the PC and the
frame? Check the physical network link between the PC and the
target frame. If the physical connection is not there, use a twisted
ethernet cable to point to point and a regular cable when the
connection is through a hub.
2. If the physical connection is there, check the basic network
communication.
Verify network communication using Ping:
Under a DOS prompt, follow this command to clarify whether
there is a network problem.
ping <Current Frame IP Address>, then click Enter.
Example 1: Ping response for a good network link
C:\WINDOWS>ping 172.16.10.210
Pinging 172.16.10.210 with 32 bytes of data:
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=2ms
TTL=255
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=1ms
TTL=255
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=1ms
TTL=255
Reply from 172.16.10.210: bytes=32 time=1ms
TTL=255

64 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Ethernet Communication Error and Diagnosis

Ping statistics for 172.16.10.210:

Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milliseconds:
Minimum = 1ms, Maximum = 2ms, Average = 1ms
Example 2: Ping response for a bad network link
C:\WINDOWS>ping 172.16.10.210
Pinging 172.16.10.210 with 32 bytes of data:
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Request timed out.
Ping statistics for 172.16.10.210:
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss),
Approximate round trip times in milliseconds:
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms
3. If Ping fails, check the network settings of your PC.
• Your PC IP address may not be 172.16.10.xxx (consult your IS
department on how to read your PC IP address).
• In this case your IS department might let you change your
PC IP address to 172.16.10.xxx where xxx represents a
number between 1 and 255.
• If you cannot change your PC IP address or are using
DHCP, select the appropriate IP address, Gateway, and
Subnet Mask for your network. Consult your IS department
for the correct values.
4. If you have passed all of the above test procedures, check the frame
IP address.
• Connect your PC to the frame through a serial cable.(Use Serial 1
at the back of the frame).
• Run Hyperterminal (or any other terminal emulation program) on
your PC. Use these settings for the terminal:
• 38400 bps
• 8 bits
• No Parity

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 65

Chapter 4: Frequently Asked Questions

• 1 Stop bit
• NO flow control settings.
• In Hyperterminal mode, type: rfip
This process will display the current frame IP address.
5. If you have passed all of the above test procedures and the
communication error persists, reboot the target frame. Close and
reopen the RouterMapper program.

66 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Changing IP Addresses for an Existing Panel and Frame

Changing IP Addresses for an Existing Panel

and Frame
Question I need to change the IP addresses for an existing panel and
frame.
Answer You will need to change the IP address of the frame first, then change
the IP address of the panel, then reboot both panel and frame to
re-establish the communication “link” between them.
1. Change the IP address of the frame:
• At the RouterMapper main menu, highlight the Opus Frame
entry, then click Edit.
• On the Network tab, check the box to change the IP address.

• Enter the new frame host name and IP address in the Master
Control Frame section. (If necessary, also update the Gateway
and Subnet Mask sections.)
• Click OK to exit the window, but do not save the database.
• Click Download to download the updated frame information.
• Once the download has completed, save the database.
2. Change the IP address of the panel:

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 67

Chapter 4: Frequently Asked Questions

• At the RouterMapper main menu, highlight the Master Control

Panel entry, then click Edit.
• On the Network tab, check the box to change the IP address.

• Enter the new panel host name and IP address.

• Click Update Network Setting. The system will process your
entries, then display both the original and the changed IP
addresses so that you may verify your entries.
• Click OK.
• Exit the window.
• Save the database.
3. Reboot the panel and the frame
• Physically turn off the panel; wait 10 seconds; turn it back on.
• Physically turn off the frame; wait 10 seconds; turn it back on.
If you encounter a communication error, please refer to the “Ethernet
Communication Error and Diagnosis” section of the FAQ.

68 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Adding a New Panel to an Existing Frame

Adding a New Panel to an Existing Frame

Question I need to add a new panel to an existing frame.
Answer You will need to add the panel via RouterMapper, then update the
panel.
1. In RouterMapper:
• At the RouterMapper main menu, highlight the Master Control
Panel entry, then click Edit.
• On the Master Assignment tab, click Add.
• Enter the new frame name and IP address.
• Click OK. The updated frame name and IP address will appear,
but the new frame status will appear as Unassigned.
• Highlight the new frame entry.
• Click Query Master Assignment. The new frame’s status
will change to Primary.
• Click OK.
2. At the panel:
• Click Master Assign to make sure that the correct frame is set
to be the primary frame. (The frame names will be displayed in
the input windows between the program and preset busses.)
• To select a primary frame, hold the Shift + the program
selection above the appropriate frame name. The primary
frame will be displayed at full brightness.
• To select a secondary frame, hold the Shift + the preset
selection below the appropriate frame name. The secondary
frame will be displayed at half brightness.
• Click Master Assign to exit this mode.
The panel should now update with the information from the frame.
If you encounter a communication error, please refer to “Ethernet
Communication Error and Diagnosis” on page 64.

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 69

Chapter 4: Frequently Asked Questions

Opus Embedded ABA Panel Download Error

Question How do I take care of an Opus embedded ABA panel down-
load error?
Answer 1. Check the Comm settings (RouterMapper main window) if the
download does not start. Refer to the “Installing RouterMapper”
section in the RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference
Guide.
2. If step one does not work, check the DIP switch settings for the
Opus logic card. The eighth switch of the second DIP switch should
be turned ON to enable router control.
3. Make sure the corresponding Opus frame has been downloaded
before downloading the Opus embedded ABA panel.

OpusView
Question Where can I find OpusView?
Answer OpusView is now a part of the RouterMapper software configuration
utility. It can be found in the Master Control Switcher section of this
manual and the RouterMapper CD.

70 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Index

Keywords

A selecting 15
Audio Over tab 14–16
ABA panel device ID 35 activating on air lockout 16
ABA panel download error 70 changing names 15
Accessible router sources 49–50 editing sources 15–16
adding all sources to panel list box 49 selecting external key control 16
adding individual sources to panel list box 50 selecting inputs 15
removing all sources from panel list box 50 selecting sources 15
removing individual sources from panel list box 50 selecting tab 15
Accessing Opus router control 46 setting up machine control 16
Adding frames to device list 1–3 Audio-video mix transition 22
Adding frames to master assignment table 61 Automation 36
Adding new panel to existing frame 69
AES DARS reference, selecting 32 B–C
Aspect ratio, enabling 42
Assigning names to panels 54 Background source, changing 44
Assigning router destinations to primary inputs 51–52 Backgrounds, assigning 7
Assignments tab 47–50 Border color, changing 43
accessible router sources 49–50 Border size, changing 43
editing selection buttons 48–50 Border softness, changing 44
inaccessibility errors 50 Breakaway tab 23–24
selecting tab 47 assigning AES paths 24
Audio input⁄audio output tab 17–20 selecting tab 23
audio embed 19 Changing host name of target panels 57–59
embedded audio list box 20 Changing IP address of target panels 57–59
handling user data 18 Changing IP addresses 67–68
processing inputs 18 Channel position, changing 42
selecting data types 18 Channels, adding 41
selecting tab 17 Channels, setting for preview 42
selecting word size for outputs 18 Communication error, network 64–66
Audio over sources Controlling an external router 45–54
editing 15–16 Crop size, changing 44

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 71

Index

D audio over tab 14–16

breakaway tab 23–24
Database, editing 46 effects tab 39–44
Deleting frames form master assignment table 61 genlock tab 31–33
Device IDs, checking 25 GPI tab 27–29
Download error, ABA panel 70 GPO tab 29–30
keyer tab 11–14
E misc tab 34–36
Editing an Opus frame 1–44 network tab 8–10
See also Frames, editing preroll tab 24–26
Editing an Opus panel 55–62 primary input tab 5–7
See also Panels, editing selecting frames 3–4
Editing Assignments tab selection buttons 48–50 time display tab 36–38
assigning categories and indexes 48 transition control tab 21–23
assigning categories only 48 Frequently asked questions 63–70
assigning favorite sources 49 ABA panel download error 70
clearing assignments 49 changing IP addresses 67–68
rearranging 48 communication error and diagnosis 64–66
Editing database 46 panel to frame, adding new 69
Editing the master assignment window 60–62
adding frames 61 G–H
deleting frames 61 Gateway settings 10
querying the master assignment table 62 Genlock tab 31–33
Effects tab 39–44 adjusting timing setup 32
adding channels 41 selecting AES DARS reference 32
changing background source 44 selecting operating standard 31
changing border color 43 selecting source type 32
changing border size 43 selecting tab 31
changing border softness 44 GPI tab 27–29
changing channel position 42 assigning selections 28
changing crop size 44 enabling GPI 29
changing layer priority 44 selecting sources 28
changing squeeze ratio 43 selecting tab 27–28
disabling effects 41 selecting trigger type 28
editing names 41 specifying polarity 28
enabling the correct aspect ratio 42 GPO entries, checking 25
re-enabling effects 41 GPO tab 29–30
selecting channels for edit 42 assigning selections 30
selecting tab 41 selecting sources 30
setting channels for preview 42 selecting tab 30
Enabling rate change during transitions 22 setting duration 30
specifying polarity 30
F Host name, changing 9–10
Fade to black transition rate 22
Fade to silence transition rate 22 I–J
Frames, editing 1–44 Inaccessibility errors 50
adding frames 1–3 IP address, changing 9–10, 67–68
audio input⁄audio output tab 17–20

72 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Index

K–L subnet mask settings 10

On air lockout, activating 13, 16
Keyer sources Opus router control, accessing 46
editing 12–14 OpusView 70
selecting 11–12
Keyer tab 11–14 P
activating on air lockout 13
changing source names 12 Panel to frame, adding new 69
choosing keyers 13 Panels, editing 55–62
editing sources 12–14 master assignment window, editing 60–62
machine control setup 12 network information setup 57–59
selecting sources 11–12 selecting master control panel 56
selecting tab 11 Preroll tab 24–26
setting external keyers 13–14 checking device IDs 25
Keyers, setting external 13–14 checking GPO entries 25
Layer priority, changing 44 enabling preroll 25
resetting preroll duration 26
M–O selecting sources 25
selecting tab 25
Machine control, setup 7 setting up preroll duration 25
Master assignment window, editing 60–62 Primary input source
adding frames 61 editing 6–7
deleting frames 61 selecting 6
querying the master assignment table 62 Primary input tab 5–7
Master control panel, selecting 56 Selecting tab 5
Misc tab 34–36 Primary inputs tab 51–52
ABA panel device ID 35 assigning backgrounds 7
automation 36 assigning destinations 51–52
quick select 34–35 assigning quick select 6
selecting tab 34 changing source names 6
Name, ID tab 53–54 editing sources 6–7
assigning IDs 54 following sources 6
assigning names 54 selecting sources 6
selecting tab 53 selecting tab 51
Names, editing 41 setting up machine control 7
Network information setup 57–59
changing host name of target panels 57–59 Q–R
changing IP address of target panels 57–59
multiple frames 57 Querying master assignment table 62
multiple panels 57 Quick select 6, 34–35
Network tab 8–10 Router control, accessing 46
changing gateway of target frames 10 Router sources, accessible 49–50
changing host name of target frames 9–10 adding all sources to panel list box 49
changing IP address of target frames 9–10 adding individual sources to panel list box 50
changing subnet mask of target frames 10 removing all sources from panel list box 50
gateway settings 10 removing individual sources from panel list box 50
multiple frames 9
multiple panels 9 S
single frame 8 Selecting frames 3–4
single panel 8 Selecting master control panel 56

Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide 73

Index

Selection buttons, editing 48–49 transition control 21–23

Setting up network information 57–59 Take setup 38
Source names, changing 6 Time display format 37
Squeeze ratio, changing 43 Time display tab 36–38
Subnet mask settings 10 assigning timeout values 37
selecting format 37
T–Z take setup 38
timer configuration 37
Tabs
Timeout values 37
assignments 47–50
Timer configuration 37
audio input⁄audio output 17–20
Transition abort direction 22
audio over 14–16
Transition control tab 21–23
breakaway 23–24
selecting tab 21
effects 39–44
selecting transition rates 21–23
genlock 31–33
Transition rates
GPI 27–29
audio-video mix 22
GPO 29–30
enabling rate change 22
keyer 11–14
enabling VBI processing 22
misc 34–36
fade to black 22
name, ID 53–54
fade to silence 22
network 8–10
transition abort direction 22
preroll 24–26
VBI processing 22
primary input 5–7
Warranty information iv
primary inputs 51–52
time display 36–38

74 Opus Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Router Control Software
Reference Guide

Edition K
ROUTERWORKSMAN
 Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

®
RouterWorks
Router Control Software
Reference Guide

Edition K
April 2005
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Trademarks and Copyrights

CCS, CCS CoPilot, CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, Command Control
System, CineTone, CinePhase, CineSound, DigiBus, DigiPeek, Digital
Glue, DigiWorks, DTV Glue, EventWORKS, EZ HD, Ez ID, Genesis,
Harris, HDTV Glue, Image Q, Inca, Inca Station, InfoCaster, Inscriber,
Inscriber CG—FX, Icon, IconLogo, IconMaster, IconMaster Nav,
IconSet, IconStation, Integrator, LeFont, Leitch, LogoMotion,
MediaFile, MIX BOX, NEO, the NEO design, NEOSCOPE,
NewsFlash, Nexio, Opus, Panacea, PanelMAPPER, Platinum, Portal,
PROM-Slide, RouterMAPPER, RouterWORKS, Signal Quality
Manager, SpyderWeb, SuiteView, TitleMotion, UNIFRAME, Velocity,
VelocityHD, VideoCarte, Videotek, and X75 are trademarks of Harris
Corporation, which may be registered in the United States, Canada,
and/or other countries. All other trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
Copyright 1996-2006, Leitch Technology International, Inc. and Harris
Corporation. All rights reserved. This publication supersedes all
previous releases. Printed in Canada.

Warranty Information
The Leitch Limited Warranty Policy provides a complete description of
your warranty coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as
procedures for obtaining warranty service. To view the complete
warranty, visit www.leitch.com>Support>Warranties.
 Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction
What’s New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Firmware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Using RouterWorks On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
General Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Context-Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Full-Text Help Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Single-Bus Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Multi-Bus Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Matrix Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
RouterMapper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote Dial-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Demo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Related Leitch Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Contacting Leitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 2: Installation
Installing RouterWorks Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide v

Contents

Installing RouterWorks v 5.06 on PCs Using Microsoft® Windows®

95, Windows® 98, or Windows® Me Operating System . . . . . . . 26
Connecting RouterWorks to a Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Editing the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Launching RouterWorks Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Chapter 3: Operation
Selecting a Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Connecting a Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
AFV (Audio Follow Video) Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Breakaway Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Performing a Multiple Take (Matrix Panels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Disconnecting and Replacing Sources (Matrix Panels only) . . . . . . . . 41
Source Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Multiple Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Source Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Undoing a Take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Locking and Protecting Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Locking a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Unlocking a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Protecting a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Unprotecting a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Allowing Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Alarms (Matrix Panels Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Executing and Editing Salvos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Adding a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Capturing the Existing State of the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Adding a Crosspoint to a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Deleting a Crosspoint from a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Copying an Existing Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Executing a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Editing a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Deleting a Salvo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Active Salvos Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Bidirectional Take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Configuring the Router . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Editing the .PAN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Using the Bidirectional Take Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

vi RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Contents

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Using the Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Setting Up a New Panel via Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Editing an Existing Panel via Panel Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Advanced Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Determining .PAN File Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Designating the Router Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Setting the Locks and Protects Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Changing the Control Panel Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Setting Control Panel Size Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Adding/Deleting Logical Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Adding/Deleting Logical Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Activating Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Activating Active Salvos Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Activating Signal Presence Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Activating Bidirectional Take . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Creating Control Panels for Individual Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Creating Control Panels for Multiple Remote Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Index
Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide vii

Contents

viii RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Chapter 1
Introduction

Leitch’s RouterWorks router control software provides an easy-to-use

graphical user interface for the entire line of Leitch signal routers.
RouterWorks is a group of Windows®-based applications that can be
easily navigated using only basic Windows skills. Sources and
destinations in a routing system are graphically represented on
on-screen control panels, and can be selected or deselected using a
standard mouse or touch screen. Control panels may be customized for
each routing system or for each operator, enabling any user to quickly
and easily locate and select appropriate sources and destinations in the
system.
RouterWorks software may be used as the only controlling device in a
system or it may be used in conjunction with traditional hardware
control panels. Multiple RouterWorks control stations may control the
same routing system. RouterWorks continually monitors the routing
system and reports all changes in the status of the system, regardless of
the type of controlling device that initiated the change. The
RouterWorks package is modem-ready and can control an unlimited
number of remote routing systems using only a modem, phone line,
router, and PC. Appropriate wherever “ease-of-use” is an issue,
RouterWorks is an effective, powerful tool that will greatly simplify the
use of your Leitch signal router.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 1

Chapter 1: Introduction

What’s New
An index has been added to edition K of the RouterWorks Router
Control Software Reference Guide.

System Requirements
You may use RouterWorks with any IBM-compatible computer that
Note meets these minimum requirements.
If you want to install
RouterWorks version 5.06 on a CPU 266 MHz Pentium II
PC that uses a Microsoft ®
Windows® 95, Windows® 98, RAM At least 128 MB
or Windows® Me operating
system, you may need to
Hard disk space At least 30 MB free
manually remove certain files Additional disk drives CD-ROM or CD-RW
and Windows registry entries.
See page 26 through page 27 for Port(s) Serial port, RS-232 or RS-422 / 9600 baud or
more information higher
(Optional) Ethernet port, if used with an Ethernet
Gateway device
Display resolution 800x600, 256 colors
1024x768, high color (16 bit) recommended
Pointing device Mouse, trackball, touch screen, or other pointing
device
Operating system* Microsoft® Windows® 95, Windows® 98,
Windows NT®, Windows® 2000, Windows®
ME, Windows® XP
Microsoft® Internet Explorer 4.0 or later

*Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows ME,
Windows XP, and Microsoft Internet Explorer are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.

2 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 System Limitations

System Limitations
Table 1-1 shows the various system limitations of RouterWorks.

Table 1-1. RouterWorks System Limitations

System Item Limitation
Maximum number of levels 8
Maximum number of logical sources 3072
Maximum number of logical destinations 3072
Maximum number of sources usable with non Power-PC 128
based alphanumeric panels (panels that do not have serial
& Ethernet ports) when in program mode — DIP switch
mode is only limited by router system size
Maximum number of panels in one router system 128
Maximum number of salvos — The actual number of 254
salvos that can be downloaded to panels is limited by the
panel memory and number of buttons on the panel, but
RW/RM supports up to 254 salvos total
Maximum number of Integrator frames in one router 128
system
Maximum number of matrices per Integrator frame 8
Maximum number of components per Integrator frame 5
matrix

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 3

Chapter 1: Introduction

Firmware Requirements
RouterWorks may be used to control any Leitch router that meets the
Note following requirements:
To identify the firmware version
in use, check the X-Y bus Table 1-2. Leitch Router Requirements for Using RouterWorks
connections on the frame.
For Direct Control via the For Remote Control via
Version 2 and higher frames will Frame Type
Serial Port Modem
use mini-XLR connectors
instead of the RJ-11 connectors HD Series SCE-101 or RSCE-101, SCE-101 or RSCE-101,
used in earlier versions. Earlier version 2.0 or later, or version 3.0 or later, or
version frames cannot be SPT-1000-XY SPT-1000-XY
upgraded. If serial control is
desired for these earlier version Xplus® Version 2.0 or later Version 3.0 or later
frames, discuss the RSCE-101
option with your Leitch
VIA32® Version 1.0 or later Version 1.0 or later
representative. Integrator™ Version 1.0 or later Version 1.0 or later
If all the serial ports on a frame
are currently being used, and
serial control is desired,
additional ports can be created
using the SPT-1000-SXY Serial
Protocol Translator. Contact
your Leitch representative for
more information.

If your router system requires a

firmware upgrade, please
contact Leitch Customer
Service.

4 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using this Manual

Using this Manual

This manual is intended as a reference to the RouterWorks software and
is not organized in step-by-step tutorial fashion.
The manual has the following writing conventions:

Table 1-3. Writing Conventions

Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields,
buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes,
menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection
names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books or
publications, and the first instances of new terms and
specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as
ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as
a DOS entry or something you type into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the
electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Indicates important information that helps to avoid
Note and troubleshoot problems

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 5

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using RouterWorks On-Line Help

The stand-alone help offers complete information on all RouterWorks
functions. General Help and Help search functions are available.

General Help
When you need help on any RouterWorks topic, choose Help from the
Leitch Routing Switchers display window (see page 8 for a graphical
representation of this window). This will allow you to locate
information by category. Figure 1-1 shows an illustration of the General
Help window.

Figure 1-1. General Help Window

Context-Sensitive Help
Context-sensitive Help gives you instant help whenever a menu
command is highlighted, a dialog box is open, or a pop-up message box
is displayed.
Press F1 for context-sensitive help.

Full-Text Help Search

RouterWorks Help includes a full text search capability so that you can
find help topics containing the text string you specify. Two options are
available that allow you to refine your search: the Index option and the
Database Find option. Figure 1-2 shows an illustration of the results of
a full-text Help search using the Index option. Figure 1-3 shows an

6 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using RouterWorks On-Line Help

illustration of the results of a full-text Help search using the Database

Find option.

Figure 1-2. Full-Text Help Search — Index Option

Figure 1-3. Full-Text Help Search — Database Find Option

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 7

Chapter 1: Introduction

Features
The RouterWorks package includes a single-bus panel, a multi-bus
panel, a matrix panel, a Panel Wizard, and RouterMapper™
applications.

Figure 1-4. RouterWorks Display Window

8 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Features

Single-Bus Panel

Figure 1-5. Single-Bus Panel Window

The RouterWorks single-bus panel provides control over one

destination at a time. User-access to the destination may be restricted
via Locks and Protects to prevent inadvertent changes to crosspoint
selections. Sources may be connected to a selected destination in either
AFV or Breakaway modes. Source status on each individual level is
clearly indicated on the on-screen panel by color-coded LED bars.
Logical source connections may be easily changed from the on-screen
control panel. Changes made on other control panels in the system will
also be reflected on the single-bus panel whenever the affected
destination is selected from the drop-down list box.
The single-bus panel is divided into two main sections: destinations are
on the left, and sources are on the right. The Source section includes a
Status display that lists the sources connected on each level to the
selected destination. The destination is selected via the drop-down list
box located at the bottom of the Destination section. Lock and Protect
buttons are also included in this section of the control panel, and are
described in detail in other chapters of this manual.
The Sources section of the single-bus panel includes a separate
Breakaway button for each level in the router. A Follow button, a salvo
button, a set of source buttons representing each logical source, and a
set of LEDs representing each level and each source on each level is
also included.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 9

Chapter 1: Introduction

Optionally (for Panacea panels only), a single-bus panel display can

show Source Signal presence indicators. Signal presence is indicated by
a circle display located directly above each source button on a
RouterWorks panel. For each level on which a valid signal is detected
and reported by the router, a wedge of the signal presence indicator
circle display will be filled using the Level’s assigned color. If the
router reports that the input does not detect a valid input signal, the
wedge will be colored using the color that signifies loss of input signal.
(The default color is black.) The circle display for a single-bus panel is
illustrated in Figure 1-5 on page 9.
If a panel controls more than one level, the circle is divided into
sections based on the number of levels that the RouterWorks panel
controls. Each source will display one section for each level on which
signal presence has been reported. If no signal presence is reported for a
level of a source (e.g., a router that does not support signal presence
reporting or for a source that is not defined for a particular level), the
wedge for that level will not be displayed.
You can activate the display of source signal presence indicators via the
Advanced Options function in Panel Wizard (see “Signal Presence
Settings” on page 104). Alternatively, you can edit the panel
initialization (.PAN) file directly (see “Activating Signal Presence
Indicators” on page 118).

10 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Features

Multi-Bus Panel

Figure 1-6. Multi-Bus Panel Window

With the RouterWorks multi-bus panel you can easily monitor and
control several router destinations from one panel. Multiple sources and
destinations are simultaneously displayed on the on-screen panel.
Access to destinations may be restricted via Locks and Protects to
prevent unintentional changes to crosspoint selections. Sources may be
connected to selected destinations in either AFV or breakaway modes.
Source status is clearly displayed for each level. Changes made on other
control panels in the system will also be reflected on the multi-bus
panel.
The multi-bus panel is divided into three main sections: destinations are
on the top, sources are on the bottom, and category/index control is to
the right.
• The Destination section includes a status display that lists the
sources connected on each level to the selected destination.
Destinations are selected by clicking on the Destination button
desired. Lock and Protect buttons (used to protect the destination
from being inadvertently changed) are also included in this section
of the control panel and are described in detail in the sections that

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 11

Chapter 1: Introduction

follow. An Active Salvo Control display window displays the names

of all salvos that are completely engaged. If a salvo has all levels of
every crosspoint engaged, then the name will appear in the Active
Salvos Control list box.
• The Sources section includes a separate Breakaway button for
each level in the router. A Follow button, a salvo button, a set of
source buttons representing each logical source, and a set of LEDs
representing each level and each source on each level is also
included.
• Optionally (for Panacea panels only), a multi-bus panel display can
show source signal presence indicators. Signal presence is indicated
by a circle display located directly above each source button on a
RouterWorks panel. For each level on which a valid signal is
detected and reported by the router, a wedge of the signal presence
indicator circle display will be filled using the Level’s assigned
color. If the router reports that the input does not detect a valid input
signal, the wedge will be colored using the color that signifies loss
of input signal. (The default color is black.) The circle display for a
multi-bus panel is illustrated in Figure 1-6 on page 11.
If a panel controls more than one level, the circle is divided into
sections based on the number of levels that the RouterWorks panel
controls. Each source will display one section for each level on
which signal presence has been reported. If no signal presence is
reported for a level of a source (e.g., a router that does not support
signal presence reporting or for a source that is not defined for a
particular level), the wedge for that level will not be displayed.
You can activate the display of source signal presence indicators via
the Advanced Options function in Panel Wizard (see “Signal
Presence Settings” on page 104). Alternatively, you can edit the
panel initialization (.PAN) file directly (see “Activating Signal
Presence Indicators” on page 118).
• The category/index control section of the multi-bus panel provides
another way to perform switching based on categories and indexes.
With this function you may group related inputs or outputs into
categories (e.g., VTR, CAM, MIC, etc.) with each having an index
“identifier” (e.g., 2, 17, 36, etc.) to make it easier for you to locate.
The Category/Index control function is particularly useful in
systems with very large numbers of inputs and outputs.

12 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Features

Matrix Panel

Figure 1-7. Matrix Panel Window

With the RouterWorks matrix panel, the status of an entire router

system may be monitored and controlled from a single screen. A
complete 16x16 router can be displayed on a 1024x768 screen with
reasonable legibility. (A 32x32 router can be displayed as well;

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 13

Chapter 1: Introduction

however, the names and icons in the Source and Destination buttons
will not be visible.)
Crosspoints are displayed in a matrix format with intersecting source
and destination lines. Sources appear horizontally across the top and
destinations appear vertically down the right side. Sources and
destinations are connected by double-clicking at the desired crosspoint.
The sources and destinations in a router are displayed on the matrix
panel as a row of control buttons along the top and right sides of the
panel. Sources are displayed along the top, and destinations down the
right-hand side. Each control button includes the source or destination
name and icon, although names and icons may not be readable in the
full-screen view. For greater legibility, any portion of the panel may be
enlarged using the Zoom-In button at the right of the screen.
Crosspoints in the router are monitored via colored markers at the
intersection of the source and destination lines. The markers are
displayed as pie-shaped wedges that correspond to the colors of the
Breakaway Level buttons. If, for example, a video Breakaway Level
button is colored blue, a blue marker at the intersection of a source and
destination line indicates that the source is connected on the video level.
If more than one colored marker is present at an intersection, the source
is connected on each of the levels displayed. If a source is selected on
ALL levels in the system (AFV switching), the crosspoint marker will
appear as a multi-colored circle, consisting of all colors of the active
levels.
Optionally (for Panacea panels only), a matrix panel display can show
Source Signal presence indicators. Signal presence is indicated by a
circle display located directly above each source button on a
RouterWorks panel. For each level on which a valid signal is detected
and reported by the router, a wedge of the signal presence indicator
circle display will be filled using the Level’s assigned color. If the
router reports that the input does not detect a valid input signal, the
wedge will be colored using the color that signifies loss of input signal.
(The default color is black.) The circle display for a matrix panel is
illustrated in Figure 1-7 on page 13.
If a panel controls more than one level, the circle is divided into
sections based on the number of levels that the RouterWorks panel
controls. Each source will display one section for each level on which
signal presence has been reported. If no signal presence is reported for a
level of a source (e.g., a router that does not support signal presence

14 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Features

reporting or for a source that is not defined for a particular level), the
wedge for that level will not be displayed.
You can activate the display of source signal presence indicators via the
Advanced Options function in Panel Wizard (see “Signal Presence
Settings” on page 104). Alternatively, you can edit the panel
initialization (.PAN) file directly (see “Activating Signal Presence
Indicators” on page 118).
The matrix panel may be operated in either of two configurations:
Preset/Take or No-Take configuration. The configuration is
determined by the setting of the UseTake= line in the MATRIX.PAN
file. (See “Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File” on page
109 for more information about selecting the panel configuration.)
• In No-Take configurations, crosspoints are switched as soon as
they are selected. The crosspoint markers will be presented as solid,
colored wedges. The Take button will not appear on these panels.
• In Preset/Take configurations, crosspoints are preset on the panel
prior to actual switching. The switch only occurs when you press
the Take button. Any number of crosspoints may be preset before
the Take is executed. Crosspoint markers in Preset/Take
configured panels will appear as hollow, colored wedges (outlines
only) when the crosspoint is preset, and will change to solid
markers when the Take is executed.

Zooming the Matrix Panel Window

To enlarge a section of the matrix panel, click on the Zoom-In (+)
button located on the right side of the panel. The mouse cursor will
change shapes to indicate Zoom mode. Click on a crosspoint within the
section that will be enlarged. The panel will automatically zoom-in to
display five sources and five destinations around the crosspoint
selection.
To display more than five crosspoints, follow these steps:
1. Select the Zoom-In button, then place the cursor over the top left
corner of the matrix section that will be enlarged.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
3. Drag the cursor diagonally across the screen. A rectangle will be
drawn over the area selected. (Draw the rectangle over the
crosspoint matrix only — do not include the source or destination
buttons. The associated source and destination buttons will be
automatically included in the zoomed-in view.)

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 15

Chapter 1: Introduction

4. When the rectangle is large enough to include all of the crosspoints

desired in the enlarged view, release the mouse button.
The screen will redrawn in the zoomed-in view.
To return to the full-screen view, click on the Zoom-Out (–)
button. Clicking on the Zoom-Out button will always take you all the
way back to the full screen view, regardless of the number of times you
have zoomed in.

Sizing the Matrix Panel Window

1. Move the mouse cursor over an edge of the window. The cursor
will change to a two-headed arrow.
2. While this cursor is visible, click and hold the left mouse button.
3. Drag the edge of the window into the desired position.
4. When the mouse button is released, the window will be redrawn in
the new position, and the buttons will be resized.

Panel Wizard
RouterWorks includes a panel creation utility called Panel Wizard. It
takes you through a step-by-step process to create or edit a
RouterWorks software panel. The Panel Wizard utility “asks” you
questions about what type of panel you would like to create, then
creates a new panel for you.

Figure 1-8. Panel Wizard Introduction Window

16 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Features

RouterMapper
Leitch’s RouterMapper configuration utility is an easy-to-use
Microsoft® Windows®-based application for programming
RouterWorks, router frames, control panels, and the Opus master
controller. Using RouterMapper, you may create a database that
describes a routing system (i.e., available levels, sources, and
destinations). That database may be downloaded to a control panel and/
or router frame, and may also be used in conjunction with RouterWorks
software applications. Function keys and selection keys (on
Programmable Panel series panels only) may also be defined, and
keycap inserts printed.
RouterMapper allows control panels to be customized for specific
systems or operators. Unique names and icons can be assigned to each
source and destination in the routing system, enabling a user to locate
and select the desired inputs and outputs quickly and easily. Different
on-screen control panels may also be designed for each operator with
only the sources and destinations required by that operator. This level of
customization protects the system resources from inadvertent changes.
RouterMapper also allows mapping of the logical sources and
destinations that appear on the RouterWorks control panels. The Editor
assigns these logical sources and destinations to physical sources and
destinations in a routing system. For example, when operators select a
source labeled “VTR-12” (the logical source), they may in reality be
selecting Source 1, Source 2 or any other source (the physical source) in
the system. Because the physical design of the routing system is
transparent to the RouterWorks user, changes may be made to the
routing system without affecting the overall image that the operator
sees.
RouterMapper can also set the levels on which logical sources and
destinations will be valid. A logical source for a camera, for example,
could be set without corresponding audio. This “camera” source would
be clearly indicated on the on-screen control panel as a video-only
source and, when selected, will leave the audio levels unchanged. This
form of “automatic breakaway” is especially useful for devices such as
still stores, paint boxes, microphones, speakers, monitors, and cameras.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 17

Chapter 1: Introduction

Figure 1-9. RouterMapper Main Window

Remote Dial-Up
The RouterWorks application also includes a remote dial-up feature that
allows a routing system to be controlled from a remote location. Your
system should be set up for Dial-Up control at the RouterMapper
Communications Settings dialog box. For more information, see your
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.

TCP/IP
The RouterWorks application also allows you to control a routing
system via Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
Your system should be set up for TCP/IP control at the RouterMapper
Communications Settings dialog box. For more information, see your
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.

Demo Mode
If the PC is not connected to a routing system, but the user wants to see
how the RouterWorks software will operate with a routing system, your

18 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Contacting Leitch

system should be set up for Demo Mode at the RouterMapper

Communications Settings dialog box. Selecting Demo Mode will
simulate the presence of a router and will allow the software to be
operated normally.

Related Leitch Products

RouterWorks may be easily integrated with other Leitch routing control
products, including EventWorks™ and the Programmable Panel Series
control panels.
• EventWorks is a Microsoft® Windows®-based program (similar to
RouterWorks) that is used to automate takes and salvos according
to a user-defined schedule or sequence.
• The Programmable Panel Series control panels are the hardware
equivalent of EventWorks and the RouterWorks panels. These
programmable panels use the same database as the RouterWorks
and EventWorks panels, and may be used in conjunction with these
products to control a routing system. For additional information on
these or any other Leitch products, contact the Leitch Sales
Department or visit our Web site at www.leitch.com.

Contacting Leitch
If you have questions about this or other Leitch products, contact us for
technical support and product information.

Technical Support
Leitch Technology is committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour
service to our customers around the world. Visit our Web site at
www.leitch.com > Support > Technical Support for information on how
to contact the Leitch Customer Service team in your geographical
region.

Product Information
If you would like the latest Leitch product information or
documentation, contact your Leitch dealer or the Leitch Sales
Department at one of the locations listed above; or, visit our Web site at
www.leitch.com for more information.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 19

Chapter 1: Introduction

20 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Chapter 2
Installation

Installing RouterWorks Software

1. Place the program disk or CD into the correct drive on your
personal computer.
2. From the taskbar’s Start menu, select Run.

Figure 2-1. Run Dialog Box

3. In the Command Line box, enter [drive designator]:\setup.exe.

4. Click OK to launch the RouterWorks setup program.
5. The setup program will display an installation confirmation dialog
box.
• Click OK to continue program installation.
• Click on Cancel to abort the installation.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 21

Chapter 2: Installation

Figure 2-2. Installation Confirmation Dialog Box

6. Click OK to continue the installation process.

7. The Install Directory dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-3. Install Directory Dialog Box

At this screen, designate the directory in which the RouterWorks

program files will be stored. The default is
C:\LEITCH\RTRWRKS. To change the destination directory,
enter the complete path of the desired directory in the highlighted
box. RouterWorks will create the specified directory (if it does not
already exist) and store all program files in this directory.
8. Click OK. The Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager dialog
box will appear.

22 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Installing RouterWorks Software

Figure 2-4. Install Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Dialog

Box

The optional Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager function allows

you to manage the dynamic routing thread connections between
Integrator frames and other large routing systems based on
Integrator frames. Contact your Leitch sales representative to
discuss what is required for this option.
9. Click OK to continue the installation process.
10. The Install Electronic Documentation dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-5. Install Electronic Documentation Dialog Box

This dialog box provides you with the opportunity to install

“electronic” copies of the printed RouterMapper documentation. In
addition, you may download a copy of Adobe® Acrobat® Reader
version 5. If you would like either the PDF files or the Acrobat
Reader (or both) installed, click the appropriate check boxes.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 23

Chapter 2: Installation

11. Click OK. A Leitch Program Group dialog will appear. You may
select the Windows Program Group where the application icons
will appear.

Figure 2-6. Leitch Program Group Dialog Box

12. If you are re-installing RouterWorks, the Preserve Settings dialog

box will appear. This message refers to the EDITRTR.INI file
(which is stored in the Windows subdirectory). The EDITRTR.INI
file stores all information concerning any application preferences
originally created in RouterWorks.

Figure 2-7. Preserve Settings Dialog Box

24 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Installing RouterWorks Software

• Click on Yes to keep your existing preferences.

• Click on No to overwrite existing preferences.
13. When the program installation is complete, a Read Me box will
Caution appear on the screen.
If you click “No” at the This box includes up-to-date information that may or may not have
Preserve Settings dialog box,
been incorporated into the manual at the time of program release.
RouterWorks will overwrite
your existing preferences with a Select File > Exit to close the Read Me dialog box and return to the
new EDITRTR.INI file. Windows desktop.

Figure 2-8. Read Me Dialog Box

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 25

Chapter 2: Installation

If the RouterWorks program has been successfully installed, the Start

menu should now include a new group titled Leitch Routing Switchers.

Figure 2-9. Leitch Routing Switchers Group Window

• Select the Read Me icon to reopen the text notes that were displayed
on installation.
• Select the Un-Install icon to launch an application by which the
RouterWorks software can be removed from the system.
• Select any of the Help icons to open a standard Windows Help file.
• Select the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel icons
to open those applications, each of which is described in detail in
the chapters that follow.
• Select the RouterMapper icon to launch the RouterMapper
application

Installing RouterWorks v 5.06 on PCs Using Microsoft®

Windows® 95, Windows® 98, or Windows® Me Operating
System
If you want to install RouterWorks version 5.06 on a PC that uses a
Windows 95, Windows 98, or Windows Me operating system, you may
need to manually remove the following files and Windows registry
entries.

26 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Editing the Database

Files and Directories

1. At the Leitch root directory (C:\Leitch)
a. Move any previously-created databases that you want to save to
another location.
b. Move any previously-created PAN files that you want to save to
another location.
c. Delete all files and subdirectories.
2. At the Windows root directory (C:\Windows [or WINNT, etc.])
a. Move the EDITRTR.INI file that you want to save to another
location.
b. Delete EDITRTR.INI file in the Windows root directory.

Registry Entries
Use REGEDIT to remove the following key, sub-keys and values:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Leitch Routers and Switchers

Connecting RouterWorks to a Router

To control a router with the RouterWorks software, the PC must be
connected to a serial port in the routing system. For more information
about connecting your PC to a serial port, please refer to your
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.

Editing the Database

Before RouterWorks can be used to control a router, a database for the
routing switcher must be created. Sources, destinations, and switching
levels that are to appear on the on-screen control panels must first be
defined using the RouterMapper application. Procedures for creating
and editing databases can be found in the RouterMapper manual that
was provided with your software.
A database created in RouterMapper can be used with RouterWorks and
the Programmable Panel series control panels, as each product uses the
same RouterMapper configuration utility. If you have already defined a
router database using RouterMapper, it is not necessary to create a new
one. Simply designate your existing database as the RouterWorks
database by editing the panel initialization files as described in
“Designating the Router Database” on page 109.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 27

Chapter 2: Installation

Launching RouterWorks Applications

1. Open the Leitch Routing Switchers group window. (See Figure 2-9
Note on page 26 for a graphic representation of this window.)
If your PC is not connected to a 2. Choose one of the following options:
routing system, but you want to
see how RouterWorks operates, • Select the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel
select “Demo Mode” from the icons to open those applications.
Comm Settings menu in
RouterMapper. Selecting Demo
• Select the Panel Wizard icon to quickly set up a control panel.
Mode will simulate the presence • Select the Read Me icon to reopen the text notes that were
of a router and will allow the displayed on installation.
software to be operated
normally. • Select the RouterWorks Help icon to open the Help file.

28 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Chapter 3
Operation

Selecting a Destination
Destinations available for use with a control panel are defined via
RouterMapper and the panel definition file.
• To add, delete, or change a destination in the database, refer to the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
• For instructions on how to include or exclude a destination from
this panel, see “Adding/Deleting Logical Destinations” on page
116.
To select a destination on a single-bus panel, follow these
steps:
1. Click the arrow button located to the right of the drop-down
destination list.
2. The list will expand to reveal the destinations available for use with
this control panel.
3. Scroll through the list of destinations, and click the desired
destination. Sources currently connected to the selected destination
will be reflected in the Source Status window and on the Source
LEDs.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 29

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-1. Selecting a Destination — Single-Bus Panel

To select a destination on a multi-bus panel, follow these

steps:
1. Click the desired Destination button.
2. If the desired destination is not visible on the screen, scroll through
the list of available destinations using the scroll bar immediately
below the Destination buttons. The destination name and icon will
appear in each status window, along with sources currently
connected to the destination.

Figure 3-2. Selecting a Destination — Multi-Bus Panel

30 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 To select a destination on a matrix panel: Procedures for
connecting sources and destinations on the matrix panel depend on the
configuration (Preset/Take or No-Take) of the panel. Switching
procedures will be covered separately in “AFV (Audio Follow Video)
Switching” on page 32 and “Breakaway Switching” on page 35.

Connecting a Source
Sources available for use with a control panel are defined via
RouterMapper and the panel definition file.
• To add, delete, or change a source in the database, refer to the
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide.
• To include and exclude sources and destinations, refer to “Adding/
Deleting Logical Sources” on page 114 and “Adding/Deleting
Logical Destinations” on page 116.
To connect a Source to a currently selected destination on a
single-bus or a multi-bus panel, click the appropriate source
button. The source will be reflected in the Source status window, and
the LEDs for that source will light to reflect the new connection. Click
the scroll bar located beneath the source buttons to view additional
sources.

Figure 3-3. Connecting a Source: Single-Bus Panel

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 31

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-4. Connecting a Source: Multi-Bus Panel

To connect a source on a matrix panel: Procedures for

connecting sources on the matrix panel depend on the configuration
(Preset/Take or No-Take) of the panel. Switching procedures will be
covered separately in “AFV (Audio Follow Video) Switching” on page
32 and “Breakaway Switching” on page 35.

AFV (Audio Follow Video) Switching

Single- and Multi-Bus Panels
Clicking on a source when all levels are enabled (when each Level
button is lit) will change all levels for that source simultaneously (AFV
switching).
To perform an AFV switch for single- or multi-bus panels,
follow these steps:
1. Enable all Level buttons (or press the Follow button). Each Level
button should be lit.
2. Click the desired Source button. The source will be switched on all
levels simultaneously.

32 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Figure 3-5. AFV Switching: Single-Bus Panel1

Figure 3-6. AFV Switching: Multi-Bus Panel2

1
Only the levels enabled for a particular source will be changed when a source is
selected at the single-bus panel. If, for example, a Camera source has been configured
at the Database Editor as video-only, only the video level LED will be lit when the
Camera source is selected. The LEDs for other levels will be blank for the source.
Clicking on the Camera source will change only the enabled level. Other sources
connected to the selected destination on other levels will not be affected.
2 A particular source may be enabled only on specific levels. A logical source for a

camera, for example, could be set without corresponding audio. This “camera” source
would be clearly shown on a multi-bus panel as a video-only source and, when selected,
would leave the audio levels unchanged. Only the levels enabled for a particular source
will be changed when the source is selected at the multi-bus panel. LEDs corresponding
to the enabled levels will be lit. All other level LEDs will be blank for that source.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 33

Chapter 3: Operation

Matrix Panels
Selecting a crosspoint when all levels are enabled (when each Level
button is lit) will change all levels for that source simultaneously (AFV
switching).

Figure 3-7. AFV Switching — Matrix Panel

To perform an AFV switch - Preset/Take configuration,

follow these steps:
1. Enable all Level buttons, or click Follow. (Each Level button
should be lit.)
2. Click the desired crosspoint(s).
3. Click Take. The crosspoint(s) will be switched on all levels.
To perform an AFV switch - No-Take configuration, follow
these steps:
1. Enable all Level buttons, or click Follow. (Each Level button
should be lit.)

34 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 2. Double-click the desired crosspoint. The crosspoint will be
switched on all levels.

Breakaway Switching
A source may be changed on selected levels without affecting the
sources already connected on other levels (breakaway switching).

Single- and Multi-Bus Panels

To perform a Breakaway switch for single- or multi-bus
panels, follow these steps:
1. Enable the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to
be switched independently. Only those buttons that have been
enabled should be lit.
2. Click the desired Source button. The source will be switched on the
selected breakaway level only. Sources connected on other levels
will not be affected.

Figure 3-8. Breakaway Switching — Single-Bus Panel

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 35

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-9. Breakaway Switching — Multi-Bus Panel

To return to AFV switching for single- or multi-bus panels,

click Follow. All Level buttons will now be lit. Sources connected with
all Level buttons lit will be switched on all levels simultaneously.

36 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Matrix Panels

Figure 3-10. Breakaway Switching — Matrix Panel

To perform a Breakaway switch - Preset/Take configuration,

follow these steps:
1. Enable the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to
be switched independently (only those buttons that have been
enabled should be lit).
2. Click the desired crosspoint(s).
3. Click Take. The source will be switched only on the selected
breakaway level(s). Sources connected on other levels will not be
affected.
To perform a Breakaway switch - No-Take configuration,
follow these steps:
1. Enable the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to
be switched independently (only those buttons that have been
enabled should be lit).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 37

Chapter 3: Operation

2. Double-click the desired crosspoint. The source will be switched

only on the selected breakaway level(s). Sources connected on
other levels will not be affected.
To return to AFV switching, click Follow. All Level buttons will
now be lit. Sources connected with all Level buttons lit will be switched
on all levels simultaneously.

Performing a Multiple Take (Matrix Panels Only)

The Multiple Take feature allows you to take several destinations on
selected levels to a single source.
To perform a multiple take, follow these steps:
1. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary,
use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click somewhere within the matrix grid under the source that
you want to take to your multiple destinations. A pop-up menu will
appear (see Figure 3-11)

38 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

Figure 3-11. Multiple Take Window

3. Click the Take <Source name> to Multiple Destinations

selection. The Take Multiple Destinations to <Source name>
drop-down list box will appear (see Figure 3-12).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 39

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-12. Take Multiple Destinations to <Source Name>

Drop-Down List Box

4. Select as many destinations as you like from the drop-down list

Note box.
If you have selected “Demo • To select a sequential range of destinations, click the first
Mode” for RouterMapper, any
selection in the range, then hold the <Shift> key while you
multiple Takes that you select
will be discarded when you click the last one in the range. All of the destination names in
close the .PAN file. See the range will be highlighted
“Selecting Serial, Remote, TCP/ • To select several non-sequential destinations, press and hold the
IP, or Demo Connection
Settings” in the RouterMapper
<Ctrl> key while clicking destination selections. All selected
Configuration Utility Reference destination names will be highlighted.
Guide for information on how 5. Click OK to perform the Take operation. (Click Cancel at any time
switch from Demo mode.
to close the dialog box without performing the Take. This will not
affect the existing state of the system.)

40 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Disconnecting and Replacing Sources (Matrix Panels only)

Disconnecting and Replacing Sources (Matrix

Panels only)
RouterWorks’ advanced features include Source Disconnect, Source
Replace, and Multiple Disconnect.

Source Disconnect
The Source Disconnect feature allows you to quickly disconnect all
Note destinations connected to a specified source.
You will not be able to use this
To process a Source Disconnect, follow these steps:
feature on destinations that are
locked or protected. 1. If necessary, edit the existing matrix panel via Panel Wizard to set
up the Options > Enable Source Disconnect capability.
• To learn how to edit a matrix panel, see “Editing an Existing
Panel via Panel Wizard” on page 98.
• To learn how to quickly create a panel, see “Setting Up a New
Panel via Panel Wizard” on page 88).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 41

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-13. Enabling Source Disconnects via Panel Wizard

2. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary,

use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
3. In the matrix grid control, select the Source by right-clicking the
crosspoint marker. A pop-up menu will appear (see Figure 3-14 on
page 43).

42 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Disconnecting and Replacing Sources (Matrix Panels only)

Figure 3-14. Disconnect Source Window

4. Highlight Disconnect Source In [Source XX], then press

<Enter>.
RouterWorks will search through all destinations and disconnect the
ones that are connected to the source you specified.

Multiple Disconnect
The Multiple Disconnect feature allows you to disconnect several
Note destinations connected to a single source.
You will not be able to use this
To process a multiple disconnect, follow these steps:
feature on destinations that are
locked or protected. 1. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary,
use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click somewhere within the matrix grid. A pop-up menu will
appear (see Figure 3-11 on page 39).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 43

Chapter 3: Operation

3. Click the Take <Source name> to Multiple Destinations

selection. The Take Multiple Destinations to <Source name>
drop-down list box will appear (see Figure 3-12 on page 40).
4. In the Sources list box, select <Disconnect>. The list box name will
change (see Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15. Take Multiple Destinations to <Disconnect>

Drop-Down List Box

5. Select as many destinations as you like from the drop-down list

box.
• To select a sequential range of destinations, click the first
selection in the range, then hold the <Shift> key while you
click the last one in the range. All of the destination names in
the range will be highlighted.
• To select several non-sequential destinations, press and hold the
<Ctrl> key while clicking destination selections. All selected
destination names will be highlighted.
6. Click OK to perform the Disconnect operation. (Click Cancel at
any time to close the dialog box without performing the
Disconnect. This will not affect the existing state of the system.)

Source Replace
The Source Replace feature allows you to move all destinations from
Note one specified source to another specified source.
You will not be able to use this
To process a Source Replace, follow these steps:
feature on destinations that are
locked or protected. 1. If necessary, edit the existing matrix panel via Panel Wizard to set
up the Options > Enable Source Disconnect capability.

44 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Disconnecting and Replacing Sources (Matrix Panels only)

• For instructions on how to edit a matrix panel, see “Editing an

Existing Panel via Panel Wizard” on page 98.
• For instructions on how to quickly create a panel, see “Setting
Up a New Panel via Panel Wizard” on page 88.
2. Double-click the panel name to start up RouterWorks. (If necessary,
use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
3. In the matrix grid control, select the Source by right-clicking the
crosspoint marker. A pop-up menu will appear (see Figure 3-16 on
page 45).

Figure 3-16. Move Destinations Window

4. Highlight Move Destinations on Source In [Source XX], then

press <Enter>.
RouterWorks will search through all destinations in the selected source
and move them to the new source you specified.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 45

Chapter 3: Operation

Undoing a Take
The Undo Last Take feature allows you to reverse up to eight
Note consecutive Take commands issued from the control panel.
The Undo Last Take feature will
To undo a Take command, follow these steps:
not undo Take operations issued
from other control panels. The 1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
Undo Last Take feature only title bar).
remembers the status for the
selected destination at the time 2. Scroll down to Undo Last Take (or press <Ctrl> Z).
of the most recent Take for that
destination at the user’s panel. If
a different control panel has
changed that same status to
another source, the Undo Last
Take feature will restore the
destination to the source that
was active at the time that the
last Take was issued from the
user’s RouterWorks panel.

Figure 3-17. System Menu Icon with Undo Last Take Feature
Highlighted

3. The last Take command you performed will be removed.

To undo several Take commands, follow these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar).
2. Scroll down to Undo Last Take (or press <Ctrl> Z).
3. Repeat step 2 until you have undone as many Take commands as
you wish. (Remember that this feature allows you to reverse up to
eight Take commands.)
4. The last set of Take commands you performed will be removed.

46 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Locking and Protecting Destinations

Locking a Destination
The Lock feature allows a Destination to be locked to prevent
Note inadvertent changes to the Destination. Locking a destination prevents
The Source Disconnect, anyone from changing the Destination.
Multiple Disconnect, Source
You can lock either a single Destination at a time, or lock multiple
Replace, and Undo Last Take
features do not operate on Lock/ Destinations at the same time.
Unlock operations. Attempting to unlock a locked Destination will cause the following
pop-up to appear. This pop-up message identifies the panel ID where
the destination was locked. Panels with the same IDs can unlock each
others’ panels.

Figure 3-18. Lock Error Dialog Box

The pop-up will also include override buttons, if the panel is configured
to allow users to override a lock (see “Allowing Overrides” on page
66).
To lock a single destination for single-bus panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the Destination from the drop-down list box by clicking the
arrow located to the right of the box.
2. Connect the desired source to the Destination by clicking the
appropriate source button.
3. Click Lock. The Destination will be locked to all users.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 47

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-19. Locking a Destination — Single-Bus Panel

To lock multiple destinations for single-bus panels, follow

these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon located to the direct left of the title bar.
A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-20. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Drop-Down

Menu — Single-Bus Panel

2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, then press <Enter>. The Lock/

Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

48 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Figure 3-21. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

3. Select which Destinations you want to lock.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will be locked to all users.
To lock a single destination for multi-bus panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the Destination by clicking on it.
2. Connect the desired source to the Destination by clicking on the
appropriate source button.
3. Click the Lock (L) button located inside the Destination button.
This Destination will be locked to all users.

Figure 3-22. Locking a Destination —Multi-Bus Panels

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 49

Chapter 3: Operation

To lock multiple destinations for multi-bus panels, follow

these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar). A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-23. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Drop-Down

Menu — Multi-Bus Panel

2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, then press <Enter>. The Lock/

Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-24. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

50 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

3. Select which Destinations you want to lock.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will be locked to all users.
To lock a single destination for matrix panels, follow these
steps:
1. Select the Destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A
pop-up menu will appear.
2. Click on Lock. The Destination will be locked to all users.
If a Destination on the matrix panel is locked, an icon will be
displayed at the crosspoint. Click the icon to produce a pop-up
menu that will allow the lock to be disabled. Right-click the
crosspoint to produce the pop-up menu.

Figure 3-25. Locking a Destination — Matrix Panels

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 51

Chapter 3: Operation

To lock multiple destinations for matrix panels, follow these

steps:
1. Select the Destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A
pop-up menu will appear.

Figure 3-26. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Pop-up Menu —

Matrix Panels

2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, then press <Enter>. The Lock/

Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

52 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Figure 3-27. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

3. Select which Destinations you want to lock.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will be locked to all users.

Unlocking a Destination
To unlock a single destination for single-bus panels, follow
Note these steps:
The Source Disconnect, 1. Select the Destination from the drop-down list box by clicking the
Multiple Disconnect, Source
arrow located to the right of the box.
Replace, and Undo Last Take
features do not operate on Lock/ 2. Connect the desired Source to the Destination by clicking the
Unlock operations. appropriate source button.
3. Click Lock. The Destination will be unlocked to all users.
To unlock multiple destinations for single-bus panels, follow
these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar). A drop-down menu will appear.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 53

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-28. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Drop-down

Menu — Single-Bus Panel

2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, then press <Enter>. The Lock/

Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-29. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

3. Check the box marked Unlock Selected Items.

4. Select which Destinations you want to unlock.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
5. Click OK. The Destinations will be unlocked for all users.
To unlock a single destination for multi-bus panels, click the
Lock (L) button located inside the Destination button. This Destination
will then be available to all users.

54 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

To unlock multiple destinations for multi-bus panels, follow

these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar). A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-30. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Drop-Down

Menu — Multi-Bus Panel

2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, then press <Enter>. The Lock/

Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-31. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

3. Check the box marked Unlock Selected Items.

4. Select which Destinations you want to unlock.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 55

Chapter 3: Operation

5. Click OK. The Destinations will be unlocked for all users.

To unlock a single destination for matrix panels, follow
these steps:
1. Click the Lock icon located to the right of the locked Destination.
A pop-up menu will appear.
2. Remove the check mark next to Lock. The Destinations will be
unlocked for all users.
To unlock multiple destinations for matrix panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the Destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A
pop-up menu will appear.
2. Highlight Lock/Unlock Multiple, then press <Enter>. The Lock/
Unlock Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-32. Lock/Unlock Multiple Destinations Dialog Box

3. Select which Destinations you want to unlock.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
4. Click OK. The Destinations will then be available for all users.

56 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Protecting a Destination
The Protect feature also prevents inadvertent changes to the
Note Destination, but differs from a Lock in one respect. With the Protect
The Source Disconnect, feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be able to change
Multiple Disconnect, Source the destination at will, but other users will be prevented from changing
Replace, and Undo Last Take that destination until the Protect is removed.
features do not operate on
Protect/Unprotect operations. To protect a single destination for single-bus panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the destination from the drop-down list box.
2. Connect the desired source to the destination by clicking the
appropriate source button.
3. Click Protect. The destination will be unavailable to everyone
except the person who originally enabled the Protect.

Figure 3-33. Protecting a Destination — Single-Bus Panels

To protect multiple destinations for single-bus panels,

follow these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar). A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-34. Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations

Drop-Down Menu — Single-Bus Panels

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 57

Chapter 3: Operation

2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, then press <Enter>. The

Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-35. Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations Dialog

Box

3. Select which Destinations you want to protect.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
4. Click OK. The destinations will be unavailable to everyone except
the person who originally enabled the Protect.
To protect a single destination for multi-bus panels, follow
these steps:
1. Click the desired destination.
2. Click the appropriate source button to connect the desired source to
the destination.
3. Click the Protect (P) button located inside the Destination button.
This destination will be unavailable to everyone except the person
who originally enabled the Protect.

58 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Figure 3-36. Protecting a Destination — Multi-Bus Panels

To protect multiple destinations for multi-bus panels, follow

these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar). A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-37. Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations

Drop-Down Menu — Multi-Bus Panels

2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, then press <Enter>. The

Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations dialog box will appear.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 59

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-38. Protect/Unprotect Destinations Dialog Box

3. Select which destinations you want to protect.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
4. Click OK. The destinations will be unavailable to everyone except
the person who originally enabled the Protect.
To protect a single destination for matrix panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker.
2. Click on Protect. The destination will be unavailable to everyone
except the person who originally enabled the Protect.

60 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Figure 3-39. Protecting a Destination — Matrix Panels

If a destination on the matrix panel is protected, an icon will be

displayed at the crosspoint. Click the icon to produce a pop-up
menu that will allow the lock or protect to be disabled. You can also
right-click the crosspoint to produce the pop-up menu.
To protect multiple destinations for matrix panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A
pop-up menu will appear.
2. Click on Protect/Unprotect Multiple. The Protect/Unprotect
Destinations dialog box will appear.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 61

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-40. Protect/Unprotect Destinations Dialog Box

3. Select which Destinations you want to Protect.

You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
4. Click OK. The destinations will be unavailable to everyone except
the person who originally enabled the Protect.

Unprotecting a Destination
To unprotect a single destination for single-bus panels,
Note follow these steps:
The Source Disconnect, 1. Select the destination from the drop-down list box.
Multiple Disconnect, Source
Replace, and Undo Last Take 2. Connect the desired source to the destination by clicking the
features do not operate on appropriate source button.
Protect/Unprotect operations.
3. Click Protect. The destination will be available to everyone.

Figure 3-41. Unprotecting a Destination — Single-Bus

Panels

62 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

To unprotect multiple destinations for single-bus panels,

follow these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar). A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-42. Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations

Drop-Down Menu

2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, then press <Enter>. The

Protect/Unprotect Destinations dialog box will appear.

Figure 3-43. Protect/Unprotect Destinations Dialog Box

3. Check the box marked Unprotect Selected Items.

4. Select which Destinations you want to unprotect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 63

Chapter 3: Operation

5. Click OK. The destinations will be available to everyone.

To unprotect a single destination for multi-bus panels, click
the Protect (P) button located inside the Destination button. This
destination will become available to everyone.

Figure 3-44. Unprotecting a Destination —

Multi-Bus Panels

To unprotect multiple destinations for multi-bus panels,

follow these steps:
1. Click the system menu icon (the icon located to the direct left of the
title bar). A drop-down menu will appear.

Figure 3-45. Protect/Unprotect Multiple Destinations

Drop-Down Menu

2. Highlight Protect/Unprotect Multiple, then press <Enter>. The

Protect/Unprotect Destinations dialog box will appear.

64 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Figure 3-46. Protect/Unprotect Destinations Dialog Box

3. Check the box marked Unprotect Selected Items.

4. Select which destinations you want to unprotect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
5. Click OK. The destinations will become available to everyone.
To unprotect a single destination for matrix panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker.
2. Click on Protect. The destination will become available to
everyone.
To unprotect multiple destinations for matrix panels, follow
these steps:
1. Select the destination by right-clicking the crosspoint marker. A
pop-up menu will appear.
2. Click on Protect/Unprotect Multiple. The Protect/Unprotect
Destinations dialog box will appear.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 65

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-47. Protect/Unprotect Destinations Dialog Box

3. Check the box marked Unprotect Selected Items.

4. Select which Destinations you want to unprotect.
You may select multiple items from the list using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl>
keys while selecting the items).
5. Click OK. The destinations will be available to everyone.

Allowing Overrides
The procedure for allowing overrides is the same for single bus,
multi-bus, and matrix panels.
Setting the Allowing Overrides Feature via Panel Wizard
1. Highlight the file name of the matrix panel you want to edit. (If
necessary, use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click the matrix file name. A drop-down menu will appear.

66 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Undoing a Take

Figure 3-48. Edit Drop-Down Menu

3. Highlight Edit with Panel Wizard, then press <Enter>. The Panel
Wizard Introduction window will appear.
4. Click Next until the Options window appears.
5. Click Advanced. The Advanced Options, Common Settings tab will
appear.
6. Choose the Options tab.
7. Check the Allow Lock Override option.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 67

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-49. Selecting the Allow Lock Override Option

8. Click Next. The Finish window will appear.

9. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
Allowing Overrides via Editing the .PAN File
1. Open the proper panel initialization file (.PAN) in any text editor.
2. Set the AllowLockOverRide= line to 1. (This is the default
setting.) Attempting to unlock a destination will produce a Lock
Error pop-up dialog box.
• Click on Ignore Lock to temporarily override the lock (the
pending operation will be performed, but the destination will
remain locked).
• Click on UnLock to permanently remove the lock.

68 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Alarms (Matrix Panels Only)

Alarms (Matrix Panels Only)

The matrix panel includes an alarm LED for each level that will light
when an alarm condition is detected by the router.

Figure 3-50. Alarms LED

If an alarm LED is lit, click the LED or Details and a dialog box
containing information about the detected alarm condition will appear.

Figure 3-51. Alarms Dialog Box

Click Refresh at the Alarms dialog box to update any and all Alarm
messages.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 69

Chapter 3: Operation

Executing and Editing Salvos

The Salvo feature allows point and click execution or editing of any
Note salvo stored in the database. (A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint
The Undo Last Take feature operations that, when executed, occur simultaneously.) Salvos can be
does not operate on salvo used to store commonly used, complex router setups involving multiple
operations. destinations for instant recall. (For example, a salvo could be created
that would send a test signal to every monitor in an Edit Suite.)
Executing a salvo changes only the crosspoints defined by the salvo.
Other crosspoint connections in the system will not be affected.
• For single- and multi-bus panels: To add, edit or execute a
salvo, click Salvo located at the main window. The Salvo Select
dialog will appear.

Figure 3-52. Salvo Select Dialog Box — Single-Bus Panels

Figure 3-53. Salvo Select Dialog Box — Multi-Bus Panels

The Salvo Select dialog includes a drop-down list box and three
function buttons: Execute, Edit, and Add. Available salvos are
listed in the drop-down list box and can be selected by clicking the
arrow to the right of the box.
• Click Execute to automatically launch the selected salvo.

70 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

• Click Edit or Add to open the Salvo Editor, which will allow
the currently selected salvo to be edited or a new salvo to be
added to the database.
• For matrix panels: To add, edit or execute a salvo, click the
appropriate button located in the Salvo group at the matrix panel
main window. The buttons available in the Salvo group will depend
on the panel configuration (Preset/Take or No-Take) selected.

Preset/Take Configuration
The Salvo group includes a drop-down list box and three function
buttons: Preset, Edit, and Add. Available salvos are listed in the
drop-down list box. Click the arrow to the right of the box to select an
available salvo.
• Click Preset to preset the selected salvo and enable the Take button
for salvo execution.
• Click Edit or Add to open the Salvo Editor and to allow the
currently selected salvo to be edited; or a new salvo to be added to
the database.

Figure 3-54. Preset / Take Configuration Dialog Box —

Matrix Panels

No-Take Configuration
The Salvo group includes a drop-down list box and three function
buttons: Execute, Edit, and Add. Available salvos are listed in the
drop-down list box. Click the arrow to the right of the box to select an
available salvo.
• Click Execute to immediately launch the selected salvo.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 71

Chapter 3: Operation

• Click Edit or Add to open the Salvo Editor, and to allow the
currently selected salvo to be edited or a new salvo to be added to
the database.

Adding a Salvo
• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog
box.
2. Click Add. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor window
will appear.
The Salvo Editor window (see Figure 3-55 on page 73) is an
off-line RouterWorks matrix panel. Crosspoint selections made at
the Salvo Editor window will not affect the status of the router until
the salvo is actually executed.
3. Define the salvo.
A salvo may be defined in one of several ways.
• The Capture option takes a “snapshot” view of the current
state of the router and stores it as a salvo. This salvo can then be
edited (crosspoints added or deleted) as needed.
• A salvo may be created by copying an existing salvo. The
copied salvo may serve as a starting point for the definition of
the new salvo. Crosspoints can be added or deleted as
necessary.
• A salvo may be created “from scratch” by connecting the
appropriate sources and destinations on the off-line Salvo
Editor panel. For specific procedures for making crosspoint
selections on the panel, refer to “Connecting a Source” on page
31 and “Selecting a Destination” on page 29.

72 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

Figure 3-55. Salvo Editor Window

Capturing the Existing State of the Router

• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
Note • For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
You must have these advanced
options selected for this feature 1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select panel.
to work: Allow Editing Salvos, 2. Click Add. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor
Allow Firing Salvos, Show window will appear.
Active Salvos, and Show All
Salvos. See page 102 for an 3. Assign an appropriate name to the new salvo. (Highlight the default
explanation of these options. name contained in the Name Edit box and type a new name in the
box.)
4. Click Capture at the Salvo Editor main window. The following
message will appear:

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 73

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-56. Capturing a Salvo Error Message

5. Click Yes.
6. Add or delete crosspoint assignments as necessary to edit the salvo
displayed on the off-line panel.
7. Click on Done to exit the Salvo Editor and return to where you
were before you created the salvo.

Adding a Crosspoint to a Salvo

• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select panel.
2. From the drop-down list, select the name of the salvo to which you
want to add a crosspoint.
3. Click Edit. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor window
will appear.
4. Click at the intersection of the source and destination lines. (Refer
to “Connecting a Source” on page 31 and “Selecting a Destination”
on page 29 for more information.) The crosspoint will be added to
the salvo.

Deleting a Crosspoint from a Salvo

The procedure for deleting a crosspoint from a salvo is the same for
single-bus, multi-bus, and matrix panels.
1. Position the cursor over the crosspoint to be deleted and click the
right mouse button.
2. The Lock / Protect / Clear pop-up menu will appear.
3. Select Clear. The crosspoint will be deleted.
4. If you click Clear All at the Salvo Editor window, all existing
crosspoints will be deleted from the salvo.

74 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

Copying an Existing Salvo

• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog
box.
2. From the drop-down list, select the name of the salvo from which
you want to copy.
3. Click Edit. The panel will go off-line, and the Salvo Editor window
will appear.
4. Click Copy at the Salvo Editor window. The Copy Salvo dialog box
will appear.
5. In the Copy From Salvo box (the left side of the dialog), select the
salvo that will be copied to the new salvo. The new salvo name will
already be displayed in the Copy Salvo To box.
6. Click Overwrite to completely overwrite any crosspoints
previously selected in the new salvo. Any previously existing
crosspoints will be deleted from the new salvo.
OR
Click Merge to merge the two salvos. Existing crosspoints from
both salvos will be stored in the new salvo. No crosspoints will be
deleted.

Figure 3-57. Copy Salvo Dialog Box

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 75

Chapter 3: Operation

Executing a Salvo
Single- and Multi-Bus Panels
1. Click Salvo at the Single-Bus main window to open the Salvo
Select dialog box.
2. Select the salvo from the drop-down list box by clicking on the
arrow located at the right of the box.
3. Click Execute. The selected salvo will be launched immediately.

Matrix Panels: Preset/Take Configuration

1. Select the salvo from the drop-down list box by clicking on the
arrow located at the right of the box.
2. Click Preset. The Take button will be highlighted indicating that
the salvo is preset.
3. Click Take. The selected salvo will be executed immediately.

Matrix Panels: No-Take Configuration

1. Select the salvo from the drop-down list box by clicking on the
arrow located at the right of the box.
2. Click Execute. The selected salvo will be executed immediately.

Editing a Salvo
• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog
box.
2. Select the salvo from the drop-down list.
3. Click Edit. The Salvo Editor window will appear. Redefine the
salvo, as outlined in “Adding a Salvo” on page 72.

Deleting a Salvo
• For single- and multi-bus panels only, start at step 1 below.
• For matrix panels, start at step 2 below.
1. Click Salvo at the main window to open the Salvo Select dialog
box.

76 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

2. Select the salvo from the drop-down list.

3. Click Edit. The Salvo Editor window will appear.
4. Click Delete. The selected salvo will be deleted from the router
database.

Active Salvos Control

The Active Salvos Control feature is available in single-bus, multi-bus,
and matrix panel modes. This control shows the salvos that have totally
intact crosspoints.

Figure 3-58. Active Salvos Control Window

The Active Salvos Control displays the names of all salvos that are
completely engaged.
• If a salvo has all levels of every crosspoint engaged, then the name
will appear in the Active Salvos list box.
• If even one level of one crosspoint is not engaged the name will not
appear in the window.
• If identical salvos with different names exist then both names will
appear in the control’s list box simultaneously.
Activate salvos by selecting a salvo in the Salvo Control box and
pressing the Take button in the preset box (if preset is used), or by
manually setting the salvo one crosspoint at a time. The salvo name will

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 77

Chapter 3: Operation

appear in the Active Salvos list box once the salvo is fully engaged.
Salvo names will also appear in the Active Salvos list box if other
instances of the application have engaged a salvo.

Bidirectional Take
The bidirectional Take feature allows a convenient method of
establishing two-way communications pathways using a standard
source-to destination router.
Before you can use this feature, you must
Note • Create logical Sources that correspond to router inputs are
See the RouterMapper connected to a speaking channel
Configuration Utility Reference
Guide for information on how to • Create logical Destination assignments to indicate that the router
set up logical Sources and outputs are connected to a listening channel
Destinations.
• Add bidirectional routing entry information in the .PAN file for the
appropriate router (see “Activating Bidirectional Take” on page
118)

Configuring the Router

To use the bidirectional Take feature, you must configure the router in
such a way that
• Its inputs are connected to the outgoing pathways used for talking
from the speakers (e.g., microphones).
• Its outputs are connected to the speaker’s incoming (listening)
communication pathway (e.g., headphones or other listening
apparatus).
1. Via RouterMapper, create logical Sources that correspond to the
router’s inputs. (Refer to the RouterMapper Configuration Utility
Reference Guide for instructions about how create Sources and
Destinations). Assign the names for the logical Sources to represent
the speakers’ outgoing communication channels.
In the example below, the Source naming convention identifies the
speaker and that the source corresponds to his talking channel. For
example: “S 1 TLK” identifies speaker 1’s talk channel (router
input assigned to Level 0 input 1).

78 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

Figure 3-59. Setting Up Sources for Bidirectional Take

2. Create similar logical Destination assignments to indicate that the

router outputs are connected to the speaker’s listening channel (for
example, “S 1 LIS” for speaker 1 listening channel assigned to
router level 0 input 1).

Figure 3-60. Setting Up Destinations for Bidirectional Take

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 79

Chapter 3: Operation

Editing the .PAN File

To enable the bidirectional Take feature, add the following entry to the
Note appropriate .PAN file (e.g., “Matrix.PAN”). The entry listed below is
Use Microsoft® NotePad or any not an exact duplicate of what you must enter. Entry information should
similar text editor to make reflect your system’s setup. See “Activating Bidirectional Take” on
changes to the .PAN file. page 118 for a more detailed explanation of the information in these
entries.
[BidirectionalRouting]
Enabled=1
NumberOfPorts=(value)
Port0=(value)
Port1=(value)
Port2=(value)
•
•
•
Port999=(value)

80 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

Using the Bidirectional Take Feature

1. Open a RouterWorks matrix panel (with the appropriate .PAN file
entries added to enable the feature) connected to the properly
configured routing system.
2. Press the “B” key on the PC keyboard to display the bidirectional
Take dialog. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 3-61 will
appear.

Figure 3-61. Matrix Panel with Bidirectional Take Dialog Box

3. Select the two speakers (ports) that wish to have the conversation in
the “Port A” and “Port B” selection list boxes. (In this example,
conversation is being established between Speakers 1 and 2.)

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 81

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-62. Bidirectional Take Request

4. Click OK to complete the Take operation.

5. After the Take is completed, the matrix panel will display status
showing that the talk channel for speaker 1 is connected to the
Listen channel of speaker 2, and vice-versa.

82 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

Figure 3-63. Matrix Panel Showing Status for Conversation

Between Speakers 1 and 2

6. To add additional listeners to either port, simply highlight their

entries in the list boxes displayed below the selected speaker in the
Request Bidirectional Take dialog box.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 83

Chapter 3: Operation

Figure 3-64. Setting up a Conversation between Speakers 1

and 2 with Additional Listeners Selected

84 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Executing and Editing Salvos

In the example below, a conversation will be established between

speakers 1 and 2.
• Speakers 3, 4, and 5 will be “listening” to speaker 1.
• Speakers 6, 7, and 8 will be “listening” to speaker 2.
The matrix panel display will show status indicating that a conversation
is established between speakers 1 and 2 (note reciprocal status
indicated). Speakers 3, 4, and 5 show status indicating that they are
“listening” to Speaker 1;and 6, 7, and 8 are “listening’ to Speaker 2.

Figure 3-65. Matrix Panel Display Showing Status after

Establishing Conversation Between Speakers 1 and 2

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 85

Chapter 3: Operation

86 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Chapter 4
Customizing Panels

You may create and customize your panels via two different methods:
• Using Panel Wizard
• Editing the panel initialization (.PAN) file.
Panel Wizard is an easy-to-use, versatile tool that allows you to create
and edit panel configurations quickly and easily. (More advanced users
may want to more closely control the configuration setup by editing the
.PAN file directly.)

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 87

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Using the Panel Wizard

The Panel Wizard enables you to create RouterWorks panels quickly. It
will take you step-by-step by asking you questions about what type of
panel you would like to create, then creating it for you.
You may create a new panel via the Panel Wizard, or you may edit an
existing panel via the Panel Wizard.

Setting Up a New Panel via Panel Wizard

1. At the Leitch Routing Switchers Group window, click the Panel
Wizard icon to start the Panel Wizard. The Introduction window
will appear.

Figure 4-1. Panel Wizard Introduction Window

88 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

2. Click Next to start creating your panel. The Step 1-Panel Location
window will appear. At this window you will create a unique name
for your panel, and save it to a location you specify.

Figure 4-2. Step 1 – Panel Location Window

3. Enter the location of the panel document (*.PAN) you wish to

Note create:
If you select an existing panel • Click Browse…
document, the settings from that
panel will be imported into the • Select the directory where you want to create the panel.
wizard for you to edit; however, 4. Enter a panel name.
if you save this panel you will
overwrite the original settings 5. Click Save. You will return to the Step 1 window.
with the new ones you specify.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 89

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

6. Click Next. The Step 2 – Database Location window will appear.

At this window you will link the newly-created panel to an existing
RouterMapper database.

Figure 4-3. Step 2 – Database Location Window

7. Select an existing RouterMapper database (*.da4) that stores the

information about your router system:
• Click Browse…
• Select the directory where the RouterMapper database is located.
• Select the name of the database to which you want to link the panel.
• Click Open. You will return to the Step 2 window.

90 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

8. Click Next. The Step 3 – Panel Style window will appear. At this
window you will designate if the panel will be single-bus,
multi-bus, or matrix.

Figure 4-4. Step 3 – Panel Style Window

9. Click on the drop-down arrow for this list box to display the list of
panel styles available.
10. Select the type of panel you want for this panel:
• Single-bus panels control one destination at a time.
• Multi-bus panels control several destinations at a time.
• Matrix panels show all the desired sources and destinations in a
grid-like display.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 91

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

11. Click Next. The Step 3a – Panel Address and Name window will
appear. At this window you will designate a unique identification
(ID) number and panel name for the panel.

Figure 4-5. Step 3a – Panel Address and Name Window

12. Give the panel a unique address between 0 and 127. This panel
address will be the ID the routers will “see” when you lock or
protect a destination.
13. Give the panel a unique name. This name will be the text that will
appear in the RouterWorks title bar whenever you use this panel.

92 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

14. Click Next. The Step 4 – Active Levels window will appear.

Figure 4-6. Step 4 – Active Levels Window

15. Select the levels you want to enable in this panel. You must activate
at least one level.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 93

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

16. Click Next. The Step 5 - Sources window will appear.

Figure 4-7. Step 5 - Sources Window

17. Select the sources you want to control in this panel and how many
of them to display on the panel at a time. (See your RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for a detailed explanation of
Sources.) You must select at least one source.

94 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

18. Click Next. The Step 6 - Destinations window will appear.

Figure 4-8. Step 6 - Destinations Window

19. Select the destinations you want to control in this panel and how
many destinations to display on the panel at a time. (See your
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide for a detailed
explanation of Destinations.) You must select at least one
destination.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 95

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

20. Click Next. The Options window will appear.

Figure 4-9. Options Window

At the Options window, you can

• Create a shortcut to your new panel on the Windows desktop or
Start menu
• Run this panel when it is finished
• Edit advanced optional features. (See “Advanced Options” on page
100 for more detailed information about these options.)

96 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

21. Click Next. The Finish window will appear.

Figure 4-10. Finish Window

22. Click Finish to complete the creation of your new panel.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 97

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Editing an Existing Panel via Panel Wizard

1. Highlight the file name of the matrix panel you want to edit. (If
necessary, use Windows Explorer to navigate to the file location.)
2. Right-click on the matrix file name. A drop-down menu will
appear.
3. Highlight Edit with Panel Wizard, then press <Enter>. The Panel
Wizard Introduction window will appear.

Figure 4-11. Edit Drop-Down Menu

To change database linked to the panel, follow these steps:

1. Click Next until the Step 2 – Database Location window appears.
2. Select an existing RouterMapper database (*.da4) that stores the
information about your router system. To do this:
• Click Browse…
• Select the directory where the RouterMapper database is located.
• Select the name of the database to which you want to link the panel.
• Click Open. You will return to the Step 2 window.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.

98 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

To change the Panel address, follow these steps:

1. Click Next until you reach the Step 3a – Panel Address and Name
window.
2. Give the panel a unique address between 0 and 127. This panel
address will be the ID the routers will “see” when you Lock or
Protect a destination.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Panel name, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until you reach the Step 3a – Panel Address and Name
window.
2. Give the panel a unique name. This name will be the text that will
appear in the RouterWorks title bar whenever you use this panel.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Levels displayed, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until you reach the Step 4 – Active Levels window.
2. Select the levels you want to enable in this panel. You must activate
at least one level.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Sources or make more Sources visible, follow
these steps:
1. Click Next until the Step 5 - Sources window appears.
2. Select the sources you want to control in this panel and how many
of them to display on the panel at a time. (See your RouterMapper
Configuration Utility Reference Guide for a detailed explanation of
Sources.) You must select at least one source.
3. Click Next until you reach the Finish window.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change the Destinations or make more Destinations
visible, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until the Step 6 - Destinations window appears.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 99

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

2. Select the destinations you want to control in this panel and how
many destinations to display on the panel at a time. You must select
at least one destination.
3. Click Next until the Finish window appears.
4. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.
To change or add Options, follow these steps:
1. Click Next until the Options window appears. At the Options
window you can
• Create shortcuts to your new panel on the Windows desktop or Start
menu.
• Run this panel when it is finished.
• Edit advanced optional features. (See “Advanced Options” on page
100 for more detailed information.)
2. Click Next. The Finish window will appear.
3. Click Finish to complete the edit of your panel.

Advanced Options
There are several separate options tabs available through the Advanced
Options screen:
• Common settings
• Options
• Signal presence settings (Panacea™ frames only)
• Matrix settings (matrix panels only)
• Category/index settings (multi-bus panels only)

100 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

Common Settings
The Common Settings tab in Panel Wizard enables you to set the height
Note and width (in pixels) of some of the common control panel attributes.
These settings are explained in
detail in “Setting Control Panel
Size Attributes” on page 111.
They are shown in Figure 4-17
on page 111 and Figure 4-18 on
page 112.

Figure 4-12. Advanced Options Window, Common Settings Tab

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 101

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Options
The Options tab in Panel Wizard allows you to enable extra features to
make it easier to use RouterWorks panels.

Figure 4-13. Advanced Options Window, Options Tab (Shown

With Matrix Panel)

Allow Editing Salvos

Check this box to enable the Salvo Edit button (see Figure 4-13). For
more information on how to edit salvos, see page 76.
Allow Firing Salvos
Check this box to allow users to run preprogrammed salvo sequences.
Allow Lock Override
Check this box to allow users to override locks. For more information
on overriding a lock, see page 66.
Allow Resizing
Check this box to allow users to change the size of dialog windows.
Auto AFV
Check this box to automatically allow audio follow video (AFV)
switching. For more information on AFV, see page 32.

102 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

Demonstration Mode
Check this box to allow users to test RouterWorks panels without
having to be attached to a router. (Users can access this option by
clicking on the right-side mouse button.)
Enable Extra Menu Items
Note Check this box to access diagnostics functions that you may find useful
The Enable Extra Menu Items for specialized testing and troubleshooting. (You can access this option
feature is not supported by
by clicking on the right-side mouse button.)
Leitch Customer Service.
Enable Source Disconnects
Check this box to allow users to enable a menu item that allows them to
disconnect all destinations currently statusing a selected source. (You
can access this option by clicking on the right-side mouse button.)
Remember Last Destination
Check this box to allow users to return to the destination they used
during their last RouterWorks session. (Users can access this option by
clicking on the right-side mouse button.)
Save Window on Exit
Check this box to allow RouterWorks to automatically save any
changes that you have made to a panel when you close the application.
Show Alarms
Check this box to enable alarm LEDs for each level to light when an
alarm condition is detected by the router (see Figure 4-13 on page 102).
For more information on alarms, see page 69.
Show All Salvos
Check this box to enable the Salvos drop-down list (see Figure 4-13 on
page 102).
Show EDH
(This option is reserved for future use.)
Show Status
(This option is reserved for future use. )
Use Lock/Protect Bitmap
Check this box to allow Lock and Protect icons to appear on a panel’s
Lock and Protect buttons.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 103

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Use Take
Check this box to enable the Take button on a panel screen (see
Figure 4-13 on page 102). For more information on using the Take
feature, see page 71.

Signal Presence Settings

The Signal Presence Settings tab in Panel Wizard enables you to display
the input signal presence feature found on the Leitch Panacea series of
routing switchers. Check the Display Source Signal Presence Indicators
box to include the signal presence indicators on a particular panel.

Figure 4-14. Advanced Options Window, Signal Presence

Settings Tab

104 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

Matrix Settings
The Matrix Settings tab in Panel Wizard lets you adjust some settings
specific to the matrix panel.

Figure 4-15. Advanced Options Window, Matrix Settings Tab

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 105

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Circle Ratio
Maximum Circle Size
Minimum Circle Size
These options control the size (in pixels) of colored crosspoint markers
on a matrix panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 105).
• Enter a value for the Circle Ratio option to set the size of the
colored crosspoint marker.
• You may override the Circle Ratio option by entering values for the
Maximum Circle Size and Minimum Circle Size options.
Control Button Height
Control Button Width
Control Section Width
These options control the size (in pixels) of the Levels and Alarms
control buttons on the matrix panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 105).
• Enter a value for the Control Button Height to set how high you
want the control buttons to be.
• Enter a value for the Control Button Width to set how wide you
want the control buttons to be.
• Enter a value for the Control Section Width for how wide you want
the Levels and/or Alarms control button sections to be.
Preset Group Height
This option controls the height (in pixels) of the Preset/Take section on
a matrix panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 105). Enter a value for how tall
you want the Preset/Take section to be.
Zoom Group Height
This option controls the height (in pixels) of the Zoom Tool section on a
matrix panel (see Figure 4-15 on page 105). Enter a value for how tall
you want the Zoom Tool section to be.

106 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Using the Panel Wizard

Category/Index Settings
The Category/Index Settings tab in the Panel Wizard enables you to
Note configure the Category/Index control settings; that is, it controls the size
See “Understanding and and information displayed in the Category/Index control on the
Managing Category/Indexing” right-hand side of a multi-bus panel. This function allows you to easily
in the RouterMapper monitor and control several router destinations from one panel. (See
Configuration Utility Reference
Figure 1-6 on page 11 for a graphic representation of the multi-bus
Guide for a detailed explanation
of this topic. panel that displays the Category/Index settings.)

Figure 4-16. Advanced Options Window, Category/index

Settings Tab

• Destination List, Source List, Level List: An inclusive range of

logical indices (e.g., 1-10).
• Destination List shows the list of indices for destination
categories
• Source List shows the list of indices for source categories
• Level List shows the list of indices for levels that are affected by
the choices made in the Destination List and Source List.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 107

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

There are three ways to designate what to put in the three lists: use a
dot character (“.”), use a wild card character (“*”), or enter exact
numbers to specify the Destination, Source, and Levels lists.
Use a dot character (“.”)
This option is the default option that appears when you first access
this window. Use this option whenever you want to use the settings
assigned to a selected multibus panel.
Use a wild card character (“*”)
Use this option whenever you want to use all of the values defined
in the router logical database.
Enter exact numbers to specify a Destination, Source, and Levels
lists
Use this option when you want to specify exact destinations,
sources, or levels.
For example, to specify Sources 1, 3 through 10, 11 through 15, 17
and 20, the Source List entry would look like this:
1,3-10,11-15,17,20
• Control Width: Width (in pixels) of the category/index control.
• Preset Width: Width (in pixels) of the preset control.
• Align with Destination Control: Forces the alignment of the
bottom of the Category/Index panel with the bottom of the
Destination control of the multi-bus panel (by default, the panel
aligns with the bottom of source control). This might be desirable
when the category/index control only controls 1 or 2 levels and the
multibus controls several because it prevents the category/index
control from stretching too much vertically. This option’s default
value is zero (0).

108 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

The physical appearance of a panel may be customized by editing the
panel initialization file (the .PAN file). This file is similar to a Windows
.INI file, and may be edited using any standard text editor. The .PAN
file may also be used to design control panels that provide limited
access to sources and destinations.

Determining .PAN File Location

To determine the location of the .PAN file, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on the Windows taskbar.
2. Select Properties.
3. From the Start Menu Programs tab, click Advanced.
4. In the Programs folder, find the Leitch Routing Switchers folder.
5. Find the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel shortcut
(as appropriate) in that folder.
6. Right-click on the shortcut.
7. Select Properties.
8. On the Shortcut tab, the command line will appear in the Target
box. The second half of this command line is the path to the proper
.PAN file.

Designating the Router Database

The .PAN file may be used to designate the database that will be loaded
when the single-bus panel, multi-bus panel, or matrix panel is launched.
To designate a specific database, edit the [Database Path] section of
the .PAN file as follows:
•On the Path= line, enter the drive and path of the desired RouterWorks
database file.
• On the FileName= line, enter the file name of the database that will
be loaded upon startup.

Setting the Locks and Protects Preferences

The following locks and protects preferences may be changed by
editing the [Locks&Protects] section of the .PAN file:

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 109

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

• To enable the panel to display a graphical icon for locks and

protects, set the UseBitmap= line to 1. If the line is set to 0, text
will be used instead.
• If text is being used for locks and protects, the color of the buttons
can be designated by setting the LockColor= and ProtectColor=
lines appropriately. Enter the RGB values of the desired colors. (For
example, the RGB values for the color red are 255, 0, 0).

Changing the Control Panel Preferences

The following control panel preferences may be changed by editing the
[Preferences] section of the .PAN file:
• To automatically save the position of the control panel upon
exiting, set the SaveWindowonExit= line to 1.
• To assign a different name to the control panel, enter the new
name after the “=” sign on the PanelName= line. This Panel Name
will appear in the title bar of the control panel window.
• To designate the Panel Address, set the PanelAddress= line to any
number between 1 and 128. Every panel must have a Panel
Address, as this is the address used to identify the panel for
communication on the X-Y bus. Normally, each panel is assigned a
unique Panel Address; however, it is possible to assign the same
Panel Address to multiple panels of the same type.
• To configure the panel to allow destination lock overrides, set the
AllowLockOverRide= line to 1. (See “Allowing Overrides” on
page 66 for more information on overriding locks.)
• To save the last destination displayed before exiting, set the
RememberLastDest= line to 1. When the panel is next launched,
this destination will be displayed upon startup.
• To designate a specific destination to be always displayed on
startup, set the RememberLastDest= line to 0, and set the
InitialDestination= line to the number of the desired destination.
• Set the PanelStyle= line to one of the following:
• SingleBusPanel for a single bus panel
• MultiBusPanel for a multi-bus panel
• MatrixPanel for a matrix panel.
• To configure the panel to automatically revert to AFV switching
mode after a breakaway switch, set the TakeSelectsAFV= line to

110 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

1. If this line is set to 0, the panel will remain in breakaway mode

until it is specifically switched to AFV mode (by clicking on the
Follow button). See “Connecting a Source” on page 31 for more
information on AFV and Breakaway switching.
• To enable the status display, set the ShowStatus= line to 1.
• (For matrix panels only) To select Preset/Take mode, set the Take=
line to 1. To select No-Take mode, set the Take= line to 0. The
default is Preset/Take.

Setting Control Panel Size Attributes

Single-Bus Control Panel Size Attributes
Various control panel size attributes may be changed via the
[Single-Bus Sizes] section of the .PAN file.

Figure 4-17. Setting Panel Size Attributes: Single-Bus Panels

• To change the width of the drop-down Destination list box, enter

the desired width in the DestinationWidth= line.
• To change the width and height of the Breakaway Level buttons,
set the LevelButtonWidth= line and the LevelButtonHeight= line
to the appropriate dimensions.
• To change the spacing between the Breakaway Level buttons, set
the LevelVerticalOffset= line to the desired spacing.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 111

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

• To change the height of the LED bars, set the StatusBarHeight=

line to the desired height. Status Bar height can be no greater than
the height of the Level buttons.
• To change the width and height of the Source controls, set the
SourceButtonWidth= line and the SourceButtonHeight= line to
the desired dimensions.
Multi-Bus Control Panel Size Attributes
Various control panel size attributes may be changed via the [MultiBus
Sizes] section of the .PAN file.

Figure 4-18. Setting Panel Size Attributes — Multi-Bus Panels

• To change the width of the Destination controls, enter the desired

width in the DestinationWidth= line. The height of the Destination
controls is set automatically, depending on the number of levels
activated and the LevelButtonHeight= setting.
• To change the horizontal spacing between the Destination
controls, enter the desired spacing in the DestControlOffsetx=
line. The vertical spacing of the controls is set automatically,
depending on the number of levels activated, and the
LevelButtonHeight= setting.

112 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

• To change the width and height of the Breakaway Level buttons,

set the LevelButtonWidth= line and the LevelButtonHeight= line
to the appropriate dimensions.
• To change the spacing between the Breakaway Level buttons, set
the LevelVerticalOffset= line to the desired spacing.
• To change the height of the LED bars, set the StatusBarHeight=
line to the desired height. Status Bar height can be no greater than
the height of the Level buttons.
• To change the width and height of the Source controls, set the
SourceButtonWidth= and SourceButtonHeight= lines to the
appropriate dimensions.

Matrix Control Panel Size Attributes

Various control panel size attributes may be changed via the [Matrix
Sizes] section of the .PAN file.
• To change the width of the Destination controls, enter the desired
width in the DestinationWidth= line. The height of the Destination
controls is set automatically, depending on the number of levels
activated, and the LevelButtonHeight= setting.
• To change the horizontal spacing between the Destination
controls, enter the desired spacing in the DestControlOffsetx=
line. The vertical spacing of the controls is set automatically,
depending on the number of levels activated and the
LevelButtonHeight= setting.
• To change the width and height of the Breakaway Level buttons,
set the LevelButtonWidth= line and the LevelButtonHeight= line
to the proper dimensions.
• To change the spacing between the Breakaway Level buttons, set
the LevelVerticalOffset= line to the desired spacing.
• To change the height of the LED bars, set the StatusBarHeight=
line to the desired height. Status Bar height can be no greater than
the height of the Level buttons.
• To change the width and height of the Source controls, set the
SourceButtonWidth= line and the SourceButtonHeight= line to
the proper dimensions.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 113

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Adding/Deleting Logical Sources

Single-Bus Panels
The [Logical Sources] section of the .PAN file has a single parameter
called NumControls. This parameter sets the number of source
controls that will appear on the on-screen control panel.
The [SourceGroup1] section contains two types of parameters;
GroupName and SourceX. Later versions of RouterWorks will allow
you to have multiple groups of sources so you can put all of your VTRs
in one group, all of your Paint Boxes in another group, etc. The
GroupName parameter will allow you to give each group a unique
name (e.g., VTRs, Paint-Boxes, etc.). The source groups are not
supported, however, so the GroupName parameter is not used.
The Sourcex= parameters designate the Logical Source to appear in
each Source button in the group identified by the Section, i.e.,
[SourceGroup1]. Currently only a single group is supported. There
must be a Sourcex= entry for each Logical Source button that will
appear on the panel. The entries must be in numerical sequence. (The x
represents the Logical Source that will appear in the Source button.
Source1=3, for example, means that Logical Source #3 will appear in
button #1.)
This feature might be useful in situations where you need access to a
limited number of sources, but those sources are not contiguous in the
router. In such a case, a panel could be designed that includes only those
necessary sources. For example, to create a four-button panel with
Logical Source #3 in the first button, Logical Source #6 in the second
button, Logical Source #9 in the third button, and Logical source #16 in
the fourth button, enter the following text in the .PAN file:
[LogicalSources]
NumControls=4
[SourceGroup1]
Source1=3
Source2=6
Source3=9
Source4=16

114 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

Multi-Bus Panels
The [Logical Sources] section of the .PAN file includes two parameters
that may be modified.
• The NumControls= line sets the number of source controls that
will appear on the on-screen control panel.
• The Sourcex= lines designate the Logical Source to appear in each
Source button. There must be a Sourcex= entry for each Logical
Source button that will appear on the panel. The entries must be in
numerical sequence.
This feature is useful in situations where you need access to a limited
Note number of sources that are not contiguous in the router. A panel could
The x represents the Logical be designed that includes only those necessary sources. For example, to
Source that will appear in the create a four-button panel with Logical Source #3 in the first button,
Source button. Source1=3, for Logical Source #6 in the second button, Logical Source #9 in the third
example, means that Logical
button, and Logical source #16 in the fourth button, enter the following
source #3 will appear in button
#1. text in the [LogicalSources] section of the .PAN file:
[LogicalSources]
NumControls=4
[SourceGroup1]
Source1=3
Source2=6
Source3=9
Source4=16

Matrix Panels
The [Logical Sources] section of the .PAN file includes two parameters
that may be modified.
• The NumControls= line sets the number of source controls that
will appear on the on-screen control panel.
• The Sourcex= lines designate the Logical Source to appear in each
Source button. There must be a Sourcex= entry for each Logical
Source button that will appear on the panel. The entries must be in
numerical sequence.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 115

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

This feature might be useful in situations where you need access to a

Note limited number of sources that are not contiguous in the router. In such
The x represents the Logical a case, a panel could be designed for that operator that includes only
Source that will appear in the those necessary sources. For example, to create a four-button panel with
Source button. Source1=3, for Logical Source #3 in the first button, Logical Source #6 in the second
example, means that Logical
button, Logical Source #9 in the third button, and Logical source #16 in
source #3 will appear in button
#1. the fourth button, enter the following text in the [LogicalSources]
section of the .PAN file:
[LogicalSources]
NumControls=4
[SourceGroup1]
Source1=3
Source2=6
Source3=9
Source4=16

Adding/Deleting Logical Destinations

The [Logical Destinations] section of the .PAN file operates similarly
to the [Logical Sources] section. The Destinationx= lines define the
logical destinations that will appear in each destination control. There
must be a separate entry for each destination, and all entries must
appear in numerical sequence.

Activating Levels
The [Active Levels] section of the .PAN file defines the levels that will
appear on the on-screen control panel. If a level is to appear, it must be
activated in the .PAN file and enabled via RouterMapper.
• To activate a level, set the Levelx= (where x is the level number)
line to 1.
• To deactivate a level, set the Levelx= (where x is the level number)
line to 0.
This feature is useful when designing special purpose control panels.
For example, a video-only panel could be designed for a paint station.
The panel operator would only have access to video sources and would
be unable to effect any changes on the audio levels.

116 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

Activating Active Salvos Control

The Active Salvos control presents itself based on three parameters
from the .PAN file. The parameters are
• ShowActiveSalvos (used by all panel types)
• ActiveSalvosGroupWidth (used by single-and multi-bus panels
only)
• ActiveSalvosGroupHeight (used by matrix panel files only)
The ShowActiveSalvos parameter is used by Matrix.PAN,
Singlbus.PAN, and Multibus.PAN. The value for ShowActiveSalvos
may be either 0 or 1.
• If the ShowActiveSalvos parameter is set to 0, the control will not
appear and cannot be used.
• If the ShowActiveSalvos parameter is set to 1, the control will be
visible in the panel window.
The ActiveSalvosGroupWidth parameter is only used by the
Singlbus.PAN and Multibus.PAN files. The parameter specifies how
wide (in screen pixels) the ActiveSalvosControl should appear in the
panel. If no width is specified, a default width of 120 is furnished. This
default setting should be wide enough to accommodate salvos with
names approximately 16 characters or less in width.
• In Singlebus mode the panel window will expand to allow the
specified width of the control.
• In Multibus mode, if the Active Salvos Group width provided is
large enough to overlap the neighboring control to the left, the
width will be automatically resized so that the left edge of the
Active Salvos Control is adjacent to the neighboring control to the
left.
The ActiveSalvosGroupHeight parameter is only used by the
Matrix.PAN file for Matrix Panel mode. The parameter specifies how
tall (in screen pixels) the ActiveSalvosControl should appear in the
panel. If no height is specified a default height of 100 is provided. This
default setting should be tall enough to accommodate up to 5 salvo
names in the list. If the list exceeds the Active Salvos Control list box
length, a vertical scroll bar will appear in the list box.
• In Singlebus mode the Active Salvos Control height will always
span the full height of the window.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 117

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

• In multibus mode the Active Salvos Control height will always be

identical to its neighbor to the left.

Activating Signal Presence Indicators

Signal presence indicators may be enabled using the Panel Wizard to
configure the RouterWorks panel definition (*.PAN) file (see
page 104).
Alternatively, the file may be edited directly. Each .PAN file may
contain a SignalPresenceSettings section as follows.
The EnableSourceSignalPresenceIndicators parameter allows you to
turn signal presence indicators on or off. The value for this parameter
may be 0 or 1.
• If this parameter is set to 0, signal presence indicators will be turned
off. (The default value is 0.)
• If this parameter is set to 1, signal presence indicators will be turned
on.
The Sections parameter allows you to define the number of sections for
the circle (default value is 8).

Activating Bidirectional Take

The [BidirectionalRouting] section of the .PAN file describes the
parameters of the bidirectional Take feature. The bidirectional Take
feature allows a convenient method of establishing two-way
communications pathways using a standard source-to destination router.
For this feature to become functional, it must be activated in the .PAN
file and enabled via RouterMapper.
The entries are set up as follows:
[BidirectionalRouting]
Enabled=1
NumberOfPorts=8
Port0=0,0,Speaker 1
Port1=1,1,Speaker 2
Port2=2,2,Speaker 3

118 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

Port3=3,3,Speaker 4
Port4=4,4,Speaker 5
Port5=5,5,Speaker 6
Port6=6,6,Speaker 7
Port7=7,7,Speaker 8
• [BidirectionalRouting] identifies the section of the .PAN file
corresponding to this feature.
• Enabled=1 causes the Bidirectional Take feature to be available to
users. Any value other than 1 causes the feature to be disabled (that
is, unavailable to users).
• NumberOfPorts=8 identifies the number of ports (or
“bidirectional channels”) to be defined in the system. In this case,
the number of ports has been set to 8 to correspond to 8 speakers.
• Port<portno>=<logical_src_index>,<logical_dest_index>,<port_n
ame>
The remaining entries define the ports. The fields in each entry are
as follows:
• Port<portno>= identifies the port number definition. Each port
definition must begin with the prefix Port, followed by the port
number and the equals (=) symbol (e.g., Port0=, Port1=, Port16=,
etc.).
• <logical_src_index> identifies the logical Source index entry in the
RouterMapper database to be used as the source for this port (e.g.,
microphone talk channel). Since the index is zero-based, the
number to be assigned here is one less than the logical Source index
entry shown on the RouterMapper database display. See the sample
port entry on page 121 for an example.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 119

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Figure 4-19. Logical Source Index Entry in a RouterMapper

Database

• <logical_dest_index> identifies the logical Destination index entry

from the RouterMapper database to be used as the destination for
this port (e.g., headphone listen channel). Since the index is
zero-based, the number to be assigned here is one less than the
logical destination index entry shown on the RouterMapper
database display. See the sample port entry on page 121 for an
example.

Figure 4-20. Logical Destination Index Entry in a

RouterMapper Database

120 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Modifying On-Screen Display via the .PAN File

• <port_name> is the alphanumeric text string to be assigned to this

port to identify it. In the speaker example, Each speaker is assigned
a name such as “Speaker 1.” Any text may be entered here. The
name is limited to no more than 32 characters.
Sample port entry: Port7=7,7,Speaker 8
Defines port 7 to
• Use logical Source 7 (logical Source entry #8 as shown on
Note the RouterMapper database display; see Figure 4-19 on
Remember: Since the index is page 120) as port 7’s input (talk channel)
zero-based, the number to be
• Use logical Destination 7 (logical database Destination
assigned here is one less than
the logical source or destination entry #8 as shown on the RouterMapper database display;
index entry shown on the see Figure 4-20) as port 7’s output (listen channel)
RouterMapper database display • Assign the name “Speaker 8” to the port, indicating that
Speaker 8’s microphone is connected to router input #7 and
headphones are fed by router output #7.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 121

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

Creating Control Panels for Individual Users

To create on-screen control panels for individual users,
follow these steps:
1. Create the database for the router via RouterMapper.
2. Copy the .PAN file for each user.
3. Assign each file a unique filename.
4. Edit the .PAN file to customize the control panel.
5. Create a new Program Item for each control panel:
a. Right-click on the Windows taskbar.
b. Select Properties.
c. From the Start Menu Programs tab, click Add.
d. In the Command Line box, enter the complete path of the
RTR_CTRL.EXE file, immediately followed by the complete
path of the new control panel’s .PAN file.
e. Click Next.
f. Select the folder where the new shortcut should be placed.
g. Click Next.
h. Type a description of the new panel.
i. Click Finish.
6. Select the new icon from the Windows Start menu to launch the
newly created control panel.

122 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Creating Control Panels for Multiple Remote Sites

Creating Control Panels for Multiple Remote

Sites
To create control panels for multiple remote sites, follow
these steps:
1. Using RouterMapper, create a separate database with the
appropriate phone number for each remote site.
2. Copy the .PAN files for each remote site.
3. Edit the Path= and FileName= lines in each .PAN file.
4. Create a new Program Item for each remote site:
a. Right-click on the Windows Taskbar.
b. Select Properties.
c. From the Start Menu Programs tab, click Add.
d. In the Command Line box, enter the complete path of the
RTR_CTRL.EXE file, immediately followed by the complete
path of the new control panel’s .PAN file.
e. Click Next.
f. Select the folder where the new shortcut should be placed.
g. Click Next.
h. Type a description of the remote site.
i. Click Finish.
5. Select the new icon from the Windows Start menu to launch the
newly created control panel.

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 123

Chapter 4: Customizing Panels

124 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Index

Keywords

A C
Adding options 100, 102–104 Category⁄index settings tab 107–108
Advanced options, panel wizard Changing
category⁄index settings tab 107–108 addresses 99
common settings tab 101 databases 98
matrix settings tab 105–106 destinations 99–100
options tab 102–104 levels 99
signal presence settings tab 104 options 100
Alarms 69, 103 panel names 99
Align with destination control 108 sources 99
Allow editing salvos 102 Circle ratio 106
Allow firing salvos 102 Circle size
Allow lock override 102 maximum 106
Allow resizing 102 minimum 106
Audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 32–35 Common settings tab 101
Auto AFV 102 Connecting sources 31–32
Control
B align with destination 108
Bidirectional take width 108
activating 118–121 Customer service (contacting Leitch) 19
editing .PAN file 80 Customizing panels
router configuration 78 creating for individual users 122
using 81–85 creating for multiple remote sites 123
Breakaway switching 35–38 modifying on-screen display 109–123
Button panel initialization (.PAN) file 109–123
control height 106 panel wizard 88–108
control section width 106
control width 106 D
Databases

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 125

Index

designating 109 system requirements 2

editing 27 TCP⁄IP 18
Demo mode 18–19 using RouterWorks on-line Help system 6
Demonstration mode 103 using this manual 5
Destination list 107 what’s new 2
Destinations
locking 47–53 L
protecting 47, 57–62 Launching RouterWorks applications 28
selecting 29–31 Level list 107
unlocking 53–56 Limitations, system 3
unprotecting 62–66 Locking destinations 47–53
E M
Enable extra menu items 103 Matrix panel
Enable source disconnects 103 alarms 69
audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 34–35
F bidirectional take 78–85
Features breakaway switching 37–38
matrix panel 13–16 destinations
multi-bus panel 11–12 locking multiple 52–53
single-bus panel 9–10 locking single 51
Firmware requirements 4 protecting multiple 61–62
protecting single 60–61
G selecting 31
Group height unprotecting multiple 65–66
preset 106 unprotecting single 65
zoom 106 multiple take, performing 38–40
overrides, allowing 66–68
I salvos
active salvos control 77–78
Installation
adding 71
controlling a router 27
deleting 76–77
editing databases 27
editing 71, 76
installing RouterWorks software 21–27
executing 71, 76
launching applications 28
no-take configuration 71–72, 76
Introduction
preset⁄take configuration 71, 76
contacting Leitch 19
setting attributes 113
demo mode 18–19
sources
features 8–19
connecting 32
firmware requirements 4
disconnecting 41–43
panel wizard 16
logical 115–116
related products 19
replacing 41, 44–45
remote dial-up 18
Matrix settings tab 105–106
RouterMapper 17–18
Multi-bus panel
system limitations 3

126 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Index

audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 32–33 customizing 87–123

breakaway switching 35–36 matrix 13–16
destinations multi-bus 11–12
locking multiple 50–51 panel wizard 16
locking single 49 single-bus 9–10
protecting multiple 59–60 Panel initialization file
protecting single 58–59 activating
selecting 30 active salvos control 117
unprotecting multiple 64–65 bidirectional take 118–121
unprotecting single 64 levels 116
overrides, allowing 66–68 signal presence indicators 118
salvos adding
active salvos control 77–78 destinations 116
adding 70 sources
deleting 76–77 matrix panel 115–116
editing 70, 76 multi-bus panel 115
executing 70, 76 single-bus panel 114
setting attributes 112 creating
sources panels for individual users 122
connecting 31–32 panels for multiple remote sites 123
logical 115 deleting
Multiple take 38–40 destinations 116
sources
O matrix panel 115–116
Opening RouterWorks (launching applications) 28 multi-bus panel 115
Operation single-bus panel 114
Audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 32–35 designating databases 109
bidirectional take 78–85 determining location 109
breakaway switching 35–38 setting attributes
connecting sources 31–32 matrix bus panel 113
locking destinations 47–53 multi-bus panel 112
protecting destinations 47, 57–62 single-bus panel 111
selecting destinations 29–31 setting preferences
unlocking destinations 53–56 control panels 110
unprotecting destinations 62–66 locks 109
Options tab 102–104 protects 109
Overrides, allowing 66–68 Panel wizard
advanced options 100–108
P category⁄index settings tab 107–108
.PAN file common settings tab 101
See panel initialization file matrix settings tab 105–106
Panel options tab 102–104
creating for individual users 122 signal presence settings tab 104
creating for multiple remote sites 123 existing panel editing 98–100

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 127

Index

adding options 100 Single-bus panel

changing databases 98 audio-follow-video (AFV) switching 32–33
changing destinations 99–100 breakaway switching 35–36
changing levels displayed 99 destinations
changing options 100 locking multiple 48–49
changing panel addresses 99 locking single 47–48
changing panel names 99 protecting multiple 57–58
changing sources 99 protecting single 57
making destinations visible 99–100 selecting 29–30
making sources visible 99 unprotecting multiple 63–64
new panel setup 88–97 unprotecting single 62
Preset width 108 overrides, allowing 66–68
Product information (contacting Leitch) 19 salvos
Products, related 19 active salvos control 77–78
Protecting destinations 47, 57–62 adding 70
deleting 76–77
R editing 70, 76
Remember last destination 103 executing 70, 76
Remote dial-up 18 setting attributes 111
Requirements sources
firmware 4 connecting 31
system 2 logical 114
RouterMapper 17–18 Software installation 21–27
Source list 107
S Sources
connecting 31–32
Salvos
multiple disconnect 43–44
active salvos control 77–78
undoing a take 46
deleting 76–77
Switching
editing 70, 76
audio-follow-video (AFV) 32–35
executing 70, 76
breakaway 35–38
Save window on exit 103
System
Selecting destinations 29–31
limitations 3
Settings
requirements 2
category⁄index 107–108
common 101 T
matrix 105–106
options 102–104 Take, undoing 46
signal presence 104 TCP⁄IP 18
Show Technical support (contacting Leitch) 19
alarms 103
all salvos 103 U
EDH 103 Unlocking destinations 53–56
status 103 unprotecting destinations 62–66
Signal presence settings tab 104 Use lock bitmap 103

128 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

 Index

Use protect bitmap 103 W

Use take 104
Using warranty information iv
manual 5 Width
on-line Help system 6 control 108
preset 108

RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide 129

Index

130 RouterWorks Router Control Software Reference Guide

DRFM™

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

Configuration Utility
Reference Guide

Edition F
DRFM MAN
Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager™
Configuration Utility
Reference Guide

Edition F
August 2004
Preliminary—Contents are proprietary and confidential. Do not photocopy or distribute.

Trademarks and Copyrights

CCS, CCS CoPilot, CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, Command Control
System, CineTone, CinePhase, CineSound, DigiBus, DigiPeek, Digital
Glue, DigiWorks, DTV Glue, EventWORKS, EZ HD, Genesis, HDTV
Glue, Image Q, Inca, Inca Station, InfoCaster, Inscriber, Inscriber CG—
FX, Integrator, LeFont, Leitch, LogoMotion, MediaFile, MIX BOX,
NEO, the NEO design, NEOSCOPE, NewsFlash, Nexio, Opus,
Panacea, PanelMAPPER, Portal, PROM-Slide, RouterMAPPER,
RouterWORKS, Signal Quality Manager, SpyderWeb, SuiteView,
TitleMotion, UNIFRAME, Velocity, VelocityHD, VideoCarte,
Videotek, and X75 are trademarks of Leitch Technology International
Inc. which may be registered in the United States, Canada, and/or other
countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Copyright 2006 Harris Corporation. All rights reserved. This
publication supersedes all previous releases. Printed in Canada.

Warranty Information
The limited warranty policy provides a complete description of your
warranty coverage, limitations, and exclusions, as well as procedures
for obtaining warranty service. See the inside back cover of this manual
for a warranty summary. To view the complete warranty, visit
www.broadcast.harris.com/leitch>support>warranties.
 Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Monitoring and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Contacting Leitch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Technical Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Product Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
System Requirements and Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Main Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the Monitoring and Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Dynamic Routing Thread Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Thread Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Disconnecting Dynamic Routing Thread Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Device Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Database Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Changing the Thread Refresh Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
DRFM Options Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Using the Program Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adding Column Fields to Docking Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Workspace Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Monitoring Dynamic Routing Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide v

Contents

Thread Highlighting in the Frame Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Condition Prioritization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Manual Thread Enabling and Disabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

vi Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 1
Introduction

Overview
The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager allows you to monitor the status
and control dynamic routing threads on systems that use both normal
dynamic routing threads and those associated with combiner systems.
You may also use the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager to monitor
more than one frame at the same time.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 1

Chapter 1: Introduction

Monitoring and Control Functions

The software allows continuous, real-time updates of dynamic routing
thread status:
• In use status
• What signal the dynamic routing thread carries
• Number of local connections to the dynamic routing thread
You can trace dynamic routing thread connections to their source(s).
You can trace dynamic routing thread connections to their
destination(s).
You can disconnect dynamic routing thread users to free up the dynamic
routing threads whenever you desire.

Program Functions
The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software allows a Workspace
Save (the capability to save the setup and layout of your system) so that
you can save multiple layouts for different system views.
You have the capability of monitoring dynamic routing threads among
many frames in one instance of the application.
You can run more than one instance of the application at the same time.

Contacting Leitch
If you have questions about this or other Leitch products, contact us for
technical support and product information.

Technical Support
Leitch Technology is committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour
service to our customers around the world. Visit our Web site at
www.leitch.com > Support > Technical Support for information on how
to contact the Leitch Customer Service team in your geographical
region.

2 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

Product Information
If you would like the latest Leitch product information or
documentation, contact your Leitch dealer or the Leitch Sales
Department; or, visit our Web site at www.leitch.com for more
information.

System Requirements and Limitations

The system requirements and limitations for the Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager are the same as those for RouterMapper. See your
RouterMapper Configuration Utility Reference Guide for more
information.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 3

Chapter 1: Introduction

Using this Manual

This manual is intended as a reference to the Dynamic Routing Fabric
Manager software and is not organized in step-by-step tutorial fashion.
The manual has the following writing conventions:

Table 1-1. Writing Conventions

Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields,
buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo boxes,
menus, submenus, windows, lists, and
selection names
Italics Indicates email addresses, the names of books
or publications, and the first instances of new
terms and specialized words that need
emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such
as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries,
such as a DOS entry or something you type
into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a
hierarchy of menus and windows
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the
electronic document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL
Indicates important information that helps to
Note avoid and troubleshoot problems

4 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Chapter 2
Getting Started

Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric

Manager
1. Generate a DRF file from within RouterMapper (see the
Note RouterMapper Configuration and Operation Manual for
You may want to set up a information on how to generate a DRF file).
desktop shortcut to the Dynamic
2. Switch to the Leitch Routing Systems window (or, using Windows
Routing Fabric Manager.
Explorer, switch to C:\Windows\Start Menu\Programs\Leitch
Routing Switchers).
3. Click on the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager icon.
4. The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window will appear.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 5

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Main Window

The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window provides a
summary of dynamic routing thread system databases.

Figure 2-1. Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Main Window

• The left third of the window summarizes the current DRF database
(the database definition section).
• The right side of the main window displays a list of all devices
associated with the database.
• The bottom of the window displays a system status area, where
system status messages appear for your information and use.
• The top of the window displays the main menu selections.

Figure 2-2. File Menu Dialog Box

6 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Main Window

Figure 2-3. View Menu Dialog Box

Figure 2-4. Thread Menu Dialog Box

Figure 2-5. Window Menu Dialog Box

Figure 2-6. Help Menu Dialog Box

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 7

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

1. Start the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software application, as
described in “Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager”
(see page 5).
2. If you haven’t already done so, customize your Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager main menu screen.
3. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), then choose the DRF file for
the dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.

Figure 2-7. Opening a Database Dialog Box

4. The dynamic routing threads database will be listed in the Docking

dialog.
5. Double-click on (or highlight, then press <Enter>) one of the
dynamic routing threads to display the following information:
• ID
• From Level
• Output
• To Level
• Input
• Remote Inputs
• Local Connections

8 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

Using the Monitoring and Control Functions

Dynamic Routing Thread Connection Status
In the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager, you can see continuous,
Note real-time dynamic routing thread status updates.
This window is a reporting 1. Start the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software application, as
function only. You may not
described in “Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager”
make changes at this window.
(see page 5).
2. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), then choose the DRF file for
the dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.
3. Double-click on (or highlight, then press <Enter>) one of the
downstream dynamic routing threads. Dynamic routing thread
information will appear in the Docking dialog.
4. In the docking dialog, double-click on the device for which you
want to view connection status.
5. The Dynamic Routing Thread Connection Status dialog box will
appear.

Figure 2-8. Dynamic Routing Thread Status Information

Dialog Box

The information dialog contains the following three group boxes:

upstream properties, downstream properties, and connection status.
Upstream Properties
The Upstream Properties group box lists information about the
source of the thread.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 9

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Downstream Properties
The Downstream Properties group box lists information about the
destination of the thread.
Connection Status
The Connection Status group box lists thread connection
troubleshooting information.

Thread Trace
The Thread Trace function allows you to see a “snapshot” of a
particular dynamic routing thread’s connection to its source and/or
destination.
To perform a thread trace, follow these steps:
1. In the docking dialog, highlight the dynamic routing thread you
want to trace (either upstream or downstream).
2. Open the Dynamic Routing Thread Trace dialog box (select Thread
> Trace).

Figure 2-9. Dynamic Routing Thread Upstream/Downstream

Trace Dialog Box

You can identify a trace by a cyan-colored icon with an “X”

displayed next it it. The “X” indicates that the trace was executed
from this particular dynamic routing thread.

10 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

Disconnecting Dynamic Routing Thread Users

You can disconnect dynamic routing thread users to free up the dynamic
routing threads whenever you need to, either by using the Disconnect
function or by using the Downstream Trace function.
To disconnect users via the Disconnect function, follow these steps:
1. In the docking dialog, highlight the dynamic routing thread that has
the users you want to disconnect.
2. Open the Dynamic Routing Thread Disconnect dialog box (select
Thread > Disconnect).

Figure 2-10. Dynamic Routing Thread Disconnect Dialog

Box

The Dynamic Routing Thread Disconnect dialog box will display a

list of all users currently connected to your selected dynamic
routing thread.
3. Click Disconnect to disconnect all downstream users currently
Caution connected to your selected dynamic routing thread.
You cannot select which users 4. Click OK to return to the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main
you want to disconnect! Every
window.
user downstream of the selected
dynamic routing thread will be To disconnect users via the Thread Trace function, follow these steps:
disconnected.
1. In the docking dialog, highlight the dynamic routing thread you
want to trace to its destination.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 11

Chapter 2: Getting Started

2. Open the Dynamic Routing Thread Trace dialog box (select

Dynamic Routing Thread > Trace).
3. Select the dynamic routing thread for which you want to perform
the disconnect.
4. Click Disconnect.
5. Click OK to return to the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main
window.

Device Information Dialog

For additional information on a router, right-click on the Router icon in
the Navigator window. A router information dialog box will appear
with the name of the router in its title bar.

Figure 2-11. Router Information Dialog Box

The dialog contains two group boxes with large, non-editable text
fields.
• The upper group box contains information on the router itself and
information about any combiner systems the router may be
associated with.

12 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

• The lower group box contains information about loop back threads.
(A loop back thread is any thread which connects from a
downstream frame back to an upstream frame).
Bad Router Labeling in Navigator Window
It is possible for all the threads in a router to be disabled, yet the
router itself may be operating normally. In such a case, all of the
threads shown for a router will appear with the Failure condition in
the main window. A different visual cue is given, however, if it is
not just the threads but the router itself that has been disabled. In
such a case two things will happen:
• Threads will appear in the Failure condition in the main window.
• A red “X” icon will appear over the disabled router in the
Navigator window. The Red “X” indicates a problem with the
router itself.

Database Information Dialog

For additional information on a database, right-click on the database
name in the Navigator window. A database information box will appear
with the name, location, and last modified date of the database listed in
the Details window.

Figure 2-12. Database Information Dialog Box

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 13

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Click Exit to return to the main window.

Changing the Thread Refresh Timer

The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software has a timing
mechanism for monitoring and updating the list of dynamic routing
threads currently in use. To set the timing mechanism, you must set the
time at the Dynamic Routing Thread Refresh Timer.
To set Dynamic Routing Thread Refresh Timer, follow these steps:
1. Select View > Auto Refresh Setting from the main window menu.
2. The Dynamic Routing Thread Refresh Timer dialog box will appear.

Figure 2-13. Dynamic Routing Thread Refresh Timer Dialog

Box

3. Type in a refresh thread status time.

4. Click OK to return to the main window.

DRFM Options Dialog

The Options dialog box allows you to set or modify various Dynamic
Routing Fabric Manager options.
1. Select View > Options from the main window menu.
2. The Options dialog box will appear.

14 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Running the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager

Figure 2-14. Options Dialog Box

The Options dialog box consists of these sections: Warning

Note Notification, Status Notification, Transmit Buffer, Receive Buffer,
Any changes made within the Trace and Disconnect, Router Communication, and Restore Window.
Warning Notification group box
will have mostly only cosmetic Warning Notification
effects. Changes made to values The Warning Notification group box allows you flexibility in
in the other three group boxes, setting which colors will be used for warning issues related to
however, may have severe
effects on the performance of
thread conditions in the Threads View window. Though Warning
the router system and its Notification default colors are red, orange, and yellow, you may
associated software. You should assign them another color.
take note of the default settings
before altering them. Status Notification
The Status Notification group box allows you to change the color
schemes (text and text background colors) for diagnostic status
messages.
• Edit Text Color changes the text color of diagnostic status
messages.
• Edit Background Color changes the text background color of
diagnostic status messages.
• Critical Errors changes the color scheme for critical error
messages (such as frame alarms, communication failure, input/
output card loss or insert detection, or thread users are out of
sync messages).
• Non-critical Errors changes the color scheme for non-critical
errors (such as connecting or disconnecting to router system
hardware messages).

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 15

Chapter 2: Getting Started

• Warnings changes the color scheme for warning messages (such

as download/upload detection messages).
• Normal Events changes the color scheme for events (such as
frame detection messages).
Transmit Buffer
The Transmit Buffer group box contains the edit fields Hold Off
Depth and Packet Interval.
• Hold Off Depth allows you to specify the threshold that DRFM
must hold off its transmission. Threshold is the number of
incoming messages in the receive buffer. (This feature is only
applicable if Receive buffer is used.)
• Packet Interval specifies the wait time before sending the next
query or request command to the router system.
Receive Buffer
The Receive Buffer group box contains the edit fields Use Rx
Buffer and Packet Interval.
• Use Rx Buffer specifies if the DRFM needs to store incoming
messages to the Receive buffer before processing them.
• Packet Interval specifies the wait time before processing the
next incoming message from the Receive buffer.
Trace and Disconnect
The Trace and Disconnect group box contains the edit field Query
Wait Time Interval. This field allows you to specify the time out
period period for waiting on confirms status from a thread trace or
disconnect request.
Router Communication
The Router Communication group box contains the edit field Time
Interval for Checking Frame Heart Beats. This field allows you to
specify the time interval for periodic checking to see if frame(s) in
the router system are still operational.
Restore Window
The Restore Window check box allows you to restore the original
window when the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager detects any
critical errors.

16 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Using the Program Functions

Using the Program Functions

Adding Column Fields to Docking Dialog
You can insert additional column fields in the device monitoring section
of the docking dialog, and rearrange the viewing order of all existing
fields.
To add column fields, follow these steps:
1. Open the Show Column Fields dialog box (View > Show Fields).

Figure 2-15. Show Column Fields Dialog Box

The Show Column Fields dialog lists all available fields in the
database.
• The Available Fields section shows the fields available for
display (but not yet displayed) in the docking dialog.
• The Show These Fields in This Order section shows the fields
displayed in the docking dialog, in the order that they appear. The
first field in the section will appear at the extreme left side of the
docking dialog; subsequent fields will appear consecutively to
the right of the first field.
2. Highlight the field you want to be displayed in the Available Fields
list.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 17

Chapter 2: Getting Started

3. Click Add. The field name will appear, highlighted, at the bottom
of the Show These Fields in This Order list.
4. If you want to move the field in the display order, click Move Up
until the field is in the desired sequential order.
5. Click OK.
6. The added column field will appear in the docking dialog sequence.
To remove column fields, follow these steps:
1. Open the Show Column Fields dialog box (View > Show Fields).
2. Highlight the field you want to remove from the Show These Fields
in This Order list.
3. Click Remove. The field name will appear, highlighted, in its
original location in the Available Fields list.
4. Click OK.
5. The removed column field will no longer appear in the docking
dialog sequence.
To modify fields’ order of appearance in the docking dialog, follow
these steps:
1. Open the Show Column Fields dialog box (View > Show Fields).
2. Highlight the field you want to move in the Show These Fields in
This Order list.
• If you want to move the field “higher” (closer to the left) in the
display order, click on the Move Up button until the field is in
the desired sequential order.
• If you want to move the field “lower” (farther from the left) in
the display order, click on the Move Down button until the field
is in the desired sequential order.
3. Rearrange any other fields as as necessary.
4. Click OK.

18 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Using the Program Functions

Workspace Save
The Workspace Save function provides you with the ability to save the
Note setup and layout of your dynamic routing thread system, so that you can
In a Workspace Save, columns keep multiple layouts for different system views.
and column widths are also
To create a Workspace Save, follow these steps:
saved. See “Adding Column
Fields to Docking Dialog” on 1. At the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main menu, choose File >
page 17 for more information Save Workspace. The Save As dialog box will appear.
about column fields.

Figure 2-16. Workspace Save As Dialog Box

2. Enter a file name for the Workspace Save (.DRW) file.

3. If necessary, “navigate” through your current directory structure to
the subdirectory location where you want to save your DRW file.
4. Click Save.

Monitoring Dynamic Routing Threads

You can monitor a single set of dynamic routing threads or multiple sets
of dynamic routing threads at the same time.
To monitor a single set of dynamic routing threads, follow these steps:
1. Start Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager, as described in
“Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager” (see page 5).
2. If you haven’t already done so, customize your Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager main menu screen.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 19

Chapter 2: Getting Started

3. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), then choose the DRF file for
the set of dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.

Figure 2-17. Monitoring a Single Set of Dynamic Routing

Threads

4. Double-click on (or highlight, then press <Enter>) one of the

downstream dynamic routing threads.
To monitor more than one set of dynamic routing threads, follow
these steps:
1. Start the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager software application, as
described in “Launching the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager”
(see page 5).
2. If you haven’t already done so, customize your Dynamic Routing
Fabric Manager main menu screen.
3. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), then choose the DRF file for
the first set of dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.
4. Choose Window from the main menu toolbar.
5. Select New Window from the pull-down list. A new dynamic
routing thread main menu screen will appear.
6. Choose File > Open (or <Ctrl> O), then choose the DRF file for
the next set of dynamic routing threads you want to monitor.
To toggle between the windows, press <Ctrl> F6.

20 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Using the Program Functions

Figure 2-18. Monitoring Multiple Sets of Dynamic Routing

Threads

Thread Highlighting in the Frame Window

There are three colors used by the Dynamic Fabric Routing Manager to
indicate thread conditions in the main window. The default colors and
their associated conditions are
• No Highlight — Normal condition
• Yellow — Advisory condition
• Orange — Warning condition
• Red — Failure condition
Normal (No Highlight)
Threads functioning normally will not be highlighted in the Dynamic
Routing Fabric Manager main window and will show a value of
“Good” in the Condition column.
Advisory Condition (Yellow)
When router threads are in an Advisory condition, all threads are in use,
no more can be allocated, and further connections will fail.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 21

Chapter 2: Getting Started

Warning Condition (Orange)

Note When router threads are in a Warning Condition, at least one thread in a
When an advisory condition router is disabled; however, the rest will function normally. Disabled
occurs, all threads in a router
threads are those which are not functioning due to one or more of the
share the advisory condition
highlighting in the Dynamic following problems:
Routing Fabric Manager main • Cable connection problems
window.
• Power outage problems
• Hardware problems
• User configurations
Failure Condition (Red)
Note When threads are in a Failure condition, they cannot be used because of
When a Warning condition
occurs, all threads in a router • Cable connection problems
share the Warning condition • Power outage problems
highlighting in the Dynamic
Routing Fabric Manager main • Hardware problems
window. • User configurations
Failure condition types fall into one or more of four possible causes.
Note The types of failure appear as a small, off-white text field pop-up (or
When a Failure condition tool-tip) when the mouse cursor is placed over the thread’s Condition
occurs, all threads in a router column in the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window.
will be in the Dynamic Routing Depending on the severity of the failure, multiple failure conditions
Fabric Manager main window.
may appear in the pop-up text field.

Table 2-1. Causes of Failure Conditions

Failure Condition Type Description
Bad Output An upstream frame output
is not available
Input Missing The local frame has missing
or bad input
Frame Missing An upstream frame is
missing, or has timed out on
a ping
Marked Bad Someone has manually
marked the thread as bad

22 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide

 Using the Program Functions

Condition Prioritization
The Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager prioritizes the condition(s) (and
how they are highlighted) for threads in the main window.
• A Failure condition receives the highest priority.
• A Warning condition receives a higher priority than an
Advisory (Failure > Warning > Advisory).
• An Advisory condition receives the lowest priority.
For example: If one thread in a Router is not functioning, all of the
threads in the router will appear in Orange (Warning default color) in
the main window. These items will stay highlighted to reflect the
advisory condition even if the number of dynamic threads used by the
router increases to maximum. The threads will not receive the Yellow
(Advisory default color) highlighting because Orange has a greater
priority.

Manual Thread Enabling and Disabling

If a thread has recurring problems, or it has subtle problems that go
unnoticed by the application, you may need to deliberately disable a
thread in the software. Threads can be manually disabled and enabled
from in the Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager main window.
To disable a thread, follow these steps:
1. Select the thread in the main window.
2. Right-click on the thread.
3. Select Disable in the menu pop-up.
The thread will then appear with the same visual status cues as any
other disabled thread when it is visible in the main window.
To re-enable the thread, follow these steps:
Note 1. Select the thread in the main window.
Once you have manually
enabled or disabled a thread, it 2. Right-click on the thread.
will no longer change status 3. Select Enable in the menu pop-up.
automatically. The user must
physically restart the frame Again, visual status cues for the thread will be updated in any windows
housing the thread for automatic showing the thread.
thread statusing to resume.

Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide 23

Chapter 2: Getting Started

24 Dynamic Routing Fabric Manager Configuration Utility Reference Guide